Volkswagen Polo 2024 Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Volkswagen Manuals
  4. Automobile
  5. Polo 2024
  6. Manual
Volkswagen Polo 2024 Manual

Volkswagen Polo 2024 Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for Polo 2024:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
Table Of Contents
599
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Thank you for choosing Volkswagen
By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date technology
and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment.
Before using your vehicle for the first time, please read and observe the information in this owner's manual. It will
quickly help you to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions as well as making you aware of dangers
to yourself and others and of how these dangers can be avoided.
If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the vehicle wallet has not covered
everything, please get in tap with your Volkswagen dealership. They will always be happy to deal with your
questions, suggestions or problems.
We hope you enjoy driving your new vehicle. Happy motoring.
WARNING
Observe the important safety instructions for use of child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.
seats)
(→ Child
1
OwnersManuals2.com

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the Polo 2024 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

P J Brady
April 26, 2025

what is the small compartment on the 2024 vw polo tailgate used for?

0

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Volkswagen Polo 2024

Summary of Contents for Volkswagen Polo 2024

  • Page 1 Thank you for choosing Volkswagen By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date technology and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment. Before using your vehicle for the first time, please read and observe the information in this owner’s manual. It will quickly help you to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions as well as making you aware of dangers to yourself and others and of how these dangers can be avoided. If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the vehicle wallet has not covered everything, please get in tap with your Volkswagen dealership. They will always be happy to deal with your questions, suggestions or problems. We hope you enjoy driving your new vehicle. Happy motoring. WARNING (→ Child Observe the important safety instructions for use of child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. seats) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 2 About this owner’s manual This owner’s manual is valid for all variants and versions of your Volkswagen model and model year. The owner’s manual describes all equipment and models without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that your vehicle may not have some of the equipment described, or it may only be available in certain countries. There may also be descriptions of upgrades for functions that require subsequent activation . For information on your actual vehicle equipment, please refer to the sales documents or contact a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. A passenger car is described in this owner’s manual. All data in this owner’s manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to print. Because the vehicle is constantly being developed and further improved, there may be differences between your vehicle and the data in this owner’s manual. No discrepancy in data, illustrations or descriptions shall form the basis for any legal claim. Due to legal and technical requirements, the vehicle may be equipped with different variants of an owner’s manual depending on country. Printed owner’s manual The printed owner’s manual describes the functions of the vehicle at the time of going to print. Additions and changes to the owner’s manual may also be enclosed as a supplement. An alphabetical index and a list of abbreviations that explains technical abbreviations and terms help you to find your way around and understand the printed owner’s manual. If you sell or lend the vehicle to someone else, make sure that the printed documents are always in the vehicle. Volkswagen also recommends restoring the Infotainment system to the factory settings in order to delete all personal data. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 3 Explanations Short definitions in a contrasting colour that precede some sections provide a summary of the respective topic. More detailed information about the features, conditions and limitations of systems and equipment can be found in the relevant sections. Formulations and terminology used in the owner’s manual are explained below to permit easier understanding. Directions and positions Directions and positions such as left, right, front and rear are normally relative to the vehicle’s direction of travel, unless otherwise indicated. Dimensions and speeds Values given in miles instead of kilometres or mph instead km/h refer to the country-specific instrument clusters or Infotainment systems. Illustrations Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. The illustrations may differ from your vehicle. This owner’s manual was written for left-hand drive vehicles. In r ight-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes differ from those displayed in illustrations or described in the text. Form of address For better legibility, the male form of address is used. However, this refers to all genders equally. The shortened linguistic form is used for editorial reasons and does not represent a value judgement. Terms used and their meaning: Glass roof The term glass roof is used as a standard term for all equipment-dependent versions of the sliding, tilting or panoramic roof. Qualified workshop Qualified workshops are workshops that employ instructed or trained personnel and that specialise in performing service work on passenger cars. A qualified workshop can be both a Volkswagen dealership and also an independent workshop. Volkswagen dealership Volkswagen dealerships are workshops that have a contractual relationship with Volkswagen. The contractual relationship means that additional information is available, and there is also a direct communication channel to the manufacturer. Go to a qualified workshop In some situations, it is necessary for you to drive your vehicle to a qualified workshop to have it checked. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 4: Description Of Symbols

    Seek expert assistance If it should not be possible to continue driving the vehicle at any time, it is necessary to have the vehicle checked by an expert on the spot. A decision on whether it is possible to continue driving or whether the vehicle has to be towed must be taken after this depending on the situation. Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. The symbol means “Trademark” and identifies an recognised but not ( yet) officially registered mark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. The symbol indicates a registered mark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. → Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possible risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. → → → Cross reference to potential risks of damage to property in the same section or on the page specified. DANGER Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. WARNING Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. CAUTION Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or medium injuries if you do not observe the warning. NOTICE Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause vehicle damage if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional information on the protection of the environment. Texts with this symbol contain additional information. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 5: Front View

    Front view Fig. 1 Overview of vehicle from front. 1 Door handles 2 Headlights (→ Exterior lighting) (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 3 Sensors for assist systems , 4 Behind a cover: mounting for towing eye (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 5 Behind the Volkswagen badge: radar sensor for assist systems , (→ In the engine compartment) 6 Opening lever for bonnet 7 Windscreen —with vehicle identification number (→ Wipers) —with windscreen wiper (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —with camera for assistance systems positioned near the interior mirror , (→ Rain and light sensor) (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —with rain/light sensor positioned near the interior mirror OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 6: Rear View

    Rear view Fig. 1 Overview of vehicle from rear. 1 High-level brake light 2 Rear window: (→ Rear window heating) —with rear window heating (→ Wipers) —with rear window wiper 3 Volkswagen badge for opening the boot lid 4 Camera area for parking systems , (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 5 Number plate light (→ Exterior lighting) 6 Behind a cover: mounting for towing eye 7 Behind the bumper: radar sensor for assist systems , (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 8 Sensors for assist systems , (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 9 Jacking points (→ Exterior lighting) 10 Tail light clusters 11 Tank flap (→ Exterior mirrors) 12 Exterior mirrors (→ Lane change system (Side Assist)) —With display of lane change system ( Side Assist)
  • Page 7 Driver door Fig. 1 Driver door (left-hand drive vehicles): controls (mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles) . 1 Door release lever 2 Central locking button for locking and unlocking the vehicle ( → Central locking button) ( → Indicator lamp in the driver door) 3 Central locking system indicator lamp ( → Exterior mirrors) 4 Rotary knob for exterior mirror settings and functions 5 Buttons for operating the electric windows 6 Button for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors . (→ In the engine compartment) 7 Release lever for bonnet 8 Stowage compartment —with bottle holder ( → Emergency equipment) —with stowage facility for high-visibility waistcoat OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 8: Driver Side

    Driver side Fig. 1 Overview of the driver side (left-hand drive vehicles). Fig. 2 Overview of the driver side (right-hand drive vehicles). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 9 (→ Air distribution of the air conditioning system) 1 Vents 2 Controls on the multifunction steering wheel: —for driver assist systems (→ Digital instrument cluster (Pro)) —for menu selection —for accepting telephone calls —for audio, navigation , —for volume adjustment —for activating voice control (function may not be available depending on vehicle equipment) (→ Digital instrument cluster (Pro)) —to switch between the current and previous menus (→ Turn signals) (→ Main beam) 3 Turn signal and main beam lever —With switches and buttons for the driver assist systems (→ Digital instrument cluster (Pro)) 4 Instrument cluster (→ Symbols in the instrument cluster) —with warning and indicator lamps 5 Lever for wipers and washers ( → Digital instrument cluster (Pro)) —With buttons for operating the menus 6 Location of the driver front airbag (→ Pedals) 7 Pedals 8 Horn 9 Lever for adjusting the steering column position 10 Light switch ( → Headlight range control) 11 Control for headlight range control...

  • Page 10: Centre Console

    Centre console Fig. 1 Overview of the upper section of the centre console. 1 Infotainment system 2 Indicator lamp for the front passenger front airbag switch-off function 3 Hazard warning lights button (→ Air distribution of the air conditioning system) 4 Vent 5 Controls for air conditioning system Fig. 2 Overview of the lower section of the centre console. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 11 1 Lever: dual clutch gearbox ® —for DSG ( → Manual gearbox) —for manual gearbox (→ Charging 2 USB sockets with charging function for batteries of external devices ( depending on equipment) , options for mobile devices) 3 Card compartment 4 Handbrake lever (→ Handbrake) 5 Buttons: —for start/stop system —for assist systems for parking and manoeuvring —for driving profile selection (→ Starter button) 6 Button for starting and switching off the engine ( Press & Drive) OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 12: Front Passenger Side

    Front passenger side Fig. 1 Front passenger side (left-hand drive vehicles): overview of dash panel (mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles). Fig. 2 With open front passenger door (left-hand drive vehicles): key-operated switch in the dash panel (mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles). 1 Location of front passenger front airbag in the dash panel (→ Air distribution of the air conditioning system) 2 Adjustable vent 3 Glove box with actuating lever 4 Key switch for deactivating the front passenger front airbag OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 13 Controls in the roof Symbol Meaning Buttons for interior and reading lights . Switch for glass roof (→ Glass roof) Buttons for emergency call service, information call and breakdown call . OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 14 Symbols in the instrument cluster The warning and indicator lamps can light up individually or in combination and indicate warnings, faults or certain functions. Some warning and indicator lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should go out after a while. (→ Dipped beam) For details on indicator lamps that light up in the light switch, see Chapter “Lights” WARNING Failure to observe illuminated warning lamps and text messages can lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic and can cause accidents, serious injury and even death. ● Never ignore any illuminated warning lamps or text messages. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Symbol Meaning Do not drive on! → Priority 1 warning Central warning lamp → Seat belt warning system Fasten seat belt → Handbrake The handbrake is applied Do not drive on! Brake system fault → Brake system fault Do not drive on! Low brake fluid level → Brake fluid level → Introduction to the topic Take over control of the vehicle and be prepared to brake. Do not drive on! → Engine oil level very low Engine oil level too low Do not drive on! Engine oil pressure too low → Engine oil pressure too low Do not drive on! Fault in engine coolant system → Coolant...
  • Page 15 Urgent gas system inspection due → Urgent gas system inspection Do not drive on! Gearbox overheated! → Gearbox overheated → Priority 2 warning Central warning lamp Airbag or belt tensioner system switched off with diagnostic tool → Indicator lamp → Indicator lamp Fault in airbag or belt tensioner system Functional check for the airbag indicator lamp → Indicator lamp → Switching the front passenger front airbag on Front passenger front airbag switched off and off Front passenger front airbag switched on → Switching the front passenger front airbag on and off → Legally required eCall Emergency System restricted Emergency Call Service restricted Emergency Call Service malfunction → Fault in legally required eCall Emergency System → Emergency Call Service is restricted Emergency Call Service restricted → Emergency Call Service is faulty Emergency Call Service fault → Brake pad wear indicator Check the brake pads → ESC fault Lit up: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) fault Flashes: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or traction control system (TCS) regulating → Electronic Stability Control (ESC) →...
  • Page 16 Fault in wipers → Fault in wipers → Washer fluid level too low Washer fluid level too low Fault in steering → Steering fault Do not drive on! Low tyre pressure → Low tyre pressure Do not drive on! → Fault in the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Fault in tyre monitoring system → Operating Front Assist Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) switched off → Cruise control system faulty Cruise control system fault → ACC not available Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) not available → Driving with Lane Assist Lane keeping system (Lane Assist) is regulating → Side Assist fault Fault in the lane change system (Side Assist) → Automatic braking intervention Rear Traffic Alert braking intervention → Fault in engine management system Fault in engine management system → Emissions-relevant fault Exhaust system fault → Particulate filter clogged with soot Particulate filter clogged with soot Engine speed limited → Engine speed limited → Gas system inspection Gas system inspection due Fault in 12-volt power supply → 12-volt power supply → Clutch is slipping...
  • Page 17 Main beam or headlight flasher → Switching main beam on and off → Coolant Engine coolant temperature low Outside temperature colder than +4°C (+39°F) → Information displays on the digital instrument cluster Pro → Information displays on the digital instrument cluster Basic → Start/stop system Start/stop system active Start/stop system not available → Start/stop system → Service interval display Service due Travel Assist active, Adaptive Cruise Control active, adaptive lane guidance passive → Introduction to the topic → Switching on Light Assist → Switching on Dynamic Light Assist Main-beam control active Take over steering → Take over steering → Front Assist is starting up Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) is starting up Distance warning → Warning levels and braking intervention → Driving with predictive cruise control Speed regulation due to the road layout → Fault in the Sport Select running gear Fault in Sport Select running gear → Characteristics of the driving profiles Eco driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles Normal driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles Sport driving profile → Characteristics of the driving profiles Individual mode Mobile phone connected via Bluetooth®...

  • Page 18: Warning And Information Messages

    Warning and information messages The system runs a check on certain components and functions in the vehicle when the ignition is switched on or while the vehicle is in motion. Malfunctions are indicated by red and yellow warning symbols with information messages on the instrument cluster display. An acoustic warning is also given in certain cases. The appearance of the text messages and symbols can vary depending on the version of the instrument cluster. In addition, a list of current malfunctions can be opened manually. To do so, open the V ehicle status or Vehicle menu (→ Vehicle settings menu) Priority 1 warning The red central warning lamp flashes or lights up, in some cases together with acoustic warnings or additional symbols. Do not drive on! Danger. Check the fault. Seek expert assistance immediately. Priority 2 warning The yellow central warning lamp flashes or lights up, in some cases together with acoustic warnings or additional symbols. Malfunctions and insufficient service fluids can damage the vehicle and cause it to break down. Check the fault as soon as possible. In this case, go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Note about information in the owner's manual You will find further information on the warning in the owner's manual. Information message Information about various procedures within the vehicle. If several warnings are present, the symbols will appear for several seconds, one after another. The symbols will continue to appear until the faults are rectified. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 19 Introduction to instrument cluster The vehicle is equipped with a digital instrument cluster. The instrument cluster displays basic information such as speed. The following functions are additionally available, among others, depending on the vehicle equipment: —Various menus, e.g. for driver assist systems. —Status displays for driver assist systems. —Display messages. —Warning and indicator lamps. —Information on consumption and range. The content can be individually customised and settings adjusted in the menus. WARNING Operating the instrument cluster and Infotainment system can distract you from the road. If the driver is distracted when driving, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. ● Never operate the instrument cluster while the vehicle is in motion. ● Adjust all settings in the instrument cluster and Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. WARNING The display may be switched off if there is a serious fault in the instrument cluster. The red central warning lamp may additionally light up. Warnings can no longer be displayed. This can lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic and can cause accidents, serious injuries and even death. ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place. ● Seek expert assistance. When you start the engine after the 12-volt vehicle battery has been totally discharged, replaced or after a jump start, you may find that system settings, such as personal convenience settings and programming, have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings as necessary once the 12-volt vehicle battery has been sufficiently charged. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 20 Overview of the digital instrument cluster Pro The Digital Cockpit Pro is a digital instrument cluster with high-resolution TFT colour display. By selecting different information profiles, it is possible to view additional displays in addition to the standard round instruments, e.g. rev counter. The term “digital instrument cluster Pro” is used below to refer to the Digital Cockpit Pro. Fig. 1 In the dash panel: digital instrument cluster Pro ( illustration). 1 Rev counter (running engine speed in revolutions x 1,000 per minute). 2 Currently selected gear or selector lever position . 3 Displays. 4 Speedometer. 5 Digital speed display. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 21 Operating the digital instrument cluster Pro Fig. 1 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: operating the digital instrument cluster Pro (variant 1). Fig. 2 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: operating the digital instrument cluster Pro (variant 2). Fig. 3 On the right of the steering column: buttons on the wiper lever. There are no buttons on the wiper lever in vehicles equipped with a multifunction steering wheel. The digital instrument cluster Pro is then operated only with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. The functions of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel depend on the vehicle equipment. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: If any priority 1 warnings are displayed, you will be unable to open any OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 22 (→ Warning and information messages) menus . You can confirm and hide some warnings using the button on → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 the multifunction steering wheel Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: If any priority 1 warnings are displayed, you will be unable to open any menus (→ Warning and information messages) . Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the → Fig. 3 1 button Selecting a menu or information display Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. If a message or the vehicle pictogram is displayed, press the button, several times if required. 3. Press the or button to display a menu or browse through a menu. 4. To open the displayed menu or information display, press the button or wait until the menu or information display opens automatically after a few seconds. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 3 1 2. If a message or the vehicle pictogram is displayed, press the button , several times if required. 3. To access the menu selection or to return from a menu or an information display to the menu selection, hold → Fig. 3 2 down the rocker switch 4. To browse through the menus, press the rocker switch up or down.
  • Page 23 Classic View without information profile. Automatic The information profiles adapt to the selected driving profile. Only for vehicles with driving profile selection. Memory entry 1 Individual selection of the information profiles. Memory entry 2 Individual selection of the information profiles. Memory entry 3 Only for vehicles with navigation system fitted at the factory. Navigation map on the digital instrument cluster Pro Depending on the vehicle equipment, the digital instrument cluster Pro is able to display a detailed navigation map. The navigation map can be shown in three sizes. With the larger map size, the navigation map is displayed over the entire width of the display. To select the preferred map size: 1. Select the Navigation menu option. 2. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to toggle between map sizes. 3. Press the arrow button or on the multifunction steering wheel to zoom in and out. 4. To switch to Auto zoom, press the button on the multifunction steering wheel when zooming manually. Depending on the equipment level, navigation is shown on two screens or only one. The navigation map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster Pro and Infotainment system or only on the Infotainment system display. If the navigation map is displayed on the Infotainment system, only navigation arrows are shown in the digital instrument cluster. If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Operating the instrument cluster and Infotainment system can distract you from the road. If the driver is distracted when driving, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 24 ● Never operate the instrument cluster while the vehicle is in motion. ● Adjust all settings in the instrument cluster and Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. Information displays on the digital instrument cluster Pro Information profiles Various topical information profiles can be selected via the D igital cockpit menu option in the vehicle settings of the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) . Depending on the selected information profile, the digital instrument cluster Pro shows additional information in the centre of the round instruments, or the round instruments are hidden and the additional information is displayed across the whole width of the display. The following information profiles are available: —Audio. Digital display of current audio playback. —Assist systems. Graphic representation of various driver assist systems . —Distance covered. Display of the distance covered. —Selector lever display. Display of the current gear or selected position. —Speed. Display of the speed. —Navigation. Graphic representation of arrow navigation. —Range. Display of the remaining range. —Consumption. Graphic representation of current consumption and digital display of average consumption. —Dynamic Road Sign Display. Display of recognised road signs. —Time of arrival information. Display of the remaining driving time, distance to the destination and estimated time of arrival. The number and scope of the available information profiles may differ depending on the vehicle equipment. Possible displays in the digital instrument cluster Pro Depending on equipment, various information may be displayed in the digital instrument cluster Pro: —Outside temperature display. —Road signs detected by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system. —Driver assist systems. —Driving data display and menus for various settings. (→ Gear-change indicator) —Gear-change indicator —Speed warnings. —Speed warning for winter tyres. —Open doors, bonnet and boot lid. —Infotainment system and navigation information. —Mileage displays. —Compass display.

  • Page 25: Outside Temperature Display

    —Time. —Selector lever position. —Warning and information messages. (→ Symbols in the instrument cluster) —Warning and indicator lamps Outside temperature display If the outside temperature falls below approximately +4°C ( +39°F), the temperature display also shows a snowflake symbol . This symbol remains lit until the outside temperature rises above +6°C (+43°F) . In the following situation, the temperature displayed may be higher than the actual outside temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine. —When the vehicle is stationary. —When travelling at very low speeds. The measuring range is between -45°C ( -49°F) and +76°C (+169°F). WARNING Roads may be icy at low outside temperatures, also above freezing. There is an increased risk of accidents on icy roads. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with particular care if the symbol is displayed on the instrument cluster display. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. ● Never rely only on the outside temperature display. Gear-change indicator While the vehicle is in motion, the digital instrument cluster may show which gear should be selected to reduce fuel consumption (→ Gear-change indicator) Open doors, bonnet and boot lid The digital instrument cluster indicates if any doors, the bonnet or boot lid are open once the vehicle has been unlocked and while the vehicle is in motion. In some cases, an acoustic warning is also given. Speed warning for winter tyres A display in the digital instrument cluster indicates when you have exceeded the set maximum speed. (→ Winter tyres) Speed warning settings can be made in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system Compass display Depending on the vehicle equipment, the instrument cluster display shows the vehicle’s current direction of travel in short form, e.g. NW for northwest, when the ignition is switched on.

  • Page 26: Telephone Information

    Radiator fan run-on This display appears after the vehicle ignition has been switched off if the radiator fan is in after-run mode. An after-run time of the radiator fan may be caused by the following: —Exhaust gas treatment, e.g. during particulate filter regeneration. —Active brake cooling after driving down hills. —Dissipation of engine heat after vehicle operation under high loads, e.g. trailer towing. Engine code (→ Service menu) 1. Open the Service menu 2. Select the Engine code menu option. Telephone information If a mobile telephone is connected via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth symbol is shown in the digital instrument cluster . In addition, the symbol shows the charge level of the mobile phone battery Selector lever position The selector lever position is displayed on the side of the selector lever and in the digital instrument cluster. The digital instrument cluster may show which gear has been selected if the selector lever is in D/S position or in Tiptronic mode (→ Automatic gearbox) Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change automatically when the user account is changed . Correspondingly qualified workshops can program and modify other functions depending on the vehicle equipment level. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Different instrument clusters are available, which means that the versions and displays may vary. In displays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the indicator lamps. Some notifications in the digital instrument cluster may be overridden by sudden events, e.g. incoming telephone calls. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, some settings and displays may also appear in the Infotainment system. Overview of the digital instrument cluster Basic OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 27 The digital cockpit is a digital instrument cluster with high-resolution TFT colour display. Additional content can be displayed by selecting different views, e.g. rev counter, and different displays in the main display area and secondary display areas. The term “digital instrument cluster Basic” is used below to refer to the Digital Cockpit. Fig. 1 In the dash panel: digital instrument cluster Basic ( illustration). 1 Secondary display area. 2 Time, compass and temperature. 3 Main display area. 4 Secondary display area. 5 Currently selected gear or selector lever position. 6 Active driver assist system. 7 Range. 8 Coolant temperature display. 9 Fuel gauge. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 28 Operating the digital instrument cluster Basic Fig. 1 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: operating the digital instrument cluster Basic (variant 1). Fig. 2 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: operating the digital instrument cluster Basic (variant 2). Fig. 3 On the right of the steering column: buttons on the wiper lever. There are no buttons on the wiper lever in vehicles equipped with a multifunction steering wheel. The digital instrument cluster Basic is then operated only with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. The functions of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel depend on the vehicle equipment. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: If any priority 1 warnings are displayed, you will be unable to open any OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 29 (→ Warning and information messages) menus . You can confirm and hide some warnings using the button on → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 the multifunction steering wheel Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: If any priority 1 warnings are displayed, you will be unable to open any menus (→ Warning and information messages) . Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the → Fig. 3 1 button Views in the main display area 1. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: Press the button to switch to the main display. The display in the display area can show the following views: Digital view Digital speedometer with secondary displays. Speed Classic speedometer display as round instrument. Rev counter Classic rev counter display as round instrument. The amount and scope of the displayed information may differ depending on the vehicle equipment. When the ignition is switched off, a display appears showing information on the vehicle status, e.g. total mileage. An additional secondary display can be configured in the middle of the round instrument in the Speed and Rev counter views. Selecting secondary displays Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: The secondary displays can be configured or hidden independently of each other. Various driving data, navigation information or information on audio playback or the mobile phone interface can be displayed in the secondary displays. Select the secondary displays as follows: 1. Select the right or left secondary display area with the or button. 2. Select the desired secondary display with the arrow buttons and . 3. Confirm the selection with the button.

  • Page 30: Possible Displays

    → Fig. 3 2 2. To scroll through the menus, press the rocker switch at the top or bottom. → Fig. 3 1 3. To confirm the selected secondary display, press the button If warnings about malfunctions are displayed when the ignition is switched on, it may not be possible to adjust some settings as described, or the information display may appear differently. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Operating the instrument cluster and Infotainment system can distract you from the road. If the driver is distracted when driving, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. ● Never operate the instrument cluster while the vehicle is in motion. ● Adjust all settings in the instrument cluster and Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. Information displays on the digital instrument cluster Basic Possible displays Depending on the vehicle equipment, various information can be displayed in the main display and secondary display areas of the digital instrument cluster Basic: —Outside temperature display. —Date and time. —Digital speed. —Road signs detected by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system. —Natural gas quality. —Driver assist systems. —Multifunction display, e.g. Driving time/Distance covered. (→ Gear-change indicator) —Gear-change indicator —Natural gas system inspection. —Speed warning for winter tyres. —Open doors, bonnet and boot lid. —Mileage displays. —Compass display.
  • Page 31 —Warning and information messages. —Warning and indicator lamps. —Destination information. Additional settings can be adjusted in the submenu. Outside temperature display If the outside temperature falls below approximately +4°C ( +39°F), the temperature display also shows a snowflake symbol . This symbol remains lit until the outside temperature rises above +6°C (+43°F) . In the following situation, the temperature displayed may be higher than the actual outside temperature as a result of the heat radiated from the engine. —When the vehicle is stationary. —When travelling at very low speeds. The measuring range is between -45°C ( -49°F) and +76°C (+169°F). WARNING Roads may be icy at low outside temperatures, also above freezing. There is an increased risk of accidents on icy roads. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with particular care if the symbol is displayed on the instrument cluster display. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. ● Never rely only on the outside temperature display. Gear-change indicator While the vehicle is in motion, the digital instrument cluster may show which gear should be selected to reduce fuel (→ Gear-change indicator) consumption Open doors, bonnet and boot lid The digital instrument cluster indicates if any doors, the bonnet or boot lid are open once the vehicle has been unlocked and while the vehicle is in motion. In some cases, an acoustic warning is also given. Speed warning for winter tyres A display in the digital instrument cluster indicates when you have exceeded the set maximum speed. (→ Winter tyres) Speed warning settings can be made in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system Compass display If the Compass secondary display is activated, the current compass direction in which you are driving is shown as a blue arrow with a representation of the vehicle in combination with a compass.

  • Page 32: Navigation Information

    —Dissipation of engine heat after vehicle operation under high loads, e.g. trailer towing. Engine code 1. Open the Service menu (→ Service menu) 2. Select the Engine code menu option. Navigation information When route guidance is active, the N avigation information secondary displays shows an arrow to indicate the direction of travel. An arrow after the entry in the configuration menu links to a submenu. The submenu contains the home address and a list of recent destinations. You can start route guidance using the button. Telephone information If the Telephone secondary display is activated and a mobile telephone is connected via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth symbol is shown in the digital instrument cluster . In addition, the symbol shows the charge level of the mobile phone battery A list of recent calls is displayed in the submenu. The list can be used to call the contacts shown. Selector lever position for automatic gearbox The selected position and, depending on driving profile, the selected gear are displayed both on the selector lever and in the digital instrument cluster. The gear shift pattern is displayed in the instrument cluster upon actuation of the brake or selector lever. Destination information When route guidance is active, the D estination information secondary display shows the expected journey time and the distance to the destination. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change automatically when the user account is changed . Some notifications in the digital instrument cluster may be overridden by sudden events, e.g. incoming telephone calls. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, some settings and displays may also appear in the Infotainment system. Rev counter The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed that may be used in each gear when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly.

  • Page 33: Digital Fuel Gauge

    Heavy loads on the engine, particularly when the engine is cold, can cause engine damage. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and overloading the engine. ● The needle on the rev counter should only briefly point into the red area, as engine damage may otherwise be incurred. Changing up a gear early will help to save fuel and reduce engine noise. Digital fuel gauge Fig. 1 In the digital instrument cluster Pro: fuel gauge (illustration). Fig. 2 In the digital instrument cluster Basic: fuel gauge (illustration). WARNING When the fuel level is too low, the fuel supply to the engine could be irregular and lead to the engine stuttering or stalling, especially when driving up or down hills and inclines. This can cause breakdowns in traffic, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. The steering, all driver assist systems and brake support systems will not function if the engine stalls due to a lack of fuel or irregular fuel supply. ● Make sure that the fuel tank is always sufficiently full. ● Always refuel when the fuel tank is only 1/4 full. NOTICE Irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and allow unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 34: Troubleshooting

    The small arrow next to the petrol pump symbol in the fuel gauge shows you the side of the vehicle on which the tank flap is located. Troubleshooting Fuel tank almost empty The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The reserve volume ( red marking) is being consumed. 1. Fill the tank as soon as possible. Fuel tank almost empty The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The fuel tank for natural gas is almost empty. 1. Refuel with natural gas as soon as possible. Vehicle in natural gas mode The indicator lamp lights up green. The vehicle is in natural gas mode. The green indicator lamp will go out when the natural gas tank is empty. 1. Refuel with natural gas as soon as possible. Things to note in vehicles with natural gas engine If the vehicle is parked for an extended period directly after refuelling, the pointer for the natural gas fuel gauge may not indicate exactly the same fuel level as shown directly after refuelling when the engine is restarted. This does not mean that there is a leak in the system, but rather that for technical reasons the pressure has been decreased in the natural gas fuel tank following a cooling phase directly after refilling. For vehicles with a natural gas engine, the fuel level indicator on the petrol tank can only show the correct level after a delay, depending on the refill amount. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 35 Digital coolant temperature display Fig. 1 In the digital instrument cluster Pro: coolant temperature gauge (illustration). A Cold area. The engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high engine revs and heavy engine loads until the engine is warm. B Normal area. C Warning area. The bar may also move into the warning range when the engine is working hard, especially at high ambient temperatures. Fig. 2 In the digital instrument cluster Basic: coolant temperature gauge (illustration). A Cold area. The engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high engine revs and heavy engine loads until the engine is warm. B Normal area. C Warning area. The bar may also move into the warning range when the engine is working hard, especially at high ambient temperatures. (→ Coolant) If the indicator lamp flashes red, the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 36: Multifunction Display

    Multifunction display The multifunction display shows driving and fuel consumption data. Different driving data can be displayed depending on the vehicle equipment level. The displayed driving data depends on the current driving behaviour, the vehicle condition, e.g. particulate filter regeneration, and the current driving situation, e.g. urban driving. The driving data values are determined as average values over route sections of varying length. This means that the currently displayed value may differ from the actual average value. Since start recorder The memory will be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours. Since refuelling recorder Display and storage of the collected driving and consumption values. The memory is deleted when the tank is refilled. Long-term recorder The memory records driving data for up to 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes of driving time or 1,999.9 km (mi) or 9,999.9 km (mi) distance covered. The memory is deleted if one of these maximum values is exceeded. The maximum values vary depending on the instrument cluster version. Multifunction display of digital instrument cluster Pro The driving data is available in the context menu in the digital instrument cluster Pro. Changing between the displays in the digital instrument cluster Pro Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the or button on the multifunction steering wheel. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the rocker switch TRIP on the wiper lever. Changing memory in the digital instrument cluster Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the button on the wiper lever. Deleting a driving data memory in the digital instrument cluster Pro Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the memory that you wish to delete. 2. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
  • Page 37 Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the memory that you wish to delete. 2. Press the button on the wiper lever. If you would like to know the mileage that you have driven in one day, clear the Long-term recorder before you start your journey and read the value at the end of the day. Adjustable speed warning An individual speed warning can be adjusted by the following setting: Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Warning at --- mph. 2. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to save the current speed and activate the warning. 3. Set the speed within approximately 5 seconds using the and arrow buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Then press the button or simply wait a few seconds. The speed is now saved and the warning is activated. 4. To deactivate, press the button again. The stored speed will be deleted. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Warning at --- mph. 2. Press the button on the wiper lever to save the current speed and activate the warning. 3. Within approximately 5 seconds, set the speed using the rocker switch T RIP on the wiper lever. Then press the button or simply wait a few seconds. The speed is now saved and the warning is activated.

  • Page 38: Average Consumption

    1. To access the secondary displays, press the rocker switch on the wiper lever at the top or bottom. 2. To browse through the menus, press the rocker switch up or down. 3. To confirm the selected driving data display, press the button. Resetting a multifunction display in the digital instrument cluster Basic Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the or button. 2. Use the arrow buttons and to select the corresponding multifunction display in the configuration menu. An arrow after the entry in the configuration menu links to a submenu. 3. Select Reset data in the submenu and confirm with the button. Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press and hold the button. Driving data in the Infotainment system In addition to the display on the instrument cluster, driving data can also be displayed in the Infotainment system. Selecting displays on the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle You can select which driving data you want to display in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) Average consumption The average fuel consumption is displayed after around 300 m ( around 984 ft). Range Approximate calculation of the distance in km ( mi) that the vehicle can still travel under the current driving conditions. CNG quality (not available in all countries) Vehicles with natural gas engine: the natural gas quality is determined while refuelling and is displayed in percentage values from 70% to 100%.

  • Page 39: Service Menu

    ● Never operate the instrument cluster while the vehicle is in motion. ● Adjust all settings in the instrument cluster and Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. Service menu Settings can be made in the Service menu depending on the vehicle equipment. Opening the Service menu in the digital instrument cluster Pro 1. Select the Range information profile. 2. Press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for approximately 4 seconds. 3. Navigate through the menu using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Opening the Service menu in the digital instrument cluster Basic 1. Select secondary display Driving time/Distance covered. 2. Press and hold the or button on the multifunction steering wheel in the same direction for around 6 seconds. 3. Navigate in the menu using the arrow buttons and . Resetting the service interval display 1. Select the Service menu. 2. Observe the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Resetting the oil service 1. Select the Reset oil service menu. 2. Observe the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Resetting the trip recorder on the digital instrument cluster Pro 1. Select the Reset trip menu. 2. Observe the instructions on the instrument cluster display. Displaying the engine code 1. Select the Engine code menu.

  • Page 40: Service Notification

    Displaying copyright information 1. Select the Copyright menu to access copyright information. Service interval display Service events are displayed on the instrument cluster and in the Infotainment system. The content of the displays can vary as different versions of the instrument cluster and Infotainment system are available. Service schedules at Volkswagen are divided into two categories, oil change service and inspections. The service interval display provides information on the next service which includes an oil change and on the next scheduled inspection. In vehicles with fixed oil change service interval, services take place at predefined intervals. The service intervals are calculated on an individual basis in vehicles with flexible oil change service interval. An oil change service must be carried out only when required by the vehicle. The individual conditions in which the vehicle is used and the driver's personal driving style are taken into account. The service reminder is displayed for the first time 30 days before the calculated oil change service is due. The distance is rounded to the nearest 100 km (mi) and the remaining time is rounded to full days. Service notification If an oil change service or inspection is due soon, a service alert will appear the next time the ignition is switched on. The number of kilometres or amount of time shown correspond to the maximum number of kilometres or maximum time that can still be driven before the next service. Service event For a scheduled oil change service or a scheduled inspection, an acoustic warning will sound when the ignition is switched on and the spanner symbol will be displayed for several seconds on the digital instrument cluster. One of the following displays will also appear: —Inspection now! —Oil service now! —Oil service and inspection now! Accessing service schedules in the Infotainment system You can access the current scheduled service event when the ignition is switched on, the engine is not running, and the vehicle is stationary: 1. Depending on the version, press the button or function button on the Infotainment system and select the Vehicle menu. Or: press the button or function button, depending on the version. 2. Depending on the version, select the S ettings menu.

  • Page 41: Resetting The Service Interval Display

    Resetting the service interval display If the service interval display was not reset after the oil change service or inspection, the display can be reset as follows: (→ Service menu) The service interval display can only be reset via the Service menu Do not reset the service interval display between service intervals – otherwise incorrect data may be shown. If the oil change service interval was reset manually, the service interval display then also changes to a fixed service interval in vehicles with flexible oil change service interval. The service message will disappear automatically after a few seconds when the engine is running, or when you press the button on the wiper lever or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. If the 12-volt vehicle battery was disconnected for long periods in vehicles with flexible service interval, the system cannot calculate the time at which the next oil change service is due. The information shown in the service interval display may therefore be incorrect. In this case, observe the maximum permissible maintenance interval. Time Setting the time in the Infotainment system 1. Depending on version, press the button or function button and open the V ehicle menu. Or: press the button or function button, depending on the version. 2. Depending on the version, open the S ettings menu. 3. To set the time, select the T ime and date menu option. Setting the time in the digital instrument cluster Pro 1. Select the Range information profile. 2. Press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the Service menu is available on the (→ Service menu) instrument cluster display 3. Select the Time menu.
  • Page 42 Lap timer in the instrument cluster The lap timer provides you with the option of timing your own laps manually in the vehicle on a race track, storing the times and comparing them with previously measured best times. With the appropriate equipment the lap timer can be shown on the instrument cluster display. The following higher-level menus can be displayed: —Lap timer. —Lap (with the current lap number). —Statistics. Switching between the menus 1. Press the or button on the multifunction steering wheel. The following list shows an example of how the menus in the instrument cluster display are structured. The actual scope of the menus and the names of the individual menu options vary according to the instrument cluster design and the vehicle electronics. Menu displays and functions Lap timer menu: Start Starts the lap timer. Since start Timing starts when the vehicle drives off. If it is already in motion, timing starts when the vehicle has meanwhile come to a standstill. Statistics An overview of the laps driven until now are displayed. Lap menu: Stop! Active timing is interrupted. This will not end the lap. Continue Paused timing resumes. Split time: A split time will be displayed for approximately 5 seconds. Active timing continues parallel to this. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 43 New lap Timing of the current lap will then be interrupted and a new lap will begin. The time of the completed lap will be carried over to the statistics. Abort lap The timing is ended and disregarded. The current lap is not entered into the statistics. Timing is ended. The lap is entered into the statistics. Statistics menu: Back Return to the previous menu. Reset This resets all stored statistics data. In the menu Statistics, the lap times most recently achieved are shown. If the maximum number of 99 laps or the maximum time of 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds has been reached, new timing can only be started after the statistics have been reset. WARNING If the driver is distracted, this can cause accidents and serious injuries. Operating the lap timer can distract you from the road. ● Adjust the lap timer settings and open statistics only when the vehicle is stationary. ● When the vehicle is in motion, use the lap timer only in driving situations which are easy to control. Lap timer in the Infotainment system Fig. 1 On the Infotainment system display: lap timer with stopwatch, function button and lap times. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 44 Fig. 2 Function button on the Infotainment system display: time measurement for paused, current and completed lap. 1 Stopwatch. 2 Function button with current lap time. 3 Stored lap times. 4 Start or continue time measurement. This is possible only when the ignition is switched on. Tap Start to start time measurement. Time measurement starts automatically as soon as the vehicle moves forwards. A new first lap can be started when the data in the statistics has been reset. 5 Cancel current lap. The lap time is deleted. --: --:--.-- is displayed in the statistics. 6 End time measurement. 7 Pause time measurement or cancel current lap when time measurement is running. 8 Start new lap. The last lap time is stored and a new lap starts. The overall time of the laps driven is shown in the statistics. 9 Display split time. The stopwatch stops for a few seconds and the split time is displayed. 10 Display statistics after ending or aborting time measurement: number of laps, overall time, fastest and slowest slaps, average value of all lap times, all lap values. Tap Reset to reset the statistics. A maximum of 99 laps and a maximum time of 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds can be recorded. If one of these limits has been reached, the data in the statistics must be deleted before a further time measurement. Opening the lap timer 1. Press the button or function button, depending on version. Or: press the button or function button. Or: tap the function button.

  • Page 45: Measuring Lap Times

    Or: tap the Auto function button. 3. Tap the Selection function button. 4. Tap the Sport function button. The performance monitor is displayed. 5. Tap one of the arrow buttons in the performance monitor to switch to the lap timer. You can change between the lap timer and performance monitor at any time using the arrow buttons. Measuring lap times The stopwatch measures the lap time in two areas: The red needle and the numerical value in the centre show the running time in seconds. The smaller display in the inner area shows minutes and hours. The display on the right side shows the current lap time with an accuracy of one hundredth of a second. There is no difference between the stopwatch and lap times if there are not yet any laps with split times stored in the lap timer. WARNING If the driver is distracted, this can cause accidents and serious injuries. Operating the lap timer can distract you from the road. ● Adjust the lap timer settings and open statistics only when the vehicle is stationary. ● When the vehicle is in motion, use the lap timer only in driving situations which are easy to control. Performance monitor Fig. 1 On the Infotainment system display: performance monitor. 1 Display areas. 2 Arrow buttons for changing to the lap timer. The performance monitor is a display for sporty driving. The digital instruments display real-time values for engine power, temperature and acceleration that are determined by sensors on the vehicle. This provides the driver with an overview of driving dynamics. Opening the performance monitor 1. Press the button or function button on the Infotainment system, depending on version.
  • Page 46 2. Tap the Vehicle function button. 3. Tap the Selection function button. 4. Tap the Sport function button. If you would like to switch between the performance monitor and the lap timer, tap one of the arrow buttons on the 2 . → Fig. 1 left and right above the instruments Selecting instruments and setting units The display can show a maximum of three instruments at the same time. Each instrument can be selected for each 1 (left, middle, right). → Fig. 1 display area 1. To change instruments, swipe vertically over the display. The currently selected instrument will then disappear and a new instrument will appear. (→ Vehicle settings The units of measurement can be adjusted for some instruments in the Infotainment system menu) The following instruments can be displayed: 1 shows the pressure in the charge air system → Fig. 1 —Charge air pressure gauge: the charge air pressure gauge between the turbocharger and engine in bar. The further to the right the needle on the scale, the higher the engine power output. 1 (centre) shows the acceleration value in the → Fig. 1 —Accelerometer (G-meter): the accelerometer (G-meter) centre in g. The red marking in the grid-type area shows the acceleration level and the direction of the acting force.
  • Page 47 ● Adjust all settings in the Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. NOTICE Heavy loads on the engine, particularly when the engine is cold, can cause engine damage. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and overloading the engine. ● The needle on the rev counter should only briefly point into the red area, as engine damage may otherwise be incurred. Due to the principle of performance determination used in the vehicle, the physical accuracy of the displayed values is not guaranteed. Vehicle settings menu You can switch individual functions and systems on and off and adjust the settings in the vehicle settings of the Infotainment system. Opening the Vehicle settings menu 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Switch on Infotainment system if necessary. 3. Depending on the equipment, press the button or function button and select the V ehicle menu. Or: depending on the version, press the button or function button and select the S ettings menu. Or: tap the function button and select the A uto menu. 4. Tap the corresponding function buttons to open additional menus in the V ehicle settings menu or tap the function button and select the corresponding function buttons to adjust the settings in the menu options. 5. To return to the previous menu, tap the function button. A tick indicates that the relevant function is switched on.
  • Page 48 ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. ● Adjust all settings in the Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary. Introduction to the topic Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: Driver Alert System symbol. The Driver Alert System informs the driver if their driving shows signs of tiredness. The Driver Alert System determines the driving behaviour at the beginning of a journey and uses it to evaluate the tiredness of the driver. This is compared to the behaviour of the driver while actually driving. If the system detects driver fatigue, an acoustic warning signal will sound and a symbol will be displayed on the instrument cluster display together with a supplementary text message → Fig. 1 . The message on the instrument cluster display appears for about 5 seconds and may be repeated once. The last displayed message is saved by the system. Function conditions The driving behaviour can be evaluated only when the speed is above around 60 km/h (around 37 mph) up to approximately around 200 km/h (around 125 mph). WARNING The Driver Alert System cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. The Driver Alert System therefore may not detect that the driver is tired in all situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. There is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is responsible at all times for their fitness to drive. (→ Driver Alert System (break recommendation)) ● Observe the system limits ● Never drive a vehicle when you are tired. ● During long trips, take regular and sufficient breaks. ● Follow the information in the instrument cluster display, and respond according to the commands. The Driver Alert System has been developed for use only while driving on motorways and good roads. In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 49 Limits of the Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System has system-related limitations. The following conditions can limit the function of the Driver Alert System, or prevent it from working altogether: —When travelling at speeds of less than approximately 60 km/h ( around 37 mph). —When travelling at speeds of more than approximately 200 km/h (around 125 mph). —Twisting roads. —Poor roads. —Adverse weather conditions. —Sporty driving style. (→ Trailer towing) —Towing a heavy or long trailer —The driver is distracted. Microsleep: No urgent warning will be given in the event of the phenomenon known as microsleep. The Driver Alert System is reset in the following situations: —The ignition is switched off. —The driver seat belt is unfastened and the driver door is open. —The vehicle has been stationary for longer than around 15 minutes. The Driver Alert System is automatically reset in the event of an extended period of slow driving at a speed of less than around 60 km/h (around 37 mph). If the speed is increased again, the system evaluates the driving behaviour once more. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 50: Switching On And Off

    Operating the Driver Alert System Hiding a message The message on the instrument cluster display can be hidden as follows or will disappear on its own after 5 seconds: Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the button on the wiper lever. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: 1. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Switching on and off You can switch the Driver Alert System on and off in the Assist systems menu in the Infotainment system (→ Driving data display (multifunction display)) The Driver Alert System is switched on automatically when the engine is started. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 51 Introduction to the topic Dynamic Road Sign Display uses a camera in the base of the interior mirror to monitor standard road signs and informs the driver of any detected speed limits or overtaking restrictions. Within the limits of the system, the system also displays sub-plates, e.g. temporary restrictions or restrictions in wet conditions. In some cases, the system can also display the current speed limits on non-signposted routes. In addition to speed limits and overtaking restrictions, Dynamic Road Sign Display also detects the road sign which indicates that all restrictions have been lifted on motorways and main roads in Germany. In all other countries in which the system is operated, the current speed limit is displayed instead. The road signs detected by the Dynamic Road Sign Display function are displayed on the instrument cluster display and on the Infotainment system. Display of road signs Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: displays of Dynamic Road Sign Display (illustration). Fig. 2 On the instrument cluster display: displays of Dynamic Road Sign Display (illustration). OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 52: Error Messages

    Road signs that do not always apply (e.g. 1 00 km/h (around 60 mph) “when wet”) are shown in second place. Sub-plate: if the windscreen wiper is active while the vehicle is in motion, the applicable road sign with the “when wet” sub-plate will be moved left to the first position, for example. 3rd position: A further road sign can be displayed in the third position, e.g. o vertaking not permitted at certain times. WARNING The Dynamic Road Sign Display system cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Dynamic Road Sign Display therefore cannot recognise all road signs and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. Driving recommendations and traffic symbols displayed by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system may differ from the current traffic situation. ● Observe the system limits (→ Dynamic Road Sign Display) ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Road signs on the road and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and displays provided by the Dynamic Road Sign Display system. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. Availability of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function is limited in waypoint mode (waypoint navigation) of the Infotainment system. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change automatically when the user account is changed . Limits of Dynamic Road Sign Display Error messages No road signs available. The system is in the initialisation phase. Or: the camera has not detected any regulatory or warning signs. Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display System fault. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 53: Function Limitations

    Speed warning currently not available. Fault in the Dynamic Road Sign Display system speed warning. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Dynamic Road Sign Display: Clean the windscreen! The windscreen is dirty in the area of the camera or the camera view is impaired due to the weather conditions. Clean the windscreen. Dynamic Road Sign Display is currently restricted. No data transmission from the Infotainment system. Check to ensure that valid map data is loaded in the Infotainment system. Or: the vehicle is located in an area that is not covered by the map stored in the Infotainment system. No data available. Dynamic Road Sign Display is not supported in the country in which you are currently travelling. Function limitations Dynamic Road Sign Display is subject to system-related limitations. The following conditions can restrict the function of Dynamic Road Sign Display, or prevent it from working altogether: —High ambient temperatures or prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. —Poor visibility, for example when it snows. —Glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic or sunlight. —High speeds. —A covered or dirty camera. —Road signs located outside of the camera's field of view. —Partially or fully hidden road signs, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehicles. —Non-standard road signs. —Damaged or bent road signs. —Changing overhead signs (variable display of road signs by means of L ED s or other light devices). —Out-of-date map material in the Infotainment system. —Vehicles with road sign stickers, e.g. speed restrictions on trucks. Operating the Dynamic Road Sign Display function Switching on and off Continuous display of road signs in the instrument cluster can be switched on and off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. Speed warning If the Dynamic Road Sign Display detects that an applicable speed limit has been exceeded, it can issue an acoustic warning signal or display a message on the instrument cluster display. (→ Vehicle The speed warning can be set or completely deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) . The settings can be adjusted in increments of 5 km/h ( 3 mph) within a range between 0 km/h (mph)

  • Page 54: Number Of Seats

    (→ Vehicle settings menu) can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system In trailer mode, the speed warning function display can be adjusted to the type of trailer or to legal requirements. The settings can be adjusted in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range between around 60 km/h (40 mph) and around 130 km/h (80 mph). If a higher speed is set than is permitted for driving with a trailer in the country in which you are currently travelling, Dynamic Road Sign Display automatically issues a warning at the usual speed limit, e.g. at around 80 km/h (50 mph) in Germany. If the speed warning for the trailer is deactivated, Dynamic Road Sign Display issues warnings as if the vehicle was being driven without a trailer. Introduction to the topic Number of seats The vehicle has a total of five seats: two at the front and three at the rear. Each seat is equipped with a seat belt. Assuming an incorrect sitting position considerably impairs the level of protection provided by a seat belt. This could lead to severe or even fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is responsible for all occupants transported in the vehicle, especially children. WARNING Assuming an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, in the event of a collision or accident, or if the airbags are triggered. ● All vehicle occupants must assume a correct sitting position before setting off and maintain this position throughout the trip. This also applies to the fastening of seat belts. ● The number of vehicle occupants must never exceed the number of seats with seat belts in the vehicle. ● Never tilt the backrest too far to the rear. ● Always keep your feet in the footwell during the journey. Never place your feet on the seat or dash panel, for example. Never hold your feet out of the window. If you sit like this, the airbag and seat belt cannot provide optimal protection and could actually increase the risk of injury during an accident. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 55: Correct Sitting Position

    Correct sitting position Fig. 1 Correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel, correct seat belt routing and correct head restraint adjustment (illustration). The following describes the correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers. The seat belts and airbags can only provide a maximum level of protection if a correct sitting position is assumed. If any vehicle occupants cannot assume a correct sitting position due to their physical build, they should contact a correspondingly qualified workshop to find out about possible special modifications. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Volkswagen recommends the following seating position for your own safety, for the most fatigue-free driving possible and to reduce the level of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident: The following applies to all vehicle occupants: —Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but not lower than eye → Fig. 1 level. Position the back of your head as close to the head restraint as possible at all times —For small people, push the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then located underneath the top edge of the head restraint. —For tall people, push the head restraint up as far as it will go. —Always keep both feet in the footwell. —Adjust and fasten seat belts properly . Additional points for the driver: —Sit as far back as possible on the seat. —Adjust the driver seat by moving it forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly bent and so that the distance from the dash panel to your knees is at least 10 cm (around 4 → Fig. 1 B inches) —Adjust the height so that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel. —Move the backrest into an upright position so that your back rests fully against it. —The thighs should rest loosely on the seat. The back of the knees should protrude a few centimetres beyond the (→ Front seat, front edge of the seat. Use further equipment-dependent adjustment options for the seats mechanical) —Adjust the seat so that the distance between the steering wheel and your breastbone is at least 25 cm (around 10 → Fig. 1 A inches) and the circumference of the steering wheel can be held at the sides with both hands and your arms slightly bent.
  • Page 56 ● Never unfasten the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never allow more than one person to share the same seat belt. ● Never transport children or babies on your lap and never secure them using the same seat belt as another person. ● Never travel wearing loose, bulky clothing ( such as an overcoat over a jacket). This could prevent the seat belts from fitting and functioning properly. WARNING Damaged seat belts increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries. If the belt webbing or any other part of the seat belt becomes damaged, the seat belt may tear during an accident or sudden braking manoeuvre. ● Never damage the belt by trapping it in the door or in the seat mechanism. ● If the belt webbing, belt connections, belt retractor or seat belt buckle become damaged, the seat belt or belt attachment element in question must be replaced immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. The suitably qualified workshop must use correct spare parts that are compatible with the vehicle, equipment level and model year. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never try to repair, modify or remove the seat belts or belt attachment elements yourself. All repairs to the seat belts, belt retractors and buckles must be carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. The correspondingly qualified workshop must replace the seat belt only with a seat belt that is approved for the seat in question. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Have seat belts that have been subjected to stress and stretched during an accident replaced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. Also check the anchorages of the seat belts. WARNING Using seat belts incorrectly increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries. ● Regularly check to ensure that the seat belt and its related parts are in perfect condition. ● Always keep the seat belts clean. ● Avoid allowing foreign bodies or liquids to enter the seat belt buckle slots and belt buckles. This could prevent the seat belt buckle slots, belt buckles and seat belts from working properly.

  • Page 57: Seat Belt Warning System

    Seat belt warning system Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: warning lamp of the seat belt warning system. Seat belt warning for the front seats If the driver or front passenger seat is occupied by an adult, an acoustic warning will be emitted for 126 seconds if the seat belts are not fastened at the start of a journey and the vehicle reaches a speed of more than around 25 km/h (around 15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The red warning lamp also flashes on the instrument cluster display. The red warning lamp will not go out until all occupants have fastened their seat belts when the ignition is switched on. Seat belt warning for the rear seats (depending on country and equipment) Fig. 2 On the instrument cluster display: seat belt warning for the rear seats (illustration). After the ignition has been switched on, the seat belt warning system for the rear seats → Fig. 2 on the instrument cluster display shows the driver whether the adult rear seat passengers have fastened their seat belts. The green symbol indicates that the passenger on this seat has fastened their seat belt. The red symbol indicates that the passenger on this seat has not fastened their seat belt. The white symbol indicates that this seat is not occupied. If a seat belt for one of the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion, the symbol will light up red for this seat. The red warning lamp also flashes on the instrument cluster display. If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) an acoustic signal will also be given for 126 seconds. WARNING The seat belt warning system is designed to detect adult persons. If a seat is occupied by lighter persons, in particular children, the detection will not be reliable. The seat belt warning system also does not respond or responds only in a limited way if child seats and seat pads are used. As a result, the system may not be able to OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 58: Fastening And Unfastening Seat Belts

    detect when lighter persons and children have not fastened their seat belts and this can lead to them suffering serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Always ensure that all vehicle occupants, especially children, have fastened their seat belts properly. Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fastening the seat belt Fig. 1 Inserting the seat belt latch plate into the buckle (illustration). (→ Sitting position) 1. Adopt correct sitting position 2. Take hold of the belt and pull it evenly across your chest and pelvis. Do not twist the belt when doing this (→ Seat belt routing) 3. Insert the latch plate securely into the buckle belonging to the occupied seat → Fig. 1 4. Pull on the seat belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely locked in the buckle. Unfastening the seat belts Fig. 2 Removing the latch plate from the buckle (illustration). (→ Seat belt routing) Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is stationary → Fig. 2 1. Press the red button in the buckle The latch plate is released and springs out. 2. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily, without twisting the seat belt and without damaging the trim. Twisted seat belt OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 59 If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the belt guide, the seat belt may have become twisted if it was returned too quickly into the side trim: 1. Take hold of the latch plate then slowly and carefully pull out the seat belt. 2. Untwist the seat belt and guide it back slowly by hand. 3. Fasten the seat belt even if you are unable to undo the twist. However, the twist should not be in part of the seat belt that comes into direct contact with the body. 4. Go immediately to a correspondingly qualified workshop in order to have the twist undone. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Seat belt routing Seat belts only provide an optimum level of protection during an accident when they are routed correctly. Correct seat belt routing reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Correct seat belt routing also holds the vehicle occupants in position so that an inflating airbag can offer the maximum level of protection. Therefore you must always fasten → Fig. 1 your seat belt and ensure that the seat belt routing is correct Correct seat belt routing Fig. 1 Correct seat belt routing and head restraint adjustment (illustration). —The shoulder belt must always lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, over or under the arm or behind the back. —The lap belt must always lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. —The seat belt must always lie flat and snugly on the body. Tighten the belt if necessary. Correct seat belt routing during pregnancy OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 60: Seat Belt Height Adjuster

    → Fig. 2 Correct seat belt routing according to height The following equipment can be used to adjust the seat belt routing: (→ Seat belt height adjuster) —Seat belt height adjuster for the front seats (→ Sitting position) —Height-adjustable front seats WARNING Incorrect seat belt routing can cause serious injuries in the event of an accident or a sudden braking or driving manoeuvre. ● Make sure that the seat belt routing is correct. ● Adjust the backrest to an upright position and fasten the seat belt correctly corresponding to your body size in order to achieve the optimum protective effect of the seat belts. ● Route the shoulder section of the seat belt over the centre of the shoulder and never under the arm or across the neck. ● Route the seat belt so that it lies flat and snugly on the upper body and pelvis. Pull the belt a little again to tighten it if necessary. ● Make sure that the lap part of the belt is routed in front of your pelvis and never over your stomach. ● If you are pregnant, make sure that the seat belt is routed evenly over your chest and as low as possible over your pelvis and so that it lies flat during the entire course of the pregnancy. In this way, no pressure is exerted on the lower abdomen. ● Do not twist the belt when fastening or wearing the seat belt. ● Never hold the seat belt away from your body with your hand. ● Do not route the belt over hard or fragile objects, such as glasses, pens or keys. ● Never change the belt routing by means of belt clips, retaining eyes or similar. If a person’s physical build prevents them from routing the seat belt properly, contact a correspondingly qualified workshop to find out about any special modifications so that the seat belts and airbags can provide the optimum level of protection. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Seat belt height adjuster OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 61 Fig. 1 Next to the front seats: seat belt height adjuster. The seat belt height adjuster can be used to adjust the position of the seat belt on the shoulder so that the seat belt can be fastened properly: → Fig. 1 1. Press the button of the seat belt height adjuster together in the direction of the arrows and hold 2. Push the seat belt height adjuster up or down so that the seat belt is routed over the middle of the shoulder (→ Seat belt routing) 3. Release the button of the seat belt height adjuster. 4. Pull sharply on the seat belt to check that the seat belt height adjuster is engaged securely. WARNING If you adjust the belt height while the vehicle is in motion, this can cause serious and fatal injuries. ● Never adjust the seat belt height when the vehicle is in motion. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 62: Belt Tensioner

    Fastened seat belts on the front seats may be tensioned automatically by the proactive occupant protection system in critical situations, for example during an emergency stop or in the event of oversteering or understeering. Both seat belts are slackened again if the accident does not happen, or when the critical situation has passed. The proactive occupant protection system is ready to be triggered again . Belt tensioner The seat belts for the front seat vehicle occupants (and, depending on the vehicle equipment, on the rear outer seats) are equipped with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors and tighten the seat belts during severe frontal, side and rear collisions and also possibly vehicle rollovers. Any slack in the seat belt is tightened. This can reduce the forward movement of the vehicle occupants and their movement in the direction of the impact. The belt tensioner works together with the airbag system. If the vehicle rolls over, the belt tensioner will only be activated if the curtain airbags are triggered. A fine dust may be produced when the airbags are triggered. This is quite normal and does not mean that there is a fire in the vehicle. WARNING The protective function of the belt tensioners permits only one activation of the belt tensioners. The system must be replaced if the belt tensioners have been triggered. ● Belt tensioners that have been triggered, and any affected system parts, must be replaced immediately with new parts that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Correspondingly qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never install recycled belt tensioner components or components that have been taken from end-of-life vehicles in your vehicle. ● Never modify any components of the belt tensioners. Reversible belt tensioning (proactive occupant protection system) Reversible belt tensioning may trigger in certain driving situations . Examples include: —Strong braking. —Oversteer or understeer. —Minor collisions. The reversible belt tensioners may remain continuously tensioned after certain driving situations. In this case, the seat belts must be manually unfastened when the vehicle is stationary and then fastened correctly again in order to release the belt tensioning. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 63 Belt tension limiter The seat belts for the front seat vehicle occupants and on the rear outer seats are equipped with belt tension limiters. The belt tension limiter reduces the pressure exerted by the seat belt on the body during an accident. Observe all safety requirements when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. These (→ Belt tensioner) requirements are known to the correspondingly qualified workshops . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Service and disposal of belt tensioners Seat belts may become damaged during work on the belt tensioners or while removing or installing vehicle parts in conjunction with other repair work. This damage will not always be noticeable. The consequence may be that the belt tensioners could function incorrectly, or not function at all, in the event of an accident. Regulations must be observed to ensure that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution. These requirements are known to the correspondingly qualified workshops. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The risk of severe or fatal injuries may be increased if the seat belts, automatic belt retractors and belt tensioners are not used correctly, or if they are repaired by a non-professional. As a result, the belt tensioners may not be triggered when they should, or they may be triggered unexpectedly. ● Never carry out any repairs, adjustments or removal and refitting of parts in the belt tensioners or seat belts by yourself, and have such work carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Seat belts, belt tensioners and automatic belt retractors cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. The airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements for disposal. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 64: Speed Range

    Introduction to the topic The proactive occupant protection system is an assistance system that initiates action to protect vehicle occupants in dangerous situations. However, the system cannot prevent a collision. Speed range The basic function of the proactive occupant protection system is available when driving forwards at speeds from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph). WARNING The proactive occupant protection system cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. The proactive occupant protection system cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. (→ Proactive occupant protection system) ● Observe the system limits ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 65: Basic Functions

    Functions of the proactive occupant protection system Basic functions The following functions may be triggered individually or together in critical driving situations, e.g. in the event of emergency braking, understeer and oversteer or minor collisions: —Reversible belt tensioning of the fastened driver and front passenger seat belts. —Automatic closing of the glass roof and side windows down to a gap, depending on the vehicle equipment. The belts may be tensioned individually or together depending on the respective critical driving situations. Additional functions for vehicles with Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) For vehicles with Autonomous Emergency Braking ( Front Assist), the system limits also include calculation of the probability of a rear-end collision with the vehicle in front. If the system detects that a rear-end collision is likely, or initiates severe braking, it can trigger the proactive occupant protection system. Setting in driving profile selection In vehicles with driving profile selection, the proactive occupant protection system is adapted to the special vehicle setup of the respective driving profile. Settings in the Infotainment system Depending on the vehicle equipment, settings for the proactive occupant protection system with the full range of functions can be made in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. The proactive occupant protection system will be reactivated every time the ignition is switched on. It may not be possible to operate the setting function if the proactive occupant protection system has already been adapted to the specific vehicle setup. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 66 Limits of the proactive occupant protection system The availability of the proactive occupant protection system depends on country-specific legal regulations and the vehicle equipment. The proactive occupant protection system will not be available, or will only be available to a limited extent, in the following situations: —Malfunction of the ESC , reversible belt tensioners or airbag control unit . —TCS deactivated or ESC restricted . —Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) is restricted or has a system fault. —Reverse gear is engaged. —In the case of reflective objects, e.g. crash barriers, tunnel entrances, heavy rain or icing-up. —In the case of animals or objects that are difficult to detect. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 67 Troubleshooting A message is shown briefly on the instrument cluster display. —The proactive occupant protection system functions are restricted or the system is not available. Switch off and restart the engine. —If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the proactive occupant protection system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. (→ Vehicle Depending on the malfunction, additional information may be displayed in the vehicle status settings menu) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 68 —In the case of a rear-end collision. —When the vehicle rolls over. —In the case of low-speed collisions. A triggered airbag may cause injuries, such as swelling, bruising, burning and grazing. WARNING The risk of injury increases if there are any objects between the vehicle occupants and the deployment zones of the airbags when they are triggered as these objects will change the airbag deployment zone. The objects could enter the deployment zone of the airbags during sudden braking or driving manoeuvres or in the event of accidents and then be flung dangerously through the vehicle interior if the airbags are triggered. ● Never hold any objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never transport any objects on the front passenger seat. WARNING Airbags no longer work effectively after being triggered and must be replaced. Without the protection offered by airbags, the risk of injury increases in the event of sudden braking or driving manoeuvres or accidents. ● Airbags that have been triggered, and any affected system parts, must be replaced immediately with new parts that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Correspondingly qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never install recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-of-life vehicles in your vehicle. ● Never alter components of the airbag system. WARNING Fine dust particles or steam may be released when the airbags are triggered. This is normal and does not mean that there is a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can cause irritation to the skin and eye membranes and cause breathing difficulties, particularly for people suffering from asthma or people who have (had) other respiratory problems. ● To help reduce breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle or open the windows or doors for more fresh air. ● If you come into contact with the dust, you should wash your hands and face with a mild soap and water before eating. ● Rinse out your eyes and any open wounds with water if dust has got into them. WARNING Cleaning agents that contain solvents will cause the surface in the area of the airbag fitting locations to become porous. In an accident that results in triggering of the airbags, loose plastic parts can be propelled through the...

  • Page 69: Indicator Lamp

    Indicator lamp Functional check The yellow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up briefly as a functional check when the ignition is switched on and goes out after a few seconds. Fault in airbag or belt tensioner system The yellow indicator lamp lights up continuously. In addition, a message may be displayed in the instrument cluster. A malfunction has been detected in at least one airbag or belt tensioner. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop and have the airbag and belt tensioner system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Airbag system or belt tensioner system switched off with diagnostic tool The yellow indicator lamp lights up for around 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on and then flashes for around 12 seconds. In addition, a message may be displayed in the instrument cluster. At least one airbag or belt tensioner was switched off with a diagnostic tool. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop and have a check carried out to establish whether the airbag or belt tensioner system must remain switched off. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 70 Once triggered, an airbag inflates in milliseconds at very high speed. This could cause objects to be flung through the vehicle interior. This can cause serious injuries. ● Always leave the deployment zones of the airbags clear. ● Never secure any items to the covers or in the deployment zones of the airbags. ● Do not stick anything on or cover the locations of the airbags or the surfaces in the deployment zones of the airbags or modify these components in any way. ● No other people, animals or objects may be carried between the occupants and the airbag deployment zones. Ensure that children and other passengers in the vehicle also keep to this rule. ● Do not attach any objects, e.g. mobile navigation devices, to the windscreen above the front airbag on the front passenger side. ● Only push the sun visors over to the side windows if no items are attached to the visors (e.g. pens or a garage door opener). ● Do not install any sun blinds onto the side windows unless they have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. ● The coat hooks in the vehicle should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. ● Do not fit any accessories to the doors. WARNING Incorrect use of the seats could hinder the proper function of the airbags and cause serious injury. ● Never remove the front seats from the vehicle or alter any components of these seats. ● Do not exert excessive force on the seat backrest bolsters. ● Do not fit seat covers or protective covers over the seats unless they have been expressly approved for use in the vehicle. ● Have any damage to the seat covers or around the seams of the airbags repaired immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 71: Front Airbags

    Front airbags Fig. 1 On the driver side: location and deployment zone of the driver front airbag. Fig. 2 On the front passenger side: location and deployment zone of the front passenger front airbag. WARNING An incorrect seat position could hinder the proper function of the front airbag and cause serious injury. ● Always hold the steering wheel with both hands at the sides on the rim in the nine o’clock and three o’clock positions while driving. ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm (approximately 10 inches) between the driver’s rib cage and the hub of the steering wheel. If your build makes it impossible to fulfil this requirement, then you must contact a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that the distance between the passenger and the dash panel is as large as possible. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 72 Switching the front passenger front airbag on and off Fig. 1 In the dash panel on the front passenger side: key- operated switch for switching the front airbag on the front passenger side on and off. The front passenger front airbag must be switched off if you fit a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. (→ Child seats) Observe the country-specific specifications for use of child seats on the front passenger seat Switch off of the front passenger front airbag is not available in all countries. If there is no key-operated switch in the vehicle, the front passenger front airbag can only be deactivated by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Front passenger front airbag switched on Fig. 2 In the centre console: indicator lamp for activated front passenger front airbag (depending on country). The yellow indicator lamp for the switched on front passenger front airbag lights up for around 60 seconds after the ignition has been switched on or after switching on the front passenger front airbag → Fig. 2 with the key-operated switch and then switches off again automatically. The front passenger front airbag has been switched on. 1. Check whether the front passenger front airbag must remain switched on. Front passenger front airbag switched off OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 73 Fig. 3 In the centre console: indicator lamp for deactivated front passenger front airbag (depending on country). → Fig. 3 The yellow indicator lamp lights up continuously . The front passenger front airbag has been switched off. 1. Check whether the front passenger front airbag must remain switched off, e.g. when using a child seat on the front passenger seat. Switch on the front passenger front airbag 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Open the door on the front passenger side. 3. Fold the key bit of the vehicle key all the way out. Or: remove the emergency key from the vehicle key . 4. Insert the key bit into the key-operated switch until you feel the second point of resistance → Fig. 1 The key bit is not fully inserted when doing this → 5. Turn the vehicle key or emergency key without using force to the position → 6. Remove the vehicle key from the key-operated switch and fold away the key bit → Or: remove the emergency key from the key-operated switch and insert it back into the vehicle key 7. Close the door on the front passenger side. The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp lights up and goes out after approximately 60 seconds (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) indicator lamp does n ot light up when the ignition is switched 8. Check that the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) Switching off the front passenger front airbag 1. Switch off the ignition.
  • Page 74 (→ Child seats) DANGER If the airbag is deactivated, people on the front passenger seat may be severely or fatally injured in the event of an accident. For this reason, the front passenger front airbag must be deactivated only in special cases. ● Switch the front passenger front airbag off only if, in exceptional circumstances, a rear-facing child seat is secured on the front passenger seat. As soon as the rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat is no longer being used, switch the front passenger front airbag on again. ● Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag if, in exceptional circumstances, the front passenger seat backrest is folded forwards (depending on the vehicle equipment). Reactivate the front passenger front airbag as soon as the front passenger seat backrest is folded back again. ● To prevent damage to the airbag system, switch the front passenger front airbag on and off only when the ignition is switched off. ● As the driver, always make sure that the key-operated switch is in the correct position. WARNING If there is a fault in the airbag system, the airbag may not trigger correctly, may not trigger at all or may trigger unexpectedly. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● In the event of a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● If there is a fault in the airbag system, never install a child seat on the front passenger seat and remove any child seats that are installed. WARNING If the vehicle key or emergency key remains inserted in the key-operated switch while the vehicle is moving, vibrations may cause the vehicle key or emergency key to turn in the key-operated switch and activate the front passenger front airbag unintentionally. The front passenger front airbag could then accidentally inflate, leading to serious or fatal injuries. ● Always remove the vehicle key or manual key from the key-operated switch before you switch on the ignition. NOTICE If the key bit is not inserted far enough, the key switch could be damaged when the key is turned. ● Insert the key bit into the key-operated switch up to the second point of resistance. NOTICE If the vehicle key or emergency key are inserted in the key-operated switch, this could result in damage to the door OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 75: Side Airbags

    trim, dash panel, key-operated switch and vehicle key or emergency key when the front passenger door is closed. ● Always remove the vehicle key or manual key from the key-operated switch before you close the front passenger door. Side airbags Fig. 1 On the side of the two front seats: location and deployment zone of the side airbag. Fig. 2 In the vehicle interior on both sides of the vehicle: deployment zone of the side airbag at the front. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 76: Curtain Airbags

    Curtain airbags Fig. 1 On both sides of the vehicle: location and deployment zone of the curtain airbag. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 77 Centre airbag Fig. 1 In the inner backrest cushion on the driver seat: location and deployment zone of the centre airbag (depending on vehicle equipment). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 78 Introduction to the topic Using child seats can reduce the risk of injury to the child if there is an accident. Always use child seats when driving with children. Note the following: —Child seats are classified into groups depending on the size, age and weight of the child for which they are designed. —Various securing systems are used to secure child seats in the vehicle. For safety reasons, child seats must always be fitted to the rear seats (→ Child seats) Volkswagen recommends child seats from the Volkswagen range of accessories. These child seats have been developed and approved for use in Volkswagen vehicles. For further information on the child seats from the range of accessories, contact a Volkswagen dealership or visit the Volkswagen website. WARNING Unsecured or inadequately secured children can suffer serious or fatal injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre and in an accident. ● Always transport children younger than 12 years of age or under 150 cm ( about 4 ft 11 in) in height in a suitable child seat while the vehicle is in motion. Regulations in some countries may differ and must be complied with. ● Always secure children in the vehicle in a suitable child seat. The seat used must be appropriate to the child’s height, weight and age. ● Observe the specifications of the child seat manufacturer when installing the child seat in the vehicle and securing the child in the child seat. ● Never fasten more than one child into one child seat. ● Under no circumstances should children or babies be held in a passenger’s or drivers lap while driving. ● Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat. ● Never allow a child to be carried in a vehicle without being properly secured, and never allow a child to stand up or to kneel on a seat, or to sit incorrectly while the car is in motion. This is particularly important for children carried on the front passenger seat. In an accident, children may sustain serious injuries to themselves and others. ● The child seat can only provide maximum protection if the seat belt is routed correctly around it. Always ensure that the seat belt is routed as specified in the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer. If the seat...
  • Page 79 E CE approval label may include the following information on the child seat: —Weight class. —Size class. —Approval category (universal, semi-universal, vehicle-specific or i-Size). —Approval number. On child seats that are approved under regulation E CE R 44, the eight-digit approval number on the ECE approval label must begin with 03 or 04. This shows that the seat is admissible for use. Older child seats with an approval number beginning with 01 or 02 are not admissible. Child seat weight classes Fig. 1 Example illustrations of child seats. Class Child’s weight Group 0 up to 10 kg Group 0+ up to 13 kg Group 1 9 to 18 kg Group 2 15 to 25 kg Group 3 22 to 36 kg → Fig. 1 are the best option for the period from —Weight class 0/0+: group 0/0+ or 0/1 rear-facing infant carriers birth to about 18 months. —Weight class 1: group 1 (up to about 4 years old) and group 1/2 (up to about 7 years old) with an integral belt system are the best for children over the relevant weight limit. —Weight classes 2/3: groups 2 and 3 include child seats with a backrest, and booster seats with no backrest. Child seats with a backrest have integrated seat routing and side padding, and so provide better protection than booster seats with no backrest. Volkswagen therefore recommends the use of child seats with a backrest. Group 2 child seats are for children up to the age of about 7, group 3 child seats for children more than around 7 years old. When using a Group 2 child seat or a child seat for children from a height of 100 cm (3 ft 3 in) with backrest, OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 80: Country-Specific Regulations

    additionally use the fourth anchorage point of the child seat, if available, for the seat belt. Please observe the instructions for use of the child seat. Not every child will fit in the child seat specified for their weight group. Likewise, not every seat will fit in every vehicle. Therefore it is vital to check that the child fits properly in their child seat and that the child seat can be securely fastened in the vehicle. Child seat approval categories Child seats can be classified as “universal” (in accordance with regulations ECE -R 44 and ECE-R 129), “semi-universal”, “vehicle-specific” (in accordance with regulation E CE-R 44 in each case) or “i-Size” (in accordance with ECE-R 129). —Universal: child seats with “universal” approval are approved for use in all vehicles. No type list is required. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat must also be secured with a top tether. —Semi-universal: “semi-universal” approval requires other safety devices for attaching the seat ( that require additional testing) in addition to the standard requirements for universal approval. Child seats with “semi- universal” approval come with a type list. The seats should only be used in vehicles that are included on this list. —Vehicle-specific: child seats with vehicle specific approval must have undergone dynamic testing in each model of vehicle for which it is approved. Child seats with “vehicle-specific” approval also come with a type list. —i-Size: child seats classified as “i-Size” must conform to the installation and safety requirements prescribed in regulation ECE R 129. Contact the child seat manufacturer to find out whether child seats are approved for this vehicle, and if so which ones, in accordance with i-Size. Installing and using child seats Country-specific regulations The standards and regulations governing the use of child seats and child seat securing mechanisms differ from country to country. Not all countries allow you to transport children on the front passenger seat. Regulations and legal requirements take precedence over the information given in this owner’s manual. Information on fitting a child seat Observe the following general information when fitting a child seat. This information is relevant whatever child seat securing system is being used. → —Read and follow the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer —Whenever possible, fit the child seat on the rear bench seat behind the front passenger seat so that children can exit the vehicle on the kerb side. —Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural line and is adjusted to the child seat without turning back on itself. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the belt height adjuster. —Deactivate the front passenger front airbag if fitting a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. —When fitting on the front passenger seat, push the front passenger seat back fully and adjust the seat to the highest position. Adjust the backrest to an upright position (→ Front seat, mechanical)
  • Page 81 seat backrest angle so that the child seat lies flush against the backrest. Once it has been installed, if the child seat is touching the head restraint and therefore cannot be positioned flush against the backrest, push the head restraint all the way up, or remove and stow safely in the vehicle . —The settings of the respective seat must no longer be adjusted after correct installation of the child seat. If the seat settings have been adjusted, installation of the child seat must be checked and adapted if necessary. —If a child seat is used on a seat, no functions must be used on this seat, e.g. the massage function or seat heating (→ Seat climate control) Airbag sticker Fig. 1 On the sun visor: airbag label ( illustration). Fig. 2 On the B-pillar: airbag label (illustration). The vehicle may be provided with stickers giving important information about the front passenger front airbag. The information on these stickers may vary from country to country. The stickers may be found: → Fig. 1 —On the driver sun visor and in some cases on the front passenger sun visor → Fig. 2 —On the B-pillar on the front passenger side → It is essential to observe the warning information shown on these stickers before installing a rear-facing child seat Risks involved in carrying children on the front passenger seat If you are using a rear-facing child seat, the front passenger front airbag can cause critical or potentially fatal injuries → when it inflates Rear-facing child seats may be used on the front passenger seat only if the front passenger front airbag has been switched off . A switched off front passenger front airbag is indicated by means of the continuously lit yellow (→ Indicator lamp for standard airbag system) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp in the driver’s field of vision (→ Airbag system) It is not possible to switch off the front passenger front airbag in all countries OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 82 If using a front-facing child seat, do not deactivate the front passenger front airbag. When fitting the child seat, ensure that it is as far away as possible from the front passenger front airbag. The front passenger front airbag can → cause severe injuries when it inflates Some child seats are not suitable for use on the front passenger seat. The child seat must be specially authorised by the manufacturer for use on the front passenger seat in vehicles with front and side airbags. Volkswagen dealerships keep an up-to-date list of authorised child seats. DANGER (→ Airbag system) Observe the important safety instructions for the front passenger front airbag DANGER If you use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, the child sitting in it is at increased risk of sustaining serious or life-threatening injuries or being killed in the event of an accident. ● Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger front airbag is switched ● Deactivate the front passenger front airbag if you want to install a child seat on the front passenger seat. If the front passenger front airbag cannot be deactivated, you must not use rear-facing child seats. ● In order to establish the maximum possible distance from the front passenger front airbag, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust to the highest position. ● When fitting a child seat of the size class C/ISOFIX class R3, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust to a bottom to middle position. ● Move the backrest to the upright position. ● Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural path adapted to the child seat without excessive deviations. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the seat belt height adjuster. ● Only use child seats that have been approved by the child seat manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front and side airbags. WARNING Child seats present a risk of injury if incorrectly installed. ● Always read and follow the installation instructions and warning information provided by the child seat manufacturer. WARNING Using a forward-facing child seat on the front passenger seat presents a risk of injury. ● In order to establish the maximum possible distance from the front passenger front airbag, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust to the highest position.
  • Page 83 (→ Child seat with ISOFIX or i-Size) cushion and the backrest on the outer seat cushions . A top tether or a support foot may sometimes have to be used in addition to the ISOFIX anchor points described above. —Three-point automatic seat belt. It is better to secure child seats using the ISOFIX system, if available, rather than (→ Child seat with seat belt) with a three-point automatic seat belt Additional securing points: —Top tether: this strap at the top of the child seat is routed over the vehicle seat backrest and hooked to an anchor (→ Child seat with top tether) point on the seat backs or in the luggage compartment . Top tether anchor points are marked with an anchor symbol. —Support foot: some child seats are supported by a support foot resting on the floor of the vehicle. This support foot helps prevent the child seat tipping forward in a crash. Child seats with a support foot can only be used on the front passenger seat and the outer rear seats → Recommended child seat securing systems Volkswagen recommends that child seats are secured as follows: —Rear-facing child seat: —ISOFIX/i-Size and top tether. —ISOFIX/i-Size and support foot. —Front-facing child seat in group 1 and i-Size child seat for children up to 105 cm (3 ft 5 in) in height: —ISOFIX/i-Size and top tether. —ISOFIX/i-Size and support foot. —Front-facing child seat in group 2/3 and i-Size child seat for children up to 100 cm (3 ft 3 in) in height: —ISOFIX/i-Size and, if applicable, top tether. —ISOFIX/i-Size and, if applicable, support foot. WARNING Unsecured or inadequately secured children can suffer serious or fatal injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre and in an accident. ● Observe the specifications of the child seat manufacturer when installing the child seat in the vehicle and securing the child in the child seat. WARNING Incorrect use of the support foot can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● Ensure that the support foot is always correctly and safely installed.
  • Page 84 Quick guide to ISOFIX and i-Size installation The identification marking of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorage points is equipment and country dependent. The following table shows the installation options for ISOFIX or i-Size child seats at the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points of the individual seats. Front passenger seat Size Orientation Outer seats Centre seat Front Front class Group of the child on the rear on the rear passenger passenger front /ISOFIX seat bench seat bench seat front airbag airbag class activated deactivated Rear- Group 0: up to 10 kg E/R1 IL-SU IL-SU facing E/R1 Rear- Group 0+: up to 13 kg D/R2 IL-SU IL-SU facing C/R3 D/R2 Rear-...
  • Page 85 Installing child seats with ISOFIX or i-Size The location of the bottom anchor points is indicated by either an ISOFIX or i-Size symbol. Markings identifying the ISOFIX anchorage points for child seats on the seats of the rear bench seat. Markings identifying the i-Size anchor points for child seats on the seats of the rear bench seat and on the front passenger seat. Fig. 1 Fitting a child seat with attachment arms (illustration). (→ Child seats) 1. Observe the instructions 2. Push the attachment arms of the child seat in the direction of the arrow onto the ISOFIX or i-Size anchorages → Fig. 1 . The child seat must click and audibly securely into place. 3. Perform a pull test on both sides of the child seat to make sure that the child seat is properly engaged. If the child seat is fitted with a support foot, the foot must stand firmly on the floor of the vehicle. Securing child seats with the top tether Fig. 1 On the rear of the rear bench seat: top tether anchor points for top tether. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 86 Fig. 2 On the rear of front passenger seat ( country- dependent): attached top tether. Fig. 3 In the backrest of the premium sport seat ( without opening) on the front passenger side: routing for the top tether (illustration). ISOFIX child seats with “universal” approval must be secured with an upper strap ( top tether) in addition to the ISOFIX anchor points. Secure the top tether only at the top tether anchor points provided for this purpose. The anchor points for use with the top tether are marked by a symbol and sometimes also with “TOP TETHER” → Fig. 1 → Fig. 2 Securing the top tether OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 87 Fig. 4 On the rear of the outer seats of the rear bench seat or front passenger seat: attached top tether. (→ Child seats) 1. Observe the instructions 2. Remove the luggage compartment cover if necessary. 3. Position the child seat in the centre of the seat cushion. (→ Child 4. Push the attachment arms on the child seat into the ISOFIX anchor points in the direction of the arrow seat with ISOFIX or i-Size) . The child seat must click and audibly securely into place. 5. If necessary, push the head restraint upwards and route the top tether of the child seat under the head restraint to the rear. Or: remove the head restraint if necessary and route the top tether of the child seat over the backrest to the rear. Applies only to the premium sport seat without opening: Route the top tether over the head restraint → Fig. 3 6. Hook the top tether of the child seat into the corresponding anchor point marked with “Top Tether” → Fig. 4 7. Tighten the top tether so that the child seat is positioned against the upper section of the rear seat backrest. WARNING If the top tether is not secured properly or is not secured at the anchor points provided for this purpose, the child seat can become detached and cause serious injuries. ● Always secure only one top tether of a child seat to one top tether anchor point. ● Secure the top tether only at the top tether anchor points provided for this purpose. Never secure the top tether of a child seat to a fastening ring. WARNING Objects in the rear pockets of the front passenger seat can damage the top tether in the event of an accident. This can result in serious injuries. ●...
  • Page 88 Front passenger seat Child’s Seats on the rear Group Front passenger front Front passenger front airbag weight bench seat airbag activated deactivated up to 10 Group 0 up to Group 0+ 13 kg Rear- 9 to 18 facing Group 1 Front- 9 to 18 facing 15 to Group 2 25 kg 22 to Group 3 36 kg u: universal; x: seat not suitable for securing a child seat of this group. Securing a child seat using the seat belt (→ Child seats) 1. Observe the instructions 2. Set the seat belt height so that the seat belt routing follows a natural line and is adjusted to the child seat without turning back on itself. For rear-facing child seats, use the lowest position of the belt height adjuster. 3. Fasten the seat belt and guide it through the child seat as described in the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is not twisted. 5. Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it audibly engages.
  • Page 89 (→ Emergency equipment) Checklist of what to do in the event of a breakdown To ensure your own safety and that of your passengers, observe the following points in the specified order: 1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from moving traffic and on a suitable surface. Observe all the important → (→ Parking) information on parking 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights (→ Centre console) 3. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle and go to a safe place away from moving traffic, e.g. behind the safety barrier. Observe country-specific regulations on high-visibility waistcoats. 4. Place the warning triangle in position to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. (→ In the engine compartment) 5. Observe safety notes 6. Seek expert assistance if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using the Volkswagen emergency service. When the hazard warning lights are switched on, for example if you are being towed, you can still indicate a change in direction or lane change by operating the turn signal. The hazard warning lights will be interrupted temporarily. (→ Tow-starting or towing) Comply with the important information on towing WARNING Any broken-down vehicle poses a high accident risk for the vehicle occupants and other road users. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. ● Park the car at a safe distance from moving traffic. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ● Never leave other persons alone in the vehicle, particularly children or people requiring assistance. This applies in particular when the doors are locked. People locked in the vehicle may be subjected to very high or very low temperatures. WARNING The components of the exhaust system become very hot. This can cause fires and serious injuries.

  • Page 90: Emergency Equipment

    Checklist of what to do after an accident To ensure your own safety and that of your passengers in an accident, observe the following actions in the specified order: 1. Switch off the ignition. (→ Centre console) 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights 3. Place the warning triangle in position to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 4. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle and go to a safe place away from moving traffic, e.g. behind the safety barrier. Administer first aid and observe country-specific regulations on high-visibility waistcoats. 5. Report the accident to the fire service. 6. Wait for the emergency services at the scene of the accident. Switch on the hazard warning lights, e.g. in the following situations: —When traffic ahead suddenly slows down or you reach the tail end of a traffic jam to warn vehicles behind you. —When there is an emergency. —If the vehicle breaks down. —When tow-starting or towing. Always follow local regulations for the use of the hazard warning lights. If the hazard warning lights are not working, you must use an alternative method of drawing attention to the broken- down vehicle. This method must comply with traffic legislation. The 12-volt vehicle battery will discharge if the hazard warning lights are left on over a long period of time – even when the ignition is switched off. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the brake lights flash in quick succession if you brake sharply or initiate full braking at a speed of more than 80 km/h (about 50 mph). This provides an especially conspicuous warning for the following traffic. If you then continue to brake, the hazard warning lights will be switched on automatically at speeds under approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). Once the vehicle starts to accelerate, the hazard warning lights will switch off again. Emergency equipment First-aid kit Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the first-aid kit may be located in a stowage compartment or a holder in the luggage compartment, under the luggage compartment floor or in the vehicle interior. The first-aid kit must comply with legal requirements. —Observe the expiry dates of the contents. —After use, renew contents if necessary and stow the first-aid kit safely again. Warning triangle OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 91: Fire Extinguisher

    Fig. 1 In the boot lid: holder for the warning triangle. Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the warning triangle may be located in the boot lid. → Fig. 1 1. With the boot lid open, turn the lock on the holder 90° anticlockwise. 2. Open the holder and remove the warning triangle storage box. 3. After use, stow the warning triangle back in the storage box and place the storage box into the holder and lock it into place. The warning triangle must comply with legal requirements. High-visibility waistcoat Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the high-visibility waistcoat may be located in a stowage (→ Driver door) (→ Front passenger side) compartment in the front door trim or in the glove compartment The high-visibility waistcoat must comply with legal requirements. Fire extinguisher Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, a fire extinguisher may be located in a holder in the footwell under the front passenger seat. The fire extinguisher must meet legal requirements, be ready for use at all times and be checked on a regular basis (see seal of approval on the fire extinguisher) . WARNING In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident, loose objects could be flung though the vehicle and cause severe injuries. ● Always secure the first aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguisher safely in the holders provided in the vehicle. ● Stow the high-visibility waistcoat in a stowage compartment where it can be easily reached. Information call, breakdown call and Emergency Call Service OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 92: Information Call

    Fig. 1 In the roof console: control for voice services and indicator lamp. Information Call. Breakdown Call. Emergency Call Service. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, voice services can be performed by means of the control in the → Fig. 1 roof console , , . If the Emergency Call Service is available in the vehicle’s service portfolio, the Emergency Call Service is activated as standard for a limited period of time. The required connection is established by a factory- fitted control unit. Please also observe the additional information on mobile online services Indicator lamp for the Emergency Call Service The control is equipped with an indicator lamp → Fig. 1 (arrow). Depending on the operational status of the Emergency Call Service in the vehicle, the indicator lamp lights up in different colours and light sequences: Indicator lamp does not light up: Emergency Call Service is deactivated or not available. Indicator lamp flashes red after the ignition is switched on: system error. Emergency Call Service is deactivated. Indicator lamp lights up red continuously: system error. Emergency Call Service is restricted or not available. Indicator lamp lights up green: Emergency Call Service is available, system is ready for operation in the vehicle. Indicator lamp flashes green: active connection to a voice service. Information Call —The Information Call enables you to call Volkswagen Customer Care. —The Information Call function is available only in some sales regions. —The person who takes your call will talk to you in the language of the country in which the vehicle is registered for the mobile online services or in the language of the country for which the vehicle was produced. —The Information Call can be made when the vehicle ignition is switched on. —The Information Call can be made manually via the touch panel in the roof console or, depending on vehicle, via the function button in the telephone menu of the Infotainment system. Breakdown Call —The Breakdown Call function allows you to seek professional assistance should your vehicle break down. —Some vehicle data, e.g. the current location, is transmitted parallel to the voice call. —The person who takes your call will talk to you in the language of the country in which the vehicle is registered for the mobile online services or in the language of the country for which the vehicle was produced. —The Breakdown Call can be made when the vehicle ignition is switched on. —The Breakdown Call can be made manually via the touch panel in the roof console or, depending on vehicle, via the function button in the telephone menu of the Infotainment system. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 93: Emergency Call Service

    Emergency Call Service —The Emergency Call Service enables help to be organised as quickly as possible in dangerous situations. —When the Emergency Call Service is triggered, a connection to the Volkswagen emergency call centre is established. —If an emergency call is placed manually, or automatically after an accident where an airbag or the belt tensioners were triggered, data relevant for the emergency call, e.g. the current vehicle location, will be transmitted automatically . —The person who takes your call will talk to you in the language set up in the vehicle’s Infotainment system. English is used if this language is not available at the location of the emergency. —Additional factory-fitted components are installed in order to ensure that the function is still possible even after a serious accident, e.g. emergency call microphone, emergency loudspeaker and an integrated battery that is independent of the vehicle electrical system. —The Emergency Call Service can be permanently deactivated by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —If the legally required eCall Emergency System is present in the vehicle, the Emergency Call Service can be deactivated in the Infotainment system. If present in the vehicle, the legally required eCall Emergency System (→ Manage services) cannot be switched off and cannot be deactivated WARNING The following conditions may limit or prevent the execution of a manual or automatic emergency call: ● Your current emergency call location is in an area with no or insufficient mobile communications and satellite signal reception. ● The mobile communications network of telecommunication providers is not available in areas with sufficient mobile communications and satellite reception. ● In spite of sufficient mobile communications and satellite signal reception, there is no 2G/3G mobile network of the telecommunication providers in some regions. In this case, the emergency call reverts to the legally required eCall Emergency System, if present in the vehicle. If the legally required e Call Emergency System is not present in the vehicle, calls will be forwarded to the emergency call number 112. ● In spite of sufficient mobile communications and satellite signal reception, there is no 3G mobile network of the telecommunication providers in some regions. This can lead to a delay of up to 60 seconds when setting up the connection for the Emergency Call Service. In order to permit connection setup without a delay, the Emergency Call Service can be deactivated in the Infotainment system if the legally required eCall Emergency System is present in the vehicle. The legally required eCall Emergency System is available without any delay after deactivation of the Emergency Call Service.

  • Page 94: Integrated Battery

    If you have accidentally pressed the emergency call button, cancel the emergency call immediately. 1. Press the emergency call button again until the indicator lamp lights up green continuously. → Fig. 1 Press the button for the legally required eCall Emergency System , only in an emergency. Automatic emergency call An automatic emergency call is initiated only when the ignition is switched on. A connection to the Volkswagen emergency call centre is set up automatically in the following situations: —Immediately after the airbags are triggered. —Immediately after the belt tensioners are triggered. The automatic emergency call cannot be cancelled by pressing the button for the legally required eCall Emergency → Fig. 1 System If queries from the Volkswagen emergency call centre remain unanswered, rescue measures are automatically initiated. Integrated battery The integrated battery ensures that the emergency call service remains available for some time if the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected or faulty. A corresponding message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display if the integrated battery is discharged or faulty. If this message is displayed, immediately go to a suitably qualified workshop and have the integrated battery replaced. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Have the integrated battery checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop after about 3 years and replaced if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Data transmission In the event of an emergency call, the available data is transmitted to the Volkswagen emergency call centre to determine the necessary rescue measures. The data on the vehicle location is continuously overwritten so that only the last ten stored locations required for correct functioning of the Emergency Call Service are available. The vehicle is therefore not permanently tracked. The data relating to the emergency call is processed exclusively in order to ensure correct functioning of the Emergency Call Service. The data related to the emergency call is automatically deleted from the system 13 hours after the emergency call was triggered. The following data is transmitted: —Current position of the vehicle when the emergency call was triggered. —Nine other positions shortly before the emergency call was triggered ( route driven, a few km (a few miles).

  • Page 95: Troubleshooting

    —Language selected in the Infotainment system. —Optional data ID. You can apply to view and delete the transmitted data by contacting the Volkswagen emergency call centre. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, data transmission can be influenced by the privacy settings . The Emergency Call Service function can be guaranteed only if data transmission is fully possible. The function of the Emergency Call Service may be restricted if Infotainment systems have been retrofitted. Reverting to the legally required eCall Emergency System In some situations, the Emergency Call Service may be restricted or unavailable. If the legally required eCall Emergency System is present in the vehicle, a voice connection will be established to a public emergency call centre if possible. In this case, the available data is transmitted to the public emergency call centre in order to determine the necessary rescue measures . It is possible to see whether the legally required e Call Emergency System is present in the vehicle in the Manage services area on the Infotainment system (→ Manage services) Back-up to 112 emergency number In some situations, the Emergency Call Service may be restricted or unavailable. If the legally required eCall Emergency System is not present in the vehicle, emergency calls will be made to the general emergency call number 112 if possible. In this case, only a voice-based connection is established. No data will be transmitted, e.g. regarding the vehicle or its location. Troubleshooting Emergency Call Service is faulty The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Error: Emergency call function. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. There is a system fault in the Emergency Call Service. It may not be possible to make an emergency call. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Emergency Call Service is restricted The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Emergency call function restricted. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. The availability of the Emergency Call Service function is restricted. It is not possible to establish a voice connection to the Volkswagen emergency call centre, for example. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 96 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Legally required eCall Emergency System Fig. 1 In the roof console: control for legally required eCall Emergency System and indicator lamp. Information Call. Breakdown Call. Legally required eCall Emergency System. Depending on the equipment and country, the vehicle may be equipped with an emergency call system. In some countries, the free legally required eCall Emergency System is activated as standard. The control unit is in the roof console. The emergency call function enables help to be organised as quickly as possible in dangerous situations. A voice connection is established with a public emergency call centre. The person who takes your call will talk to you in the language of the country in which the vehicle is located. In addition, legally required data relevant for the emergency call is transmitted automatically to the public emergency call centre, such as the current vehicle position. The legal basis for data processing by the legally required eCall Emergency System corresponds to the country- specific legislation such as the EU Regulation 2015/758. Please also observe the information on data storage and (→ Data processing in the vehicle) services The required connection is established by a factory-fitted control unit. Additional factory-fitted components are installed in order to ensure that the function is still possible even after a serious accident, e.g. emergency call microphone, emergency loudspeaker and an integrated battery that is independent of the vehicle electrical system. Indicator lamp for the legally required eCall Emergency System → Fig. 1 The control is equipped with an indicator lamp (arrow). Depending on the operational status of the emergency call system in the vehicle, the indicator lamp lights up in different colours and light sequences: Indicator lamp does not light up: emergency call is not available. Indicator lamp flashes red after the ignition is switched on: emergency call is deactivated. Indicator lamp lights up red continuously: system error. Emergency call is restricted or not available. Indicator lamp lights up green: emergency call is available, system is ready for operation in the vehicle. Indicator lamp flashes green: emergency call is active. WARNING The following conditions may limit or prevent the execution of a manual or automatic emergency call: OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 97 1. If fitted, briefly press on the button cover and fold the button cover down. → Fig. 1 2. Press the button for the legally required eCall Emergency System until the indicator lamp flashes green. The emergency call is now initiated and a voice connection is established to the public emergency call centre. If you have accidentally pressed the emergency call button, cancel the emergency call immediately. 1. Press the emergency call button again until the indicator lamp lights up green continuously. Press the button for the legally required eCall Emergency System → Fig. 1 only in an emergency. Automatic emergency call An automatic emergency call is initiated only when the ignition is switched on. A connection to the public emergency call centre is set up automatically in the following situations: —Immediately after the airbags are triggered. —Immediately after the belt tensioners are triggered. The automatic emergency call cannot be cancelled by pressing the button for the legally required eCall Emergency System → Fig. 1 Rescue measures will be initiated automatically if there is no response to questions from the public emergency call centre. Integrated battery The integrated battery ensures that the legally required e Call Emergency System remains available for some time if the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected or faulty. A corresponding message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display if the integrated battery is discharged or faulty. If this message is displayed, immediately go to a suitably qualified workshop and have the integrated battery replaced. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Have the integrated battery checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop after about 3 years and replaced if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Data transmission In the event of an emergency call, the legally prescribed data is transmitted to the public emergency call centre in order to determine necessary rescue measures. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 98 —Vehicle identification number (VIN). —Type of vehicle drive. —Vehicle type. —Type of trigger (automatic or manual) —Type of call. —Direction in which the vehicle was moving when the emergency call was triggered. —Time of collision. —Reliability of positioning data. —Version of data strings. —Counter of data strings transferred per call. —Determined number of passengers. You can apply to view and delete the transmitted data by contacting the public emergency call centre. The function of the legally required e Call Emergency System may be restricted if Infotainment systems have been retrofitted. Troubleshooting Fault in legally required eCall Emergency System The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Error: Emergency call function. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. There is a system fault in the legally required e Call Emergency System. It may not be possible to make an emergency call. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Legally required eCall Emergency System restricted The indicator lamp in the emergency call button lights up red continuously . In addition, the message Emergency call function restricted. Please visit workshop. may be displayed in the instrument cluster display. The function of the legally required e Call Emergency System is restricted. It is not possible to establish a voice connection to the public emergency call centre, for example. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 99 Functions of the vehicle key Fig. 1 Vehicle key. 1 Unlock the vehicle. All turn signals flash twice. 2 Unlock only the boot lid. All turn signals flash twice. 3 Lock the vehicle. All turn signals flash once. 4 Fold the key bit in and out. 5 Indicator lamp: flashes when button is pressed. WARNING If the vehicle key is left unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorised persons could lock the doors and the boot lid, start the engine or switch on the ignition and thus operate electrical equipment, such as the electric windows. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. WARNING If children, people requiring assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, they could accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be exposed to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. NOTICE External influences can restrict the vehicle key functions and damage the key. ● Protect the key from moisture and excessive vibration. The service life of the button cell in the vehicle key will be shortened by regular use of convenience systems and other use behaviour. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 100 Changing the button cell Volkswagen recommends having the button cell replaced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership → Vehicle key with key bit Fig. 1 Vehicle key: replacing the button cell (illustration). 1 Cover. 2 Button cell. 1. Fold out the key bit. → Fig. 1 1 2. Prise off the cover → Fig. 1 2 3. Lever the button cell out of the battery compartment → 4. Press the new button cell into the battery compartment. → Fig. 1 1 5. Press the cover onto the housing → 6. Dispose of discharged batteries in an environmentally responsible way. DANGER If button cell batteries are swallowed or get into the wind pipe, this will lead to serious or even fatal injuries due to suffocation or internal burns within a very short space of time. ● Call for medical help immediately if you suspect that someone has swallowed a button cell battery. ● Always keep the vehicle key and key fob with button cells out of the reach of children. NOTICE The vehicle key can be damaged if the button cell is not changed properly or if an unsuitable battery is used.

  • Page 101: Synchronising The Vehicle Key

    The type of batteries used in the remote control of your vehicle key may contain perchlorate. This may require special handling. Please observe all the legal requirements regarding the handling and disposal of (→ Product recycling) these batteries . Volkswagen recommends having this service carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Synchronising the vehicle key If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key, synchronise the vehicle key or replace the button cell (→ Vehicle key) Synchronising the vehicle key 1. Unfold key bit or remove spare key. 2. If necessary, remove the cover of the driver door handle . 3. Press the button on the vehicle key. 4. Unlock the vehicle using the key bit. 5. Open the driver door. (→ Anti-theft alarm) If the vehicle has an anti-theft alarm, this will be triggered immediately 6. Switch on the ignition. The synchronisation process is complete. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 102 Troubleshooting Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked The vehicle key is subject to interference caused by obstacles, adverse weather conditions or other transmitters operating in the same frequency range in the vicinity of the vehicle, e.g. mobile telephones, or due to a weak or flat button cell. The central locking system switches itself off temporarily to protect itself against overloading. 1. Close the driver door. Or: synchronise the vehicle key (→ Vehicle key) Or: change the button cell in the vehicle key (→ Vehicle key) Indicator lamp does not flash If the indicator lamp in the vehicle key does not flash when a button is pressed, the button cell in the vehicle key must be replaced. Additional or replacement vehicle keys can be obtained from a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 103 Introduction to the topic Keyless Access enables the vehicle to be locked and unlocked without active use of the key. For this purpose, a valid vehicle key must be within close range of the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 104: Unlocking The Vehicle

    Unlocking or locking the vehicle with Keyless Access Fig. 1 Keyless Access: operating ranges. Fig. 2 In the door handle: sensors. A Sensor surface on the inside of the driver or passenger door handle. B Sensor surface on the outside of the driver or passenger door handle. Unlocking the vehicle → Fig. 2 A 1. Touch the sensor on the inside of the driver or front passenger door handle Locking the vehicle 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Close driver or front passenger door. → Fig. 2 B 3. Touch the sensor on the outside of the driver or front passenger door handle The vehicle unlocking procedure is confirmed by all the turn signals flashing twice and the locking procedure by all the turn signals flashing once. Locking and unlocking the boot lid When the vehicle is locked, the boot lid will be unlocked automatically if you open it when a vehicle key is located OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 105 within the operating range of the boot lid → Fig. 1 The boot lid is locked automatically after it is closed. If the vehicle is completely unlocked, the boot lid will not lock automatically when closed. Temporarily deactivating the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access Keyless Access can be deactivated temporarily as described below so that the vehicle cannot be unlocked and started due to misuse by unauthorised third parties. 1. Lock the vehicle with the button on the vehicle key. → Fig. 2 B 2. Then touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle once within 5 seconds . Do not put your hand around the door handle when doing this. Keyless Access is now temporarily deactivated. 3. To check deactivation, wait for at least 10 seconds and then pull the door handle again. It should not be possible to open the door. When the vehicle is next unlocked, it can be unlocked only using the vehicle key. The keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access is reactivated the next time the vehicle is unlocked. Operating the convenience functions The electric windows can be closed automatically. The glass roof is also closed in vehicles with a glass roof. → Fig. 2 B 1. Place a finger on the sensor of the driver or front passenger door handle for a few seconds The sensor functions can be set in the V ehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. The unlocking function is deactivated for a few seconds so that you can check that the vehicle has been locked successfully. A vehicle with DSG dual clutch gearbox can be locked only when the parking lock is ® engaged. The entire vehicle will be unlocked if the sensor is touched twice, even if a single door has already been unlocked. Troubleshooting Keyless Access does not work The function of the door handle sensors may be restricted if they become very dirty.
  • Page 106 Automatic deactivation of the sensors The sensors will be deactivated in the following circumstances: —The vehicle is not unlocked or locked for an extended period. —A sensor has been triggered an excessive number of times. Activating sensors again: 1. Unlock the vehicle with the button on the vehicle key. No valid vehicle key recognised The indicator lamp lights up yellow. A text message is additionally shown on the instrument cluster display. The vehicle key is no longer in the vehicle or in the operating range. 1. Do not switch off the ignition. 2. Bring the vehicle key back into the vehicle or the operating range. If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Please note that the sensors in the handles could be activated by a powerful jet of water or steam if a valid remote control key is within the operating range. The windows could open as a result and moisture could enter the vehicle interior. This could lead to the vehicle interior being damaged. ● Never direct the jet of a high-pressure or steam cleaner directly at the sensors in the door handles. If at least one window is open and the sensors in a door handle are continuously activated, all windows will close. If the message Keyless system faulty appears on the instrument cluster display, malfunctions may occur in the Keyless Access system. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Introduction to the topic The doors can be locked manually and, in some cases, also unlocked manually, if the vehicle key or central locking fails, for example. The central locking system enables you to centrally lock and unlock all the doors, the boot lid and the tank flap of the vehicle. The vehicle can be locked if the ignition has been switched off or the driver has switched off the engine before leaving the vehicle. A symbol in the instrument cluster display indicates if one or more doors are not closed properly. Do not drive on! 1. Park the vehicle safely if necessary. 2. Open the door in question and then close it again.
  • Page 107 Any door that is not properly closed could open suddenly while the vehicle is in motion. This could lead to severe or fatal injuries. ● Stop immediately and close the door. ● Make sure that the door is closed properly and that the lock has engaged. The closed door must be flush with the surrounding body panels. WARNING Any door being held open by the door arrester could close unexpectedly in strong winds or if the vehicle is on an uphill slope. This could lead to serious injuries. ● Always hold the door handle firmly when opening and closing doors. WARNING Opening and closing the doors and boot lid without taking due care is dangerous and can cause serious injuries. ● Open or close the doors and boot lid only when there is no-one in their movement path. WARNING The central locking system locks all doors. In the event of an emergency or an accident, locked doors can make it more difficult for persons providing assistance to gain access to the vehicle interior. If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the doors and electric windows cannot be opened from the inside. There is a risk of serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. WARNING All doors can be locked from the inside using the central locking button. This may mean that children, people requiring assistance or animals lock themselves in the vehicle. In an emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle independently or to help themselves. In addition, they could also be exposed to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. NOTICE Removing the caps without taking due care can damage the vehicle. ● When carrying out manual opening or closing, remove parts carefully and fit them again correctly. Locking the vehicle from the inside can prevent accidental opening of the doors and unauthorised persons from entering the vehicle. You can save some settings in the user account in personalisation. Indicator lamp in the driver door The central locking system indicator lamp is located in the driver door. The indicator lamp indicates the status of the central locking system for around 30 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.
  • Page 108 Vehicle without SAFELOCK —The vehicle is locked if the red L ED flashes at long intervals. The LED flashes at slow intervals after around 30 seconds. Points to note If the red LED is lit up continuously, there is a fault in the central locking system or the anti-theft alarm system. Automatic locking and unlocking Depending on the vehicle equipment, the settings for central locking can be made in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. Automatic locking (Auto Lock) The vehicle locks itself automatically at speeds above approximately 15 km/h ( around 9 mph). The indicator lamp in the central locking button will light up yellow when the vehicle is locked. Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock) All vehicle doors and the boot lid are automatically unlocked if one of the following conditions applies: —The vehicle is at a standstill and the vehicle key has been removed. — On vehicles with automatic gearbox: the parking lock is engaged and the ignition is switched off. —Or: the door release lever has been operated. This applies at speeds up to around 15 km/h (9 mph). —Or: in an accident where the airbags have been triggered. Automatic unlocking gives emergency responders access to the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 109: Central Locking Button

    Central locking button Fig. 1 In the driver door: central locking button (illustration). 1 Central locking button. - unlock the vehicle. - lock the vehicle. The central locking button functions with the ignition switched on or off only when all doors are closed. If the vehicle has been locked from outside with the vehicle key, the central locking buttons do not work. Please note the following when using the central locking button to lock the vehicle from inside: —The indicator lamp in the button lights up yellow when all doors are closed and locked. (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The anti-theft alarm will not be activated The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the door release handle. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The unopened doors and boot lid remain locked and cannot be opened from the outside. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 110 Opening and closing the driver door manually Fig. 1 Handle on the driver door: levering off the cover. When manual locking takes place, all doors are locked. With manual unlocking, only the driver door is unlocked. (→ Anti-theft alarm) Observe the information about the anti-theft alarm 1. Place the key bit or spare key on the notch of the driver's door handle from below. 2. Hold your index finger under the key bit. → Fig. 1 3. Lever off the cap with the vehicle key in the direction of the arrow 4. Insert the key bit into the lock cylinder and lock or unlock the vehicle. 5. Pull the door handle and fit the cap again. Things to note when unlocking manually (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The alarm is triggered when the driver door is opened (→ Starting the engine) —An emergency start must be performed after unlocking —Switch on the ignition to switch off the alarm. The electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key. (→ Anti-theft The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key bit alarm) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 111 Manually closing the front passenger door and rear doors Fig. 1 In the front edge of the rear right-hand door: manually locking the vehicle with the vehicle key (illustration). The front passenger door and the rear doors can be locked manually. The anti-theft alarm is not activated in this case (→ Anti-theft alarm) 1. Open the door. 2. Remove the rubber seal from the front edge of the door. 3. Insert the key bit or manual key into the slot and turn → Fig. 1 4. Secure the rubber seal again. 5. Check that the door is locked. 6. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The manually locked door is unlocked again when the vehicle is unlocked or the door is opened from the inside. The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling the door release handle. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 112: Switching The Childproof Lock On And Off

    Childproof lock Fig. 1 Childproof lock: rear left door, rear right door. 1 Childproof lock is switched off. 2 Childproof lock is switched on. The childproof lock is located in the inner door panel of the rear doors. The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened from the inside → When the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. Switching the childproof lock on and off 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the appropriate rear door. → Fig. 1 2. Move the slot to the corresponding position WARNING The door cannot be opened from the inside when the childproof lock is activated. This may mean that people lock themselves in the vehicle. In an emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle independently or to help themselves. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle when the doors are locked. WARNING If children, people requiring assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, they could be exposed to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 113 SAFELOCK Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle may have a SAFELOCK mechanism. The SAFELOCK deactivates the door release levers if the vehicle has been locked. This makes it more difficult to break → into the vehicle. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside Deactivating SAFELOCK The SAFELOCK can be deactivated in one of the following ways: —Press the button on the vehicle key again within 2 seconds. — On vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: Touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle again within 2 seconds . —Switch on the ignition. (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow —Or: deactivate the interior monitoring system and the anti-tow alarm alarm) Depending on the equipment level, temporarily deactivate the interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm in the (→ Interior monitoring system and anti- Vehicle Settings menu in the Infotainment system before locking the vehicle tow alarm) There may be an indication of the activated SAFELOCK in the display of the instrument cluster. The following applies when SAFELOCK is deactivated: —The vehicle can be unlocked and opened from the inside using the door release lever. (→ Anti-theft alarm) —The anti-theft alarm is active (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) —The interior monitoring and anti-tow alarm are deactivated WARNING The doors can no longer be opened from the inside once the SAFELOCK is activated. Careless or unsupervised use of SAFELOCK can lock people in the vehicle interior and cause serious injuries in the event of an emergency. ● Never leave anybody in the vehicle if the vehicle has been locked using the vehicle key. If you unlock the driver door mechanically using the vehicle key, only the driver door is unlocked, and not the whole vehicle. The doors are released (but not unlocked) and the central locking button is activated only when you switch on the ignition. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 114 Troubleshooting Indicator lamp lights up continuously The red LED in the vehicle door flashes at short intervals and then lights up continuously. There is a fault in the locking system. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Turn signals do not flash The turn signals do not flash as confirmation when the vehicle is locked: 1. Check to make sure that all the doors, the boot lid and the bonnet are closed. 2. Close the doors, boot lid or bonnet if they are open. Vehicle locks itself automatically The vehicle locks again automatically after approximately 45 seconds if one of the following conditions applies: —The vehicle was unlocked by remote control, Keyless function or mobile telephone. —The boot lid was not opened. —No door was opened. —The ignition was not switched on. Response when locking the vehicle with a second vehicle key On vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: the vehicle key inside the vehicle is disabled for starting the engine as soon as the vehicle is locked from outside with a second vehicle key. However, an emergency start is possible. 1. To enable the vehicle key inside the vehicle for a normal engine start, press the button on the vehicle key inside the vehicle. Locking the vehicle after airbags have been triggered The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are activated during an accident. Depending on the extent of the damage, the vehicle can be locked after an accident as follows: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Open the driver's door and close it again. 3. Lock the vehicle. NOTICE Please note that the sensors in the handles could be activated by a powerful jet of water or steam if a valid remote control key is within the operating range. The windows could open as a result and moisture could enter the vehicle...

  • Page 115: Anti-Theft Alarm

    It may not be possible to lock or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Access if the 12-volt vehicle battery or button cell in the vehicle key is weak or discharged. The vehicle can be unlocked or locked manually. If there is no valid vehicle key in the vehicle or if it is not detected, a corresponding display will be shown on the instrument cluster display. This may occur if the vehicle key is disrupted by another radio signal or is covered by another item such as an aluminium suitcase. Anti-theft alarm Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the vehicle may have an anti-theft alarm. The anti-theft alarm monitors the doors, bonnet and the boot lid. The anti-theft alarm is automatically activated when the vehicle is locked. If the vehicle is not opened with a valid vehicle key, the anti-theft alarm is triggered and emits acoustic and visual warning signals for up to 5 minutes. When does the system trigger an alarm? —When a door that was unlocked mechanically with the vehicle key is opened. —When the bonnet is opened. —When the boot lid is opened. —If the ignition is switched on using an invalid key. —If the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected. (→ Interior monitoring system and —If there is movement inside the vehicle ( in vehicles with interior monitoring) anti-tow alarm) —If the vehicle is lifted or towed ( vehicles with anti-tow alarm) (→ Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) (→ Interior —If the vehicle is transported on a car ferry or by rail ( vehicles with anti-tow alarm or interior monitoring) monitoring system and anti-tow alarm) —If a device is connected to the diagnostic connection when the anti-theft alarm system is active. Switching off the alarm 1. Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking button on the vehicle key. Or: switch on the ignition using a valid vehicle key. 2. On vehicles with locking and starting system Keyless Access: grip the door handle . The anti-theft alarm will not function correctly if the 12-volt vehicle battery is weak or discharged.
  • Page 116 Interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm Fig. 1 In the roof console: sensors for the interior monitoring system (arrows). In some markets, the vehicle is equipped with interior monitoring and an anti-tow alarm, depending on the vehicle specification. → Fig. 1 The interior monitoring system triggers an alarm if movement is detected in the interior of a locked vehicle The anti-tow alarm will be triggered if the vehicle is lifted. Switching on the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm 1. Close the stowage compartments in the roof console so that the sensors can function. 2. Close the windows, tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof, doors and boot lid. 3. Press the locking button once. The interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm are activated. Temporarily switching off the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm With some equipment levels, the interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm can be switched off temporarily in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Deactivate the interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm in the V ehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. 3. Close all doors and the boot lid. 4. Lock the vehicle using the vehicle key. The interior monitoring and anti-tow alarm are deactivated until the next time the vehicle is locked. We recommend deactivating the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm in the following situations: —If any people or animals are to remain in the vehicle interior for a short period. —If the vehicle is to be loaded onto another vehicle. —If the vehicle is being transported. —If the vehicle is going to be towed with one axle off the ground. —If the vehicle is to be parked in a two-storey garage. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 117 —If the vehicle is to be parked in a car wash. Risk of false alarms for the interior monitoring system Interior monitoring can only work properly if the vehicle is completely closed. Observe the legal requirements. A false alarm can be triggered in the following situations: —If one or more windows or the glass roof are fully or partially open. —If lightweight items such as loose pieces of paper or items hung from the interior mirror are left in the vehicle. —If the vibration alarm of a mobile telephone is switched on. Permanent deactivation of interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm is not possible. If doors or the boot lid are still open when the anti-theft alarm is activated, only the anti-theft alarm is activated. Interior monitoring and the anti-tow alarm are not activated until all doors and the boot lid are closed. SAFELOCK is also deactivated when the interior monitoring system and anti-tow alarm are switched off (→ SAFELOCK) Introduction to the topic The boot lid is unlocked and locked together with the doors. On vehicles with Keyless Access, the boot lid is automatically unlocked upon opening . If single door or vehicle side opening is activated in the opening and closing settings in the Infotainment system, the button on the vehicle key must be pressed twice to release the boot lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access, it is necessary to operate the sensor on the inside of the driver or front passenger door handle twice for this, depending on setting. WARNING Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening or closing of the boot lid can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Open or close the boot lid only when there is no-one in the movement path of the boot lid. ● Always keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Close and lock the boot lid and all doors when the vehicle is not in use. ● Check that the closed boot lid is flush with the surrounding body parts. WARNING Temperatures inside a locked vehicle may be extremely hot or cold depending on the season. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially among small children. ● Ensure that no one remains in the vehicle. ● Never leave children playing unattended in or around the vehicle, especially when the boot lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment and shut the boot lid, thereby trapping themselves inside. WARNING It may not always be apparent that the boot lid is unlocked when a loaded luggage carrier is attached to it. If unlocked, the boot lid may open suddenly while the vehicle is in motion. This can cause serious injuries.

  • Page 118: Opening The Boot Lid

    ● Never open the boot lid if it is covered by a large amount of snow or a load is attached to it, e.g. a luggage carrier. ● Remove the snow or load before opening the boot lid. ● Support the boot lid if necessary or remove the load or snow before opening the boot lid. WARNING If the boot lid is not closed correctly, this can cause the rear window to shatter and lead to serious injuries. ● Never close the boot lid by pressing with your hand on the rear window. NOTICE Incorrect use of the opening mechanism can damage the component and make it impossible to close the boot lid. ● Never use the opening mechanism to hold or fix a load. NOTICE Incorrect use of the boot lid can damage the component and lead to the component being torn off. ● Never use the boot lid to hold or fix a load. Opening and closing the boot lid Fig. 1 In the open boot lid: handle recesses for closing the boot lid Opening the boot lid 1. Press the or button on the vehicle key. 2. Press on the top of the Volkswagen badge and lift up the boot lid. Closing the boot lid → Fig. 1 1. Pull the boot lid downwards by the handle recess in the interior trim with sufficient momentum so that → it engages in the lock The boot lid will also be locked when the doors are locked. A symbol in the instrument cluster display indicates that the boot lid is opened or not properly closed. The boot lid is locked automatically when the vehicle is moving. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 119 Serious injuries can occur if the boot lid is closed incorrectly or without due care and attention. ● When opening the boot lid, make sure the boot lid is moved fully up. ● When closing the boot lid, make sure that no-one has their hands in the direct path of the boot lid as it moves. If the boot lid is not opened within a few minutes after unlocking, it automatically locks again. Troubleshooting Boot lid cannot be opened or closed 1. Check whether the boot lid is blocked by an obstacle. The boot lid can be moved by hand. You will need to use more force than usual. All turn signals flash four times The vehicle key used last is still in the vehicle. 1. Remove the key and lock the vehicle. Boot lid is stiff At outside temperatures around freezing point, the opening mechanism cannot always lift the partially opened boot lid automatically. 1. Guide the boot lid further upwards by hand. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 120: Opening And Closing Windows

    Opening and closing windows Fig. 1 In the driver door: electric window buttons. 1 Open windows: press the button. Close windows: pull the button. 2 Deactivate the electric window buttons in the rear doors: press button. The button is located only in the driver door. The windows can still be operated using the buttons several minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door and front passenger door are not opened. One-touch opening and closing One-touch opening and closing makes it possible to fully open and close the windows. The individual buttons do not have to be held down to do this. — To start one-touch closing, pull the button for the appropriate window up briefly into the second position. — To start one-touch opening, press the button for the appropriate window down briefly into the second position. —To stop the one-touch function, press or pull the button for the appropriate window again. Convenience opening and closing The windows can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key when the ignition is switched off. Depending on country, it may be possible to only open the windows from outside with the vehicle key. 1. Press and hold the locking or unlocking button on the vehicle key. Or: in vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: place your finger on the locking sensor in the door handle for a few seconds until the windows are closed . The vehicle key must also be within the operating range. All turn signals will flash once as confirmation that all the windows have been closed. If the vehicle is equipped with a glass roof, this must also be closed. 2. To interrupt this function, let go of the locking or unlocking button. Or: to interrupt the function, take your finger off the sensor. Settings for convenience opening can be adjusted in the V ehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 121 WARNING When the vehicle is locked, the windows can no longer be opened and this makes it impossible to exit the vehicle interior. In an emergency situation, this can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children or people requiring assistance alone in the vehicle when the vehicle is locked. NOTICE If it starts to rain or snow when the windows are open, this can soak the interior equipment of the vehicle and restrict the functions of the controls or damage them. ● Close all windows if it starts to rain or snow. One-touch opening and closing and the roll-back function will not work if there is a fault in the electric windows. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Convenience opening and closing works only when one-touch opening and closing is activated for all electric windows. Some settings can be saved in the personalization user accounts and thus change automatically when a user account is changed. Electric window roll-back function The roll-back function for the electric windows can reduce the risk of injuries when the windows are closing. If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will immediately open → again 1. Check to see why the window has not closed. 2. Try to close the window again. If the window closing process is interrupted again, the roll-back function will be disabled for a few seconds. If the window still cannot be closed, the window stops where it is. To close the window without the roll-back → function, press the button again within a few seconds Closing windows without roll-back function 1. Attempt to close the window again within a few seconds by holding the button. The roll-back function is deactivated in the process. If the closing procedure takes longer than several seconds, the roll-back function will be reactivated. If it is still stiff or obstructed, the window will stop and open again automatically. 2. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop if the window still cannot be closed. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 122 WARNING Closing the electric windows without the roll-back function can lead to severe injuries. ● Always take care when closing the windows. ● Close windows only when there is no-one in the operating path. ● Please note that the roll-back function does not prevent fingers and parts of the body being trapped against the window frame. The roll-back function is also activated if the convenience closing function on the vehicle key is used to close the windows. Troubleshooting One-touch opening and closing does not work One-touch opening and closing is deactivated if the 12-volt vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged while the windows were not fully closed. The function will have to be reset. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Close all windows and doors. 3. Pull up the button for the window and hold it in this position for a few seconds. 4. Let go of the button, then pull it up again and hold it in this position. One-touch opening and closing is now ready for operation. The one-touch function can be restored for individual windows or for several windows at the same time. Touch panels react differently than expected Moisture, dirt and grease can impede the functioning of the touch panels. 1. Always keep touch panels clean and dry. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 123 Opening and closing the glass roof The term glass roof is used as a standard term for the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof. Fig. 1 In the roof: button for the glass roof. A Closing the tilted glass roof. B Tilting the glass roof. C Opening the glass roof or stopping the one-touch function. D Closing the glass roof or stopping the one-touch function. The button has two positions. First position: fully or partially tilt, open or close the roof. Second position: automatically move the roof to the respective limit position. Press the button again to stop the one-touch function. Tilting the glass roof → Fig. 1 B to the first position. —Manual operation: push button → Fig. 1 B to the second position. — One-touch function: push button Closing the tilted glass roof → Fig. 1 A to the first position. —Manual operation: push button → Fig. 1 A to the second position. — One-touch function: push button Opening the glass roof → Fig. 1 C to the first position. —Manual operation: push button →...
  • Page 124 ● Open or close the glass roof only when there is no-one in the operating path of the roof. ● Please note that the glass roof can still be opened or closed for a short time after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door or front passenger door is not opened. WARNING If the vehicle key is left unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorised persons could lock the vehicle, start the engine or switch on the ignition and operate the glass roof. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. NOTICE If the glass roof is opened or tilted when it is raining or snowing, particularly in conditions with ice and snow, this can lead to damage to the vehicle interior and electrical system. ● At winter temperatures, always clear ice and snow from the vehicle roof before using the glass roof. ● Always close the glass roof when you leave the vehicle or if it starts to rain or snow. NOTICE The glass roof may be damaged if you operate the glass roof when a roof carrier is fitted. ● Always keep the glass roof closed when using a roof carrier. Remove leaves and other loose items from the glass roof guide rails at regular intervals using a vacuum cleaner or by hand. The roll-back function will not work properly if there is a fault with the glass roof. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. You can save some settings in the user account in personalisation. Convenience opening or closing of the glass roof Convenience opening and closing The glass roof can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key: —Not applicable for USA or Canada: Press and hold the locking or unlocking button on the vehicle key. The glass roof is tilted or closed. —On vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access: P lace your finger on the locking sensor in the door handle for a few seconds until the glass roof is closed (→ Keyless Access) —Release the locking or unlocking button to interrupt this function. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 125 Convenience closing closes all windows in the doors and the glass roof. After all windows and the glass roof have been closed, all turn signals will flash once as confirmation. Glass roof settings can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes. Glass roof roll-back function → The roll-back function reduces the risk of crush injuries . If the glass roof is impeded during the closing process, it will open again immediately. 1. Check to see why the glass roof has not closed. 2. Try to close the glass roof again. 3. If the glass roof still cannot be closed, close it without the roll-back function. Closing the glass roof without the roll-back function 1. Push the button to the second position until the glass roof has fully closed . 2. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop if the glass roof still cannot be closed. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. If you let go of the switch during the closing procedure, the glass roof will open automatically. WARNING Closing the glass roof without the roll-back function can cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Always take care when closing the glass roof. ● Close the glass roof only when there is no-one in its operating path, particularly if it is closed without the roll- back function. ● Please note that the roll-back function does not prevent fingers and parts of the body being trapped against the roof frame. The roll-back function is also activated if you use the convenience closing function on the vehicle key to close the windows and the glass roof. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 126 Troubleshooting The glass roof will not close —The glass roof only works when the ignition is switched on. The glass roof can still be opened or closed for a short time after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door or front passenger door is not opened. —If it is not possible to close the glass roof electrically, it must be closed manually. The glass roof cannot be closed manually without removing vehicle components. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Touch panels react differently than expected Moisture, dirt and grease can impede the functioning of the touch panels. 1. Always keep touch panels clean and dry. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 127 Adjusting the steering wheel position mechanically Fig. 1 Below the steering wheel in the steering column trim: lever for mechanical adjustment of the steering wheel position (illustration). Fig. 2 On the steering wheel: 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock position (illustration). → Adjust the steering wheel position before setting off and only when the vehicle is stationary → Fig. 1 1 1. Push down the lever 2. Adjust the steering wheel so that you can hold it with both hands at its outer edge at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock → Fig. 2 positions with your arms slightly bent. → 3. Push the lever up firmly until it is flush with the steering column trim WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel position adjustment and incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can cause serious or fatal injuries. 1 up firmly. This prevents the steering wheel → Fig. 1 ● After adjusting the steering wheel, always move the lever from moving accidentally while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. If you determine that adjustment is necessary when driving, stop the vehicle safely and adjust the steering wheel to the correct position. ● The steering wheel must always point towards the chest and not towards the face. This ensures that the driver front airbag provides maximum protection in the event of an accident. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 128 ● While driving, always keep both hands on the outside of the steering wheel at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock → Fig. 2 positions . This reduces the risk of injury if the driver front airbag is triggered. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner, e.g. at the hub of the steering wheel. If the driver front airbag is triggered, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head. Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting the front seats. Always ensure that your sitting position is correct (→ Sitting position) WARNING Driving with an incorrect seating position caused by wrongly adjusted seats can lead to serious injuries. ● Always adjust the front seats to their correct position before any journey, and ensure that all passengers have fastened their seat belts correctly. ● Push the front passenger seat as far back as possible. WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the seats can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Adjust the seats only when the vehicle is stationary. The seats could change position unexpectedly if you attempt to reposition them while the vehicle is in motion so that you lose of control of the vehicle as a result. Furthermore, an incorrect sitting position is adopted while adjusting the seat. ● Adjust the height and angle of the front seats or move them forwards and backwards only when there is no-one in the adjustment range of the seats. ● The adjustment range of the seats must not be restricted by any items. ● The areas for adjusting and locking the seats must not be soiled. WARNING Any lighters in the vehicle could be damaged or accidentally lit. This could lead to serious burns and other injuries. ● Before adjusting the seats, always make sure that there is no cigarette lighter on or near the movable parts of the seat. NOTICE Sharp edges can damage the seats. ● Do not touch the seats with sharp-edged objects. Sharp objects, such as zips, rivets on clothing or belts, may damage surfaces. Open Velcro fasteners may also cause damage.
  • Page 129 Mechanically adjusting the front seat The following section contains a description of all possible controls. The number of controls may vary depending on the version of the seat. The controls are mirrored for the front passenger seat. Fig. 1 Driver’s seat: controls 1 To adjust the lumbar support, operate the lever. 2 To adjust the seat backrest, relieve the pressure on the backrest and turn the handwheel. Front passenger seat: to adjust the backrest, relieve the pressure on the backrest and operate the lever (depending on equipment). 3 To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down, repeating several times if necessary. 4 To move the front seat forward or back, pull the lever. The front seat must engage after you release the lever! OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 130 Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting the rear seats. Always ensure that your sitting position is correct (→ Sitting position) WARNING Incorrectly adjusted rear seats increase the risk of serious injuries in the event of an accident. ● Before all journeys, make sure that the rear seats are adjusted so that all occupants are sitting upright and with the seat belts fastened correctly. ● The rear seats must be adjusted only when there is no one in the adjustment area of the rear seats. WARNING If you adjust the rear seats while the vehicle is in motion, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. The rear seats may also move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. In an accident, there is then an increased risk of serious injuries. ● Adjust the rear seats only when the vehicle is stationary. WARNING Any lighters in the vehicle could be damaged or accidentally lit. This could lead to serious burns and other injuries. ● Before adjusting the seats, always make sure that there is no cigarette lighter on or near the movable parts of the seat. WARNING Incorrect use of the rear centre armrest can cause serious injuries. ● The rear centre armrest must always be folded up while the vehicle is in motion. ● The centre seat on the rear bench seat must never be used when the centre armrest is folded down – neither by adults nor children. ● Never transport an adult or child on the centre armrest. NOTICE When the rear seat is moved, objects in the luggage compartment can get into the space between the seat and the luggage compartment floor and cause damage. ● Before moving the rear seat, remove all objects that are located in the space between the seat and luggage compartment floor. NOTICE Sharp edges can damage the seats. ● Do not touch the seats with sharp-edged objects. Sharp objects, such as zips, rivets on clothing or belts, may damage surfaces. Open Velcro fasteners may also cause damage.
  • Page 131 Folding the backrest of the rear bench seat forwards and backwards The rear seat backrest is split. Each part of the rear seat backrest can be folded down to increase the size of the luggage compartment. Folding rear seat backrest forwards with the release button Fig. 1 In the rear seat backrest: release button. 1. Push the head restraint all the way down. → Fig. 1 1 2. Pull the release button forwards and fold the rear seat backrest forwards at the same time. → Fig. 1 2 The respective section of the rear seat backrest is unlocked when the red marking is visible. Folding back the rear seat backrest → 1. Fold back the rear seat backrest and push it firmly into the catch until it engages securely into place → Fig. 1 2 The red marking must no longer be visible. WARNING Injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is folded forwards and backwards without due care and attention. ● While folding the rear seat backrest forward, always make sure that no people or animals are in its path. ● Never fold the rear seat backrest forwards or backwards while the vehicle is in motion. ● Ensure that the seat belt is not trapped or damaged when folding back the rear seat backrest. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet or other body parts away from the swivel area when folding the rear seat backrest forwards and backwards. ● Ensure that each rear seat backrest engages securely, otherwise the seat belts for the rear seats will not offer maximum protection. This applies to the centre seat of the rear bench seat in particular. If a seat is occupied and the corresponding rear seat backrest has not clicked securely into place, the seat occupant and rear seat backrest may move forwards in the event of a sudden braking or driving manoeuvre or during accidents. → Fig. 1 2 ●...
  • Page 132 Damage to the vehicle or to other objects could be caused if the rear seat backrest is folded forwards and backwards in an uncontrolled way or without due care. ● Before folding the rear seat backrests forwards, always adjust the front seats so that the rear head restraints or rear seat cushions do not collide with the front seats. ● Before folding down the rear seat backrest, always make sure that there are no objects located in its path. Introduction to the topic The following section describes the options for adjusting and removing the head restraints. Always ensure that your (→ Sitting position) sitting position is correct Every seat is fitted with a head restraint. The head restraints are approved specifically for the respective seat and must not be installed at any other seat in the vehicle. If a seat is occupied, select the correct head restraint setting for the respective head restraint. If a seat is unoccupied, the respective head restraint can be pushed down as far as it will go. The rear centre head restraint ( depending on vehicle equipment) is designed solely for use with the centre seat on the rear bench seat. Therefore you should not install this head restraint in any of the other positions. There are notches in the rods of the head restraints which enable them to engage in different positions. Only correctly mounted head restraints can engage in the notches in the adjustment area. To prevent accidental removal of the head restraints after installation, stops are fitted at the top and bottom of the adjustment area. Correct head restraint adjustment Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but not lower than eye level. Position the back of your head as close to the head restraint as possible. Head restraint adjustment for shorter people Push the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then underneath the top edge of the head restraint. There may be a small gap between the head restraint and backrest in the lowest position. Head restraint adjustment for taller people Push the head restraint up as far as it will go. WARNING Driving without head restraints or with incorrectly adjusted head restraints increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. ● If a seat is occupied, the head restraint for that seat must always be fitted and adjusted correctly. ● If a seat is occupied, adjust the head restraint corresponding to the size of the person sitting on the seat. ● Never adjust the head restraint when the vehicle is in motion. NOTICE If you do not remove and fit the head restraints properly, this can result in damage.

  • Page 133: Adjusting The Height Of The Head Restraint

    Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the height of the head restraint Fig. 1 Adjusting a front head restraint ( illustration). Fig. 2 Adjusting a rear head restraint (illustration). → Fig. 1 1 → Fig. 2 1. While pressing the or button if necessary, push the head restraint up or down in the direction of the arrows. The head restraint must engage securely into position. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 134: Removing And Installing The Head Restraints

    Removing and installing the head restraints Removing the front head restraints Fig. 1 Removing a front head restraint ( illustration). 1. If necessary, lower the head restraint. → Fig. 1 1 2. To release the head restraint, feel for the recess in the marked area on the rear side, press in and hold in the direction of the arrow. → Fig. 1 2 3. Pull the head restraint out in the direction of the arrow Fitting the front head restraints 1. Position the head restraint correctly over the head restraint guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. 2. Push the head restraint down until the guide pins click into place. 3. Adjust the head restraint so a correct sitting position can be assumed. Removing the rear head restraints Fig. 2 Removing a rear head restraint (illustration). OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 135: Centre Armrest

    1. If necessary, adjust the backrest so that the head restraint can be removed. 2. Push the head restraint all the way up. → Fig. 2 1 3. Pull the head restraint out fully while pressing the button Fitting the rear head restraints 1. Release the rear seat backrest and fold the backrest forwards slightly. 2. Position the head restraint correctly over the head restraint guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. → Fig. 2 1 3. Press and hold the button and push down the head restraint. 4. Fold back the rear seat backrest and allow it to engage securely. 5. Adjust the head restraint so a correct sitting position can be assumed. Centre armrest Front centre armrest Fig. 1 Front centre armrest (illustration). —To move it backwards and forwards: push the centre armrest in the direction of the arrow all the way forwards → Fig. 1 or all the way backwards. —To open: pull the centre armrest all the way up. —To close, lower the centre armrest as far down as it will go. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a stowage compartment under the centre armrest. WARNING When fully open or not completely closed, the front centre armrest can restrict the freedom of movement of the driver’s arms and therefore cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Always keep stowage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never transport an adult or child on the centre armrest. An incorrect sitting position can cause serious injury. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 136 Switching turn signals on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. A Indicate right . B Indicate left . Switching turn signals on and off 1. Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 2. Move the lever from the centre position to the required position 3. To switch off the turn signal, move the lever to the basic position. Go to a suitably qualified workshop and have the vehicle checked if the acoustic signal does not sound when a turn signal is switched on. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Convenience turn signal 1. Push the lever up or down to the point where you encounter resistance and then release the lever. The turn signal flashes three times. To cancel the lane change flash, immediately move the lever in the opposite direction up to the pressure point and then release it. The convenience turn signal can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) WARNING Incorrect use of turn signals, a failure to use turn signals, or forgetting to switch off a turn signal can confuse other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always activate the turn signal in good time when changing lanes and performing overtaking or turning manoeuvres. ● Always switch off the turn signal once the lane change or overtaking or turning manoeuvre has been completed. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 137: Switching Lights On And Off

    Switching lights on and off Fig. 1 Next to the steering wheel: light switch ( one variant). Switching lights on 1. Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 2. Turn the light switch to the corresponding position The daytime running lights are switched on. Automatic lighting control: dipped beam is switched on or off depending on the brightness level and the → (→ Automatic lighting control) weather conditions The side lights and daytime running lights are switched on. The symbol in the light switch lights up green. Dipped beam is switched on. Switching off the lights 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Turn the light switch to the corresponding position: The lights are switched off. The orientation lighting can be switched on (→ Orientation lighting) The side lights or continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle are switched on . The symbol in the light switch lights up green. Dipped beam is switched off. Vehicles with ignition lock: the side lights will stay on while the vehicle key is in the ignition lock. Vehicles with starter button: the side lights will stay on while the driver door is closed. Daytime running lights The daytime running lights ( dependent on equipment level) can increase the visibility of your vehicle in traffic during OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 138 the day. The daytime running lights are switched on every time the ignition is switched on when the light switch is in position , or (if brightness is detected). The daytime running lights cannot be switched on or off manually. WARNING If the vehicle lighting is not switched on as appropriate for the weather conditions, the road will not be illuminated sufficiently. Other road users may have difficulty seeing the vehicle or may not see it at all. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always switch on dipped beam when it is dark or raining and in poor visibility. ● Regularly check that all lights and turn signals are working properly. WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. The tail lights will not be switched on with the daytime running lights. The vehicle cannot be seen by other road users in darkness, precipitation and poor visibility without the rear lights switched on. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always switch on dipped beam when it is dark or raining and in poor visibility. WARNING The automatic lighting control only provides support; the driver is responsible for making sure the vehicle lights are switched on correctly. The automatic lighting control function switches the dipped beam headlights on and off only when there is a change in the level of brightness. An insufficiently lit road can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Switch the dipped beam on manually if required by the weather conditions, e.g. in the event of fog. When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering light on both sides of the vehicle switches on to provide better illumination of the surrounding area when manoeuvring. Switching main beam on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. Switch on the main beam. B Operate the headlight flasher or switch off the main beam. When the main beam or headlight flasher is switched on, the blue indicator lamp lights up in the instrument →...
  • Page 139 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Switch on dipped beam. → Fig. 1 A 3. Press the lever forward from the centre position Switching off the main beam → Fig. 1 B 1. Pull the lever to the rear from the centre position Switching the headlight flasher on and off → Fig. 1 B 1. Pull the lever to the rear from the centre position and hold it Release the lever to switch off. Main-beam control (→ Main-beam control (static)) Depending on the vehicle equipment, automatic main-beam control may be available (→ Main-beam control (dynamic)) WARNING Using the main beam incorrectly can distract and dazzle other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Use main beam only if other road users cannot be distracted or dazzled. Main-beam control (Light Assist) Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. Main-beam control (Light Assist) automatically dips the headlights when oncoming vehicles and vehicles driving in front are detected. Light Assist normally also recognises illuminated areas such as towns and deactivates main beam while driving through them. Within the limits of the system, main beam assist automatically switches the main beam on or off depending on the surroundings and traffic conditions and on the driving speed → Switching on Light Assist 1. Switch on the ignition.

  • Page 140: System Limits

    (→ Dipped beam) 2. Switch on automatic lighting control → Fig. 1 A 3. Tap the lever forward from the basic position When Light Assist is switched on, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up. When Light Assist is active, the blue indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Switching off Light Assist (→ Dipped beam) 1. Switch off automatic lighting control → Fig. 1 B Or: if Light Assist is switched on and active, pull the lever back → Fig. 1 A Or: if Light Assist is switched on and not active, tap the lever forward . Manual main beam is now switched on. To switch off the manual main beam again, pull back the lever B . System limits The main beam must be manually switched off under the following conditions, as it is not switched off by Light Assist in time or at all: —In badly lit towns that the system cannot recognise as towns. —In poorly lit streets where there are highly reflective signs. —Other road users with insufficient lighting facilities, such as pedestrians, cyclists. —In the case of crossing traffic at right-angled junctions. —In tight bends, on steep hill crests or in dips in the road or when oncoming traffic is half-hidden. —With oncoming traffic on streets with a central barrier where the driver can see clearly over the central barrier e.g. truck drivers. —In fog, snow or heavy rain. —In conditions where dust or sand has been blown up. —Damage to the windscreen in the camera's field of vision. —If the camera window is covered by condensation, dirt, a sticker, snow or ice. —If the camera is switched off automatically due to a high ambient temperature or prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. When the camera is available again, Lane Assist will also be available once more.
  • Page 141 ● Check the area of the windscreen which is in the camera’s field of view for damage at regular intervals. Advanced main-beam control (Dynamic Light Assist) Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. Advanced main-beam control (Dynamic Light Assist) provides maximum illumination for the road and the edges of the road. At the same time, it prevents vehicles in front or oncoming vehicles from being dazzled. The system uses a camera to detect other self-illuminated road users and their distance from your vehicle and deactivates areas within the light distribution in a targeted manner. If the system can no longer prevent other road users from being dazzled, main beam is switched off completely. Dynamic Light Assist normally also recognises illuminated areas such as towns and deactivates main beam while driving through them. Within the limits of the system, main beam assist automatically switches the main beam on or off depending on the → surroundings and traffic conditions and on the driving speed (→ Vehicle Dynamic Light Assist can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) Switching on Dynamic Light Assist 1. Switch on the ignition. (→ Dipped beam) 2. Switch on automatic lighting control → Fig. 1 A 3. Tap the lever forward from the basic position When Dynamic Light Assist is switched on, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up. When Dynamic Light Assist is active, the blue indicator lamp for main beam lights up in the instrument cluster. Switching off Dynamic Light Assist (→ Dipped beam) 1. Switch off automatic lighting control → Fig. 1 B Or: if Dynamic Light Assist is switched on and active, pull the lever back → Fig. 1 A Or: if Dynamic Light Assist is switched on and not active, tap the lever forward . Manual main beam is now switched on. To switch off the manual main beam again, pull back the lever.

  • Page 142: Troubleshooting

    —If the camera is faulty or the power supply is interrupted. WARNING Dynamic Light Assist may not be able to recognise all driving situations correctly and may not work properly in certain situations. Dynamic Light Assist only provides support; the driver is responsible for making sure the vehicle lights are switched on correctly. Improperly switching on the main beam can distract and dazzle other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always check the lighting yourself and adjust it to suit the light, visibility and traffic conditions. ● Switch off the main beam manually if it may cause dazzle to other road users. WARNING If the camera window is dirty, covered or damaged, the function of Dynamic Light Assist may be impaired. This also applies if changes are made to the vehicle's lighting system, for example if additional headlights are fitted. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Clean the camera window at regular intervals, and keep it free from snow and ice. ● Do not cover the camera window. ● Check the area of the windscreen which is in the camera’s field of view for damage at regular intervals. Troubleshooting Turn signal indicator lamp The indicator lamp flashes green. If a turn signal on the vehicle has failed, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice as fast. (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required 2. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Trailer turn signal indicator lamp (with factory-fitted towing bracket) The indicator lamp flashes green. The indicator lamp goes out if a trailer turn signal or all trailer lights stop working. (→ Exterior lighting) 1. Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required 2. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 143 Exterior drive lighting not working The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Vehicle lighting not working partially or completely. 1. Check the lighting and change the appropriate bulb as required (→ Exterior lighting) 2. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fault in rain and light sensor The indicator lamp lights up yellow. In light switch position , the vehicle lighting is not switched on or off automatically. 1. Switch the ignition off and on. 2. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Switching on and off the fog lights The fog lights can be switched on when the ignition is switched on and when the light switch is in the , side (→ Dipped beam) lights and dipped beam positions Switching on the fog lights 1. Pull the light switch out to the first stop. The indicator lamp in the light switch lights up green. Switching off the fog lights 1. Press in the light switch or turn to position. If the fog lights are switched on while the automatic lighting control is switched on , the dipped beam will also be switched on irrespective of the prevailing light conditions outside. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 144 Switching the rear fog light on and off The rear fog light can be switched on when the ignition is switched on and when the light switch is in the and dipped beam positions (→ Dipped beam) Switching on the rear fog light 1. Pull out the light switch. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the instrument cluster. Switching off the rear fog light 1. Press in the light switch or turn to position. If the rear fog light is switched on while the automatic headlight control is switched on , the dipped beam headlights will also be switched on irrespective of the prevailing light conditions outside. In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket: the vehicle’s rear fog light is not switched on if a trailer with rear fog light is electrically connected to the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 145: Side Lights

    Side lights If the side lights are switched on, both headlights light up with side lights together with parts of the tail light clusters, the number plate lighting and the buttons in the centre console and the dash panel. The daytime running lights also switch on when the ignition is switched on. If the vehicle is not locked from outside when the ignition is switched off and the side lights are switched on, the continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle switches on automatically after around 10 minutes to reduce the load on the 12-volt vehicle battery (→ Parking light) Automatic switch-off of side lights and parking lights The vehicle will detect a weak 12-volt vehicle battery and switch off the side lights or parking lights in good time so that the engine can still be started – however, this will occur after 2 hours at the earliest. If the battery capacity is not sufficient for the side lights or parking light to remain switched on for 2 hours, the 12- → volt vehicle battery can be discharged to such an extent that it is no longer possible to start the engine WARNING Accidents and serious or fatal injuries can occur if the vehicle is parked without sufficient illumination, as other road users might have difficulty seeing the vehicle, or may not see it at all. ● Always park the vehicle safely and with sufficient lighting. ● Observe any applicable country-specific legal requirements. ● Switch on the parking light on the right or left side if possible if illumination of the vehicle for several hours is necessary. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 146 Switching parking lights on and off Fig. 1 On the left-hand side of the steering column: turn signal and main beam lever. A Right-hand parking light is switched on. B Left-hand parking light is switched on. Switching one-sided parking lights on and off When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight with side light and parts of the tail light cluster on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The activation duration of the one-sided parking light is generally twice that of the continuous parking light on both sides. 1. Switch off the ignition. → Fig. 1 2. Move the lever from the centre position to the desired position 3. To switch off the one-sided parking light, move the lever to the basic position. Switching the continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle on and off Both headlights light up with side lights as well as parts of the tail light clusters if continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle is switched on: 1. Switch on the side lights . 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Lock the vehicle from outside. 4. To switch off the continuous parking light on both sides of the vehicle, unlock the vehicle from the outside. Automatic switch-off of side lights and parking lights The vehicle will detect a weak 12-volt vehicle battery and switch off the side lights or parking lights in good time so that the engine can still be started – however, this will occur after 2 hours at the earliest. If the battery capacity is not sufficient for the side lights or parking light to remain switched on for 2 hours, the 12- volt vehicle battery can be discharged to such an extent that it is no longer possible to start the engine → WARNING Accidents and serious or fatal injuries can occur if the vehicle is parked without sufficient illumination, as other road users might have difficulty seeing the vehicle, or may not see it at all.
  • Page 147 ● Observe any applicable country-specific legal requirements. ● Switch on the parking light on the right or left side if possible if illumination of the vehicle for several hours is necessary. Coming Home and Leaving Home function (orientation lighting) The Coming Home and Leaving Home function lights up the area immediately surrounding the vehicle when you get in or out of the vehicle in darkness. Depending on equipment, the vehicle can have an automatic or manual Coming Home function: —Automatic Coming Home function: the Coming Home and Leaving Home functions are controlled automatically by a rain and light sensor. —Manual Coming Home function: the Coming Home function is switched on manually. The Leaving Home function is controlled automatically by a rain and light sensor. The switch-off delay can be set and the function activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment (→ Vehicle settings menu) system Switching on the automatic Coming Home function 1. Switch off the ignition. The Coming Home lighting is switched on when the light switch is in position and the rain and light sensor detects darkness. The switch-off delay starts when the last vehicle door or the boot lid is closed. Switching on the manual Coming Home function 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Operate headlight flasher. The Coming Home lighting is switched on when the driver door is opened. The switch-off delay starts when the last vehicle door or the boot lid has been closed. Switching off the Coming Home function 1. Automatically after the set switch-off delay has elapsed. Or: automatically if a vehicle door or the boot lid is opened approximately 30 seconds after switch-on. Or: switch off the lights. Or: switch on the ignition. Switching on the Leaving Home function 1. Unlock the vehicle when the automatic headlights function is switched on and the rain and light sensor detects darkness.

  • Page 148: Cornering Light

    Or: lock the vehicle. Or: switch off the lights. Or: switch on the ignition. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. Cornering light When dipped beam is switched on, a cornering light is switched on when turning slowly or driving around very tight bends. When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering light on both sides of the vehicle switches on to provide better illumination of the surrounding area when manoeuvring. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 149 Automatic lighting control When the automatic lighting control is switched on, the vehicle lighting and the instrument and switch lighting will switch on under the following conditions: —The light sensor has detected darkness. —The windscreen wipers have been switched on for an extended period. When the lights are switched on, the indicator lamp lights up yellow (→ Dipped beam) The automatic lighting control is merely an aid and will not always be able to detect all driving situations. In vehicles with a corresponding equipment level, the switch-on time of the automatic headlights can be set in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 150: Headlight Range Control

    Headlight range control Fig. 1 Next to the steering wheel: control for headlight range control. 1 Control for headlight range control. Headlight range control can be used to adjust the light cone of the dipped beam headlights to the vehicle load level. → This gives the driver the best visibility possible and means that oncoming traffic will not be dazzled Manual headlight range control → Fig. 1 1 1. Turn the control to the required position ( typical vehicle load level). If you have different loads, you can also select a position between the settings. Front seats occupied and luggage compartment empty. All seats occupied and luggage compartment empty. All seats occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded. Towing a trailer with a low drawbar load. Only the driver seat occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded. Towing a trailer with maximum drawbar load. Dynamic headlight range control Depending on equipment, the dynamic headlight range control automatically adapts the headlight range to suit the vehicle load as soon as the headlights are switched on → . The headlight range cannot be adjusted manually if the vehicle has dynamic headlight range control. WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle can change the vehicle level and cause the headlights dazzle and distract other road users. This could cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always adapt the light cone to the load level of the vehicle to avoid dazzling other road users. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 151 Failure or malfunction in the headlight range control can cause the headlights to dazzle or distract other road users. This could cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have the headlight range control checked by a suitably qualified workshop as soon as possible. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Switching over headlights for driving abroad (travel mode) If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. The headlights must therefore be switched over when you travel to these countries. With some equipment levels, the headlight alignment can be adjusted in the Infotainment system in the Vehicle (→ Vehicle settings menu) settings menu In vehicles in which the headlights cannot be adjusted via the menu, stickers should be applied to certain parts of the headlight lenses, or the headlights should be adjusted by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Travel mode may only be used for a short period. Please contact a suitably qualified workshop if permanent alteration is required. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 152 Acoustic warnings if lights are not switched off When the ignition has been switched off and the driver door is opened, acoustic warnings will sound under the following conditions: —If the parking light is switched on. —If the side lights are switched on. —If the rear fog light is switched on. When the orientation lighting is switched on, no acoustic warning will be given as a reminder that a light is still (→ Orientation lighting) switched on when leaving the vehicle OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 153 Instrument and switch lighting The brightness of the instrument and switch lighting can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) The brightness setting is automatically adjusted to the changing ambient light conditions in the vehicle. When the automatic lighting control is switched on, a sensor automatically detects the ambient brightness level and switches the dipped beam and the lighting in the instruments and switches on and off. When the lights are switched off and the ignition switched on, the instrument and switch lighting (needles and scales) is switched on. As the ambient light becomes lower, the lighting of the scales is automatically reduced and may be switched off entirely. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch on the dipped beam in good time, i.e. when driving through tunnels. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 154: Background Lighting

    Interior and reading lights, background lighting Switching the interior and reading lights on or off The functions and design of the controls in the roof vary depending on the vehicle equipment. Press the corresponding button: Switch off the interior lights. Switch on the interior lights. The interior lights switch on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or left. Function switched off: the interior lights switch on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or left. Switch the reading light on or off. Glove box and luggage compartment lights Depending on equipment, the glove box and luggage compartment may be equipped with lights. The respective light will be switched on or off when the glove box or boot lid is opened or closed. Background lighting Depending on the equipment level, the background lighting provides indirect light in the various areas of the vehicle interior. Other areas can also be illuminated, e.g. the footwell. The brightness of the background lighting can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) Vehicles with starter button: If the ignition has been switched off, the lights go out when the vehicle is locked, or they switch off automatically after a few minutes. This prevents the 12-volt battery from discharging. Vehicles with ignition lock: If the vehicle key has been removed from the ignition lock, the lights go out when the vehicle is locked, or they switch off automatically after a few minutes. This prevents the 12-volt battery from discharging. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 155 Operating the wiper lever Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the steering column: operating the windscreen wipers. The wipers function only when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or boot lid are closed. Move the wiper lever → to the desired position Wipers switched off. Interval wipe for the windscreen or rain sensor mode. The interval wipe for the windscreen depends on the speed of the vehicle. The wipers will wipe more frequently as the vehicle moves faster. Slow wiping. Fast wiping. Flick wipe – short wiping. Pulling the lever activates the automatic wipe/wash function for cleaning the windscreen. The Climatronic will switch to air recirculation mode for approximately 30 seconds to prevent the smell of the windscreen washer fluid from entering the vehicle interior. 1 Use the switch to adjust the wipe intervals ( vehicles without a rain and light sensor) or the sensitivity of the rain and light sensor. Fig. 2 On the right-hand side of the steering column: operating the rear window wiper. → Move the wiper lever to the desired position Intermittent wiping for the rear window. The wiper will wipe the window approximately every six seconds. Pushing the lever activates the wash and wipe system for cleaning the rear window. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 156 WARNING Without adequate anti-freeze, the washer fluid may freeze onto the windscreen and obscure your view. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● At winter temperatures, use the window washer system only when adequate anti-freeze has been added. ● Never use the windscreen washer system at winter temperatures before the windscreen has been heated by the ventilation system. WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe injuries. ● Always change the wiper blades if they are damaged or worn and no longer clean the windscreen properly (→ Wiper blades) NOTICE Incorrect handling of the wipers can lead to damage to the windscreen and wiper blades and also to the wiper motor. ● Before starting your journey and switching on the ignition, check to make sure that the wiper lever is in its basic position. ● Remove snow and ice from the wipers and windows. ● Always carefully loosen wiper blades that have become frozen onto the window. ● Do not switch on the wipers when the window is dry. When switched on, the wipers will temporarily be switched to the next setting down when the vehicle is stationary. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. If the vehicle is parked during cold weather, the service position of the windscreen wiper may be helpful in order to be able to release the wiper blades better from the windscreen (→ Wiper blades) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 157 Wiper function Automatic activation of the rear window wiper The rear window wiper is switched on automatically when the windscreen wipers are switched on and reverse gear is engaged. Automatic activation when reverse gear is engaged can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the (→ Vehicle settings menu) Infotainment system OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 158: Rain And Light Sensor

    Rain and light sensor Fig. 1 On the right of the steering column: wiper lever. 1 Switch for setting the sensitivity of the rain and light sensor. A The rain and light sensor is deactivated. B The rain and light sensor is activated, automatic wipe when necessary. When the rain and light sensor is activated, it automatically controls the frequency of the wiper intervals, depending on the intensity of the rain. Activating and deactivating the rain and light sensor → Fig. 1 1. Push the lever into the required position The automatic wipe function can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) If the automatic wipe function is deactivated in the Infotainment system, the intervals are set at fixed levels. Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain and light sensor → Fig. 1 1 The sensitivity of the rain and light sensor can be adjusted manually using the switch in the wiper lever → —Switch to the right – high sensitivity. —Switch to the left – low sensitivity. WARNING The rain and light sensor cannot always detect all precipitation sufficiently and activate the wipers. If visibility is restricted, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually if the water on the windscreen restricts the field of vision. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 159: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Washer fluid level too low The indicator lamp lights up yellow. (→ Washer fluid) 1. Fill up the washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible Fault in wipers The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The wipers do not wipe. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fault in rain and light sensor The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The wipers are not switched on automatically if it rains during rain and light sensor operation. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Changes in the response of the rain and light sensor (→ Front Possible causes for faults and misinterpretations relating to the sensitive surface of the rain and light sensor view) include: —Damaged wiper blades: a film of water or smears caused by damaged wiper blades can increase the time the wipers are switched on, can shorten the length of the intervals between wipes or cause the wipers to run quickly and continuously. —Insects: insects hitting the windscreen surface can cause the wipers to be activated. —Salt deposits: in winter, salt deposits can cause the wipers to continue to wipe the windscreen when it is almost dry. —Soiling: dry dust, wax, windscreen coatings (lotus effect), or detergent deposits (from an automatic car wash) can cause the rain and light sensor to become less sensitive and react too slowly, or prevent it from reacting at all. Clean the sensitive surface of the rain and light sensor at regular intervals and inspect the wiper blades for damage (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —Crack in the windscreen: a wipe cycle will be triggered if the rain and light sensor is switched on when the windscreen is impacted by a stone. The rain and light sensor will then register the reduction in sensitivity of the surfaces and adjust accordingly. The size of the crack can affect the way in which the rain and light sensor activates the wipers. The wipers will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the window. The wipers will stop moving if the obstacle blocks their path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wipers back on again.

  • Page 160: General Safety Notes

    General safety notes The driver can use the exterior mirrors and interior mirror to observe the traffic behind and adjust the driving style accordingly. For safety reasons, it is important that the driver positions the exterior and interior mirrors correctly before starting a journey. Looking in the exterior mirrors and the interior mirror does not allow the driver to see the entire area around the side and rear of the vehicle. The area that cannot be seen is known as the blind spot. There may be objects and other road users in the blind spot. WARNING Adjusting the exterior and interior mirrors while driving may cause the driver to become distracted. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror only when the vehicle is stationary. ● Always ensure that the mirrors are positioned correctly and that the rear view is not restricted by ice, snow, condensation or any other objects. WARNING The fields of view of the exterior mirrors and interior mirror do not cover the entire area around the vehicle at the sides and rear. There may be objects and other road users in these blind spots. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● When parking, changing lane, overtaking or turning, always pay careful attention to the area around the vehicle. WARNING Curved mirrors (convex or aspheric) enlarge the field of vision and can make objects in the mirror seem smaller and further away than they actually are. This leads to an inaccurate estimation of the distance from vehicles following behind (e.g. when changing lanes). This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Whenever possible, use the interior mirror to check the exact distance between your vehicle and following traffic or other objects. ● Ensure that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle. WARNING Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors contain an electrolyte fluid which could leak if the mirror is broken. Contact with this fluid can cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs, especially in people who suffer from asthma or similar illnesses. This can cause serious injuries. ● If you have swallowed electrolyte fluid, rinse your mouth immediately with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unless instructed to do so by a doctor. Seek medical assistance immediately. ● Immediately make sure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air and get out of the vehicle or, if this is not possible, open all windows and doors.

  • Page 161: Automatic Anti-Dazzle Interior Mirror

    Interior mirror Fig. 1 On the windscreen: automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror. 1 Sensor for light incidence from the rear. 2 Sensor for light incidence from the front. Fig. 2 On the windscreen: manual anti-dazzle interior mirror. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror → Fig. 1 When the ignition is switched on, the sensors measure the incident light from the rear and from the front Depending on the values measured, the interior mirror dims automatically. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 162: Exterior Mirrors

    If the incident light on the sensors is hindered or interrupted, e.g. by a sun blind or other hanging objects, the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror will not function or will not function correctly. Mobile navigation devices → attached to the windscreen or near the interior automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror can also influence the sensors The automatic anti-dazzle function will be deactivated in some situations, e.g. when reverse gear is engaged. Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror —Basic position: the lever on the lower part of the mirror is pointing forwards towards the windscreen. → Fig. 2 —Pull the lever back to select the anti-dazzle function WARNING The illuminated display of a mobile navigation system can interfere with operation of the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror. As a result, the interior mirror cannot be used to check the exact distance between your vehicle and following traffic or other objects. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Switch off the mobile navigation system in such cases. Exterior mirrors Fig. 1 In the driver door: rotary knob for the exterior mirrors. The exterior mirror functions for left-hand drive vehicles are described below. Position corresponds to the exterior mirror on the driver side and position to the exterior mirror on the front passenger side. These instructions are mirrored for right-hand drive vehicles. Adjusting the exterior mirrors 1. Switch on the ignition. → Fig. 1 2. Turn the rotary knob in the driver door to the desired symbol 3. To adjust the exterior mirror, press the rotary knob forward, back, right or left in the direction of the arrows. Fold exterior mirrors into the body electrically → OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 163 Switch on the exterior mirror heating. The exterior mirror heating heats only at ambient temperatures below around +20°C (around +68°F) and initially with the highest setting. Heating takes place dependent on the ambient temperature after around two minutes. Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror. Neutral position. The exterior mirror cannot be adjusted and all functions are switched off. Activating the exterior mirror functions The following exterior mirror functions must be activated once in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) Folding in the exterior mirrors while parking The exterior mirrors fold in or out automatically when the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the outside. In order for this to happen, the rotary knob must be in position , , or . The exterior mirrors remain folded in if the rotary knob for the electrically adjustable exterior mirrors is in the position . Storing front passenger exterior mirror settings for reversing 1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key to which the settings should be assigned. 2. Apply the handbrake. 3. Switch on the ignition. 4. Put the gearbox into neutral. 5. Select reverse gear. 6. Adjust the exterior mirror on the front passenger side so that you have a good view of the kerb area, for example. 7. Put the gearbox into neutral. 8. Switch off the ignition. The settings for the mirror position will be saved and assigned to the vehicle key. Activating the front passenger exterior mirror setting for reversing 1. Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirrors to the position for adjusting the front passenger exterior mirror. 2. With the ignition switched on, select reverse gear.

  • Page 164: Sun Visors

    If the exterior mirrors are folded out or in without paying due attention, fingers can be trapped between the exterior mirror and the mirror base. This can cause serious injuries. ● Fold the exterior mirrors in or out only when there is no obstruction in the path of the mirror. NOTICE Exterior mirrors may be damaged if they are not folded in when driving through a car wash. ● Always fold in the exterior mirrors. NOTICE Folding in the electrically adjustable exterior mirrors mechanically can lead to increased wear or damage the electric drive. ● Do not fold electrically adjustable exterior mirrors in or out by hand. The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer needed. Fuel is otherwise wasted. In the event of a fault, the electric exterior mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the outer edge of the mirror. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. Sun visors Fig. 1 In the front headliner: sun visor (light depending on equipment). 1 Light. A Pull out of the holder. B Slide the cover open. Adjustment options for the driver and front passenger sun visors: —Folded down over the windscreen. → Fig. 1 A —Pulled out of the bracket and swung over towards the door Illuminated vanity mirror → Fig. 1 B There is a vanity mirror behind a cover on the inside of the sun visor. When you open the cover , the lamp → Fig. 1 1 lights up.
  • Page 165 WARNING Driving with the sun visors folded down and the sun blinds pulled out can reduce your view of the road. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Sun visors should always be folded away and sun blinds should always be retracted if they are not being used. In certain circumstances, the lamp above the sun visor will go out automatically after a few minutes. This prevents the 12-volt battery from discharging. Overview of the Climatronic The Climatronic is an automatic air conditioning system that heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. Automatic mode enables the Climatronic to control the air temperature, air distribution and air volume automatically. Some functions of the air conditioning system depend on the vehicle equipment level. Fig. 1 In the upper part of the centre console: Climatronic air conditioning block ( version 1). Fig. 2 In the upper part of the centre console: Climatronic air conditioning block ( version 2). Using the air conditioning system efficiently The air conditioning system will work most effectively if the vehicle interior is kept closed. If heat has built up in the vehicle interior, cooling can be accelerated by briefly airing the vehicle. Display of active functions Lit up LED s on the air conditioning block indicate that the function is switched on. WARNING Iced-up, snow-covered or misted-up windows severely restrict visibility. This increases the risk of collisions and accidents, which can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Keep all windows free of ice, snow and condensation. ● Adjust the heating, air conditioning and rear window heating to prevent condensation from forming on the OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 166 (→ Heating and air conditioning system) windows ● Only set off once all windows are clear. ● Use air recirculation mode for a short period only. Condensation could otherwise form very quickly on the windows, greatly reducing visibility. ● Switch off the air recirculation mode as soon as it is no longer required. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change when the user account changes . Switching the Climatronic on and off At the air conditioning block Switching off the Climatronic. Adjust the blower speed. 1. To switch on the Climatronic, swipe to the right on the touch slider for fan speed. Or: press the button. 2. To switch off the Climatronic, swipe to the left on the touch slider for fan speed. Or: press the button several times. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 167 Climatronic automatic mode At the air conditioning block The set air temperature is kept constant. The volume of air and air distribution are controlled automatically. Automatic mode switches off when the blower speed is adjusted manually. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 168 Manual air conditioning system overview The manual air conditioning system heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. Some functions of the air conditioning system depend on the vehicle equipment level. Fig. 1 In the upper section of the centre console: air conditioning block for the manual air conditioning system. Using the air conditioning system efficiently The air conditioning system will work most effectively if the vehicle interior is kept closed. If heat has built up in the vehicle interior, cooling can be accelerated by briefly airing the vehicle. Display of active functions Lit up LED s on the air conditioning block indicate that the function is switched on. WARNING Iced-up, snow-covered or misted-up windows severely restrict visibility. This increases the risk of collisions and accidents, which can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Keep all windows free of ice, snow and condensation. ● Adjust the heating, air conditioning and rear window heating to prevent condensation from forming on the (→ Heating and air conditioning system) windows ● Only set off once all windows are clear. ● Use air recirculation mode for a short period only. Condensation could otherwise form very quickly on the windows, greatly reducing visibility. ● Switch off the air recirculation mode as soon as it is no longer required. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 169 Switching the manual air conditioning system on and off At the air conditioning block Adjust the blower speed. 1. To switch on the manual air conditioning system, turn the centre rotary knob clockwise. 2. To switch off the manual air conditioning system, turn the centre rotary knob anticlockwise as far as it will go. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 170: Temperature Control

    Temperature control At the air conditioning block Select temperature. The air is cooled and dehumidified in cooling mode. Adopt temperature settings of driver side for all seats. Setting the temperature on the Climatronic air conditioning block 1. To adjust the Climatronic temperature to +22°C (+72°F), tap and hold the touch slider centrally between and Or: to set a different temperature, swipe the touch slider to the left or right. Or: turn the left or right rotary knob to or . Climatronic shows the temperature settings. Setting the temperature on the air conditioning block of the manual air conditioning system 1. Turn the left rotary knob to or . Maximum cooling output and heating output 1. Tap and hold or on the touch slider of the Climatronic. Or: turn the left or right rotary knob as far as it will go to or . OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 171 Air distribution and fan speed Vents There are vents in the vehicle in the following locations: —Driver side. —Front passenger side. —Front centre console. —Rear centre console. NOTICE The air flowing through the vents can damage food, medicines and objects that are sensitive to hot and cold temperatures, and may render them unusable. ● Never leave food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects in front of the vents. Air distribution functions on the air conditioning block Adjust the blower speed. Direct air towards upper body. Direct air into the footwell. Guide air to the upper body and the footwell. Guide air to the windscreen and the footwell. Direct air onto the windscreen. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 172: Defrost Function

    Defrost function The defrost function of Climatronic clears the windscreen of ice and condensation. The air is dehumidified and the blower is set to a high speed. The defrost function of the manual air conditioning system clears the windscreen of ice and condensation. The air must be dehumidified when the defrost function is switched on. For this reason, you cannot switch on air recirculation mode or switch off cooling mode when the defrost function is switched on. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 173: Air Recirculation Mode

    Air recirculation mode → When air recirculation mode is switched on, no fresh air enters the vehicle interior Switching air recirculation mode on and off at the air conditioning block. 1. Press on the air conditioning block. When does air recirculation mode switch off? Air recirculation mode switches off in the following situations: —When the defrost function is switched on. —If a sensor detects that condensation might form on the windows. WARNING A lacking fresh air supply can lead to restricted visibility due to misted-up windows and to fast driver fatigue due to the stale air. This can lead to collisions and accidents and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Use air recirculation mode for a short period only. ● Switch off the air recirculation mode as soon as it is no longer required. NOTICE Tobacco smoke can leave a residue on the evaporator of the air conditioning system and the enhanced air filter with activated carbon, producing a lasting unpleasant odour. ● To prevent lasting unpleasant odours, do not smoke in the vehicle when air recirculation mode is switched on. Climatronic: When reversing the vehicle or when the wash and wipe system is being used, the air recirculation mode will switch on to prevent odours from entering the vehicle interior. Manual air conditioning system: If the outside temperature is very high, brief activation of air recirculation mode helps to cool the vehicle interior more quickly. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 174 Overview of seat heating When the engine is running, the front seats can be electrically heated. Switch the seat heating on and off on the air conditioning block. Heating levels of the seat heating The seat heating operating conditions are highlighted in colour. Both L ED s light up at the highest temperature setting. When should the seat heating be switched off? Switch off the seat heating if one of the following conditions applies: → —A person with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature is sitting on the seat —The seat is not occupied. —A child seat is installed on the seat. —Objects are covering the seat cushion, e.g. protective covers, jackets, blankets or bags. —The seat cushion is damp or wet. —The temperature in the vehicle interior or the outside temperature is above +25°C (+77 °F). WARNING Magnetic fields are produced during operation of the seat heating. In isolated cases, these magnetic fields can affect active medical implants, e.g. pacemakers. ● If you have a medical implant, you should consult your doctor or the implant manufacturer before operating the seat heating. ● Also make the other vehicle occupants aware of this. WARNING Anyone with reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature due to medication, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes) could sustain burns on the back, buttocks and legs when using the seat heating. These burns may take a long time to heal or may never heal fully. ● Never use the seat heating if you have reduced sensitivity to pain or temperature. ● Consult a doctor if you have questions about your own state of health. WARNING Wet seat covers can cause a malfunctions in the seat heating and increase the risk of burns. ● Ensure that the seat cushion is dry before using the seat heating. ● Do not sit on the seat in damp or wet clothing. ●...
  • Page 175 Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Operating the seat heating 1. To switch on the seat heating with the highest temperature setting, press the or button in the air conditioning block. 2. To set the temperature setting, press the or button repeatedly. 3. To switch the seat heating off, press the or button repeatedly until no L ED is lit. If the seat heating is switched on for more than approximately 15 minutes at the highest temperature setting, the system will automatically switch to the lowest temperature setting. To save fuel, switch off the seat heating as soon as possible. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 176: Rear Window Heating

    Rear window heating The rear window heating works when the engine is running. Switch the rear window heating on and off in the air conditioning block. The rear window heating switches off automatically after around 10 minutes at the latest. NOTICE Stickers that are affixed over the heating wires of the rear window heating on the inside of the rear window or objects that are in contact with the inside of the rear window can damage the rear window heating. ● Do not stick any stickers over the heating wires of the rear window heating. ● Load the luggage compartment only up to a height where no objects are in contact with the rear window. To save fuel, switch off the rear window heating as soon as possible. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 177: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Cooling mode or the heater cannot be switched on or operation is restricted Cooling mode works only when the engine is running and at ambient temperatures above +3°C (+38°F). The cooling mode , heating and defrost function may be restricted when the engine is very hot or at extreme outside temperatures. —Switch on the blower. —Check the fuse of the air conditioning system . —Replace enhanced air filter with activated carbon . —If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE If the air conditioning system is not working and is nevertheless still operated, this can cause secondary damage. ● If the air conditioning system does not cool or heat the air, switch it off immediately. ● Have the air conditioning system checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Condensation on the windows Condensation may form on the windows if they are colder than the ambient temperature and the air is humid. Cold air can absorb less moisture than warm air, which is why condensation frequently forms on windows in cold weather. 1. In order to improve the heating and cooling output, keep the air intake in front of the windscreen free of ice, (→ Vehicle care) snow and leaves 2. Keep the air slots in the rear area of the luggage compartment clear so that air can flow through the vehicle from the front to the rear. (→ Defrost function) 3. Switch on the defrost function The wrong unit of temperature has been set You can change the unit of temperature for all temperature displays in the vehicle using the Infotainment system. 1. Open the Settings menu. 2. Select the Units menu option.

  • Page 178: Progressive Steering

    Information on steering The steering should be locked every time you leave the vehicle to make it more difficult for the vehicle to be stolen. The steering The power steering provided by the electromechanical steering system automatically adjusts to the vehicle speed, steering torque and steering angle of the wheels. The electromechanical steering only functions when the engine is running. The steering also functions when the start/stop system intervenes and switches off the engine. You will need considerably more strength than normal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is reduced or has failed completely. In vehicles with driving profile selection, the selected driving profile can affect the behaviour of the power steering. Electronic steering lock in vehicles with a starter button The steering column is locked electronically in vehicles with a starter button: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Depending on equipment: move the selector lever to position. 3. Switch off the ignition and then open the driver door. The steering column is locked. If you do not want the steering column to be locked, first open the driver door and then switch off the ignition. The steering column will remain unlocked as long as the vehicle is not locked. Mechanical steering column lock The steering column is locked mechanically in vehicles with an ignition lock: Locking the steering column: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Depending on equipment: move the selector lever to position. 3. Remove the vehicle key. 4. Turn the steering wheel slightly until the steering lock audibly engages. Unlocking the steering column: 1. To relieve the steering lock, turn the steering wheel slightly. 2. Insert the vehicle key into the ignition lock. 3. Hold the steering wheel in this position and turn the ignition on. Counter steering assistance Counter steering assistance provides the driver with steering assistance in some critical driving situations. In combination with the ESC , additional steering power helps the driver when counter steering →...

  • Page 179: Steering Fault

    ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. WARNING The counter steering assistance cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Uncontrolled vehicle movements can occur in critical driving situations in spite of the counter steering assistance. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Please note that the vehicle is not steered by the counter steering assistance. ● Ensure that your speed and driving style are always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. Troubleshooting Steering fault The warning lamp lights up or flashes red. There is a fault in the electromechanical steering or electronic steering lock. Do not drive on! 1. Seek expert assistance. —If the warning lamp lights up red, the steering may be stiff because the electromechanical steering has failed. Steering fault The indicator lamp lights up or flashes yellow. The steering is harder or more sensitive than usual. The indicator lamp lights up continuously: 1. Re-start the engine and drive a short distance slowly. 2. If the warning lamp stays lit, the system should be checked by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The indicator lamp flashes: 1. Turn the steering wheel back and forth. 2. Switch the ignition off and then on again. 3. Observe the messages on the instrument cluster display. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 180 4. Do not continue your journey if the indicator lamp still flashes after the ignition is switched on. Seek expert assistance. Information on the pedals Fig. 1 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with a manual gearbox. Fig. 2 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with an automatic gearbox. 1 Accelerator 2 Brake pedal 3 In vehicles with a manual gearbox: Clutch pedal WARNING Objects in the driver footwell can hinder pedal operation. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries. ● Make sure that all pedals can always be operated without any hindrance. ● The floor mats must always be properly secured in the footwell. ● No additional floor mats or other floor coverings should be placed over the fitted floor mat. ● Make sure that no objects can enter the driver footwell while the vehicle is in motion. ● If there are any objects in the footwell, remove them when the vehicle is parked. ● Always wear shoes that provide good grip for your feet when using the pedals. WARNING Lack of attention when driving in traffic can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always observe the current traffic regulations and speed limits and think ahead when driving. ● When travelling long distances, stop and take a break regularly – at least every 2 hours. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 181: Information On The Brakes

    ● Do not drive under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medicines and narcotics. WARNING If a brake circuit fails, a larger brake pedal travel will be necessary in order to stop the vehicle. A longer braking distance can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Continue pressing the brake pedal and press the pedal with more force than usual if the braking power is reduced. Information on the brakes Running in brake pads New brake pads cannot generate the full braking effect during around the first 200 to 300 km (around 100 bis → 200 miles) and must first be run in . However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. During the run-in period, the braking distance is longer when the brakes are depressed fully or during emergency braking than with brake pads that have been fully run in. In the run-in period, the brakes should not be depressed fully and situations should be avoided that create a heavy load on the brakes, e.g. when driving up close to the vehicle ahead. Brake pad wear The wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way in which the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is used for regular urban trips or short journeys and is driven with a sporty driving style, the brake pads must be regularly checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. External influences on the brakes When driving with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after heavy rainfall or after washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed as the brake discs will be wet, or possibly iced up (in winter). The brakes must be “dried” as quickly as possible by careful braking at higher speed. Please ensure that no following vehicle and → no other road user is put at risk as a result of this action Any salt layer accumulating on the discs and pads will delay the braking effect and increase the braking distance. If the brakes on the vehicle have not been applied for a long time on roads that have been gritted with salt, the layer of → salt must be reduced through careful braking Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt in the brake pads are facilitated through long periods of inactivity, low mileage and low load levels. If the brake pads have been hardly used or if they are corroded, Volkswagen recommends that the brake discs and brake pads be cleaned by braking strongly several times from high speed. Please ensure that no → other vehicles and no road users are put at risk as a result of this action WARNING Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty brake system can lead to loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

  • Page 182: Brake System Fault

    ● Never “ride” the brake pedal or depress the brake pedal too often and for too long. WARNING When driving downhill, the brakes are placed under particular strain and become hot very quickly. Overheated brakes reduce the braking effect and considerably increase the braking distance. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, reduce your speed by changing to a lower gear with a manual gearbox or in Tiptronic mode of the automatic gearbox. ● Use the braking effect of the engine to reduce the load on the brakes. ● Before starting your journey, make sure that the air supply to the brakes is not covered, e.g. by non-standard or damaged front spoilers. WARNING Wet brakes or brakes coated with ice or road salt react more slowly and require longer braking distances. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Carefully test the brakes. ● Carry out a few careful braking operations to dry the brakes and clean off any coating of ice and salt when visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit. If the front brake pads are tested, the rear brake pads should be tested at the same time. Regularly check the thickness of the brake pads through the openings in the rims or from the underside of the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to carry out a comprehensive check. Further information can be obtained from a correspondingly qualified workshop Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Troubleshooting Brake system fault The warning lamp lights up red. A text message may also be displayed. Do not drive on! Seek expert assistance immediately. Brake pad wear indicator The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The brake pads are worn. 1. In this case, go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. All brake pads should be checked and renewed as necessary. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 183: Electronic Immobiliser

    Unusual noises when braking If you hear scratching or squeaking noises each time you brake, this is an indication that your brake pads on the front and rear axle are worn. 1. In this case, go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. All brake pads should be checked and renewed as necessary. If the braking performance of the vehicle changes If the brake pads are worn or if you establish that the vehicle is no longer braking in the usual way, for example, a sudden lengthening of the stopping distance: 1. In this case, go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. All brake pads should be checked and renewed as necessary. Electronic immobiliser The immobiliser helps to prevent the engine from being started and driven with an unauthorised vehicle key. Vehicles with ignition lock The vehicle key contains a chip that automatically deactivates the immobiliser when a valid vehicle key is inserted in the ignition lock. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated as soon as the vehicle key is removed from the ignition lock (→ Ignition lock) Vehicles with starter button The vehicle key contains a chip that automatically deactivates the immobiliser when a valid vehicle key is located in the vehicle interior. (→ Starter button) The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated as soon as the ignition is switched off The engine can be started only when a Volkswagen Genuine vehicle key with the correct code is used. Coded vehicle keys are available from a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 184: Ignition Lock

    Ignition lock Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock Fig. 1 On the right next to the steering wheel: ignition lock. Ignition switched off. The vehicle key can be removed. Ignition switched on. The steering lock can be released. Start the engine (→ Starting the engine) . Once released, the vehicle key moves back to position . The steering lock can be activated when there is no vehicle key in the ignition lock. Warning when the ignition is switched on A warning message appears in the instrument cluster display if the driver door is opened while the ignition is switched on. An acoustic signal may also be given. The warning is a reminder that the ignition must be switched off before leaving the vehicle. NOTICE The 12-volt battery may be discharged unintentionally and prevent the engine from restarting if the ignition is switched on while the engine is switched off. ● Always switch off the ignition before you leave the vehicle. WARNING If the vehicle key is left unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorised persons could lock the doors and the boot lid, start the engine or switch on the ignition and thus operate electrical equipment, such as the electric windows. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always switch off the engine and take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 185: Starter Button

    WARNING If children, people requiring assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, they could accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be exposed to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. WARNING If the vehicle key is removed from the ignition lock while the vehicle is in motion, the steering lock may engage and you will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. ● Always completely unfold the key bit of the vehicle key and lock it in this position. ● Attach only light objects weighing less than around 100 g ( around 3.5 oz) to the vehicle key. Select the selector lever position if the vehicle key cannot be removed. If necessary, press the lock button in the selector lever and then release it. Starter button The starter button replaces the ignition lock ( Press & Drive). Vehicles with a manual gearbox: The engine is started by pressing the starter button with the clutch pedal depressed. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: The engine is started by pressing the starter button with the brake pedal depressed. The vehicle can be activated only if there is a valid vehicle key in the vehicle. Depending on equipment, the starter button flashes to indicate readiness for operation. When leaving the vehicle, the electronic steering lock will be activated when the ignition is switched off and the (→ Steering) driver door is opened Switching the ignition on or off Fig. 1 In the lower section of the centre console: starter knob. → 1. Press the starter button once without depressing the brake or clutch pedal Automatic ignition switch-off Once the vehicle detects that the driver is absent after the combustion engine is switched off, the ignition will be switched off automatically after a certain period of time.

  • Page 186: Starting The Engine

    If no valid vehicle key is detected in the vehicle interior when the engine has been switched off unintentionally, it is possible to restart the engine within approximately 5 seconds. After this time, the engine cannot be restarted without a valid vehicle key in the vehicle interior. WARNING The engine will start immediately if the brake pedal is pressed when the ignition is switched on. This can lead to unintentional vehicle movements and cause serious injuries. ● Avoid pressing the brake pedal when switching on the ignition if you do not want to start the engine. WARNING If the vehicle key is left unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorised persons could lock the doors and the boot lid, start the engine or switch on the ignition and thus operate electrical equipment, such as the electric windows. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. WARNING If children, people requiring assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, they could accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be exposed to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, always switch off the ignition manually and observe any information shown in the instrument cluster display. Leaving the vehicle stationary for long periods with the ignition switched on can discharge the 12-volt vehicle battery so that the engine can no longer be started. Starting the engine Starting the engine 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal until the handbrake has been released. 3. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: fully depress the clutch pedal and hold it until the engine has been started. Move the gear lever to neutral position. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to position or engage the parking lock . Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox: Move the selector lever to position or engage the parking lock . 4. ​ V ehicles with ignition lock: turn the vehicle key further in the ignition lock – do not depress the accelerator. Release the vehicle key once the engine has started.
  • Page 187 Starting the natural gas engine The gas engine will only start with gas. It is possible to start the engine with petrol under the following conditions: —Very low outside temperatures. —The mixture adjustment after refuelling is not yet complete. —Natural gas tank is empty. WARNING Toxic gases can enter the vehicle interior if the engine is started in unventilated or closed spaces. This can cause serious injuries and lead to death by suffocation. ● Never start the engine in unventilated or closed spaces or allow it to run in unventilated or closed spaces, e.g. in garages. WARNING Hot components and exhaust gases can ignite combustible or explosive materials located nearby. This can lead to fires and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never start the engine or allow the engine to run if oil, fuel or other highly flammable service fluids are close to the vehicle or are leaking from the vehicle. ● Never use start boosters. WARNING If the vehicle is left unattended with the vehicle’s drive system is active, it may lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running, particularly if a gear or position has been selected. NOTICE Incorrect vehicle handling can increase component wear, e.g. on the starter, or lead to damage. ● Never use the starter with a gear selected for driving or tow-starting if the engine does not start, e.g. when the fuel tank is empty. ● Refill fuel if necessary or obtain jump starting assistance. ● Seek expert assistance if the engine does not start. NOTICE Incorrect vehicle handling can increase component wear, e.g. on the engine, or lead to damage. ● Avoid restarting the engine while the vehicle is in motion or directly after switching off the engine. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and overloading the engine. ● Please note that the density of air decreases with increasing altitude and this may make it more difficult to start the engine.
  • Page 188 If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or if it is not detected, a message will be shown on the instrument cluster display. This may occur if the vehicle key is disrupted by another radio signal or is covered by another item such as an aluminium suitcase. The engine cannot be started with the starter button if the button cell in the vehicle key is weak or discharged. Carry out an emergency start. When starting from cold, the engine may run with increased operating noise for a short time. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. The natural gas engine starts in natural gas mode at outside temperatures down to around -10°C (around +14°F), unless a gas quality check is running after refuelling natural gas. At temperatures below around -10°C (around +14°F), the natural gas engine starts and runs in petrol mode until the CNG components are ready for natural gas mode. The duration depends on the outside temperature, because natural gas mode requires a minimum operating temperature. The engine will automatically select natural gas mode once the required operating temperature is reached. Troubleshooting Fault in engine management system The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Fault in engine management system. 1. Observe any text messages that are shown on the instrument cluster display. 2. Have the engine checked immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fault in engine management system The indicator lamp lights up in the digital instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The vehicle power has been limited. The power was limited to prevent overheating of components in the engine management system. —A corresponding display may appear in the instrument cluster display. —It is possible to continue driving with reduced power. The power limitation will be cancelled again in the following cases: —The components of the engine management system are no longer in a critical temperature range. Engine speed limited The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The engine speed was limited to prevent the engine from overheating. The engine speed is shown on the instrument cluster display. The engine speed limitation will be cancelled again in the following cases: —Engine is no longer in a critical temperature range. —Foot is taken off the accelerator. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 189 Engine speed limitation due to fault in the engine management system The indicator lamps light up yellow. Engine speed limitation is activated due to a fault in the engine management system. 1. Make sure that the displayed engine speed is not exceeded. 2. Have the engine checked immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. No valid vehicle key recognised Fig. 1 On the right-hand side of the steering column: emergency start function in vehicles with the keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access. A corresponding display will appear in the instrument cluster. If the button cell in the vehicle key is weak or discharged, it is possible that the vehicle key will not be recognised. In this case it is necessary to perform an emergency start: 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. → Fig. 1 2. Hold the vehicle key to the right of the steering column trim directly after pressing the starter button (arrow). The ignition is switched on automatically, and in some cases the engine is started. Engine cannot be started A corresponding message will be displayed in the instrument cluster if an unauthorised vehicle key is used or there is a system fault. 1. Use an authorised vehicle key. 2. If the fault persists, seek expert assistance. Or: the engine cannot be started with the vehicle key or by briefly pressing the starter button while the brake or clutch pedal is depressed. There is a fault in the starting system. 1. Turn and hold the vehicle key or press the button until the engine starts. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 190: Switching Off The Engine

    2. Seek expert assistance. Switching off the engine → 1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill 2. Park the vehicle. 3. ​ V ehicles with ignition lock: Switch off the ignition. 4. ​ V ehicles with starter button: briefly press the starter button. If the engine cannot be switched off, carry out the emergency switch-off procedure. 5. Follow the instructions in the instrument cluster. Warning before leaving the vehicle In order to indicate that the vehicle is capable of rolling when leaving the vehicle, an acoustic warning signal sounds when the driver door is opened and corresponding warning messages appear on the display of the instrument cluster. Vehicles with DSG dual clutch gearbox: If the selector lever is in position , an acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver door is opened and the warning message Vehicle not secured against rolling away! will appear on the instrument cluster display. This warns you that the vehicle could potentially roll away. WARNING When the engine is switched off, certain vehicle systems do not function or function only to a restricted extent, e.g. brake servo or power steering. As a result, more force has to be used for steering and more pressure has to be applied to the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle is in motion, this can cause loss of control over the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING The airbags and belt tensioners do not function when the engine is switched off. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING ​ V ehicles with ignition lock: If the vehicle key is removed, the steering lock may activate and you may no longer be able to steer the vehicle. This can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.
  • Page 191 NOTICE If the vehicle has been driven at high load for a long period, the engine can overheat when it is switched off. ● Allow the engine to run in neutral for approximately 2 minutes before switching it off. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the vehicle key can only be removed from the ignition lock if the selector lever is in position . After the engine has been switched off, the radiator fan in the engine compartment may run on for a few minutes. The radiator fan will switch itself off automatically. Troubleshooting Engine cannot be switched off The engine cannot be switched off by briefly pressing the starter button. In this case it is necessary to perform an emergency switch-off procedure: 1. Press the starter button twice within a few seconds or press and hold once. (→ Starter button) The engine switches off automatically Vehicle key cannot be removed from the ignition lock An unauthorised vehicle key has been inserted in the ignition lock. Remove the vehicle key as follows: Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: 1. Press the lock button in the selector lever and release. 2. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: 1. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 192: Start/Stop System

    Start/stop system Functional description The start/stop system automatically switches off the engine shortly before stopping or when the vehicle comes to a standstill and when the vehicle is stationary. On vehicles with manual gearbox, the engine switches off only if no gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed when coasting to a stop or at vehicle standstill. The engine restarts automatically whenever necessary for the vehicle and the detected situation. The function is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on. Indicator lamps The instrument cluster display will show information about the current status. If the indicator lamp lights up, the start/stop system is available and automatic engine stop is active. If the indicator lamp lights up, the start/stop system is not available or the start/stop system has started the engine automatically. Conditions for an automatic restart of the engine —Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: When the foot is taken off the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal is pressed. —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: If the clutch is pressed. —If the temperature in the vehicle interior greatly increases or decreases. —If the vehicle starts rolling. —If the electric voltage of the 12-volt vehicle battery drops. —If the steering wheel is moved. Conditions that may prevent the engine from switching off automatically —The driver has not fastened their seat belt. —The driver door is open. —The bonnet is open. —A minimum engine temperature has not been reached. —​ V ehicles with Climatronic: The temperature of the vehicle interior is not within the preset temperature range, or the humidity level is too high. —The defrost function of the air conditioning system is switched on. —The charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is insufficient. —The temperature of the 12-volt vehicle battery is too low or too high. —The vehicle is on a steep incline. — The steering wheel is turned too sharply. —Reverse gear is selected. —Park Assist is active. The engine can also switch off later if the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled only after the vehicle has come to a stop, e.g. if the defrost function is switched off when stationary. Activating and deactivating the start/stop system manually OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 193 Fig. 1 In the lower part of the centre console or in the Infotainment system (depending on equipment): button for the start/stop system. Deactivating the start/stop system manually: 1. Press the button in the centre console. If the start/stop system has been deactivated, the indicator lamp in → Fig. 1 the button lights up. Always deactivate the start/stop system manually when driving through water. Activating the start/stop system manually: → Fig. 1 1. Press the button in the centre console again The instrument cluster display shows the status of the start/stop system each time the button is pressed. If the start/stop system has switched off the engine, the engine will start again as soon as the system is deactivated with the button. In some cases, it may be necessary to restart the engine manually, for example if the bonnet or driver door is → opened. Follow any corresponding messages on the instrument cluster display Start-Stop mode with automatic Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The engine will be switched off after the Adaptive Cruise Control ( A CC ) has brought the vehicle to a standstill with an active braking intervention. In the following instances, the engine will restart when A CC is active: —If the accelerator is depressed. —When ACC has resumed speed and distance control. —If the vehicle ahead has moved on. The engine will also be restarted if the Adaptive Cruise Control ( A CC ) is deactivated and the vehicle ahead moves further away.
  • Page 194 WARNING The engine can start suddenly if the start/stop system is activated when working in the engine compartment. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Always deactivate the start/stop system when working in the engine compartment. WARNING When the engine is switched off, certain vehicle systems do not function or function only to a restricted extent, e.g. brake servo or power steering. As a result, more force has to be used for steering and more pressure has to be applied to the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle is in motion, this can cause loss of control over the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING The airbags and belt tensioners do not function when the engine is switched off. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING When the ignition is switched off, the steering lock may activate and you will no longer be able to steer the vehicle. If the vehicle is in motion, this can cause loss of control over the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch off the ignition while the vehicle is in motion. NOTICE If the start/stop system is used in very high outside temperatures over a long period, the 12-volt vehicle battery can be damaged. ● Avoid using the start/stop system at very high outside temperatures. Troubleshooting Engine no longer starts automatically (→ Starting the engine) 1. Start the engine manually (→ Start/stop system) 2. Deactivating the start/stop system manually 3. In this case, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 195: Selecting Reverse Gear

    Manual gearbox: Selecting a gear Selecting a forward gear Fig. 1 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox. Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may have a 5-speed manual gearbox. The positions of the individual gears are displayed on the gear lever. Carry out the following actions to engage a forward gear: 1. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal. 1 . → Fig. 1 2. Move the gear lever to the required position 3. Release pedal to engage the clutch. In some countries, the clutch pedal will have to be depressed fully in order to start the engine. Selecting reverse gear Reverse gear should be selected only when the vehicle is stationary. Carry out the following actions to engage reverse gear: 1. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal. 2. Move the gear lever to the neutral position and push down. R . 3. Push the gear lever fully to the left and then forwards into the reverse gear position → Fig. 1 4. Release pedal to engage the clutch. Shifting down Shifting down while driving should always be done one gear at a time (to the next lower gear – and not at high engine speed). At high speeds or high engine speeds, damage to the clutch and the gearbox could occur if one or more gears are skipped when shifting down, even if the clutch is not released when doing this. WARNING Shifting gears incorrectly to gears that are too low can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ●...
  • Page 196 WARNING Fast acceleration or switching off TCS can lead to a loss of traction and skidding on slippery roads, e.g. in wet or icy conditions or on dirty road surfaces. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Accelerate quickly only if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit, and other road users are not put at risk due to the acceleration and driving style. ● Always adapt your driving style to the traffic. WARNING When a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal released, the vehicle will start moving immediately if the engine is running. This also applies when the handbrake is on. Unintentional vehicle movements can cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Never engage reverse gear while the vehicle is in motion. NOTICE Serious damage to the clutch and gearbox could occur if the gear lever is shifted to a gear that is too low or if the clutch pedal is pressed and held and the clutch not engaged when travelling at high speeds or at high engine speeds. ● Always select a suitable gear for the current driving situation. ● Avoid pressing the clutch unnecessarily or for too long. NOTICE If the manual gearbox is not used correctly, this can lead to damage or premature wear. ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure from your hand is passed onto the selector forks in the gearbox. ● Ensure that the vehicle has come to a full stop before engaging reverse gear. ● Always fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear. ● Do not hold the vehicle by “riding” the clutch on uphill gradients with the engine running. Changing up a gear early will help to save fuel and minimise engine noise. Troubleshooting Clutch is “slipping” The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The clutch is not transmitting the full engine torque. 1. If necessary, remove foot from the clutch pedal.

  • Page 197: Selector Lever

    5. If the indicator lamp does not go out, do not drive on. Seek expert assistance. Failure to do so could result in considerable damage to the gearbox. Clutch defective The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The clutch is faulty. 1. Drive on carefully! 2. In this case, go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately and have the system checked. Failure to do so can cause considerable clutch damage. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Selector lever The engaged selector lever position is shown in the instrument cluster display when the ignition is switched on. Selecting a position Fig. 1 In the centre console: selector lever of the dual clutch gearbox (illustration). To change from neutral position to a gear position, carry out the following: 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Press the selector lever to the desired selector lever position → Fig. 1 Description of positions The drive wheels are blocked. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To disengage this selector lever position while the ignition is switched on, depress the brake pedal and press the lock button in the selector lever. Reverse gear is selected. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 198: Selector Lever Lock

    The gearbox is in the neutral position. No force is transmitted to the wheels and the braking effect of the engine is not available. Position : Normal mode. All forward gears are shifted up and down automatically. The timing of the gear shift is determined by the engine load, your individual driving style and the speed of the vehicle. Position : Sport mode The forward gears are automatically shifted up later and down earlier than in selector lever position . This exploits the engine’s full power reserves. The timing of the gear shift is determined by the engine load, your individual driving style and the speed of the vehicle. To change between positions and , tap the selector lever to the rear . The selector lever will always move back into selector lever position . This also functions in the Tiptronic gate (→ Tiptronic) Selector lever lock The selector lever lock in position or prevents a gear selector position from being engaged inadvertently and the vehicle being set in motion unintentionally as a result. To release the selector lever lock, switch on the ignition and depress the brake pedal. Then press the lock button in → Fig. 1 the selector lever handle (arrow). The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever skips position , for example when shifting from reverse to . This makes it possible, for instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards to free the vehicle if it is stuck in snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position for → more than approximately 1 second and the vehicle is travelling no faster than around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) WARNING The vehicle will start moving if the brake pedal is released when the engine is running and position or is engaged. This can lead to unintentional vehicle movements and cause accidents and serious injuries. ● Hold the vehicle by the foot brake if the engine is running and the position or is engaged. ●...
  • Page 199 If the selector lever is accidentally moved to when driving, take your foot off the accelerator. Wait for the engine to reach idling speed in the neutral position before selecting a position again. If the selector lever is not left in the parking lock position for long periods when the engine is switched off, the 12-volt vehicle battery will discharge. Changing gear using Tiptronic Using Tiptronic, the gears can be shifted up and down manually in an automatic gearbox. The gear that is currently selected will be maintained when the Tiptronic mode is selected. This remains the case as long as the system does not automatically carry out a change of gear due to the current driving situation. Operating Tiptronic with the selector lever Fig. 1 In the centre console: selector lever in Tiptronic position. 1. Push the selector lever from position to the right into the Tiptronic gate. – → Fig. 1 2. Tap the selector lever forwards or back to shift gear up or down When tapping the selector lever in the Tiptronic gate, it is not necessary to press the lock button on the selector lever. Operating Tiptronic with the paddles Fig. 2 Behind the steering wheel: paddles for Tiptronic. 1. Pull the right paddle towards the steering wheel to change up a gear → Fig. 2 2. Pull the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change down a gear. 3. To leave the Tiptronic mode, pull the right paddle towards the steering wheel for approximately 1 second. The Tiptronic mode is automatically exited if the selector paddles are not operated for some time and the selector OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 200 lever is not in the Tiptronic gate. When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up to the next gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine speed is reached. When shifting down a gear manually, the gearbox will not change gear until the engine can no longer be overrevved. Driving with DSG® dual clutch gearbox The gearbox changes the forward gears up and down automatically. Driving down hills The steeper the downhill gradient, the lower the gear that must be selected. Lower gears increase the braking effect of the engine. Never allow the vehicle to roll down mountains or hills in the neutral position . 1. Reduce your speed. 2. Push the selector lever from position to the right into the Tiptronic gate. 3. Tap the selector lever to the rear to change down gear. Or: shift down using the paddles on the steering wheel. Stopping and pulling away on uphill gradients The steeper the incline, the lower the gear that is required. if you stop the vehicle on an incline with a position selected, you must always prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards or forwards by depressing the brake pedal or by applying the handbrake. The brake pedal or the handbrake should not be released until you start to pull away → Coasting with DSG dual clutch gearbox ® In coasting mode, the momentum of the vehicle can be used to save fuel in conjunction with an anticipatory driving style. The engine no longer brakes the vehicle – the vehicle can roll for a longer distance. The function is available only in the selector lever position and at speeds of around 40 to 130 km/h ( around 25 to 80 mph). If you depress the brake when the vehicle is coasting to a stop, the engine remains switched off until the vehicle is stationary. When coming to a stop without braking, the engine restarts automatically at “creeping speed”. An automatic engine start may take place in order to ensure reliable engine restarting and to guarantee the power supply of the vehicle electrical system. Initiating coasting 1. Select the Eco driving profile from the driving profile selection.

  • Page 201: Kickdown Function

    Or: depress the accelerator or brake pedal briefly. Or: pull a paddle towards the steering wheel. Or: press selector lever to Tiptronic position. Or: change the driving profile. Kickdown function The kickdown function enables maximum acceleration in the selector lever position or in the Tiptronic position. If the accelerator is depressed fully, the gearbox will automatically shift to a lower gear, depending on the speed and engine speed. This will make use of the full vehicle acceleration. With the kickdown function, the gearbox does not shift up to the next gear until the engine reaches the maximum engine speed for the current gear. When the driving profile is selected in vehicles equipped with driving profile selection and the accelerator is depressed fully beyond the pressure point, the engine output is automatically regulated to ensure maximum vehicle acceleration. Launch Control Program Depending on equipment, vehicles with D SG dual clutch gearbox have a Launch Control Program. The Launch Control Program gives the vehicle maximum ® acceleration from a standing start. 1. Depending on the vehicle equipment, switch off the traction control system ( TCS Or: switch on ESC Sport. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot. 3. Move the selector lever in selector lever position to position or to the Tiptronic position. Or: depending on equipment, select the S port driving profile. Or: depending on equipment, select the R ace driving profile. 4. With your right foot, depress the accelerator until the engine speed reaches approximately 3,200 rpm. →...
  • Page 202 WARNING Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat. This can considerably reduce the braking effect, increase the braking distance and, in certain circumstances, cause the brake system to fail completely. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never “ride” the brake pedal or depress the brake pedal too often and for too long. NOTICE The gearbox is not lubricated if the vehicle rolls with the engine switched off. The dual clutch gearbox DSG could overheat and be damaged. ® ● If you stop the vehicle on an incline while a position is selected, do not attempt to stop it from rolling back by depressing the accelerator. ● Never allow the vehicle to roll in selector lever position , particularly if the engine is switched off. NOTICE ​ V ehicles with Launch Control Program: accelerating with the Launch Control Program places heavy strain on all vehicle components. This can lead to higher wear. ● Use the function only when the vehicle is at operating temperature. NOTICE If the brake pads “rub” due to light pressure on the brake pedal, this will increase wear. ● Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light pressure to the brake when it is not necessary to brake. Engine does not start The indicator lamp lights up green. Brake pedal was not depressed, e.g. when trying to engage another position with the selector lever. 1. To select a position, press the brake pedal. Lock button prevents you from driving off The indicator lamp flashes green. The lock button in the selector lever is not engaged. 1. Check whether the lock button is engaged. 2. Engage the lock button if necessary. Selector lever lock prevents you from driving off The indicator lamp flashes green. A text message is also displayed. In rare cases, the selector lever lock may not engage in vehicles with a DSG dual clutch gearbox.
  • Page 203 An acoustic signal may also be given. A text notification may also be shown on the instrument cluster display. The DSG dual clutch gearbox can become too hot as a result of moving off frequently on uphill gradients, for example. ® 1. Stop at the next opportunity and allow the gearbox to cool down with engaged parking lock and running → engine 2. Do not drive on if the indicator lamp does not go out. 3. Seek expert assistance. Failure to do so could result in considerable damage to the gearbox. Gearbox overheated The warning lamp lights up red. An acoustic signal may also be given. A text notification may also be shown on the instrument cluster display. The DSG dual clutch gearbox can become too hot as a result of moving off frequently on uphill gradients, for example. ® Do not drive on! → 1. Allow the gearbox to cool down with engaged parking lock and running engine 2. Do not drive if the warning lamp does not go out. 3. Seek expert assistance. Failure to do so could result in considerable damage to the gearbox. Releasing the selector lever lock manually Fig. 1 In the centre console: releasing the selector lever lock manually (variant 1). OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 204: Emergency Mode

    Fig. 2 In the centre console: releasing the selector lever lock manually (variant 2). If the power fails in the vehicle, e.g. due to a flat 12-volt vehicle battery, and the vehicle has to be pushed or towed, the selector lever lock must be released manually. Seek expert assistance. The manual release mechanism is located under the cover of the gearshift gate. Removing the cover of the gearshift gate: 1. Apply the handbrake firmly. If the handbrake cannot be applied firmly the vehicle will have to be prevented from rolling off using other means. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Carefully pull the cover upwards in the area around the selector lever gaiter with connected electrical wiring. 4. Pull the cover up and over the selector lever. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two possible manual release mechanisms for the selector lever lock. Releasing the selector lever lock manually: 1. Using the flat blade of a screwdriver, carefully push the release lever in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 1 (magnifying glass) and keep it in this position (variant 1) . → Fig. 2 Or: push the release lever in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this position ( variant 2). 2. Press the lock button on the front of the selector lever handle and move the selector lever into position . 3. After manual unlocking, carefully press the cover into the centre console while ensuring that the electrical wires are positioned correctly. WARNING If the parking lock is released and the handbrake is not applied, the vehicle can start moving unexpectedly when on uphill and downhill gradients. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never release the parking lock when the handbrake is not firmly applied. Emergency mode There is a fault in the system if all the displays on the instrument cluster for the selector lever positions have a light background. The DSG...

  • Page 205: Hill Start Assist

    ® In all cases, you should have the D SG dual clutch gearbox checked immediately by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a ® Volkswagen dealership. Vehicle does not move even though position is engaged If the vehicle will not move in the required direction, the system may have selected the position incorrectly. 1. Depress the brake pedal and reselect the position. 2. If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system fault. Seek expert assistance and have the system checked. NOTICE If the vehicle rolls for an extended period or at high speed with the engine switched off and with the selector lever in the position, the DSG dual clutch gearbox will be damaged. ® ● Do not allow the vehicle to roll for an extended period or at high speed with the engine switched off and in gear selector position , e.g. when being towed. NOTICE If the gearbox becomes too hot or overheats, this can lead to increased wear or damage to the component. ● Drive faster than around 20 km/h ( around 12 mph) or park the vehicle in a safe place immediately when a warning is displayed for the first time indicating that the gearbox has overheated. ● Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and switch off the engine if the text message and acoustic warning are repeated around every 10 seconds. ● Allow the gearbox to cool down. ● Continue driving only when the acoustic warning is no longer emitted. ● Avoid moving-off operations and driving at walking pace as long as the gearbox is overheated.
  • Page 206 —If the engine is not running smoothly or there is an engine fault. —If the engine is switched off or has stalled. —If the selector lever is the neutral position . CAUTION If you do not drive off immediately after releasing the brake pedal, the vehicle may roll backwards. This can lead to injuries or damage. ● In this case, depress the brake pedal immediately or apply the handbrake. ● Depress the brake pedal for a few seconds before moving off if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when driving off on an uphill gradient in dense traffic. Introduction to the topic By selecting different driving profiles, the driver can adapt the characteristics of the vehicle systems to the current driving situation, the desired ride comfort and an economical driving style. The adaptable vehicle systems include the chassis, steering, drive and the air conditioning system. Different driving profiles are available, depending on the vehicle equipment level. The effect on the vehicle systems in the individual driving profiles depends on the vehicle equipment level. Some settings can be stored in the personalised user accounts and therefore change when the user account changes. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 207 Selecting a driving profile The driving profile can be selected when the ignition is switched on and when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. WARNING Selecting a driving profile while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. If you have selected a driving profile while driving, the vehicle systems will be switched immediately to the new driving profile except for Drive. 1. To activate the newly selected driving profile for the D rive system also, take your foot off the accelerator as soon as permitted by the traffic situation. Selecting the driving profile via the MODE button Fig. 1 In the centre console: MODE button for driving profile selection. → Fig. 1 1. Press 2. To select driving profiles, press again or tap the desired driving profile in the Infotainment system. If the Normal driving profile is selected, the L ED in the MODE button will remain switched off, depending on the version. Displaying information on the driving profile 1. To display further information on the selected driving profile, tap in the Infotainment system. Selecting the Individual driving profile 1. Press 2. Select Individual in the Infotainment system. 3. To open the Individual menu, tap Change. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 208 Characteristics of the driving profiles The Eco driving profile switches the vehicle into economical mode and helps you to drive the vehicle in a fuel- efficient manner. The system automatically switches to gear position E when the Eco driving profile is selected. The Normal driving profile corresponds to the basic settings of the vehicle systems and offers a balanced setup, e.g. for everyday use. The Sport driving profile gives you a sporty driving feeling. If you select the Sport driving profile, position S will be selected on vehicles with an automatic gearbox. You can use the Individual driving profile to tailor individual vehicle systems to suit your personal requirements. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 209 Standard behaviour of the driving profiles and vehicle systems The Normal driving profile corresponds to the basic settings of the vehicle systems when the ignition is switched on. Behaviour of the driving profiles when the ignition is switched off and on If you switch the ignition off and then back on again, the previously selected driving profile remains selected. Behaviour of the Drive vehicle system when the ignition is switched off and on The settings of the Drive vehicle system are reset to the settings of the N ormal driving profile as soon as you switch the ignition off and on again. The other vehicle systems retain their settings. You can switch the Drive vehicle system to the desired driving profile again. 1. Select the desired driving profile again. Or: to activate the settings in the S port driving profile again, move the selector lever of the automatic gearbox back to the S position. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 210 Troubleshooting Fault in the “Sport Select” running gear The indicator lamp lights up white and together with the yellow central warning lamp . The message Fault: damper is displayed. 1. In this case, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The driving profiles or vehicle systems do not behave as expected. (→ Driving profile selection) 1. Note the standard behaviour of the driving profiles and vehicle systems OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 211: General Driving Tips

    General driving tips Think ahead when driving Repeated acceleration and braking will increase fuel consumption. Keeping a close eye on the traffic can help to avoid frequent acceleration and braking. Keeping your vehicle at a sufficient distance from the vehicle in front can help you to think ahead when driving. Avoid full throttle The rolling and air resistance increase at excessively high speeds. This in turn increases the force needed to move the vehicle. Never drive the vehicle at top speed. Observe the correct tyre pressures An inadequate tyre pressure does not just mean greater wear, but also increases the rolling resistance of the tyres and thus the fuel consumption. Use tyres with optimised rolling resistance. Adjust the tyre pressure according to the vehicle load: (→ Tyre pressure) — Observe the information on the tyre pressure sticker (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) —Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Use low viscosity engine oils Synthetic, low viscosity engine oils decrease frictional resistance in the engine and spread better and more quickly, especially for cold starts. WARNING Driving at high speed and without a sufficient safety distance can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 212 Running in the combustion engine A new combustion engine has to be run in during the first 1,500 km ( about 1,000 miles). All moving parts have to adapt themselves to each other. During the first few operating hours, the combustion engine has higher internal friction than it does later. Up to 1,000 km (around 600 miles) —Do not depress the accelerator fully. —Do not operate the combustion engine at more than 2/3 of the maximum engine speed. —Do not drive with a trailer attached. Between 1,000 and 1,500 km (around 600 to 1,000 miles) 1. Gradually increase speed and engine speed. The style of driving during the first 1,500 km ( about 1,000 miles) will also affect the quality of the combustion engine. Even after this time – and especially with a cold combustion engine – drive the vehicle at moderate speeds in order to reduce engine wear and to increase the mileage that the engine can cover. New tyres and brake pads have to be run in carefully. NOTICE Driving with an engine speed that is too low can lead to increased wear and damage to the engine. ● Do not drive at engine speeds that are too low. ● Shift down a gear if the combustion engine is not running “smoothly”. If the new combustion engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption reduced. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 213: Gear-Change Indicator

    Gear-change indicator Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: gear-change indicator. A Currently selected gear. B Recommended gear. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the instrument cluster display may indicate which gear should be selected in order to reduce fuel consumption while the vehicle is in motion → Fig. 1 Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: the gearbox must be in Tiptronic mode for this. No recommended gear is indicated if the most suitable gear is already selected. The currently selected gear is displayed. CAUTION The gear-change indicator is designed only to assist the driver and cannot replace the driver’s attention and responsibility. Accidents and injuries can occur if an unsuitable gear is selected for the driving situation. ● Always select the correct gear for the respective driving situation, e.g. when overtaking or driving downhill. Driving in the correct gear can help to reduce fuel consumption. The gear-change indicator display goes out when the clutch is depressed in vehicles with a manual gearbox or when the Tiptronic position is deselected in vehicles with an automatic gearbox. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 214: Driving Economically

    Driving economically Adopting the correct driving style can reduce fuel consumption, pollution and wear-and-tear on the engine, brakes and tyres. The following section lists a few tips for easing the strain on the environment and your bank account. Fig. 1 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at two different outside temperatures. Use coasting Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: When the selector lever is in position and neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed, the vehicle will roll (“coast”) with practically no energy being consumed. Change gear to save energy Shifting up early at engine speeds of 2,000 rpm can save energy. Do not drive gears to the limit and avoid high revs. —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: change from first to second gear immediately after moving off. — Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: accelerate slowly and avoid using the kickdown function. (→ Gear-change indicator) —Pay attention to the gear-change indicator driving profile if possible. —Use the Reduce idling Drive off immediately at low engine speeds. If you are stopped for a long period, do not allow the engine to idle but switch it off, e.g. when in a traffic jam or at a railway crossing. In vehicles with an activated start/stop system, the engine can switch off automatically when the vehicle is stopping and when the vehicle is stationary. Do not overfill the fuel tank Filling the fuel tank all the way to the top will increase the vehicle weight. A fuel tank that is half to three quarters full is sufficient for urban journeys in particular. Avoid short journeys Engines consume a lot of fuel when cold. They do not reach optimum operating temperature until the vehicle has travelled a few kilometres (miles). The fuel consumption is above average at very low ambient temperatures, e.g. in winter → Fig. 1 . Plan your journeys economically and combine several short trips. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 215: Save Energy

    Have your vehicle serviced on a regular basis Regular maintenance is an essential prerequisite for economical driving and increases the service life of the vehicle. Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the vehicle You can reduce fuel consumption by clearing out the luggage compartment before setting off, for example by removing empty drink crates or unused child seats. To keep the air resistance of your vehicle as low as possible, remove any add-on parts and equipment once you have finished using them. Save energy The alternator powered by the engine generates electricity for convenience functions, such as the air conditioning system, windscreen heating or ventilation system. Saving electrical energy is easy, for example: —At high ambient temperatures, ventilate the car before starting a journey and drive a short distance with open window. Only then switch on the air conditioning system. —Switch off convenience systems as soon as they have served their purpose. NOTICE The gearbox is not lubricated if the vehicle rolls down mountains or hills in neutral position . The automatic gearbox could overheat and be damaged. ● Do not allow the vehicle to roll in neutral position , particularly if the engine is switched off. Your Volkswagen dealership will gladly provide you with further information on correct maintenance and replacement parts that are particularly energy-efficient, e.g. new tyres. In vehicles equipped with active cylinder management (ACT ) depending on the equipment level, engine cylinders can be automatically deactivated in driving situations with low power requirements. When a cylinder is deactivated, no fuel is injected into that cylinder, which leads to an overall reduction in fuel consumption. Driving a loaded vehicle For good vehicle handling when driving a loaded vehicle, please observe the following: —Stow all items of luggage securely . —Accelerate particularly cautiously and carefully. —Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. —Brake earlier than in normal driving. (→ Roof carrier) —If applicable, observe the information concerning the roof carrier —If applicable, observe the information about driving with a trailer . WARNING Shifting loads can severely impair the vehicle’s stability and driving safety and lengthen the braking distance in the event of hard or emergency braking. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Secure the load properly to prevent it from slipping.
  • Page 216 Driving with an open boot lid Driving with an open boot lid is particularly dangerous. Ensure that the open tailgate and any objects are secured properly, and take appropriate measures to reduce the quantity of toxic exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. WARNING When driving with the boot lid unlocked or open, loose items can fall out of the vehicle and hit following road users. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always drive with the boot lid closed. ● Stow all items securely in the luggage compartment. ● Always drive carefully and ensure that you think ahead. ● Avoid any abrupt or sudden driving and braking manoeuvres as this can cause the open boot lid to move unpredictably. ● If it is necessary to drive with the boot lid open, always remove a luggage rack and its load from the boot lid. WARNING Items that protrude from the luggage compartment change the length of the vehicle and may endanger other road users. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Observe legal requirements. ● Mark any objects protruding from the luggage compartment to ensure that they are visible to other road users. ● Never use the boot lid to jam or fix objects in position. WARNING Among other things, exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. When driving with the boot lid open, toxic exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior and lead to unconsciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always drive with the boot lid closed in order to prevent poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. ● Close all windows. ● Close the glass roof. ● Switch off air recirculation mode. ● Open all vents in the dash panel. ●...

  • Page 217: Driving Through Water On Roads

    Driving through water on roads Please follow these rules to help prevent damage to your vehicle when driving through water, for example if the road is flooded: → — The water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body —Do not drive faster than walking speed. —Never stop the vehicle, reverse or switch off the engine while in water. —Oncoming vehicles will create waves that could increase the water level for your vehicle to such an extent that it is not safe to drive through the water. —Always deactivate the start/stop system manually when driving through water . WARNING After driving through water, mud, slush etc., the brakes may react slowly and the braking distance will be increased as the brake discs and pads will be wet, or possibly iced up in winter. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Carry out careful braking manoeuvres to dry and de-ice the brakes. ● Do not endanger other road users when performing braking manoeuvres and do not ignore any legal requirements. ● Avoid abrupt and sudden braking manoeuvres directly after driving through water. NOTICE If you drive through water, parts of the vehicle, e.g. electronics, could sustain severe damage or corrode. ● Never drive through salt water. ● Immediately rinse all vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water using fresh water. ● Protect electronic components from contact with water. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 218 Using the vehicle in other countries and continents Registration regulations The vehicle has been manufactured specifically for a particular country and complies with the requirements and registration regulations that applied in that country at the time of vehicle production → If you want to use the vehicle abroad temporarily or for a short period, all relevant information and instructions should be followed. Safety standards and regulations In some countries, special safety standards and regulations apply that the vehicle may not comply with. Volkswagen recommends that you visit your Volkswagen dealership before travelling abroad to find out about any legal requirements at your destination. Selling the vehicle abroad If the vehicle is going to be sold in another country or used in another country for an extended period, the legal requirements applicable in that country must be observed. In some cases, certain equipment will have to be fitted or removed and functions deactivated. The scope of servicing and the type of servicing could also be affected. This is particularly important if the vehicle is driven in another climatic region for a long period of time. Functioning of the Infotainment system Because different frequency bands are used in different countries, the factory-fitted Infotainment system may not work in other countries. Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by low-quality fuel, inadequate servicing work or lack of availability of Genuine Parts. Volkswagen cannot be held responsible if the vehicle does not comply with or only partly complies with the relevant legal requirements in other countries and continents. WARNING The density of air decreases with increasing altitude. The lower air density can result in a reduction in engine power and vehicle components may be damaged if the vehicle is driven for an extended period at very high altitudes. A reduction in the engine power can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries, e.g. when overtaking. ● Consult a suitably qualified workshop before driving abroad, particularly if the vehicle will be driven at altitudes of more than 3,000 m (around 9,843 ft) above sea level. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 219 Introduction to the topic Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has driver assist systems that increase comfort and convenience when driving. Some of these driver assist systems use sensors or cameras for operation (also referred to as “sensors” below). These are visible to you in some cases and in other cases not. The sensors and cameras visually detect the vehicle surroundings using ultrasound or radar waves. Installed sensors Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following sensors may be installed: —Radar sensor in the front of the vehicle. —Radar sensors in the rear of the vehicle. —Camera behind the windscreen. —Ultrasound sensors in the front of the vehicle. —Ultrasound sensors in the rear of the vehicle. Information on the respective sensor locations is provided in the vehicle overviews WARNING The driver assist systems cannot replace the driver’s attention and operate only within the limits of the respective system. The driver assist systems cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may warn or react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Observe the limits of the sensors and the system limits of the individual systems. ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Be ready at all times to override or cancel automatic interventions. ● Observe the information on the instrument cluster display and respond according to the displays if permitted by the traffic situation. ● Do not use the driver assist systems if you suspect there is a problem or damage. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 220 Limits of the sensors Limits of the radar sensors Driver assist systems that use radar sensors can react unexpectedly, with a delay or not at all in the following situations: —Driving in poor weather conditions, e.g. heavy rain, snow or heavy spray. —Driving through road works, tunnels or toll stations. —Driving on winding roads, e.g. mountain roads. —Over crests or through dips. —Driving offroad. —Driving in multi-storey car parks. —Driving on roads with embedded metal objects, e.g. railway tracks. —Driving on roads with loose chippings. —In complex driving situations, e.g. traffic islands. —After external force on components in the area of the radar sensors, e.g. after a rear-end collision. —If the radar sensors are covered, dirty, incorrectly adjusted or damaged. Limits of the camera behind the windscreen Driver assist systems that use the camera behind the windscreen can react unexpectedly, with a delay or not at all in the following situations: —Over crests or through dips. —Driving through road works. —Driving offroad. —Driving in poor weather conditions, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog or heavy spray, and on poor roads. —When the sun is low in the sky, in darkness or with glare from oncoming vehicles. —If the camera is temporarily not available due to prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or high ambient temperatures. —If the camera window is covered, dirty or damaged. —If the camera is displaced. Delayed response If the sensor system is exposed to environmental conditions that impair sensor functioning, the driver assist systems may detect this only after a certain delay. For this reason, any restrictions to functions may be displayed only after a delay at the start of the journey and when driving . Limits in certain driving situations OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 221: Speed Range

    Fig. 1 Driving through bends. The sensors always measure straight ahead. For this reason, vehicles may be incorrectly detected or vehicles driving ahead not detected in tight bends. Fig. 2 Narrow vehicle. Vehicles that are driving outside the sensor range in close proximity to your vehicle, e.g. motorbikes, cannot be detected. Fig. 3 Vehicle changes lane. Vehicles that change into your lane directly in front of your vehicle cannot be detected. This also applies to vehicles with bodies or attachments that project beyond the vehicle. Specific system limits In addition to the limits of the sensors, each driver assist system also has additional functionally related system limits. Also observe these: (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) —Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (→ Predictive cruise control system) —Predictive cruise control system (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) —Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) (→ Lane keeping system (Lane Assist)) —Lane keeping system (Lane Assist) (→ Travel Assist) —Semi-automated driving assistance (Travel Assist) (→ Lane change system (Side Assist)) —Lane change system (Side Assist) Introduction to the topic The cruise control system helps to maintain a speed set by the driver. Speed range The cruise control system is available when driving forwards at speeds from around 20 km/h (around 15 mph). Driving with the cruise control system You can exceed the stored speed at any time, e.g. to overtake. Control is interrupted for the duration of the acceleration manoeuvre and is then resumed with the stored speed. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 222: Changing Gear

    Displays When the cruise control system is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the stored speed and the status of the cruise control system. Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, the following warning lamps light up: Cruise control system switched on, control active. The indicator lamps are displayed small or grey when the cruise control system is not active. If no speed is stored, the instrument cluster display shows instead of the speed. Changing gear Cruise control is interrupted as soon as you depress the clutch pedal and is resumed automatically after the gear change. Driving downhill The vehicle cannot maintain the stored speed in all driving situations. Always be prepared to brake the vehicle. 1. Shift down before extended downhill stretches. In this way you will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. WARNING The use of the cruise control system can lead to accidents and serious injuries or even death if traffic does not allow you to drive at a safe distance from the vehicle in front at a constant speed. ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The driver is responsible for the vehicle speed at all times. ● Never use the cruise control system in heavy traffic, if the distance to the vehicles in front is insufficient, on steep or winding roads, on slippery road surfaces, e.g. due to snow, ice, on wet roads, loose chippings, or on flooded roads. ● Never use the cruise control system when driving offroad or on unpaved road surfaces. Operating the cruise control system Fig. 1 Lefthand side of the multifunction steering wheel (Variant 1) OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 223: Adjusting The Speed

    Fig. 2 Lefthand side of the multifunction steering wheel (Variant 2) Switching on 1. Press the button. No speed is stored. The system is not yet active. Starting control 1. While driving, press the button. The cruise control system stores and regulates the current speed. Adjusting the speed You can adjust the stored speed during speed control by the cruise control system: + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from bottom to top. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from top to bottom. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next lower ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment Press and hold the or button to continuously change the stored speed. The vehicle adapts the current speed by accelerating or closing the throttle. The vehicle does not actively brake. Cancelling control 1. Briefly press the or button.

  • Page 224: Switching Off

    WARNING There is a risk of an accident if you unintentionally resume a stored speed or if the stored speed is too high for the current road, traffic and weather conditions. This can cause serious injuries or death. ● Check whether the stored speed is suitable for the current road, traffic and weather conditions before you resume cruise control. ● Switch off the cruise control system when you do not need it. Switching off 1. Press and hold the button. The cruise control system is switched off and the stored speed is deleted. Changing to the speed limiter 1. Press the button. 2. Select the speed limiter on the instrument cluster display. The cruise control system is switched off. Depending on equipment, the button is either on the multifunction steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. Troubleshooting Cruise control system faulty Malfunction. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. 1. Switch off the cruise control system and go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Control is interrupted automatically —You have kept the clutch depressed for an extended period. —The vehicle has exceeded the stored speed for an extended period. —No gear is engaged for forward travel. —Brake support systems, e.g. TCS or ESC, have performed an intervention. —The vehicle was braked by the Autonomous Emergency Braking system ( Front Assist). —If the problem persists, switch off the cruise control system and go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 225 Introduction to the topic The speed limiter helps to prevent the vehicle from exceeding a speed that you have stored. Speed range The speed limiter is available when driving forwards at speeds from around 30 km/h (around 20 mph). Driving with the speed limiter You can interrupt the speed limiter function at any time by fully depressing the accelerator beyond the point of resistance. As soon as the stored speed is exceeded, the green indicator lamp will flash and an acoustic warning may sound. The speed remains stored in the memory. The speed limiter function is activated again automatically as soon as the speed drops below the stored speed. Displays When the speed limiter is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the stored speed and the status of the speed limiter. Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, the following warning lamps light up: Speed limiter switched on, system control active. The indicator lamps are displayed small or grey when the speed limiter is not active. Driving downhill The vehicle cannot maintain the stored speed in all driving situations. Always be prepared to brake the vehicle. 1. Shift down before extended downhill stretches. In this way you will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. WARNING Use of the speed limiter in adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injuries or even death. ● Ensure that your speed is always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. The driver is responsible for the vehicle speed at all times. ● Do not drive at full throttle if this is not necessary. ● Never use the speed limiter on slippery roads ( e.g. as a result of aquaplaning, snow, ice or leaves) . ● In order to avoid unintentional control interventions, switch off the speed limiter when you do not need it. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 226: Operating The Speed Limiter

    Operating the speed limiter Fig. 1 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel (variant 1) Fig. 2 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel (variant 2) Switching on 1. Press the button. No speed is stored. The system is not yet active. Starting control 1. While driving, press the button. The current speed is stored as the maximum speed. Adjusting the speed You can adjust the stored speed: + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 227 - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button. + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from bottom to top. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from top to bottom. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next lower ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment Press and hold the or button to continuously change the stored speed. Cancelling control 1. Press the button or The speed remains stored in the memory. Resuming control 1. Press the button. Switching off 1. Press and hold the button. The speed limiter is switched off and the saved speed is deleted. Switch to other driver assist systems Depending on the equipment, you can switch to the following driver assist systems: —Cruise Control System. —Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC 1. Press the button. 2. Select the desired system on the instrument cluster display. The speed limiter is switched off.
  • Page 228 Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. For safety reasons, the speed limiter switches itself off completely only when you release the accelerator once or switch off the system manually. Introduction to the topic The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed that you have set. If the vehicle approaches a vehicle in front, the ACC automatically adapts the speed so that a distance you have selected is maintained. Does the vehicle have ACC? The vehicle is equipped with A CC if you can adjust settings for ACC in the Assist systems menu in the Infotainment system. Speed range You can set a speed between 30 km/h ( 20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). Depending on equipment and country, the maximum speed that can be set may be lower. Driving with ACC You can override a control intervention by the A CC system at any time. Cruise control will be stopped if you brake. If you accelerate, control will be interrupted while you are accelerating and then resumed with the set speed. The intervention by the A CC system is less dynamic when towing a trailer. Driver intervention prompt If automatic deceleration by the ACC system is not sufficient or the system limits have been reached, the ACC system will request you to brake additionally by a corresponding message on the instrument cluster. In addition, the red warning lamp lights up and an acoustic warning is given. Take over control of the vehicle and be prepared to brake. WARNING cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. ACC cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) ● Observe the system limits ●...

  • Page 229: Special Driving Situations

    Special driving situations The functions described below are dependent on the equipment level and are not available in all countries. Predictive cruise control system If the vehicle is equipped with the Dynamic Road Sign Display function and an Infotainment system with navigation, can predictively adapt the vehicle speed to detected speed limits and the course of the road ahead. Overtaking If you indicate left (left-hand traffic: indicate right) to overtake, ACC will accelerate the vehicle and reduce the distance from the vehicle in front. Your set speed will not be exceeded. If ACC does not detect any vehicle in front after you have changed lane, ACC will accelerate the vehicle up to the set speed. Stop-and-go traffic can brake vehicles with an automatic gearbox to a standstill and hold them stationary for a few seconds. ACC remains active and the instrument cluster display shows ACC ready. During this time the vehicle will move off again automatically as soon as the vehicle in front moves off. After this time, the vehicle will automatically release the brakes. The vehicle will be free to roll and ACC control will be cancelled. Extend readiness to drive: —Depress the brake pedal. remains active as long as the brake pedal is depressed. When you take your foot off the brake pedal, ACC remains ready to pull away for a few seconds. button. —Press the Readiness to move off is prolonged for a few seconds. The readiness to move off is ended if the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. WARNING If the message ACC ready to start is shown on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your vehicle will move off automatically. In some cases, obstacles in the vehicle's path may not be detected. This can result in serious injury and accidents. ● Always check the road ahead before moving off and brake the vehicle if necessary. Inside Overtaking Prevention System OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 230 Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: slower vehicle detected in the left-hand lane (illustration). ​ V ehicles with Inside Overtaking Prevention System: If ACC detects a slower vehicle in the left-hand lane (left-hand traffic: in the right-hand lane) , ACC will brake the vehicle gently within the system limits and can therefore prevent a prohibited overtaking manoeuvre. The function is active from a speed of around 80 km/h (around 50 mph). ​ V ehicles without Inside Overtaking Prevention System: When driving on a multi-lane road, cancel control if vehicles in the overtaking lane are driving more slowly. System limits of ACC Limits of the sensors detects driving situations by means of the radar and ultrasound sensors in the front of the vehicle and the camera behind the windscreen. The range of the radar sensor is up to approximately 120 m (around 400 ft). WARNING If you use ACC in driving situations that are outside the system limits, this could result in accidents and serious injuries, as well as violations of legal regulations. ● Observe the limits of the sensors (→ Sensors) and cancel control in the specified situations. Objects that cannot be detected detects only vehicles that are moving in the same direction or stationary. The following are not detected: —Persons. —Animals. —Crossing or oncoming vehicles. —Other stationary obstacles. Stationary vehicles OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 231 Fig. 1 Stationary vehicle. reacts to stationary vehicles to a limited extent up to a speed of around 60 km/h (around 37 mph), provided a stationary vehicle is detected and your own vehicle can be comfortably braked behind the stationary vehicle, subject to the system limits of the ACC. ACC does not perform emergency braking → Fig. 1 The response to stationary vehicles depends on the vehicle equipment and is not available in all countries. Switching the ACC on and off Fig. 1 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel (variant 1) Fig. 2 Left-hand side of the multifunction steering wheel (variant 2) Switching on 1. Press the button. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 232 is not yet performing a control intervention. Starting control 1. While driving forwards, press the button. stores the current speed and maintains the set distance. If the current speed is outside the defined speed range, ACC will set the minimum speed when driving more slowly than the limit or the maximum speed when driving faster than the limit. In addition, the traction control system (TCS ) is activated and E SC Sport is deactivated. The following indicator lamps light up, depending on the driving situation: has taken control; no vehicle detected ahead. has taken control; vehicle detected ahead. When ACC is not active, the indicator lamps light up grey. Cancelling control 1. Briefly press the button. Or: depress the brake pedal. The indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up grey, the speed and distance remain stored. Control is automatically cancelled if the traction control system ( T CS ) is deactivated. Resuming control 1. Press the button. adopts the last set speed and last set distance. The instrument cluster display shows the set speed and the indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up. Switching off 1. Press and hold the button. The set speed is deleted. Changing to the speed limiter 1. Press the button. 2. Select the speed limiter on the instrument cluster display.

  • Page 233: Setting The Distance

    is switched off. Depending on equipment, the button is either on the multifunction steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. Setting the ACC Setting the distance Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: set distance for control (illustration). You can set the distance in five steps from very small to very large: 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button or . Steering wheel variant 2: Alternatively, swipe vertically over the button area from to or . Or: press the button repeatedly until the required distance is selected. 1 . Please observe any country-specific The instrument cluster display shows the chosen setting → Fig. 1 regulations for the minimum distance. In the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system, you can choose whether you want to start control with the distance set at the end of the journey or a preselected distance. If the ACC has not taken control, the set distance and vehicle are not highlighted on the instrument cluster display. Adjusting the speed You can adjust the stored speed within the defined speed range by means of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel: + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button, only when ACC is active. - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button, only when ACC is active.

  • Page 234: Acc Not Available

    + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from bottom to top. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from top to bottom. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next lower ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment Press and hold the corresponding button to continuously change the stored speed. WARNING cannot detect all driving situations correctly. If you do not maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front or if the difference in speed between the vehicle in front and your own vehicle is so great that the braking action of ACC is insufficient, you are in danger of colliding with the vehicle in front. This can cause serious injuries or death. ● Always be prepared to brake the vehicle yourself. ● Press the accelerator to override Adaptive Cruise Control. A CC does not brake automatically in this case. ● ● Observe any country-specific regulations relating to the minimum distance. ● Always set a larger distance in wet or snowy conditions or when visibility is poor. Setting the system behaviour You can influence how dynamically A CC reacts: —​ V ehicles with driving profile selection: Set preferred driving profile. —​ V ehicles without driving profile selection: Select the desired gearbox program in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system.
  • Page 235 —The genuine Volkswagen badge is not used. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The ACC does not function as expected (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor (→ Vehicle care) —The ultrasound sensors are dirty, covered or damaged. Clean the ultrasound sensors Keep the area around the ultrasound sensors clear and check whether there is any visible damage (→ Accessories and replacement parts) (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) —The system limits have been exceeded —The brakes have overheated, control was cancelled automatically. Allow the brakes to cool down and check their functionality again. —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. (→ Vehicle Depending on the malfunction, additional information may be displayed in the vehicle status settings menu) Control cannot be started Make sure that the following conditions are met: —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: A forward gear other than 1st gear has been engaged and the speed is at least 25 km/h (16 mph). —Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A position has been selected for driving forward. —The brake lights on the vehicle are working. —The brake lights on the electrically connected trailer are in working order. —ESC is not performing a control intervention. —If control is to be started while the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. Otherwise, do not depress the brake pedal. Unusual noises during automatic braking This is normal and is not a fault. Introduction to the topic The predictive cruise control adapts the vehicle speed to detected speed limits and the course of the road ahead, e.g. bends, junctions, roundabouts. The predictive cruise control is an extension of A CC and makes use of Dynamic Road Sign Display and the navigation data provided in the Infotainment system.

  • Page 236: Function Limitations

    even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is responsible for the stored vehicle speed at all times. (→ Predictive cruise control system) ● Observe the system limits ● Ensure that your speed is always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. ● Keep the navigation data up-to-date. ● Always observe the maximum speed limit. ● Please note that the speeds regulated by the system do not necessarily correspond to your driving style. Also observe the system limits and the information for System limits of predictive cruise control In addition to the system limits of the Dynamic Road Sign Display function and ACC , the predictive cruise control function is subject to the following additional, system-related limitations: —The predictive cruise control function detects only road signs that show a speed limit. In particular, predictive cruise control does not take into account any rights of way or traffic lights. —Road signs that indicate a speed limit indirectly, e.g. place-name signs, will be detected only on the basis of the navigation data. —Predictive cruise control is not available on roads which are not recorded in the navigation data or not recorded with sufficient accuracy. —If a speed limit is announced on the basis of the navigation data but is not detected by the Dynamic Road Sign Display function, the announced speed will be reset to the last-stored speed. (→ Adaptive —The predictive cruise control system cannot perform control at speeds below the minimum speed Cruise Control (ACC)) Function limitations In the following situations, it is possible that the predictive cruise control will not change the speed or will change it with a delay or in an unexpected way: —There is a fault in the Dynamic Road Sign Display system. No speed limit is shown in the instrument cluster display. — Road signs are not detected or are not detected correctly. —The navigation data is out-of-date. —You are driving without route guidance. —You leave the route calculated by the navigation system.
  • Page 237 Activating predictive cruise control You can adjust the settings for the events to which the vehicle should react: —Reaction to the road layout. —Reaction to the permitted speed. In the Infotainment system: 1. Open the Assist systems menu. 2. Select Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC 3. Adjust the setting as desired. If you have activated at least one event, predictive cruise control will also be switched on automatically when ACC is switched on. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 238 Driving with predictive cruise control Driving with route guidance When you drive with route guidance, the predictive cruise control will adapt the speed to the entered route. Driving without route guidance When you drive without route guidance, the predictive cruise control will adapt the speed to the most probable route. Displays A message will be displayed on the instrument cluster display as soon as the system detects a speed limit or will reduce the speed due to the course of the road ahead. This message indicates the reason and the speed to which your vehicle will be regulated. Speed regulation due to speed limit. Speed regulation due to the road layout. When automatic speed control is assumed due to a speed limit, the detected speed is stored as the new desired speed. In the case of control due to the road layout, the vehicle will subsequently accelerate back up to the previously stored speed. Announced speeds for driving through bends depend on the driving profile . Cancelling speed adaptation During the announcement: 1. Press the button. During control intervention: 1. Press the button. Adjusting the announced speed The announced speed can be adjusted only in the case of speed regulation due to a speed limit. + 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button only when ACC is active. - 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button only when ACC is active. + 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from bottom to top. The first time it is pressed, it jumps to the next higher ten (km/h) or five (mph) increment. - 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button. Steering wheel variant 2: alternatively, swipe over the button from top to bottom.
  • Page 239 If a speed limit is detected, the predictive cruise control function will adjust the stored speed even if is deactivated. However, speed regulation will not take place. When a speed limit is lifted on a motorway, the recommended speed will automatically be stored as the desired speed. However, if a higher speed has previously been stored on a motorway without a speed limit, this will be adopted instead of the recommended speed. Troubleshooting A message is displayed that predictive cruise control is currently not available or is not available in your country 1. If this message is displayed for an extended period and predictive cruise control is available in your country, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Depending on the malfunction, additional information may be displayed in the vehicle status (→ Vehicle settings menu) OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 240: Automatic Braking

    Front Assist functions only within the system limits. The warning times vary depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. Functions Front Assist includes the following additional functions depending on vehicle equipment and country: —Pedestrian Monitoring. —Cyclist Monitoring. The listed functions are automatically active when Front Assist is switched on. Detectable objects Front Assist can detect the following objects depending on vehicle equipment and country: —Vehicles. —Bicycles and motorcycles. — Pedestrians. Driving with Front Assist You can cancel the automatic braking interventions by steering or pressing the accelerator. Automatic braking Front Assist can decelerate the vehicle to a standstill. The vehicle will then not be held permanently. Depress the brake pedal! The brake pedal will feel harder during an automatic braking operation. WARNING Front Assist cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Front Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) ● Observe the system limits ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● You should consider cancelling the automatic interventions by Front Assist if necessary. ● If Front Assist issues a warning, brake your vehicle immediately depending on the traffic situation or avoid the obstacle. ● If you are unsure about what systems your vehicle has depending on the vehicle equipment and country, please enquire at a suitably qualified workshop before starting your journey. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 241 Warning levels and braking intervention Speed ranges Front Assist provides maximum assistance in the following speed ranges: —Reaction to vehicles: around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) to around 250 km/h (around 155 mph) . —Reaction to bicycles and motorcycles: around 5 km/h ( around 3 mph) to around 250 km/h (around 155 mph) . —Reaction to pedestrians: around 5 km/h (around 3 mph) to around 85 km/h (around 53 mph) . The assistance may include an advance warning, an urgent warning and automatic braking or a braking intervention. A distance warning may also be displayed. Influencing factors Whether and in what speed range Front Assist reacts to the specified objects depends on the following factors: —Type of object. —Direction of travel of the object. —Speed of the object. —Speed of the vehicle. The operating range may therefore be restricted if the vehicle approaches an object very quickly and there is therefore little time for a reaction. In addition, not all warning levels are used in all situations. Depending on speed, there may not be an advance warning or an urgent warning, for example. Instead, automatic braking may take place immediately in order to ensure optimum protection for the object. Distance warning Front Assist detects when safety is endangered by driving too close to the vehicle in front. The indicator lamp lights up. Increase the distance. Advance warning Front Assist detects a possible collision and prepares the vehicle for possible emergency braking. An acoustic warning sounds and the red warning lamp lights up. Brake or take avoiding action. Urgent warning If you do not react to the advance warning, the system may initiate a short braking jolt in order to draw attention to the increasing collision risk. Brake or take avoiding action. Automatic braking Front Assist can brake the vehicle automatically in several stages with increasing braking force. The reduced speed means that it is possible to minimise the consequences of an accident. Braking intervention If the system detects that you are braking insufficiently when there is a risk of collision, Front Assist can increase the OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 242 braking force and help prevent a collision. The braking intervention takes place only for as long as you press the brake pedal hard. System limits of Front Assist Limits of the sensors Front Assist detects driving situations by means of the radar sensor at the front of the vehicle. The range of the radar sensor is up to approximately 120 m (around 400 ft). (→ Sensors) Observe the limits of the radar sensor . Always pay due attention and intervene yourself if necessary. After vehicle start Immediately after vehicle start or after a system restart, Front Assist is not available or only partially available. The white indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster display during this time. Objects that cannot be detected Front Assist cannot react – or will react with a delay – in the case of the following objects: —Oncoming vehicles or vehicles crossing your path. —Stationary or oncoming pedestrians; generally no reaction to persons without Pedestrian Monitoring. —Stationary or oncoming cyclists; additionally no reaction to crossing cyclists without Cyclist Monitoring. —When pedestrians and cyclists are not detected, for example because they are partially or fully hidden. Function limitations In addition to the situations specified in the section on the limits of the sensors, Front Assist may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way in the following situations, among others: —Reversing. —If TCS is switched off manually. —If ESC is performing a control intervention. —If ESC Sport (depending on equipment) is switched on (→ Brake support systems) —If several brake lights on the vehicle are faulty. —If there is a fault in several brake lights on a trailer with an electrical connection to the vehicle. —If the vehicle accelerates hard or the accelerator is fully depressed. —In unclear traffic situations, e.g. vehicles ahead are braking heavily or turning off. —If there is a fault in Front Assist. Switching off Front Assist Front Assist is not suitable for use in the following situations due to the limitations of the system and must be → switched off —If the vehicle is utilised in a capacity beyond usage on public roads, e.g. off-road or on a race track. —If the vehicle is being towed or is loaded onto another vehicle.

  • Page 243: Switching On And Off

    —If the radar sensor is covered by any auxiliary equipment, e.g. auxiliary headlights. —If the radar sensor is faulty. —After external force on components in the area of the radar sensor, e.g. after a rear-end collision. —In the event of multiple unwanted interventions. WARNING If you use Front Assist in the situations mentioned, this can result in accidents and serious injuries or even death. ● Switch off Front Assist in the specified situations. Operating Front Assist Front Assist and the advance warning ( in some countries) are automatically switched on when you switch on the ignition. However, Front Assist is not available or only partially available as long as the white indicator lamp is lit up. Volkswagen recommends that Front Assist and also the distance and advance warnings are switched on at all times. (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) Exceptions Switching on and off You can switch Front Assist on and off manually and view the activation status. On the display of the instrument cluster: 1. Press the button. 2. Switching Front Assist on or off. Depending on equipment, the button is either on the multifunction steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. In the Infotainment system: 1. Open the Assist systems menu. 2. Switch Front Assist on or off in the corresponding submenu. If you switch off Front Assist, the advance warning and distance warning will also be switched off. The yellow indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster display. Setting the distance and advance warnings If Front Assist is switched on, you can make the following settings in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system, depending on the vehicle equipment and country: —Switch the distance warning on and off. —Switch the advance warning on and off.
  • Page 244 Troubleshooting Front Assist is starting up The indicator lamp lights up white. —Front Assist is temporarily unavailable or limited. Front Assist is available after driving straight ahead for a short time, and the indicator light goes out. When the vehicle is not in motion, the indicator lamp lights up continuously. Front Assist is not available, the radar sensor does not have sufficient visibility (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor —The view of the radar sensor is impaired due to the weather conditions, e.g. snow, or due to detergent deposits or (→ Vehicle care) coatings. Clean the radar sensor —The view of the radar sensor is impaired by add-on parts, number plate holders with trim frames or stickers. Keep (→ Accessories and replacement parts) the area around the radar sensor free —The radar sensor has been displaced or damaged, e.g. due to damage to the front of the vehicle. Check whether damage is visible (→ Accessories and replacement parts) (→ Repairs and technical —Paint work or structural modifications were carried out on the front of the vehicle modifications) —The genuine Volkswagen badge is not used. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. —If the problem persists, switch off Front Assist and go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Front Assist does not function as expected or is triggered unnecessarily several times (→ Vehicle care) —The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor (→ Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist)) —The system limits have been exceeded —If the problem persists, switch off Front Assist and go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 245: Speed Range

    Introduction to the topic Within the system limits, the lane keeping system ( Lane Assist) helps the driver to stay in lane. The function is not designed to keep the vehicle in lane automatically, nor is it suited to this purpose. If your vehicle moves too close to a recognised road lane marking, Lane Assist will warn the driver with a corrective steering intervention. The corrective steering intervention can be overridden by the driver at any time. Speed range When road lane markings can be detected, Lane Assist is ready to intervene at speeds above around 60 km/h (around 35 mph) within the system limits (system status active). WARNING Lane Assist cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Lane Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for staying in the lane. (→ Lane keeping system (Lane Assist)) ● Observe the system limits ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Your hands should always be on the steering wheel so that you can steer at any time. ● Immediately override any undesired intervention by the system by steering. ● Observe the information on the instrument cluster display and respond according to the prompts, if permitted by the traffic situation. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 246 System limits of Lane Assist Limits of the sensors Lane Assist detects road lane markings by means of the camera behind the windscreen. (→ Sensors) Observe the limits of the camera . Always pay due attention and intervene yourself if necessary. Road lane marking that are not detected or not detected correctly Lane Assist cannot recognise all road lane markings correctly. If road lane markings are not recognised or are incorrectly recognised as such, this may mean that supporting control interventions do not take place or Lane Assist may perform undesired control interventions. In addition to the situations specified in the section on the camera limits, this can occur in the following situations, among others: —If there are no road lane markings. —If the driving style is very dynamic. —When not driving on motorways or well-developed country roads. —On poor roads, or if road structures or objects are present. —If there are reflections or glare effects. Always pay attention and intervene yourself and override an undesired system intervention immediately if necessary. Switch off Lane Assist temporarily if necessary. Lane Assist not ready to perform control interventions Lane Assist is not ready to perform control interventions under the following conditions (passive system status): — The vehicle speed is under around 55 km/h ( approximately 30 mph). —Lane Assist has not detected a road lane marking. —If the lanes are too narrow and in tight bends. —Temporarily if the driving style is very dynamic. —When the turn signal is switched on before changing lane manually. —If the driver oversteers a system intervention. —The driver does not react to a driver intervention prompt. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 247 Driving with Lane Assist Switching on and off Depending on country, Lane Assist is always switched on when the ignition is switched on. You can also switch Lane Assist on and off manually and view the activation status. On the display of the instrument cluster: 1. Press the button. 2. Switch Lane Assist on or off. Depending on equipment, the button is either on the multifunction steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. In the Infotainment system: 1. Open the Assist systems menu. 2. Switch Lane Assist on or off in the corresponding submenu. If there is a system fault, Lane Assist can switch itself off automatically. Displays Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: Lane Assist displays. 1 Road lane markings detected. The system is ready to intervene on the side shown. 2 Road lane markings detected. System is actively intervening on the indicated side. 3 The system is not ready to intervene on the side shown (depending on vehicle equipment). Depending on the situation and the instrument cluster version, one of following indicator lamps lights up: System is active and ready to perform control intervention. System intervention (corrective steering intervention). If no warning lamp lights up, Lane Assist is not ready to intervene on either side (passive system status) or is switched off. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 248 If you do not react, Lane Assist will switch to passive state. Independently of steering activity, you will be additionally requested to drive in the middle of the lane again with a display on the instrument cluster display and with acoustic warnings if the corrective steering intervention takes place for an extended time. Steering wheel vibration The following situation can lead to vibration of the steering wheel: —The system can no longer detect a lane during a major steering intervention. You can also select the option V ibration or Steering wheel vibration in the Assist systems menu of the Infotainment system. In this case, the steering wheel will vibrate if the vehicle drives over a detected road lane marking when Lane Assist is active. Troubleshooting Fault message, Lane Assist not available An indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A message will also appear on the instrument cluster display. (→ Vehicle care) —The camera window is dirty. Clean the windscreen —The view of the camera is impaired due to the weather conditions, e.g. snow, or due to detergent deposits or (→ Vehicle care) coatings. Clean the windscreen —The view of the camera is impaired by add-on parts or stickers. Keep the area around the camera window free from obstructions (→ Accessories and replacement parts) —The camera has been displaced or damaged, e.g. due to damage to the windscreen. Check whether damage is (→ Accessories and replacement parts) visible —The camera was deactivated automatically due to a high ambient temperature or prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. When the camera is available again, Lane Assist will also be available once more. Switch off and restart the engine. —Fault or malfunction. Switch off and restart the engine. —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. It can take a few seconds before a system fault is detected after the ignition is switched If Lane Assist is not available, Travel Assist is also not available. The system is not responding as expected 1. Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 249 Introduction to the topic Within the system limits, Travel Assist allows the vehicle to maintain a distance from the vehicle in front that has been preselected by the driver and stay in the preferred position within the lane (adaptive lane guidance). Does the vehicle have Travel Assist? The vehicle is equipped with Travel Assist if the button is available on the multifunction steering wheel. Speed range You can set a speed between 30 km/h ( 20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). This speed range may differ depending on country. System limits of Travel Assist Travel Assist detects driving situations with the same sensors as the Adaptive Cruise Control ( ACC ) and the lane keeping system ( Lane Assist). Observe the system limits and information for and Lane Assist. Always pay due attention and intervene yourself if necessary. Driving with Travel Assist Travel Assist automatically regulates the speed and steers the vehicle. Within the system limits, Travel Assist can decelerate the vehicle to a standstill behind a vehicle that is stopping. It can also start driving again by itself. You can override Travel Assist regulation at any time. Displays Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: active regulation displayed. 1 Adaptive lane guidance active. 2 Set distance, no vehicle detected ahead. Depending on the vehicle equipment, indicator lamps on the instrument cluster display show the status of Travel Assist: OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 250 Travel Assist active, Adaptive Cruise Control and adaptive lane guidance active. Travel Assist active, Adaptive Cruise Control active, adaptive lane guidance passive. Driver intervention prompt If you take your hands off the steering wheel, the system prompts you within a few seconds to take over active steering by way of acoustic warnings and a display on the instrument cluster. Travel Assist will be deactivated if you do not respond to the prompt. WARNING Travel Assist cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Travel Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Observe the system limits of ACC (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) (→ Lane keeping system (Lane Assist)) and Lane Assist ● ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Your hands should always be on the steering wheel so that you can steer at any time. ● Take control of the vehicle immediately if requested to do so by a prompt on the instrument cluster display or if the speed reduction by Travel Assist is not sufficient. ● Brake if the vehicle starts moving unintentionally, e.g. after a driver intervention prompt. Operating Travel Assist Fig. 1 Lefthand side of the multifunction steering wheel (Variant 1) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 251 Fig. 2 Lefthand side of the multifunction steering wheel (Variant 2) Switching on and starting control 1. While driving forwards with activated A CC , press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle switches from ACC to Travel Assist. Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle switches to the following system statuses in Travel Assist: —When ACC is active, Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset distance to the vehicle in front (system status passive). When lane markings are detected, the vehicle is simultaneously kept in the lane by steering movements (system status active). —If ACC is not active, Travel Assist is switched on but remains deactivated. 1. Press the button. Travel Assist switches to active or passive system status according to the driving situation. The indicator lamp corresponding to the driving situation lights up in the instrument cluster display. A message is also displayed. Cancelling control 1. Briefly press the button. Or: depress the brake pedal. The set distance remains stored. Switching to ACC 1. Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle switches from Travel Assist to the system status of A CC corresponding to the driving situation. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 252: Making Other Settings

    Making other settings The other operating functions of Travel Assist correspond to operation of A CC (→ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)) Troubleshooting Travel Assist is not available or is not working as expected The indicator lamp lights up yellow. A message will also appear on the instrument cluster display. —There is a fault in the sensor system. Check the causes and remedies described in the information on ACC or Lane Assist. —Fault or malfunction. Switch off and restart the engine. —The system limits have been exceeded. —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Take over steering The warning lamp lights up white and a message is displayed in the instrument cluster display. You have released the steering wheel for a few seconds. 1. Take hold of the steering wheel and take over vehicle control. Take over steering immediately The warning lamp lights up red and a message is displayed in the instrument cluster display. An acoustic warning is issued or the steering wheel vibrates, depending on the driving situation. You have let go of the steering wheel for an extended time or the system limits have been reached. 1. Take hold of the steering wheel immediately and take over vehicle control. Travel Assist switches off automatically —You have released the steering wheel for an extended period of time. —Fault or malfunction. Switch off and restart the engine. —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Control is interrupted unexpectedly — You have activated the turn signal. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 253 Introduction to the topic The lane change system ( Side Assist) helps the driver to recognise the traffic situation behind the vehicle. Radar sensors behind the rear bumper cover monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system measures the distance and difference in speed in relation to other vehicles and uses visual signals in the mirror glass of the exterior mirrors to inform the driver. Use Side Assist only on surfaced roads. Speed range When Side Assist is switched on, Side Assist is active from a speed of around 15 km/h (around 9 mph). Side Assist is deactivated at a vehicle speed below around 10 km/h (around 6 mph). WARNING Side Assist cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Side Assist cannot recognise all driving situations or all objects in the surroundings and may possibly not issue a warning or may issue a warning with a delay or when not desired. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks and lane changes. ● Observe the system limits (→ Lane change system (Side Assist)) ● Adapt your speed and the distance from the vehicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Your hands should always be on the steering wheel so that you can steer at any time. ● Observe the displays in the exterior mirror housings and on the instrument cluster display and act in accordance with the requests. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 254 System limits of Side Assist Limits of the sensors Side Assist recognises driving situations using the radar sensors at the rear of the vehicle. (→ Sensors) Observe the limits of the radar sensors and always pay due attention. Function limitations In addition to the situations specified in the section on the limits of the sensors, Side Assist may not interpret the traffic situation correctly in the following situations, among others: —When driving in the middle of two lanes. —When road lanes are of varying width. —Where there are special roadside structures, e.g. high or offset crash barriers. Restricted visibility It may be hard to see the display in the exterior mirror in direct sunlight. Calibration The radar sensors calibrate themselves once in the first few kilometres after vehicle delivery and if the sensors are repaired. The sensor range may be limited during the calibration phase. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 255 Driving with Side Assist Switching on and off You can view the activation status of Side Assist on the instrument cluster display and in the Infotainment system. You can also switch Side Assist on and off there. On the display of the instrument cluster: 1. Press the button. 2. Switch Side Assist on or off. Depending on equipment, the button is either on the multifunction steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. In the Infotainment system: 1. Open the Assist systems menu. 2. Switch Side Assist on or off in the corresponding submenu. After switching on, the yellow indicator lamp in the mirror glass of the exterior mirrors lights up once briefly. Deactivation for trailer towing If you use the factory-fitted towing bracket and have set up the necessary electrical connection, Side Assist switches off automatically. Once a trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle and the driver pulls away, a notification appears in the instrument cluster display to inform the driver that Side Assist has been deactivated. After you have disconnected the electrical connection, Side Assist is switched back on automatically. If the towing bracket is not a factory-fitted towing bracket, you must manually switch off Side Assist and then switch it back on again. Displays in the exterior mirror Fig. 1 In the mirror glass of the exterior mirrors: Side Assist display. Flashing: a vehicle has been detected in the blind spot and the turn signal has also been activated in the direction of the detected vehicle. Lit up: your vehicle is being overtaken or you are overtaking another vehicle with a speed difference of up to around 15 km/h (around 9 mph). No display will be shown if the overtaking manoeuvre is much faster. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 256 Lane change system “Side Assist Plus” If the vehicle is equipped with a lane keeping system ( Lane Assist) and Lane Assist is switched on, you will be warned by a corrective steering intervention when changing lanes during a possible critical situation (information level, warning level). The steering intervention also occurs when you have activated the turn signal for the corresponding direction. If you override the steering intervention, the steering wheel vibrates to give an additional warning. For this, steering wheel vibration must be activated in the Assist systems menu in the Infotainment system. Brightness The brightness of the visual display will change automatically depending on the ambient light levels. You can adjust the basic brightness of the display in the Assist systems menu in the Infotainment system. Side Assist is not active during the adjusting procedure. Some settings can be stored in the user accounts of the personalisation function and therefore change automatically when the user account changes. Troubleshooting Side Assist fault Fault or malfunction. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up yellow. The yellow central warning lamp also lights up. 1. Switch off and restart the engine. 2. If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. No sensor visibility, fault message, system switches itself off (→ Vehicle care, —Clean the radar sensors and remove stickers or accessories from the radar sensors or bumper exterior) (→ Accessories and replacement parts) (→ Accessories and replacement parts) —Check for any visible damage —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The system will be available again only after you have switched the ignition off and back on again and switched on Side Assist. The system is not responding as expected (→ Vehicle care, exterior) —The radar sensors are dirty. Clean the radar sensors —The radar sensors are covered by water. —The view of the radar sensors is impaired due to the weather conditions (e.g. snow) or due to dirt, detergent (→ Vehicle care, exterior)
  • Page 257 —Paint work or structural modifications have been carried out in the area of the radar sensors, at the rear of the vehicle or on the running gear (→ Repairs and technical modifications) (→ Repairs and technical modifications) —The side windows have been retrofitted with tinted window films —If the problem persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Parking 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. With a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully or disengage the clutch. 2. With an automatic gearbox, engage the parking lock P. 3. Apply the handbrake firmly. 4. On uphill and downhill slopes, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle will roll against the kerb if it starts to move. 5. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster display lights up red → 6. With a manual gearbox, select first gear for flat ground and uphill gradients, or reverse gear for downhill gradients, and then release the clutch. 7. Release the brake. 8. To engage the steering lock, turn the steering wheel slightly if necessary. → 9. Get out of the vehicle . Watch out for other road users! 10. Take all vehicle keys with you and lock the vehicle. WARNING If the vehicle is not parked properly, it can roll away even on a slight downhill gradient. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the handbrake is applied firmly and that the indicator lamp lights up red on the instrument cluster display.
  • Page 258 Low-lying vehicle components such as bumpers, spoilers and parts of the running gear can collide with obstacles protruding from the ground when driving over them. The vehicle may be damaged. ● Drive carefully over drives, ramps, kerbs, borders and dips. Rear seat warning The function depends on the vehicle equipment. When the ignition is switched off, a text message in the Infotainment system reminds you not to leave any → passengers behind in the rear seats If a rear door was used before the journey, a text message is also displayed in the instrument cluster and an acoustic warning may sound. The acoustic warning can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system. Rear seat warning muted. Handbrake Fig. 1 Between the front seats: handbrake with lock button (illustration). Applying the handbrake 1. Pull the handbrake lever up firmly with the lock button pressed → Fig. 1 → The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up red when the handbrake is applied. Releasing the handbrake → Fig. 1 1. Lift the handbrake lever up slightly and press the lock button 2. Guide the handbrake lever down whilst the lock button is pressed. WARNING If the handbrake is applied improperly, this can result in accidents, vehicle damage and serious injuries. ● Always apply the handbrake firmly when parking the vehicle. The red indicator lamp lights up already even if the handbrake is only slightly applied. As a result, the vehicle will not be held securely. ● Never drive the vehicle with the handbrake lightly applied. The brake can overheat, which can adversely affect the brake system. It can also cause premature wear to the rear brake pads. WARNING The handbrake is not designed to brake the vehicle. The braking distance is considerably longer as only the rear wheels are braked in some cases. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 259: Safety Notes

    ● When parking, always look in the direction of travel and observe the vehicle surroundings. ● Pay special attention to small children, animals and objects when parking. ● Do not allow the parking system displays to distract you from the traffic around you. ● Please note that the parking system may not react if an obstacle is approached too fast and will then not issue a warning. ● Ensure that your speed and driving style are always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged by obstacles when manoeuvring in parking spaces without kerb borders. ● Observe a safety distance of around 50 cm ( around 20 in) from walls and buildings. Limits of sensors and cameras There are various sensors and cameras on the vehicle which detect and monitor the area around the vehicle by means of ultrasound, radar waves and optical systems. The various parking systems use different combinations of the sensors. Common to all sensors is the fact that they are subject to technical and physical limits → —Some objects may not be detected under certain circumstances, such as trailer drawbars, thin bars, fences, posts, → trees, very low or high obstacles, as well as open or opening boot lids —The detection ranges of the parking systems have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered. —In some cases, dirt or ice and water on the sensors and cameras could be registered as an obstacle or impair detection of objects. The sensor visibility may be impaired by dirt and snow, as well as residue from cleaning (→ Vehicle care, exterior) agents or coatings —External sources of sound and certain surfaces on objects and clothing may influence the sensors' signals. In certain circumstances, the systems will be unable to detect or properly detect people and objects. —Certain objects, for example narrow posts or railings, may be difficult or impossible to see on the screen because of its low resolution or poor light conditions. —The cameras show only two-dimensional images on the screen. The lack of depth of field means that potholes and protruding objects on the ground may only be detected with difficulty, or may not be detected at all. Volkswagen recommends that drivers practise using the parking systems in a traffic-calmed area or car park in order to familiarise themselves with their functions. Prerequisites OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 260: General Information

    Prerequisites The use of parking systems, e.g. with camera assistance, may not be allowed in some countries and regions due to legal requirements. General information The following prerequisites must be met so that the sensors and cameras are best able to detect the surroundings of the vehicle and display this information on the Infotainment system screen. The doors and boot lid are closed. ✓ Exterior mirrors are not folded in. ✓ ✓ Sensors or cameras are not covered by add-on parts, e.g. a bicycle carrier, or number plate holders with trim frames. The number plate holder with trim frame must not project at the sides or downwards. ✓ The surrounding area has a flat surface. Vehicle does not have a heavy load at the rear or on one side. ✓ Engine running. ✓ ✓ Brake support systems such as ESC or TCS are switched on. The parking function and the acoustic warnings will be deactivated if other functions are operated on the Infotainment system during a parking operation. Finding a suitable parking space ✓ The length and width of the parking space must be larger than the vehicle dimensions and offer sufficient space for manoeuvring. ✓ The distance when driving past the parking space should be around 1 m (around 3 ft). ​ V ehicles with Park Assist: The maximum speed when driving past p arking spaces parallel to the road maximum ✓ around 40 km/h (around 25 mph) and for parking spaces perpendicular to the road maximum around 20 km/h (around 12 mph). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 261 Automatic braking intervention The automatic braking intervention of a parking system is designed to avoid a collision as soon as an obstacle is detected. Parking systems with braking intervention Depending on equipment, the vehicle may have parking systems with a manoeuvring or emergency braking function → WARNING The automatic braking intervention function cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. In some driving situations, the automatic braking intervention may be restricted or undesired or there may be no intervention at all. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Use the foot brake to brake the vehicle in a hazardous situation before an obstacle. ● React promptly to the warnings issued by the parking system, e.g. Park Distance Control. When is the automatic braking intervention available? ✓ The driver has switched on a parking system. ✓ Park Distance Control: manoeuvre braking is activated in the Infotainment system. The vehicle speed does not exceed a maximum of around 10 km/h (around 6 mph) when manoeuvring. ✓ What happens when an automatic braking intervention takes place? The vehicle brakes to a standstill and is held for around 2 seconds. Automatic braking intervention by manoeuvre braking. Hold the vehicle with the foot brake! Automatic braking intervention of Rear Traffic Alert. Hold the vehicle with the foot brake! Park Assist: The vehicle is braked if the speed is too high. The parking manoeuvre can then be continued. A text message may also be displayed on the instrument cluster, depending on the vehicle equipment. Manoeuvre braking function of Park Distance Control The manoeuvre braking function is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on. Manoeuvre braking can be deactivated temporarily using the function button in the Park Distance Control display. After a braking intervention, manoeuvre braking may be inactive for a short distance or will only function again after the drive position has been changed. Continue driving carefully for the first few metres, e.g. if there are other obstacles in the vicinity. The permanent deactivation of manoeuvre braking can be saved in the personalised user accounts, depending on the country. The settings change automatically when the user account is changed.

  • Page 262: General Notes

    (→ Parking systems) —The prerequisites for the parking system are not met —The detection range of the sensors or camera is blocked by add-on parts, e.g. bicycle carriers. (→ Vehicle care, exterior) → —The sensors are dirty or iced-up (→ Vehicle care, exterior)→ —The camera is dirty or iced-up and the camera image is unclear —The ultrasound signal is subject to interference from external noise sources, for example when driving over → cobblestones —The vehicle is damaged in the area around the sensors or the camera, e.g. caused by parking collisions or an accident → —Changes have been made to the paintwork or structural modifications have been made in the area of the sensors or → the camera, e.g. on the vehicle front end or the running gear Fault displays 1. Observe the text messages on the instrument cluster display and in the Infotainment system. NOTICE If the parking system is still used even though there is a fault, this can lead to vehicle damage. ● In the event of a fault in the parking system, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop immediately. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. No sensor visibility, or there is a fault in the Park Distance Control The sensor area is switched off permanently if a sensor fails. The symbol indicates the affected sensor area in the Infotainment system. Park Distance Control may be switched off completely. If there is a fault in the Park Distance Control, a signal tone will sound for several seconds when it is switched on. A text notification may also be shown on the instrument cluster display. 1. Check whether one of the above causes applies. 2. Switch the system on again once you have rectified the source of the fault. 3. If the issue persists, go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 263 Manoeuvre braking restricted or unavailable A text message appears in the Infotainment system or in the instrument cluster. The automatic braking intervention occurs unexpectedly or unusually. If the function is switched off, there is no automatic braking intervention. (→ Vehicle care, exterior) 1. Check sensors on the vehicle for damage or dirt, and clean if necessary 2. Switch the ignition off and then back on again. 3. If the issue persists, go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Park Assist cancels parking manoeuvre automatically Park Assist will cancel the parking manoeuvre if one of the following situations occurs: is pressed. —Function button —The driver intervenes using the steering wheel. —The driver door is opened. —The time limit or number of manoeuvres for parking are exceeded. — TCS is switched off or is taking corrective action. —There is a system fault. 1. Restart the parking procedure. Park Assist is active and supports steering movements when the vehicle is stationary If Park Assist attempts to turn the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary, the white symbol will appear on the instrument cluster display. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Park Assist parks inaccurately after a wheel change If Park Assist does not park correctly after a wheel change, e.g. vehicle is too far away or too close to the kerb, the system may have to first adapt the new wheel circumferences. 1. Drive a longer distance with the vehicle, including curves. Park Assist automatically adapts the new wheel circumferences. Introduction to the topic Park Distance Control assists the driver when parking and provides warnings about obstacles. Function Park Distance Control uses ultrasound sensors to detect the distance of the vehicle from an obstacle.

  • Page 264: Driving With A Trailer

    WARNING The Park Distance Control system cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Park Distance Control may possibly not detect some obstacles and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● React promptly to the visual and acoustic warnings of Park Distance Control. ● Use the foot brake to brake the vehicle before an obstacle. NOTICE Visual and acoustic warnings are given only for obstacles in the vehicle path. The collision area has been reached when the penultimate segment is displayed on the Park Distance Control screen or a continuous acoustic warning sounds, if not before. There is a risk of damage to the vehicle. ● Always brake the vehicle in good time before an obstacle. NOTICE With some equipment levels, distances to obstacles in the side areas are also displayed. An obstacle entering these areas from the outside will not be displayed. This may result in damage to the vehicle. ● Drive the vehicle a few metres forwards or backwards in order to scan and display the side areas in full. Displays Fig. 1 Infotainment system: rear Park Distance Control display (illustration). Red-coloured image segment: close obstacle. The vehicle is at risk. Brake! Yellow-coloured image segment: obstacle in the vehicle path. The vehicle is at risk. Adjust the steering angle. White or grey-coloured image segment: obstacle outside the path of the vehicle. Switch the manoeuvre braking function off or on ( depending on equipment). Mute audio signals. Park Distance Control settings Depending on the vehicle equipment, settings for Park Distance Control can be made in the vehicle settings in the (→ Vehicle settings menu) Infotainment system Driving with a trailer OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 265 The rear sensors of Park Distance Control are not switched on if a trailer is electrically connected: —No warnings are given for obstacles. —The manoeuvre braking function is also automatically deactivated. Some Park Distance Control settings, e.g. the volume of the acoustic signals, can be stored in the personalised user accounts. The settings change automatically when the user account is changed. Switching Park Distance Control on and off Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for Park Distance Control. Switching on 1. Select reverse gear. → Fig. 1 Or: press the button Or: the vehicle rolls backwards. Switching off → Fig. 1 1. Press the button Or: move the selector lever to position P . Park Distance Control also switches itself off if the vehicle is driven forwards at higher speed. Automatic activation when driving forwards Park Distance Control is activated automatically when an obstacle is encountered in the front area, such as in heavy traffic, or when driving into a garage. The function can be deactivated in the Park Distance Control settings in the Infotainment system. 1. To close the display again, tap the home button on the Infotainment system. No automatic braking intervention takes place (→ Automatic braking intervention) . The braking intervention can be switched on by means of the function button. Automatic activation is available again under the following conditions: OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 266 —The vehicle was accelerated to over a speed of around 15 km/h ( around 9 mph) and then slowed down below this speed again. Or: the ignition was switched off and then back on again. Or: a position was selected from the parking lock position P. If an obstacle is detected in front of the vehicle, the Park Distance Control display appears on the Infotainment system. An acoustic signal also sounds if the vehicle continues to approach the obstacle. Introduction to the topic The rear view camera system in the rear of the vehicle makes it easier for the driver to see behind the vehicle and provides support for parking manoeuvres. Function The rear view camera system shows the area behind the vehicle on the Infotainment system screen. Depending on → the operating mode and equipment level, orientation lines aid the view to the rear WARNING The rear view camera system cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Using images from the camera to estimate the distance from persons or obstacles can be inaccurate. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Please note that camera lenses can magnify and distort the field of vision. In the camera image, the orientation lines are shown by the system regardless of the vehicle surroundings. No automatic detection of obstacles by cameras takes place. Drivers must judge for themselves whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. No orientation lines for the rear area will be shown in the camera image when a trailer is electrically connected to the factory-fitted towing bracket. No orientation lines will be shown when the boot lid is open on vehicles where the camera is installed in the boot lid. CAUTION Vehicles with a swivelling Volkswagen badge: people can sustain crush injuries when the rear view camera system is extended. ● When engaging reverse gear, make sure that nobody is positioned directly at the boot lid who reaches into the path of the Volkswagen badge on the boot lid. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 267 Switching the rear view camera system on and off Switching on 1. Select reverse gear. Switching off 1. Shift out of reverse gear. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 268 Driving into a parking space (rear view camera system without parking mode selection) Fig. 1 Infotainment system: parking using the rear view camera system. Choose parking space. Drive towards the selected parking space. Align the vehicle in the parking space. 1 Road. 2 Selected parking space. 3 Side limits of the selected parking space. 4 Rear limit of the parking space. Displays Red line: boundary or vehicle safety clearance. Green lateral line: extension of the vehicle. Adjust brightness, contrast and colour. When the camera image of a parking system is switched on by engaging reverse gear, no function buttons are shown for safety reasons (depending on the country). These function buttons can be made visible again by tapping the function button. 1. Position the vehicle in front of the parking space → Fig. 1 2. Select reverse gear. 3. Reverse slowly and steer the vehicle so that the green lateral lines lead into the selected parking space. The 3 . → Fig. 1 green lines must correspond to the lateral boundary lines of the parking space OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 269 4 . → Fig. 1 4. Stop when the red horizontal line reaches the rear limit Introduction to the topic Park Assist shows parking spaces that are suitable for parking and assists the driver when driving into and out of parking spaces. Function Park Assist is an extension of Park Distance Control. Park Assist steers the vehicle into a parking space, while the driver operates the accelerator and brake and changes gear → WARNING Park Assist cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Park Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Use the foot brake to slow the vehicle in a hazardous situation. Available functions —Display suitable parking spaces. —Select a parking mode. —Drive into suitable parallel and bay parking spaces. —Drive out of a parallel parking space. WARNING If another function is operated on the Infotainment system when manoeuvring with the parking system, all active parking functions, including the acoustic warnings, will be switched off. No warnings are then given about a collision and no preventive interventions take place. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Do not operate any other function in the Infotainment system while manoeuvring. NOTICE Park Assist uses parked vehicles, kerbs and other objects for orientation. If there are obstacles that are close to the ground, this can result in damage to components located low down on the vehicle such as tyres and wheel rims. ● Pay attention to obstacles that are close to the ground when parking. ● Brake and end the parking manoeuvre if necessary. NOTICE Any equipment that has been retrofitted to the vehicle, e.g. bicycle carriers, can prevent Park Assist from functioning properly and may cause damage.
  • Page 270 Looking for a parking space Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for Park Assist. Fig. 2 In the instrument cluster display: parking modes for parking. Reverse parallel parking. Reverse perpendicular parking. Forward perpendicular parking. Looking for a parking space 1. Press the button → Fig. 1 The indicator lamp lights up yellow and the park function is active. 2. Drive slowly past a row of parked vehicles, paying attention to the traffic. Park Assist automatically searches for a suitable parking space. Or: operate the turn signal to search for a parking space on the opposite side of the road. → Fig. 2 A parking mode is displayed when a parking space is detected 3. If, for example, you wish to park in a perpendicular parking space in a forward direction, press the button → Fig. 2 and select the parking mode Or: press the button repeatedly to select one of several displayed parking spaces one after the other. Park Assist can be activated retrospectively. If the vehicle has previously driven past a suitable parking space, it will be displayed. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 271 Driving into a parking space Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: parking perpendicular to the road. Choose parking space. Drive into a parking space. Manoeuvre in the parking space 1 Prompt to drive forward. 2 Your vehicle. 3 Parked vehicle or obstacle. 4 Detected parking space. 5 Prompt to reverse. 6 Prompt to brake. 7 Progress bar (remaining relative distance). 1. Stop the vehicle in front of or behind the parking space. 5 . 2. Observe the prompt to drive into a parking space on the instrument cluster display → Fig. 1 3. Select reverse gear when a reverse arrow appears on the instrument cluster display. 4. Release the steering wheel. 5. Release the brake. 6. Observe text messages and displays on the instrument cluster display. 7. Accelerate carefully. 8. Brake the vehicle when an acoustic signal sounds, the display lights up or a text message appears on the instrument cluster display.
  • Page 272 10. If necessary, carry out several parking manoeuvres. When the parking procedure is completed, a text message is displayed in the instrument cluster. (→ Parking) 11. Parking the vehicle WARNING The steering wheel is turned quickly during manoeuvring. Reaching into the steering wheel can cause serious injuries. ● Take over steering only when the system requests you to do so. ● Take over steering in a hazardous situation. Driving out of a parking space Fig. 1 On the instrument cluster display: reversing out of a parallel parking space. 1 Parked vehicle. 2 Your vehicle. 3 Progress bar (remaining relative distance). 4 Direction of travel when driving out of a parking space 1. Press the button. 2. Use the turn signal lever to select the direction (left or right) in which you would like to drive out of the parking space. 3. Select reverse gear. 4. Release the steering wheel when the text message S teering intervention active! Please monitor area around vehicle. is displayed. 5. Accelerate carefully. 6. Brake the vehicle when an acoustic signal sounds, the display lights up or when the request to drive forwards appears on the instrument cluster display.

  • Page 273: Rear Traffic Alert

    9. Take over steering with the already set steering angle. 10. Drive the vehicle out of the parking space → WARNING When driving out of a parking space, there is a danger that the vehicle could drive into moving traffic. This can lead to an accident and to serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive the vehicle out of the parking space only when permitted by the traffic situation. Rear Traffic Alert Rear Traffic Alert monitors crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space or manoeuvring. Function Fig. 1 Monitored area around the vehicle leaving the parking space (illustration). Radar sensors behind the rear bumper cover monitor the area behind the rear and side area of the vehicle. → Fig. 1 → The system detects approaching and moving objects and warns the driver about an obstacle A warning signal sounds if an obstacle is detected. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the obstacle area is → Fig. 2 displayed in colour on the Infotainment system or a warning lamp lights up together with a text message in the instrument cluster. Obstacle detected. (→ Automatic braking intervention) An automatic braking intervention can take place if the driver does not react If Park Distance Control is deactivated, no feedback can be given to the driver. The Rear Traffic Alert is also temporarily deactivated. WARNING Rear Traffic Alert cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. Not all approaching objects may be detected, e.g. pedestrians or rapidly approaching objects. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. ● Pay attention to the traffic situation and the area around the vehicle when driving out of a parking space. ● React promptly to the visual and acoustic warnings of Rear Traffic Alert. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 274 Switching on and off 1. Press the button. Or: depending on the vehicle equipment, press the button for the driver assist systems. (→ Vehicle Or: depending on the vehicle equipment, open the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system settings menu) 2. Switch Rear Traffic Alert on or off. This setting can be saved in the user accounts of the personalisation function and can therefore change automatically when the user account is changed. Display Fig. 2 Infotainment system: Rear Traffic Alert display (illustration). Red-coloured image segment: close obstacle. The vehicle is at risk. Brake! Yellow-coloured image segment: obstacle in the vehicle path. The vehicle is at risk. Adjust the steering angle. Calibration The radar sensors calibrate themselves once in the first few kilometres after vehicle delivery and if the sensors are repaired. The sensor range may be limited during the calibration phase. Driving with a trailer Rear Traffic Alert cannot be activated if a trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle. After the trailer has been unhitched, Rear Traffic Alert will be activated again when the ignition is switched on. Rear Traffic Alert must be switched off manually for trailer towing if a non-factory-fitted towing bracket is used. Information on brake support systems Brake support systems can stabilise the vehicle in critical driving or braking situations and help to increase driving → safety. The driver is responsible for driving safety —Continue to brake with the necessary force when a brake support system is performing a control intervention. — Steer the vehicle if necessary. WARNING Brake support systems cannot replace the driver’s attention and operate only within the limits of the respective system. Driving fast on icy, slippery or wet roads as well as driving too close to the vehicle in front can have an OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 275 ● Ensure that your speed and driving style are always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. Never take any safety risks. ● Always keep the footwell under the pedals clear so that the brake pedal can move freely. ● Always use suitable tyres because driving stability depends on the grip of the tyres. —The ESC , ABS and TCS can only function properly if all four wheels are fitted with the correct tyres → —If the ABS fails, ESC, TCS and EDL will also cease to function. The status of the brake functions is checked automatically when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lamps light up briefly and then go out again. If an indicator lamp remains lit up, there is a fault. Go to a suitably qualified workshop immediately. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The effectiveness of ESC can be reduced considerably if other components and systems which affect driving dynamics are not serviced properly or are not functioning properly. This applies in particular to changes to the suspension and wheel and tyre combinations that have not been approved. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have vehicle conversions and modifications carried out only by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Always use suitable tyres because driving stability depends on the grip of the tyres. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) control intervention to reduce the risk of skidding and improve driving stability → . The indicator lamp flashes yellow. Traction control system (TCS) control intervention to prevent the wheels from spinning. The indicator lamp flashes yellow. reduces the drive output if wheelspin occurs and adapts the output to suit the road surface conditions. The TCS → makes it easier to pull away, accelerate and drive up hills Anti-lock brake system (ABS) → prevents the wheels from locking during braking so that the vehicle can still be steered Brake Assist system OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 276: Driving Situations

    can help to reduce the stopping distance. The brake assist system reinforces the braking force when the driver → depresses the brake pedal quickly in an emergency situation Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) brakes a spinning wheel automatically and distributes the drive force to the other drive wheels. is an extension of the electronic differential lock and improves traction by braking interventions in order to keep the vehicle on its intended course. Automatic Post-Collision Braking System The Automatic Post-Collision Braking System automatically triggers braking if the airbag control unit detects a collision in an accident situation. Requirements for automatic braking: ✓ The driver does not press the accelerator. Brake servo The brake servo will only function when the engine is running and reinforces the pressure applied by the driver on the brake pedal. If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more → forcefully as the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of assistance for the brake system WARNING Driving without the brake servo or with restricted brake servo function can considerably increase the braking distance. This can lead to accidents with serious or fatal injuries. ● Never switch the engine or ignition off while the vehicle is in motion. ● Press the brake pedal with more force if the brake servo is not working or if the vehicle is being towed. ● Always keep the footwell under the pedals clear so that the brake pedal can move freely. Switching a brake support system off and on Driving situations → To prevent any safety risk, the braking systems should not be switched off under normal conditions WARNING With the ESC Sport switched on, there is a much greater chance of the vehicle breaking away. Inexperienced drivers may find it difficult to control the vehicle when driving at high speeds. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Switch on the ESC Sport only if you are driving on a closed road or track and have the necessary skills for sporty driving. ● ●...

  • Page 277: Troubleshooting

    When the setting is no longer used, the brake support system should be switched back on fully → It can help to switch off T CS when driving on loose terrain or when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards if it has become stuck → . The function depends on the vehicle equipment. TCS switched off manually. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. ESC Sport Polo GTI: This function supports a sporty driving style. The ESC → intervenes later to stabilise the vehicle, for example when taking bends in the road at high speed ESC Sport switched on. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Button in the centre console Fig. 1 In the centre console: button for switching ESC Sport on and off manually (depending on equipment). Switching on ESC Sport → Fig. 1 1. Press the button for around 1 second. Switching off ESC Sport 1. To switch ESC Sport back off, press the button again. Troubleshooting Anti-lock brake system failure or fault The indicator lamp lights up yellow. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 278 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The vehicle can be braked without A BS ESC fault The indicator lamp lights up yellow. E SC has been switched off. There is a fault or a malfunction. 1. Switch the ignition off and on. 2. Drive a short distance at a speed of approx. 15 km/h ( around 9 mph) to 20 km/h (around 12 mph). 3. If the indicator lamp remains lit, go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Noises of the brake support systems The brake pedal may move or noises may occur while the brake support systems are performing a control intervention. 1. Continue to brake with the necessary force, and steer the vehicle if necessary. WARNING If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the indicator lamp, the control function of the A BS may have failed. This can cause the rear wheels to lock when you brake. This may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and can result in accidents with serious or fatal injuries. ● Drive at reduced speed to the nearest qualified workshop to have the brake system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. WARNING The ABS is not functioning correctly if the indicator lamp does not go out or comes on while the vehicle is in motion. The...
  • Page 279 injuries. Hot drinks can also be spilled and cause serious scalding. ● Place only soft, break-proof and closed containers in the drink holder. ● Integrated stowage systems in the rear centre armrest must always be used in the locked end positions. ● Never place hot drinks in a drink holder. ● Make sure that only drinks of the appropriate size are placed in the drink holder. Drinks must always be stored securely in the drink holder. WARNING If the glove box is open while driving, objects could be flung through the vehicle interior. This can lead to loss of control over the vehicle and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always keep the glove box closed while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Any lighters in the vehicle could be damaged or lit without being noticed by high surface temperatures, for example. This could lead to serious burns and other injuries. ● Before closing stowage areas or compartments always make sure that there is no lighter in the way. ● Never stow lighters in stowage areas or compartments or on other surfaces in the vehicle. WARNING Closed drink bottles can explode in the vehicle in extreme heat or burst in extremely cold temperatures and cause serious injuries. ● Never leave closed drink bottles in an extremely hot or extremely cold vehicle for extended periods. NOTICE Objects kept in the vehicle could be damaged or could cause damage to the vehicle when exposed to strong sunlight or the effects of heat or cold. ● Do not stow any temperature-sensitive objects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. ● Please note that objects made of translucent materials, e.g. transparent suction pads on the windows, concentrate sunlight. NOTICE Depending on equipment, the rear centre armrest may have a stowage system. Folding in the rear centre armrest when the stowage system is open can damage the drink holder. ● Before folding in the rear centre armrest, make sure that any objects have been removed and that the integrated stowage systems are closed or folded in.

  • Page 280: Ashtray And Cigarette Lighter

    An open folding compartment or objects that fall out into the driver’s footwell can hinder the correct operation of the pedals. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always keep the folding compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion. Always stow the vehicle wallet in this stowage compartment. Ashtray and cigarette lighter Fig. 1 In the front centre console: cigarette lighter. 1. With the ignition switched on, press the knob on the cigarette lighter into the socket. The lighter knob will jump out when the wire spiral is hot enough. → 2. Pull out the cigarette lighter WARNING Improper use of the cigarette lighter or ashtray could cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. ● Always use the cigarette lighter properly. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used when the ignition is switched ● Never place paper or other objects that could cause a fire in the ashtray. The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12-volt socket. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 281 Introduction to the topic Electrical equipment can be connected to the sockets in the vehicle. The 12-volt socket will work only when the ignition is switched on. WARNING Improper use of the sockets and connected electrical accessories can cause fires and serious or fatal injuries. ● Switch off electrical devices immediately and disconnect them from the power supply if the electrical devices become too warm. ● Please note that sockets and devices connected to them can also be used when the ignition is switched off, e.g. by children in the vehicle. NOTICE Unsuitable, non-approved or incorrectly connected electrical devices can cause damage to the vehicle and the electronic components. ● Never connect electrical devices that supply electric power, such as solar panels or a battery charger, to the 12- volt socket to charge the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Use only electrical devices that have been approved in accordance with current guidelines concerning electromagnetic compatibility. ● Do not use faulty devices. ● In order to avoid damage due to voltage fluctuations, always switch off any electrical devices before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine. ● Observe the operating instructions of the electrical devices. NOTICE The vehicle's electrical system can be damaged if the maximum power output is exceeded. ● Never connect electrical devices requiring more than the rated power to a 12-volt socket. Using electrical consumers with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the 12-volt battery. With some equipment levels, unshielded devices can cause interference with the Infotainment system and vehicle electronics. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 282: Volt Socket

    Sockets in the vehicle The maximum power of the sockets must not be exceeded. The power consumption of the external devices is specified on their type plates. 12-volt socket Fig. 1 In the front section of the centre console: 12-volt socket with removable cover (illustration). (→ Sockets) The continuous power of all 12-volt sockets in the vehicle is 120 watts in total The maximum power of a 12-volt socket in the vehicle is a total of 180 watts when the engine is running. NOTICE The fuse can blow as a result of extended operation of the 12-volt sockets at maximum power. ● Never use the 12-volt sockets at maximum power for longer than 10 minutes. ● Always use only one 12-volt socket with maximum power. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 283 Charging options for mobile devices Mobile devices can be charged in the vehicle either via the installed USB-C connections or wirelessly. Charging via the USB-C ports The following USB -C ports may be available in the vehicle: Identification of a USB port suitable for data transfer and charging. Identification of a USB port suitable only for charging. Available charging capacity Voltages of up to 20 V are made available via the USB port. These voltages permit a charging capacity of up to 45 W. Depending on equipment, the following charging profiles can be supported by the USB ports: — Legacy charging (2.5 W). —BC1.2 (7.5 W). —USB -C charging (15 W). —USB power delivery (up to 45 W). The charging capacity actually tapped by the connected device depends on the following: — Supported charging profiles. —Charge level of the device. —Device temperature. —Charging cables used. In the case of double ports, the charging capacity can be split between both ports. Wireless charging function OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 284 1 Lining mat with telephone symbol. The wireless charging function is dependent on the equipment level and is not available in all countries. The wireless charging function enables wireless energy transmission by electromagnetic induction over a short distance for Qi-certified mobile telephones. → Fig. 1 1 The shelf with lining mat for the wireless charging function is located in the area of the centre console and is designed for only one Qi-certified mobile telephone. → Fig. 1 1 In some vehicles, the lining mat has a telephone symbol which marks the centre position. The charging capacity is 5 watts. Qi standard The Qi standard enables wireless charging of suitable Qi-certified mobile telephones. Consult the operating instructions for the mobile telephone to find out if it is compatible with the Qi standard. An overview of Qi-certified mobile telephones can be found at the following external link of Wireless Power Consortium, Inc.: https://www.wirelesspowerconsortium.com/products Volkswagen AG does not assume any liability for the completeness and correctness of this list. The manufacturer of the mobile telephone can provide further information on compatibility, if necessary. There may be charging restrictions with mobile telephones that are not Qi-certified. Charging a mobile telephone wirelessly Prerequisite A suitable mobile telephone that is not larger than the marked shelf area and is Qi-certified. ✓ → 1. Remove any foreign objects from the stowage compartment before charging 2. After removing the protective cover and any other foreign material, place the mobile telephone in the centre of the shelf area with the display facing upwards and so that its entire surface is flat on the area. The charging process starts automatically. 3. Follow the operating instructions for the mobile telephone. The Infotainment system will provide information about the start of the charging operation and, where applicable, about any foreign objects with metallic components that are detected in the stowage compartment. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 285 Depending on equipment, the charging function can be deactivated manually in the Infotainment system. WARNING Notifications on the mobile telephone display can distract the driver. This can lead to an accident and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Make sure that no objects impede the closing function of the cover. ● If the shelf has a cover, always keep the cover closed while driving. WARNING Metallic objects on the shelf can become very hot. This can cause burns or fires. ● Do not place any metal or metallic objects on the shelf for the wireless charging function. ● Remove any foreign objects immediately. NOTICE If cards or objects with a magnetic stripe or chip are placed on the shelf for the wireless charging function, this may damage the data stored on them. ● Do not place any ID, bank and credit cards etc. with a magnetic stripe or chip on the shelf for the wireless charging function. Troubleshooting Mobile telephone is not charged A message about a foreign object in the stowage compartment may be displayed on the Infotainment system. An unfavourable position of the mobile telephone on the lining mat can impair the charging function. This can already be the case in the event of small changes in position, e.g. due to vibrations. The position of the mobile telephone must be corrected to re-establish the correct charging function. 1. Align the mobile telephone centrally on the charging area. The charging function can also be impaired by metal and above all magnetic parts of a mobile telephone or its protective cover. 1. Turn the mobile telephone by around 180° and align on the charging area with the display still facing upwards. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 286 Connectivity components are control units for data transmission, interfaces, media and diagnostic connections via which information and data can be exchanged between the vehicle and mobile devices or the internet. Connectivity components are equipped with security mechanisms that minimise the risk of unauthorised access to vehicle systems. The connectivity components include the following in particular: —Diagnostic port. —Control unit with embedded eSIM card. —Mobile phone interface. —App-Connect. —Wi-Fi ® hotspot. —NFC radio technology. —AUX -IN socket. —Bluetooth® interface. —CD/DVD drive. —USB port. —SD card slot. —SIM card slot. The type and number of connectivity components present in your vehicle depend on the equipment and country. Software and security mechanisms The software and security mechanisms in the vehicle are subject to ongoing development. Like with computers or the operating systems of mobile telephones, the software and security mechanisms in the vehicle may also be updated at irregular intervals. System updates improve the security, stability and running speeds of the vehicle systems. A system update is a preventive measure to optimise functionality and protect against malware, for example. Vehicle control unit software is updated with a system update. There are two options for updating your vehicle, depending on vehicle and country: —System update by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —System update via an over-the-air update. WARNING In spite of integrated security mechanisms and regularly performed system updates or over-the-air updates, OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 287 ● Reduce speed in a controlled manner if the vehicle functions or reacts differently than usual. ● Please contact a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Malware can access data and information that are stored in control units, in the Infotainment system and on connected data media and paired mobile telephones. This can lead to complete loss of the data or damage to the control units, Infotainment system, computer, data medium or mobile telephone. ● Carry out over-the-air updates as soon as possible after they are made available or have system updates carried out. Please contact a qualified workshop for this. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Protect computers, data media and mobile telephones by means of a suitable anti-virus program and generally known precautionary measures. Regularly update the appropriate anti-virus program with the system updates or updates from the respective provider. Minimising risks You too can reduce the risk of unauthorised access to vehicle systems and functions: —Use only data media, Bluetooth devices and mobile telephones in the vehicle than do not contain manipulated data or malware. —Have system updates that are made available by Volkswagen carried out by a suitably qualified workshop as soon as possible after they are made available. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. If it is possible for you to perform over-the-air updates for your vehicle and in your country, carry out any over-the-air updates that are made available by Volkswagen immediately. If the driver repeatedly rejects the over-the-air update, it is then necessary to visit an appropriately qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —Have the vehicle serviced, repaired and maintained only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Introduction to the topic Over-the-air updates allow you to always keep your vehicle up-to-date, for example in order to optimise the vehicle functions and for protection against malware. How can you recognise when an over-the-air update is available? An available over-the-air update is displayed to you in the Infotainment system. If several over-the-air updates are available for the vehicle at the same time, one over-the-air update must first be completed successfully before the next over-the-air update can be performed. In your own interest, over-the-air updates should be carried out as soon as possible. If the driver repeatedly rejects the over-the-air update, it is then necessary to visit an appropriately qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership.
  • Page 288 If the instrument cluster does not function after an over-the-air update, no instruments, warning lamps, symbols or text messages can be displayed. Driving with an instrument cluster that is not working can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Do not use the vehicle. Contact Volkswagen Customer Care. NOTICE If special modifications have been performed on vehicles that are outside the scope of responsibility of Volkswagen AG (e.g. for emergency services vehicles or taxis), there is a risk that the special functions (e.g. taximeter) will no longer function correctly after an over-the-air update. ● Consult your Volkswagen dealership before you carry out an over-the-air update. A measure to increase performance or efficiency ( e.g. engine tuning) that has not been performed by Volkswagen may be deleted by an over-the-air update. Depending on equipment, release notes may be displayed once before or after an over-the-air update. These notes describe the changes to the vehicle status. No functions or apps purchased via Upgrades are updated with the over-the-air update. Prerequisites for an over-the-air update. The following prerequisites must be met so that an over-the-air update can be downloaded and so that you can perform software installation of the over-the-air update. ✓ The over-the-air update function is offered in your country. You have concluded a current We Connect contract. ✓ You have assigned the vehicle to your active user account. ✓ ✓ There is a primary user available. You may have to log in as the primary user. ✓ The vehicle is in an area with sufficient mobile reception. Your current privacy settings allow data and information to be transmitted and received . ✓ The 12-volt vehicle battery is appropriately charged. ✓ OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 289: After Software Installation

    Downloading and installing an over-the-air update Download costs Download of over-the-air updates takes place via the factory-fitted control unit with e SIM card and is free of charge. Volkswagen pays the connection costs. Time of download Download takes place automatically without any previous notification and is also possible when driving. When download has been completed, a message will be displayed to inform you that an over-the-air update is available. The duration of a download process depends on the network quality, file size and type of over-the-air update. It is possible that the download process may be interrupted. The download process will be resumed as required when the ignition is switched on. Prerequisites for software installation —The vehicle is parked safely in accordance with legal requirements and local conditions . —The previously provided over-the-air updates have been installed. Installing software from an over-the-air update Choose a time for the over-the-air update when the vehicle does not have to be driven by yourself or others. WARNING Control units will be deactivated and will not function while software installation is taking place. Driving with deactivated or malfunctioning control units can cause accidents and fatal injuries. ● Carry out software installation so that other road users are not hindered. ● Never use your vehicle during a software installation procedure. 1. Stop the engine and switch on the electronic parking brake. 2. Close the bonnet, boot lid, all windows, the glass roof, if installed, and all doors. 3. Confirm software installation in the Infotainment system. 4. Make sure that all vehicle occupants get out and that no animals are left behind in the vehicle. 5. Take all vehicle keys with you and get out of the vehicle. 6. Lock the vehicle. Functional restrictions during software installation Control units, the central computer, functions and displays are not available during software installation. Do not use the vehicle and do not operate the Infotainment system during this time. —Mobile online services are not available.
  • Page 290 —The vehicle can be used again after successful software installation. (→ System update) —If software installation is unsuccessful: Troubleshooting Installation of an over-the-air update has failed —If installation of an over-the-air update is unsuccessful, a corresponding error message will be displayed on the Infotainment system or instrument cluster. Observe the corresponding messages and warnings. Control units will no longer function or will not function correctly in the event of a critical installation error. Functions and displays are not available until the error is corrected. Do not use the vehicle. In this case, contact Volkswagen Customer Care. Can I interrupt installation of an over-the-air update? No, this is not possible. What happens if installation of an over-the-air update is interrupted? If installation is interrupted, for example due to damage to the electrical system in the vehicle, it is possible that control units will be not be updated and may be damaged due to incomplete installation of the over-the-air update. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 291 Introduction to the topic Mobile devices can be connected to the Infotainment system by cable and wireless connections present in the vehicle. The type and number of cable and wireless connections differ according to the vehicle equipment and country. The connections may also be different within a model series or in special-edition models. In the case of cable connections, use only the original device connecting cables or, if available, the factory-supplied connecting cables for your vehicle. If the plug on the connecting cable cannot be inserted, check the angle of insertion and the connections. NOTICE Use of unsuitable or damaged connecting cables and insertion of the plugs at the incorrect position or with great force can lead to malfunctions and damage to the devices. ● Use only suitable and undamaged connecting cables. ● When inserting the plugs of the connecting cables into the appropriate connection, ensure that they are correctly positioned and apply only light pressure. Applying too much pressure may damage both the unit connection and the plug of the connecting cable. ● Make sure that the connecting cable is not pinched or sharply bent. If a connected device is not recognised, disconnect all devices and connect the device again. If necessary, check that the connecting cable you are using is working properly. If a connected device malfunctions, restart the device. In some cases this will remedy the fault. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 292: Usb Connection

    USB connection The USB port allows data transfer and device charging or only device charging. USB-C port Fig. 1 USB-C port in the vehicle ( illustration). The following USB -C ports may be available in the vehicle: Identification of a USB port suitable for data transfer and charging. Identification of a USB port suitable only for charging. (→ Charging options for mobile devices) For information on charging options and charging capacity, see Possible fitting locations of USB connections The number and fitting locations of U SB ports depend on the vehicle and equipment and the ports are not available in all countries. —In the centre console. —On the interior mirror base. —In the centre console stowage compartment. —In the compartment under the centre armrest. ports on the rear seats are equipped only with a charging function. Available data transfer functions The following USB data transfer functions are available, depending on equipment. —App-Connect . —Media playback . (→ Navigation) —Update function, e.g. for navigation data Notes and restrictions OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 293: Bluetooth Interface

    —Use only suitable USB connecting cables. The USB connecting cable must match the U SB port installed in the vehicle. —Dirty, overheated or damaged data media may be unusable. Observe the manufacturer’s instructions. —Differences in the quality of data media from different manufacturers can interfere with media playback. —If USB extension cables, USB plug adapters or USB hubs are used, this can lead to faults or failure of the U SB functions. Bluetooth® interface The Bluetooth interface is a wireless connection. In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a mobile device, e.g. mobile telephone, that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers. Bluetooth audio mode is available if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted mobile phone interface that supports this function. You can find out how to connect your mobile device with the Infotainment system via Bluetooth here: (→ Mobile phone interface) Bluetooth profiles A maximum of three mobile devices can be connected via Bluetooth at the same time. The following Bluetooth profiles may be available in the specified or different version: —HFP 1.7. —Telephony and handsfree mode. —A2DP 1.3. —Music playback. —AVRCP 1.6. —Displaying and operating music playback. —Transmission of Cover Arts. —PBAP 1.2. —Access to phone book and call lists. —MAP 1.4. —Access to SMS and email. — SPP 1.2. —Serial data transmission via Bluetooth.

  • Page 294: Controlling Playback

    Controlling playback The extent to which the Infotainment system can be used to control the mobile device connected via Bluetooth depends on the respective mobile device. With media players that support the A VRCP Bluetooth profile, playback on the mobile device can be automatically started or stopped upon switching to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. Depending on the mobile device, it may also be possible to display the track title and change the track using the Infotainment system. Due to the large number of possible mobile devices, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected mobile device (e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone) to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. With some devices, the Bluetooth audio connection will be disconnected automatically if a mobile device is simultaneously connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth and the USB port Connecting an external audio source via Wi-Fi® The Wi-Fi connection is a wireless connection. In Wi-Fi audio mode, sources connected via Wi-Fi (e.g. mobile telephones) can be used for audio transmission. The availability of the Wi-Fi function varies depending on country and the Infotainment system used. Prerequisites The connected audio source has a suitable app or supports media enabling under the U PnP ✓ standard. The Wi-Fi ✓ connection to the audio source is set up. Starting Wi-Fi audio transmission 1. Reduce the volume on the Infotainment system. 2. To open the Media main menu, tap MENU . 3. Start the UPnP server application or suitable app for audio playback on the Wi-Fi audio source.
  • Page 295 Introduction to the topic You need an internet connection in your vehicle in order to use selected In-Car Apps or Streaming for the Internet Radio. There are two options available to you for using internet in the vehicle: via the hotspot of a mobile device (e.g. mobile telephone) or, depending on country and the vehicle equipment, via the vehicle’s eSIM (→ Wi-Fi) Independently of how you establish the internet connection, whether via the hotspot of a mobile device or via the vehicle’s eSIM (→ Wi-Fi) , you can use the Infotainment system as a W i-Fi hotspot for eight further mobile devices . This function is dependent on the equipment level and is not available in all vehicles. If you want to use the eSIM for internet access, you must purchase data plans via the web shop of Volkswagen’s external mobile communications partner. You do not need any other data plans of the external mobile communications partner to use the mobile online services if you have concluded a contract for use of the mobile online services. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 296: Setting Up An Internet Connection

    Setting up an internet connection Using the internet via the eSIM in the vehicle In order to use an internet connection via the vehicle’s e SIM , you must purchase data plans in the web shop of Volkswagen’s external mobile communications partner. If you activated the Load in vehicle function during registration, you can also subsequently purchase data plans directly in the vehicle via the Infotainment system. Activate the internet connection via the e SIM 1. Tap HOME Data connection. Or: tap MENU Data connection. 2. Activate Streaming via integrated data connection (eSIM). The possibility of using an internet connection via the vehicle’s eSIM depends on the vehicle equipment and country. Using an internet connection via a mobile device Depending on your mobile telephone tariff, additional costs such as roaming charges may be charged for loading and using online data packages, especially if you use these services abroad. Due to the potentially high volume of data in use, Volkswagen recommends using a mobile device tariff which includes a data flat rate. For more information contact your mobile telephone provider. 1. Activate tethering / Wi-Fi hotspot on the mobile device, refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions. 2. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: .

  • Page 297: Setting Up A Wi-Fi Hotspot

    Setting up and deactivating a Wi-Fi® hotspot Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Infotainment system can be used as a Wi-Fi hotspot for internet access of up to eight mobile devices (e.g. tablet). An internet connection is necessary in order to use the Infotainment system as a Wi-Fi hotspot. This can be set up via the eSIM in the vehicle or via the hotspot of a mobile device, for example (→ Wi-Fi) The types of internet connections possible are dependent on the country and the Infotainment system used. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Inputs must be made both on the mobile device and in the Infotainment system. 1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot. Or: tap MENU Settings Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot. 2. Tap Use as hotspot and activate. 3. Search for the name of the Wi-Fi hotspot on the mobile device. 4. Enter the displayed network key on the mobile device and confirm. The Wi-Fi connection is set up. Further inputs may be required on the mobile device to complete the connection. 5. Optional: repeat the procedure to connect further mobile devices. The network name and the network key are generated automatically. You can then change the network name and the network key yourself. Deactivating a Wi-Fi hotspot 1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot.

  • Page 298: Quick Connection

    Quick connection The quick connection function makes it possible to easily and quickly establish a wireless local network with encryption. Alternatively, in some countries the function can be performed by scanning a QR code WPS with Infotainment system as a Wi-Fi® hotspot 1. Tap MENU Wi-Fi Mobile hotspot Wi-Fi:. 2. Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button). 3. Activate WPS on the mobile device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is set up. Further inputs may be required on the mobile device to complete the connection. 4. Repeat the procedure to connect further mobile devices. It is possible to establish only one connection at a time. If several connection attempts are started simultaneously, all connection attempts will fail. WPS with Infotainment system as client 1. Tap MENU Settings Wi-Fi Wi-Fi. 2. Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button). 3. Activate WPS on the mobile device. The Wi-Fi connection is set up. Further inputs may be required on the mobile device to complete the connection. is not supported by all mobile devices. Establish the connection manually in this case: Set up the Infotainment system as a W i- hotspot .

  • Page 299: Technical Specifications

    Technical specifications The technical specifications of the internet connections in the vehicle that are described here depend on the vehicle equipment and country. — Wi-Fi in accordance with IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. —Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. —Two Wi-Fi modes simultaneously: —Tethering (2.4 GHz). —2.4 GHz access point. —Up to eight mobile devices can be connected simultaneously. —Internet connection via Wi-Fi —Tethering via mobile telephone. —Hotspot for clients in the vehicle. —Apple CarPlay™ via Wi-Fi —Android Auto™ via Wi-Fi —Simplified pairing process via WPS , NFC or QR code. Possible types of data connections SIM card in SIM card reader: Suitable SIM card in SIM card reader. Network settings Allow internet connection is activated in the settings menu. A stable network can be set up only with a compatible SIM card. Bluetooth profile rSAP: The Infotainment system is connected with a suitable mobile telephone via the Bluetooth profile rSAP . Allow internet connection must be activated in the N etwork settings menu. Mobile device: Use the Wi-Fi (→ Wi-Fi) hotspot of a mobile device eSIM (embedded SIM): The vehicle has a control unit with embedded e SIM card (SIM). In order to use the Wi-Fi hotspot, you must purchase data plans from the In-Car Shop or from our mobile telephone partner’s web shop.
  • Page 300 Network settings Allow internet connection is activated in the settings menu. ✓ Or: Data connection Integrated data connection is activated. Introduction to the topic App-Connect enables the user to display and operate content and functions from the mobile telephone on the Infotainment system screen. For this, the mobile telephone must be connected to the Infotainment system using a U SB interface with data transfer function. Some technologies can also be used with A pp-Connect Wireless via the Bluetooth interface and the W i-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system. The following technologies may be available: —Apple CarPlay™. —Apple CarPlay™ Wireless. —Android Auto™. —Android Auto™ Wireless. The above-named technologies are operated by third parties and are not made available by Volkswagen. Volkswagen is not responsible if these technologies are terminated, discontinued or deactivated during the service life of the vehicle. There may be problems with compatibility with third-party apps. We are unable to guarantee that the available apps can be run on all mobile telephones and all operating systems. The availability of the App-Connect technologies is country-dependent and may vary according to the mobile telephone. A wide range of apps may be available and they may depend on the vehicle and country. The content, scope and providers of apps can vary. The apps offered by Volkswagen can also be changed, discontinued, deactivated, reactivated and upgraded without prior notice. Some apps also depend on availability of services offered by third parties. For more information, please visit the Volkswagen website. Apps, their use, and the necessary mobile network connection may be subject to charges. WARNING Using apps while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road. Serious accidents and fatal injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Use apps and functions only when the vehicle is stationary.
  • Page 301 Symbols and settings for App-Connect Symbols in the menu App-Connect The display of symbols depends on the equipment and the country. or Show more information. Open the App-Connect settings menu. Select Apple CarPlay technology. Select Android Auto technology. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 302 If Apple CarPlay is used, the Bluetooth connection is terminated again when the connection via the W i- hotspot of the Infotainment system has been established. If Android Auto is used, the Bluetooth connection is maintained. Connecting a mobile telephone for the first time 1. For App-Connect Wireless, connect the mobile telephone with Bluetooth and with the W i-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system (→ Mobile phone interface) (→ Wi-Fi) For App-Connect, connect the mobile telephone with the Infotainment system using a U SB cable. 2. Tap . Or: tap MENU . Or: press APP . 3. Select the mobile telephone and the required technology. 4. Grant the Infotainment system the necessary permissions. To do this, confirm the permission requests on the mobile telephone. App-Connect or App-Connect Wireless is set up. App-Connect and App-Connect Wireless will not be available if you do not confirm the pop-up menus during the connection process. In this case, Volkswagen recommends deleting the mobile telephones in both the device settings and on the Infotainment system and restarting the connection process. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 303: Apple Carplay

    ✓ If Apple CarPlay Wireless is not possible, the iPhone must be connected to the Infotainment system via a USB connection with data transfer capability. Only USB ports with data transfer capability are suitable for using Apple CarPlay. ✓ The USB cable used must be an original cable from Apple. The availability of the technologies depends on the country and may vary. Information on technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certified apps and availability is available on the Volkswagen and Apple CarPlay websites or from your Volkswagen dealership. Launching Apple CarPlay 1. To open the App-Connect main menu, tap MENU App-Connect . Or: press APP . 2. Tap Apple CarPlay to establish the connection with the iPhone. Disconnecting 1. To open the App-Connect main menu when in A pple CarPlay mode, tap . 2. Tap or to disconnect the active connection. How the function buttons are displayed on the screen may vary. Points to note Please note the following points during an active Apple CarPlay connection: —Telephone functions are possible only via A pple CarPlay for the iPhone that is connected to the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay.

  • Page 304: Voice Control

    ✓ addition, the Infotainment system must also be activated as a Wi-Fi hotspot. If Android Auto Wireless is not possible, the smartphone must be connected to the Infotainment system using a ✓ connection with data transfer capability. Only USB connections with data transfer capability are suitable for using Android Auto. The USB ✓ cable used must be an original cable from the smartphone manufacturer. The availability of the technologies depends on the country and may vary. Information on technical requirements, compatible smartphones, certified apps and availability is available on the Volkswagen and Android Auto websites or from your Volkswagen dealership. Starting Android Auto 1. To open the App-Connect main menu, tap MENU . Or: press APP . 2. Tap Android Auto to establish a connection with the smartphone. Disconnecting 1. To open the App-Connect main menu when in Android Auto mode, tap C lose . 2. Tap to disconnect the active connection. Points to note The following points apply when an Android Auto connection is active: —An active Android Auto device can also be connected simultaneously to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth (hands-free profile, HFP —Telephone functions are possible via Android Auto. If the Android Auto device is connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth at the same time, the telephone function on the Infotainment system can also be used.
  • Page 305 —An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a media device in the M edia main menu. —It is not possible to use the Android Auto navigation at the same time as the internal navigation. The last route guidance to be started terminates the previous active route guidance. —The instrument cluster display shows information about the telephone mode. —Depending on the Infotainment system and navigation app you are using, turning instructions may be shown on the instrument cluster display. —You can accept or reject incoming calls or end a telephone call via the multifunction steering wheel. Voice control The “voice control” function depends on the vehicle equipment level. 1. Tap briefly to start voice control of the Infotainment system. Or: long-tap to start voice control of the connected smartphone. Introduction to mobile online services Mobile online services, referred to below as services, allow you to connect your vehicle to the internet. This makes it possible for you to extend the scope of various services. A description of all available services can be found on the internet at: https://connect.volkswagen.com You can find the myVolkswagen customer area on the internet at: https://www.myvolkswagen.net/start/en.html To use We Connect, it must first be activated online by concluding a We Connect contract with Volkswagen and is subject to a restricted, country-dependent period of validity. The provision and availability of services and service portfolios can vary from country to country and depend on the vehicle and vehicle equipment. Both the service portfolios offered by Volkswagen and individual services may be changed, discontinued, deactivated, reactivated, renamed and expanded without further notice. In areas with insufficient mobile phone and reception, no emergency calls and phone calls can be made and no data can be transmitted. Observe the warnings in the chapter . Volkswagen is not responsible for damage to the vehicle caused by poor-quality or faulty third-party apps, inadequate programming of third-party apps, insufficient network strength, data loss, misuse of mobile devices, or malware on data media, computers, tablets and mobile telephones. An overview of your activated services and their contract terms is available in your user account. Execution of services using the app can consume data and cause costs. The transmission speed will be reduced if the contractually agreed data volume is exceeded, and this can cause delays in execution of the services. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 306: Data Processing

    Data processing Valid in EU countries where the General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union is effective: When using the services, information about the vehicle is transmitted and processed online. This data can also indirectly provide information about the respective driver, e.g. about driving behaviour. You can find the Privacy Policy for use of the Volkswagen mobile online services in the Infotainment system under MENU Legal information or HOME Legal information or Legal information. Permanent transfer of the vehicle If the vehicle has been purchased as a used vehicle or handed over to you by another person for permanent use, mobile online services may already be activated and the previous user may still have the possibility to view collected data and control certain vehicle functions via mobile online services. In the Infotainment system you can see whether a person is assigned to your vehicle as the primary user. In this case, you can register yourself as the primary user of the vehicle and automatically remove the previous primary user. Alternatively, you can permanently delete the previous user as the primary user directly in the Infotainment system. You can also set the vehicle to offline mode and thus restrict communication of your vehicle with the data server of Volkswagen and processing of vehicle-related and personal data. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 307 Prerequisites for using the services In order to be able to use the full scope of the services, the following prerequisites must be met. ✓ The hardware for We Connect was also ordered for the vehicle and has been installed at the factory. The vehicle and user are located in the area covered by the services. ✓ Data transmission is possible without restrictions at the location of the user and vehicle. ✓ ✓ The mobile telephone is compatible with the app. ✓ The privacy settings in the Infotainment system permit data transmission by the services. The settings in the mobile telephone permit data transmission by the services. ✓ (→ Volkswagen ID) A personal user account, V olkswagen ID, has been set up ✓ ✓ There is a valid contract for use of the services. (→ Virtual vehicle) ✓ A vehicle has been added to the user account Neither the online connectivity unit nor individual services are deactivated or decommissioned. ✓ Certain technologies that are operated by third parties and provided to Volkswagen AG are available. Volkswagen ✓ AG is not responsible if these technologies are terminated, discontinued or deactivated during the service life of the vehicle. WARNING Using apps, services and functions while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road. Serious accidents and fatal injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. WARNING Using services without due care or unsupervised can result in the serious injury or even death of people in and around the vehicle, for example if they are locked inside the vehicle unintentionally. ● Always carry out the services carefully and responsibly.
  • Page 308 Interference Even when the prerequisites for using the services are met, the provision of the Volkswagen services can be impaired or interrupted due to factors that are beyond the control of Volkswagen. Such factors include in particular: —Maintenance, repairs, deactivations, software updates and technical changes to your service provider’s telecommunication systems, satellites, servers and databases. —A change in the mobile communication standard for transmission of mobile data by the telecommunications providers, e.g. from LTE or UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. —An existing mobile telecommunications standard has been switched off by the telecommunications provider. —Disturbance, interference or interruption of mobile and G PS reception, e.g. due to high speeds, weather, landscape, interfering devices or intensive use of the mobile network in the relevant cells. —If your current location is in an area with no or insufficient mobile communications and GPS reception. This can also include tunnels, streets with tall buildings, garages, multi-storey car parks, underpasses, mountains and valleys. —Restricted availability, completeness or correctness of information provided by third parties, e.g. maps. —Countries, states and regions where mobile online services are not available. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 309 Activation-free services The following services can also be used if the vehicle is not added to a user account. This is the maximum possible range of functions. Not all services are available in all vehicles and countries. — Information Call. —Emergency Call Service . —eCall Emergency System. —Breakdown Call without transmission of vehicle data. The Emergency Call Service is available independently of logging into the Infotainment system. In Europe, further information is available on the internet and on the Volkswagen website. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 310 Setting up a Volkswagen ID The Volkswagen ID provides personal access to the digital world of Volkswagen. The Volkswagen ID enables you to log into Volkswagen apps and websites. You need a Volkswagen ID in order to use the services. You can register for the Volkswagen ID via myVolkswagen or via the Volkswagen app, referred to below as app. Registering via myVolkswagen 1. Open www.myvolkswagen.net. 2. Create a user account in the Login or register area. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Registering via the app 1. Install the app. 2. Follow the instructions in the app. Registering via the Infotainment system Depending on equipment, you can also register for the Volkswagen ID via the Infotainment system. 1. Tap We Connect on the Infotainment system and follow the instructions of the configuration wizard. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 311 Managing vehicles After you have set up your V olkswagen ID and thus created your user account, you must add your vehicle by entering the 17-character vehicle identification number (VIN). Adding via myVolkswagen 1. In the myVolkswagen customer area, click on Garage. 2. Enter and confirm the vehicle identification number (VIN The service packages available for your vehicle will be displayed after your vehicle has been successfully added. You can add further vehicles in the same way via myVolkswagen. Adding a vehicle via app 1. Launch the app and then open the A dd vehicle area. 2. Enter or scan the VIN and confirm. The service packages available for your vehicle will be displayed after your vehicle has been successfully added. Removing a vehicle via myVolkswagen 1. In the myVolkswagen customer area, open Garage. 2. Click Remove next to the vehicle that you want to remove and confirm. The vehicle is then deleted from your user account. No further services can be performed or data displayed for the deleted vehicle. Removing the vehicle resets the primary user and renewed registration is then necessary. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 312 Ordering services and activating them in the vehicle You must first order the services before you can use the services in the vehicle. You must then become the primary user of your vehicle by providing proof of ownership for the vehicle. Proof of ownership is provided either by means of the 2-key method or by entering the registration code. If you want to use security-relevant services, you must also carry out the Volkswagen Ident process (→ Volkswagen Ident process) . The ordered services will be activated when you have become the primary user for your vehicle and also carried out the Volkswagen Ident process where necessary. Ordering services via myVolkswagen Observe the information on privacy, right of withdrawal, Terms and Conditions and Terms of Use. 1. In the myVolkswagen customer area, confirm your Approval of the Terms and Conditions and Terms of Use . 2. Click on Order free of charge. 3. Wait for email with confirmation. 4. To activate the services in the vehicle, identify yourself as the primary user. To do, this follow the further instructions. You can extend contracts that will expire in the near future via the E xtend contract function button in the vehicle overview. If your contract has only just begun or still has a long period to run, this function button will not be visible. You receive only basic services as the primary user in the case of pre-owned vehicles whose services have already expired. The services can then be renewed via myVolkswagen and the In-Car Shop. Ordering services via the app Observe the information on privacy, right of withdrawal, Terms and Conditions and Terms of Use. 1. In the app, confirm your Approval of the Terms and Conditions and Terms of Use . 2. Tap Order free of charge. 3. Wait for email with confirmation. 4. To activate the services in the vehicle, identify yourself as the primary user. To do this, follow the further instructions in the app.
  • Page 313 After the Infotainment system has processed the radio signals, you are then the primary user of the vehicle and proof of ownership has been provided. You can check the current status in the user area of the following website: https://www.myvolkswagen.net/start/en.html Activating services via registration code A registration code will be displayed automatically after ordering the services. The registration code is valid for 14 days. After this period has elapsed, you will need to request a new registration code via the myVolkswagen customer area. In the Overview for my vehicle area, the registration code is displayed below the vehicle for all vehicles that have not been fully activated. Select Finish activation to continue the activation process. 1. Take the registration code with you to the added vehicle. 2. Unlock the vehicle. 3. Switch on the ignition and leave it switched on until activation has been completed successfully. 4. With the Infotainment system switched on, tap the R egistration function button in the W e Connect (online services) area. 5. Enter the registration code, confirm, and wait until successful activation is confirmed in the Infotainment system. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 314 Setting, changing and resetting the S-PIN Input of the security PIN (S-PIN) is requested in addition to the password as part of user authentication and acts as a second security level to protect security-relevant services from unauthorised access. The security PIN , S-PIN is a multiple-digit number string that can be freely chosen during registration. When creating the S-PIN , avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and generally known birthday dates. You must treat the S-PIN as strictly confidential. For security reasons, you should change the S-PIN if the S-PIN is disclosed to a third party. Setting the S-PIN via myVolkswagen and via the app —In myVolkswagen, you can set the S -PIN in your user account. —In the app, you can set the S-PIN during the registration process. The S-PIN should consist of four non-identical digits that are not sequential in either ascending or descending order. Changing the S-PIN via myVolkswagen and via the app —In myVolkswagen, you can change the S -PIN in your user account. —In the app, you can change the S -PIN in your user profile. To change the S-PIN, you must enter and confirm both the previous and new S -PIN. If you enter the S-PIN incorrectly several times, the input field will be blocked for a certain period. Resetting the S-PIN via myVolkswagen and app —As soon as the S-PIN has been reset, certain online services can no longer be used in either the app or in myVolkswagen until the vehicle keeper has verified themselves in the vehicle. For verification, have both vehicle keys ready and start the process on the Infotainment system. You can use the services again in full after renewed ordering and activation. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 315 Carrying out Volkswagen Ident The identity of the primary user must be confirmed in order to use security-relevant services. You can provide proof of identity either personally at the Volkswagen dealership or through Volkswagen Ident, a video chat in the app. 1. When a message about the identity check is displayed upon using a security-relevant service for the first time, observe the information and tap Start. 2. Have your identity document ready. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. A message confirms that the identity check has been performed successfully. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 316: Getting Help

    Getting help Various information sources are available to get help on the functions or operation of individual services. Help via myVolkswagen Information on registration, the individual services and frequently asked questions (FAQ) is available in the H elp area. Short help texts and videos are available for you in many areas via myVolkswagen. You can display help texts by clicking on the icon. Using the chatbot, you can search directly for a certain question or keyword after tapping Start chat. The chatbot shows several possible answers for the respective topic. Help via the app Information on the service portfolio and individual services, frequently asked questions (FAQ) and also tutorials on the app are available in the Account area. You can display this information by clicking on the icon. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 317: Manage Services

    Manage services The following are possible in the Manage services area of the Infotainment system: —Checking which services are currently available in the vehicle. —Displaying number of activated and deactivated services. —Activating or deactivating individual services. Further information: https://connect.volkswagen.com Opening service management 1. Tap System Service. If you deactivate all services individually, the control unit with embedded eSIM card can still transmit data. Settings The services can be activated and deactivated individually. To do this, open the drop-down list for the service and make the corresponding selection. If data transmission is restricted by the “privacy settings” function, it is not possible to activate or deactivate services individually. The setting options are country-dependent and are not available in all vehicle models. 1. Open service management. 2. Tap Show services. 3. Select the desired setting. Overview of services available in the vehicle. Activate Activate one or more services. Deactivate Deactivate one or more services. Deactivating services The following functions are available for deactivating and activating the services: —Central deactivation and activation via the Infotainment system . —Individual deactivation and deactivation via m yVolkswagen or in the app. The respective services can be run again only after the corresponding deactivation is cancelled. Some streaming services can be activated or deactivated only together, even if they are listed separately in the individual menu.

  • Page 318: Setting Options

    Introduction to the topic Opening user management 1. Tap Users or User management on the Infotainment system start screen. Or: tap MENU Users or User management. Setting options The following setting options may be available, depending on the vehicle equipment: —Me (primary user). —Others (secondary users). —Key. —Settings. Description of user roles Primary user or —The “primary user” role is intended for the vehicle keeper or for users who do not just have temporary authorisation to use the vehicle, such as a lessee or company car driver. The primary user has unrestricted rights and can assign additional rights to other users of the vehicle by inviting them as secondary users. If a new primary user legitimises themselves for the vehicle, the previous primary user will automatically lose their primary user role. Secondary users or —The “Secondary user” user role is intended for users who also use the vehicle regularly. Secondary users derive their role from the primary user and must be invited for the vehicle by the primary user. The primary user can delete secondary users at any time. Guest users —The “Guest user” user role is intended for users who use a vehicle occasionally or only once. Guest users can log in themselves in every vehicle with service capability and involvement of the primary user is not necessary. Every vehicle user can delete the guest user in the vehicle at any time. The guest user has only restricted access to certain services. Anonymous guest —The “Anonymous guest” user role is a non person-specific account that exists locally in the vehicle and cannot be synchronised with the server. The “Anonymous guest” user role is intended for anonymous guests. These are persons who have access to the vehicle but do not log in. This account exists only once in vehicles with online personalisation and cannot be deleted. If the “Anonymous guest” user role is activated in the vehicle, all users logged into the vehicle will be logged out temporarily. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 319 Creating and deleting user roles Creating a primary user (→ Volkswagen ID) 1. Create a user account (→ Virtual vehicle) 2. Add a vehicle to a user account 3. Order services and activate them in the vehicle (→ Virtual vehicle) Creating secondary users via myVolkswagen After successful registration and verification, you can assign rights to the vehicle users as the primary user. 1. Open the Vehicle users area. 2. Click on Invitations and enter the email address and username of the user to be registered. 3. Click Send. The invited person receives an email with their invitation. You can activate the services for this person as soon as they accept the invitation. You can withdraw invitations again if necessary in the U sers area. Deleting the primary user 1. Set privacy settings to “Share my position” mode or “Online”. (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) 2. Reset the Infotainment system to the factory settings Or: legitimise a new user in the vehicle. If a different privacy setting is chosen, the primary user may still be present on the server. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 320 Changing and deleting user data You can change or delete your user and login data. Any changes to your login details will simultaneously also apply to the all other Volkswagen systems that use the Volkswagen ID. Changing user data via myVolkswagen 1. Open myVolkswagen Settings in the customer area and open one of the following areas: —Volkswagen ID. —Privacy settings and consents. 2. Click on Volkswagen ID Adapt data. 3. Change and save the user data. 4. If necessary, adapt and save the information in the P rivacy settings and consents area. Deleting user data via myVolkswagen 1. In the myVolkswagen customer area, click on Settings Volkswagen ID Delete data. Your data will be deleted. Your V olkswagen ID will not be deleted. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 321 Introduction to the topic Using the “Privacy settings” function, it is possible to allow or prevent data transfer between the vehicle and internet in several levels. The “Privacy settings” function depends on the vehicle equipment and is not available with all Infotainment systems. Data transfer by mobile devices and communication by these devices with the vehicle or legally required services, such as the legally required “eCall Emergency System”, cannot be blocked or deactivated by the setting made for the “Privacy settings” function. Please note that every vehicle user can adjust individual settings in the “Privacy settings” function. These settings may be different from those preferred by the vehicle keeper. Opening the Privacy settings menu 1. Switch on the ignition. (→ Privacy settings) The set “Privacy settings” mode is displayed on the Infotainment system 2. Tap MENU Users Privacy settings. (→ Privacy settings) 3. Select the desired mode OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 322: Status Display

    Status display The following symbols display the status of the privacy function individually or together in the Infotainment system. In order to permit or prevent data transmission, activate a status in the Infotainment system. Connection to the Internet Offline, no connection to the Internet. Online, connection to the Internet with reduced speed. Online, connection established to the Internet. Privacy settings display “Maximum privacy” mode. —All We Connect services are deactivated and do not transmit any data. (→ Privacy settings) All tracking services are deactivated —The eSIM card is deactivated. All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the eSIM card are deactivated (→ Privacy settings) —It is not possible to update any information and data stored in the control units, e.g. emergency call numbers. This can restrict functions and services or mean that they are not available. “No position data” mode. —The current position of the vehicle is not transmitted. (→ Privacy settings) All tracking services are deactivated —The eSIM card remains activated. All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM (→ Privacy settings) card are activated “Use my position” mode. —Information on the current position of the vehicle is not provided to other persons. All tracking services are deactivated (→ Privacy settings) —The eSIM card remains activated. All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM card are activated.
  • Page 323 “Share my position” mode. —All We Connect services can transmit and receive data without restrictions. All tracking services are activated. The primary and secondary users can access the vehicle’s positioning data online at myVolkswagen or via the app. —The eSIM card is activated. All vehicle functions that require an online connection via the e SIM card are activated. Legally required services cannot be deactivated and still transmit data, e.g. the legally required eCall Emergency System. Effects on online vehicle functions and tracking services If data transfer is restricted, online vehicle functions such as system updates or tracking services for the vehicle cannot be executed. Some online vehicle functions and tracking services are available only in some countries and vehicle models. The restrictions also apply to new online vehicle functions and tracking services that are provided for the vehicle in future. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 324 Introduction to the topic The personalisation function allows personalised vehicle settings, e.g. for the air conditioning system, to be saved in a user account. User identification takes place when logging into the Infotainment system. Changes to the settings are assigned to the user account active in the vehicle and are automatically saved online in the user account via an existing internet connection. Opening the configuration wizard for personalised vehicle settings 1. Tap MENU Configuration wizard. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 325 Personalised vehicle settings The vehicle functions that can be configured depend on the equipment level. Some personalisable functions are not stored online, but are only assigned to the user account locally in the vehicle. This is the maximum possible range of functions. Not all vehicle functions are available in all vehicles and countries. The following functions can be personalised: —Settings for single door unlocking, convenience opening and windows. —Wiper settings. —Settings for daytime running lights, switch-on times of dipped beam, convenience turn signal. —Air conditioning system settings. —Settings for active driver assist systems. —Driving profile selection. —Multifunction display and selection of displays in the instrument cluster. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 326 Synchronising vehicle settings Vehicle settings changed in the vehicle are automatically assigned to the active user account and are stored online on a cyclical basis. The vehicle settings are also automatically synchronised with the data stored online in the following situations when an Internet connection has been established: —When the ignition and Infotainment system are switched on: synchronises all user accounts stored in the vehicle that have recently been used. —When switching to another user account: synchronises the newly activated user account and the user account that has now been deactivated. —At the end of the journey and when the ignition is switched off: synchronises the last active user account. You can also start the synchronisation manually in the user management menu at any time, e.g. if automatic synchronisation fails when logging in. Synchronisation cannot take place automatically if the online status of the vehicle is impaired, e.g. in underground garages, or if you have activated the “maximum privacy settings” mode. If an inactive user account is active in another vehicle and settings are synchronised from there, these settings are also transferred to your vehicle and assigned to the corresponding user account. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 327 Introduction to the topic With Upgrades, your vehicle can be extended by new functions after delivery. Functions Depending on the vehicle model, you can activate convenience and Infotainment system functions, along with driver assistance systems. Activation of Upgrades functions depends on the country and vehicle. Inform the user or buyer about unlocked functions when renting or selling the vehicle. WARNING Activating functions while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road. Serious accidents and fatal injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Only activate functions when the vehicle is stationary. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. If the required hardware for the respective activatable function is not available in the vehicle, it can be retrofitted in some cases by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. If the required software for the activatable function is not available in the vehicle, the software can be retrofitted . Retrofitting may be subject to charge, depending on the type of software. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 328: Viewing Functions

    Viewing and activating functions Before starting the engine again, read the message in the Infotainment system about the completed activation. Observe the instructions if activation was not successful. Prerequisites A suitable Infotainment system is installed in the vehicle. ✓ The hardware in the vehicle is compatible and offers the required performance. ✓ ✓ A valid contract for use of the services exists between you and Volkswagen AG. ✓ The vehicle is assigned to your user account. You have the “primary user” role for the vehicle (→ Manage users) ✓ Sufficient mobile reception is available at the current location of the vehicle. ✓ ✓ The electrical system in the vehicle is ready for use. ✓ The 12-volt vehicle battery is appropriately charged. The factory-fitted control unit with integrated e SIM ✓ card is present. Viewing functions 1. Tap HOME Users or Manage users . Or: tap MENU Users or Manage users .

  • Page 329: Troubleshooting

    (→ Manage users) If you have the “primary user” role for the vehicle , you can also view activated functions in the app. Troubleshooting Where can I obtain functions? Functions are available from a web shop accessible via your user account. Depending on the vehicle equipment, functions can also be activated directly via the Infotainment system in the In- Car shop. Are there any function restrictions during activation? The function is not available during activation. Where is successful activation shown? Successful activation is displayed in the Infotainment system. When will the activated function be available? Depending on the activated function, the function is either available immediately or after switching the ignition back OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 330: Before Using For The First Time

    Introduction to the topic The functions and settings of the Infotainment system depend on the equipment and are not available in all countries. Before using for the first time Before using the Infotainment system for the first time, please observe the following points so you can make full use of the available functions and settings: (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) —Observe the safety instructions (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) —Reset the Infotainment system to the factory settings —Find your favourite radio stations ( also referred to below just as “stations”) and store them to memory locations for quick access . —Use only suitable audio sources and data media . —Use current map data for the navigation system. —Pair a mobile telephone to make calls using the mobile phone interface . —Register with We Connect to use the corresponding services. Other applicable documents In addition to this manual, please observe the following documents when using this Infotainment system and its components: —Supplements to the vehicle wallet of your vehicle. —The operating instructions for the mobile telephone or audio sources. —The operating instructions for external data media and playback devices. —Instructions for any Infotainment accessories subsequently installed or additionally used. —Digital instructions in the Infotainment system, where available. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 331 Safety notes —Some functions may contain links to websites that are operated by third parties. Volkswagen does not assume ownership of the third-party websites that are reached via links and is not responsible for their content. —Some functions may contain external information supplied by third parties. Volkswagen is not responsible for external information being correct, up-to-date and complete, or for any infringement of third-party rights. —The radio stations or owners of the data storage media and audio sources are responsible for the content provided. —Multi-storey car parks, garages, underpasses, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains, valleys, and other electrical devices such as battery chargers can impair reception of mobile communications, GPS and radio signals. —Films or metal-coated stickers on the aerial and on the windows can interfere with radio reception. —Read and follow the appropriate operating instructions of the respective manufacturer when using mobile telephones, data media, external devices, external audio and media sources. WARNING The central computer of the Infotainment system is networked with the control units in the vehicle. If the central computer is not repaired correctly or is not removed and installed correctly, there is an increased risk of accidents and injuries due to a control unit that does not function or does not function properly. ● Never replace the central computer with a used central computer taken from an older vehicle or a recycling facility. ● Only have the central computer removed, installed or repaired by a specialist company qualified to perform this work. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Reading information from the screen, operating the Infotainment system and connecting, inserting or removing a data medium or audio source while driving can distract you from the traffic situation. Unfavourable light conditions and a damaged or dirty screen may result in displays and information not being read or not being read correctly from the screen. This can distract you from the road. Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. WARNING If the volume is set too loud, this will prevent you from hearing acoustic signals. If you do not hear acoustic signals from outside, this can lead to accidents. ● Set the volume so that you can still always hear acoustic signals from outside the vehicle (e.g. emergency service sirens). WARNING A volume that is too loud can damage the hearing, even if the hearing is exposed to loud volumes only for a short time. ● Adjust the volume so that it is pleasant for all vehicle occupants.
  • Page 332 mobile communications and satellite reception. ● If the components in the vehicle required for emergency calls, telephone calls and data transmission are damaged, not working, or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● The battery of the mobile telephone is empty or does not have a sufficient charge level. WARNING Radio stations can transmit catastrophe and danger warnings. If catastrophe and danger warnings cannot be received or output, this can cause accidents and injuries. The following conditions can prevent these warnings from being received or issued: ● Your current location is in an area with no or insufficient radio signal reception. ● The frequency bands of the radio stations are subject to interference or are not available in areas with adequate radio signal reception. ● The loudspeakers and the components required for radio reception in the vehicle are damaged, not working or do not have sufficient electrical power. WARNING In some countries and mobile networks, a call for assistance or an emergency call can be made only subject to the following prerequisites: ● A mobile telephone with unlocked S IM card and sufficient call credit is connected to the mobile phone interface of the vehicle. ● ● Sufficient network coverage is available. WARNING If a mobile telephone or two-way radio that is not connected to an external aerial is used, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed limit values and thus be a health hazard for all vehicle occupants. ● Maintain a minimum distance of 20 cm ( around 8 inches) between the aerials on the mobile telephone and an active medical implant (e.g. a pacemaker) since the mobile devices may impair the function of active medical implants. ● Do not carry a mobile telephone that is operational close to or directly above an active medical implant, for example in a breast pocket.

  • Page 333: Notes On Use

    NOTICE The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. ● Always switch off your mobile telephone in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile devices is forbidden. NOTICE The loudspeakers can be damaged if the volume is set at too high a level and by playback which is too loud or distorted. ● Choose the volume setting so that the loudspeakers are not damaged. Notes on use —The Infotainment system needs a few seconds for a complete system start and does not respond to inputs during this time. During system startup, only the rear view camera image can be displayed. —The Infotainment system must start up completely before all displays are available and before it is possible to execute functions. The duration of a system start depends on the functional scope of the Infotainment system and can also take longer than usual particularly at low and high temperatures. —When using the Infotainment system and the corresponding accessories, such as a headset or headphones, please observe the country-specific regulations and legal requirements. —To ensure that the Infotainment system functions correctly, it is important to make sure the system is switched on and that, where applicable, the correct date and time are set in the vehicle. —A missing function button on the screen does not constitute a fault in the unit; It reflects the equipment that is available in the country in question. —Some of the functions and settings of the Infotainment system are available only when the vehicle is stationary. In some countries, the selector lever must also be in selector lever position or . This is not a malfunction, but simply a legal requirement. —There may be restrictions on the use of Bluetooth® devices in some countries. Information is available from the local authorities. —Switch the ignition on before switching the Infotainment system back on if the 12-volt vehicle battery has been disconnected. —If settings are modified, displays on the screen may vary and the Infotainment system may behave differently from the description in this manual in some cases. —The Infotainment system switches off automatically when the engine is switched off and when the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is low. —In certain vehicles with Park Distance Control, the volume of the current audio source is lowered automatically when reverse gear is engaged. It is possible to adjust the volume reduction. —Information on the software and the licence conditions is stored in the Infotainment system: Settings Copyright. —If you sell your vehicle or loan it to somebody else, make sure that all the stored data, files and settings are deleted and that the external SD card, external audio sources and data media are removed where applicable.
  • Page 334 Marks, licences, copyright Marks and licences Certain terms in this manual are accompanied by the symbol ® or ™. These symbols indicate trademarks or registered marks. However, the absence of these symbols does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. Other product names are registered marks of the respective legal owners. —Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. —Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. —All SiriusXM services require a subscription. See the SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees, content and features are subject to change. Satellite and steaming lineups may vary. SiriusXM, Pandora and all related logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its respective subsidiaries. All rights reserved. —HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. —Apple Music is a trademark of Apple Inc. —SPOTIFY and the Spotify logo are among the registered trademarks of Spotify AB. Compatible vehicle and Spotify Premium subscription required, where available. —Android Auto™ is a certified trademark of Google Inc. —Apple CarPlay™ is a certified trademark of Apple Inc. —Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. —iPod®, iPad® and iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc. —MPEG -4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. —SD ® and SDHC® are brands or registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC in the USA and other countries. —Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. —This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product requires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. Copyright law Audio and video files saved on data media and audio sources are normally subject to national and international copyright laws. Observe the legal requirements. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 335 Infotainment system overview Fig. 1 Overview of the 9.2” Infotainment system. MENU : sensor field for opening the start screen. HOME : sensor field for opening the views. 3 Sensor field for Infotainment system on or off. 4 Sensor fields for volume. 5 Function button for main menu. 6 Control Centre. 7 Screen (touchscreen). 8 Views. 9 Status bar. Further information and tips for operating the Infotainment system are provided in these operating instructions (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) MENU 1. Tap MENU to open the start screen. HOME 1. Tap HOME to open the views. 3 Sensor field for switching the Infotainment system on or off OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 336 1. Tap the sensor field to switch the Infotainment system on or off manually. 4 Sensor fields for volume 1. Tap the sensor fields to adjust the volume. 5 Function button for main menu The position of the function buttons can be configured (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) 1. Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. for the mobile phone interface. Control Centre There are additional function buttons for functions and notifications in the Control Centre. You can configure the (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) displayed functions 1. Tap the marking and slide it down to open the Control Centre. Screen (touchscreen) You can operate the functions of the Infotainment system using the screen. You can find a detailed explanation of the different finger gestures in the digital instructions on the Infotainment system, where available. 1. Tap MENU to open the digital instructions of the Infotainment system. 8 Views Some menus and functions have several views with different content. The current view is highlighted. —Tap the marking to change to a view. —Swipe your finger to the left or to the right across the screen to switch between views. Scroll bar (without item number) Some menus and functions have further content above or below the current screen view. 1. Tap the scroll bar and swipe it up or down to display additional content. Gesture control (without item number) You can also switch on gesture control. When gesture control is switched on, this is indicated on the screen. 1. Tap MENU Screen Hand gesture. Infotainment system overview OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 337 Fig. 1 Overview of the 8” Infotainment system. 1 Sensor fields for opening main menus and the start screen: — RADIO : radio mode . — MEDIA : media mode . — PHONE : mobile phone interface . — VOICE : . The button has no function in some countries. — NAV : navigation . — APP : App-Connect . The button has no function in some countries. — SOUND . — CAR . — MENU : start screen. 2 Rotary pushbutton. 3 Function button for main menu. 4 Views. 5 Control Centre. 6 Menu control. Further information and tips for operating the Infotainment system are provided in these operating instructions (→ First steps in the Infotainment system)
  • Page 338 2 Rotary pushbutton —Press to switch the Infotainment system on or off. —Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the volume. —Turn clockwise to increase the volume. 3 Function button for main menu The position of the function buttons cannot be configured. 1. Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. for the mobile phone interface. 4 Views Some menus and functions have several views with different content. The current view is highlighted. —Tap the marking to change to a view. —Swipe your finger to the left or to the right across the screen to switch between views. 5 Control Centre There are additional function buttons for functions and notifications in the Control Centre. You can configure the (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) displayed functions 1. Tap the marking and slide it down to open the Control Centre. 6 Menu control 1. Turn to select from a list. 2. Press to confirm a selection. Screen (touchscreen) (without item number) You can operate the functions of the Infotainment system using the screen. You can find a detailed explanation of the different finger gestures in the digital instructions on the Infotainment system, where available. 1. Tap MENU . Scroll bar (without item number) Some menus and functions have further content above or below the current screen view. 1. Tap the scroll bar and swipe it up or down to display additional content.
  • Page 339 Fig. 1 Overview of the 6.5” Infotainment system. 1 Function buttons for opening main menus and the start screen: — RADIO . — MEDIA . — MENU : start screen. — PHONE . — APP . The button has no function in some countries. — VOICE . The button has no function in some countries. 2 Rotary pushbutton. 3 Function button for main menu. (→ Media drives) 4 SD card slot 5 Screen (touchscreen). 6 Menu control. Further information and tips for operating the Infotainment system are provided in these operating instructions (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) 1 Function buttons —Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. PHONE for the mobile phone interface. —Press MENU to open the start screen. —Press and hold VOICE to start voice control of the connected mobile telephone.

  • Page 340: Media Drives

    —Press to switch the Infotainment system on or off. — Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the volume. —Turn clockwise to increase the volume. Function button for main menu The position of the function buttons cannot be configured. 1. Tap the corresponding function button to open a main menu, e.g. for the mobile phone interface. 5 Screen (touchscreen) You can operate the functions of the Infotainment system using the screen. You can find a detailed explanation of the different finger gestures in the digital instructions on the Infotainment system, where available. 1. Tap MENU Operation. 6 Menu control 1. Turn to select from a list. 2. Press to confirm a selection. Scroll bar (without item number) Some menus and functions have further content above or below the current screen view. 1. Tap the scroll bar and swipe it up or down to display additional content. Media drives SD card slot Depending on equipment, an SD card slot is not available in all Infotainment systems and not in all countries. To use stored media such as audio files or media files in the Infotainment system, insert a compatible SD card into the SD card slot. Supported file formats are displayed in the Infotainment system. Other file formats will be ignored. Dimensions of compatible SD cards: ✓ 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm (approx. 1 in x 0.94 in x 0.083 in) 32 mm x 24 mm x 1.4 mm (approx. 1 in x 0.94 in x 0.055 in) ✓...

  • Page 341: Switching The Infotainment System On Or Off

    card slot, SD card or both may be damaged if you insert S D cards with force, if an S D card has the wrong dimensions or if you use an SD card adapter. If you insert other objects, e.g. S IM cards, in the SD card slot, the object, SD card slot or both may be damaged. ● Do not use excessive force when inserting S D cards. ● ● Observe the dimensions of compatible S D cards. ● ● Do not use any SD card adapters. ● If the Infotainment system cannot read the data of an card, a corresponding message will be displayed on the screen. An SD card with navigation data cannot be used as a storage device for other files. Stored files will not be recognised by the Infotainment system. Operating the Infotainment system Opening the digital instructions for the Infotainment system ( if available) The digital instructions for the Infotainment system provide further information and tips for operation of the system. 1. Tap HOME . Switching the Infotainment system on or off If the Infotainment system was not manually switched off before, the Infotainment system will start up when the ignition is switched on.
  • Page 342 Help: here you can find further information on the functions and operation of the Infotainment system, e.g. the (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) quick guide (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) or Sound Air conditioning . Media . Navigation . (→ Manage users) Users, User management Radio . Legal. Settings (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) Telephone . Configuring the start screen You can configure the layout of the function buttons and also the views and displays on the start screen in the Infotainment system or have them positioned on the basis of factory layout templates. It is not possible to configure the start screen in all available Infotainment systems. 1. Tap a function button and hold until the function button is visibly highlighted. 2. Move the function button to the desired position and release. Personalisation Personalise function buttons and pages depending on the vehicle equipment (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) Enlarging or reducing images and maps on the screen Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. 1. Using two fingers at the same time, tap the screen and keep your fingers on the screen. —To enlarge the display of images and maps, slowly move your fingers apart. —To reduce the display of images and maps, slowly move your fingers together. Personalising the Infotainment system Depending on equipment, you can personalise the Infotainment system to permit faster access to favourite or frequently used functions. You can find tiles for accessing further menus and functions on the Infotainment system displays. Adapting tiles Adapt the tiles and the displayed tile functions in the Infotainment system views in order to customise the Infotainment system to suit your needs.

  • Page 343: Changing Settings

    1. Tap a tile and hold until an additional window opens. 2. Tap the desired function in the additional window. Various functions are available depending on the size of the tile. Or: tap a free area on the screen to return to the view. At least two views are always available. These cannot be removed. Depending on equipment, you can add two more views. In total, a maximum of four views can be displayed. More functions are available for some tiles than are visible at first glance in the additional window. Swipe up or down in the additional window to see all functions. Adapting the Control Centre You can personalise the Control Centre of the Infotainment system for faster access to favourite or frequently used functions. 1. Open the Control Centre. 2. Tap a function and hold until an additional window opens. 3. Tap the desired function in the additional window and hold until the function is visibly highlighted. 4. Move the function to the desired position and release. The active function is automatically removed from the Control Centre and added to the additional window. More functions are available for the Control Centre than are visible at first glance in the additional window. Swipe to the left or right in the additional window to see all functions. Opening tips for personalisation ( if available) You can find further information and tips for personalisation in the digital instructions for the Infotainment system. 1. Tap HOME Custom. System and sound settings Changing settings The meanings of the following symbols apply to all system and sound settings. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. or The setting is selected and activated or switched on. or The setting is not selected and is deactivated or switched off. or Open the drop-down list.

  • Page 344: System Settings

    Change setting values with the slider control (infinitely variable). System settings The following functions, information and setting options may be available in the system settings: —Screen. —Time and date. —Language. —Additional keyboard languages. —Units. —Voice control. —Wi-Fi ® —Data connection. —Manage mobile devices. —Reset to default settings. —System information. —Copyright. —Configuration wizard. Opening system settings 1. Tap HOME Settings. Or: tap MENU Settings. Sound settings The sound settings may contain information and setting options for equaliser, position, volume and settings. Opening sound settings 1. Tap HOME Sound. Or: tap MENU Sound. Adjusting the volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an external audio source, first lower the volume on the Infotainment system.
  • Page 345 Or: use a cleaning cloth available from Volkswagen dealerships. ✓ In the case of stubborn dirt: ✓ Moisten dirt with only a little water and allow to soak in. Carefully remove dirt with a clean, soft cloth. ✓ NOTICE The screen can be damaged if it is cleaned with the wrong cleaning agents or when dry. ● Use only gentle pressure. ● Do not use aggressive or solvent-based cleaning products. These cleaners may damage the device and dull the screen. NOTICE If the screen is cleaned with too much moisture, it may no longer be possible to operate the screen or the screen may switch off. ● Dry the screen then leave the vehicle locked from the outside for at least 2 minutes. Introduction to the topic In radio mode, you can receive available radio stations using different reception modes and store your favourites for quick access. The available reception modes are dependent on the equipment level and are not available in all countries. Reception modes may be discontinued, deactivated or no longer offered in individual countries. (→ Online functions, radio) With some equipment levels and in some countries, you can also use Internet Radio The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. Additional electrical devices connected in the vehicle can interfere with reception of the radio signal and cause noises in the loudspeakers. Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles with a window aerial. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 346: Function Descriptions

    Function descriptions Selecting reception mode Different stations are available depending on the reception mode. The available reception modes are dependent on the equipment level and are not available in all countries. 1. Tap Source to open the list of reception modes. 2. Select the reception mode, e.g. FM Searching for and selecting stations You can search for and select stations in different ways. The possibilities vary depending on reception mode. Searching for stations in SCAN mode In SCAN mode, the stations of the frequency band are automatically set successively and played for around 5 seconds in each case. 1. To start SCAN mode, tap or SCAN, depending on equipment. The SCAN function starts and the currently set station is shown on the display. The SCAN function button is shown. 2. To select a station, tap S CAN. The SCAN function stops and the station is set. Selecting stations using the multifunction steering wheel Depending on equipment, you can select stations from the station list or from the favourites using the multifunction steering wheel. —To select the previous station, press on the multifunction steering wheel. —To select the next station, press on the multifunction steering wheel. Selecting stations using the frequency band 1. Open settings and switch off the combined station list in the settings. 2. To open the frequency band, tap . 3. Tap the cursor, move on the frequency band and release at the desired frequency. Or: tap a point on the frequency band. The cursor automatically jumps to the corresponding frequency.

  • Page 347: Station Logos

    Selecting a station and storing as a favourite You can store up to 36 stations or frequencies from different reception modes as favourites. Saving stations as favourites 1. Set the desired station. 2. Tap Or: tap and hold a station in the station list. The memory locations are displayed. 3. Tap and hold the memory location until the station is stored. The station is stored in the selected memory location. If a station was already stored in the memory location, this station will be removed from the memory location and replaced by the new station. Showing or hiding display of station logos and DAB slideshow 1. Tap . 2. Tap radio text in the current playback. Other functions in radio mode The functions listed below depend on the equipment level and are not available in all countries. Traffic Programme function (TP function) The Traffic Programme function (TP function) monitors the traffic announcements from a set traffic news station for Traffic Programme monitoring and automatically outputs them during radio or media mode. Reception of a traffic news station must be possible and the → Traffic Programme TP function must be activated in the settings in order to receive traffic announcements function (TP function) . Traffic news stations are not available in all countries. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traffic news support the TP function through a corresponding traffic news station ( E ON). A traffic news station is automatically set in the background in the A M reception mode and in media mode as long as a traffic news station can be received. No TP will be shown on the display if no traffic news station can be received. The unit automatically searches for a receivable traffic news station. As soon as a new traffic news station can be received, the status in the display changes to TP again. Switching on the TP function 1. In radio mode, tap or and activate Traffic Programme (TP).

  • Page 348: General Symbols

    1. In radio mode, tap or and activate Autoselect station logos. Manually assigning station logos Station logos cannot be assigned manually in A M reception mode. 1. In radio mode, tap Station logos. 2. Select the station to which you wish to assign a station logo. 3. Select the station logo. 4. Repeat the process for further stations if desired. 5. Tap to finish assigning station logos. Functions and symbols Functions The functions and possible reception modes depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries. —AM tuner. —FM dual tuner (antenna diversity). —Combined station list. —Combination of FM - and DAB stations in one list. —Combined preset list for favourites. —Display of station logos. —Aerial amplifier. —DAB /DAB+. —DAB slide show. —Stationary images are transmitted parallel to the current broadcast.
  • Page 349 FM Select FM reception mode. FM/DAB Select FM /DAB reception mode. Internet Radio Select Internet Radio reception mode. Open additional information for the selected station. Select previous station from the station list or favourites. Select next station from the station list or favourites. Open preset list for favourites. Small in a station list: station already saved as a favourite. or Open the settings. Traffic Programme function (TP function) for traffic news monitoring is activated. No TP The selected traffic news station is not available. AF Off Automatic station tracking (AF ) is switched off. RDS Off Radio Data System (RDS ) is switched off. Symbols for AM reception mode Open list of AM stations. Update station list manually. Open frequency band for manual selection of the A M frequency. Symbols for FM and FM/DAB reception modes Open station list of FM stations and, depending on the country, DAB stations. Open frequency band for manual selection of the F M frequency. Possible only if the combined station list is switched off.

  • Page 350: Online Functions

    No DAB reception possible. station supports slide show. Slide show is not available for the D AB station. Symbols in Internet Radio mode Open full-text search. No Internet Radio reception possible. Open the most recently listened to Internet Radio stations. Open the 100 most listened to Internet Radio stations. Open available Internet Radio podcasts. Open Internet Radio stations from the desired country. Open Internet Radio stations that broadcast their programmes in the desired language. Open Internet Radio stations whose programmes belong to the desired genre. Open the station selection. Online functions With some equipment levels, the Infotainment system has online functions in radio mode. Online functions in radio mode are not available in all countries and vehicle models. The online functions in radio mode include Internet Radio, for example. Prerequisites for using online functions in radio mode: (→ Online services) ✓ The requirements for using the services have been fulfilled ✓ You have purchased a corresponding data plan for an internet connection from the In-Car Shop or you have available data volume on the SIM card of your mobile telephone and are connected to your vehicle via the Wi-Fi hotspot on your mobile telephone. Internet Radio Internet Radio is a reception mode for Internet Radio stations and podcasts which is independent of AM , FM and DAB. Due to transmission via the internet, reception is not regionally restricted. Internet Radio is available only when the Infotainment system has an active internet connection. Costs may be incurred for data transmission from the internet when using Internet Radio mode. In some countries, functioning of Internet Radio depends on the privacy settings in the vehicle. Searching for and filtering stations OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 351 In Internet Radio mode, it is possible to search for or filter stations by category. 1. Open the station selection. 2. Select the category according to which you wish to filter the stations. Or: tap to start the full-text search. The input field is displayed. 3. Enter the name of the station or category you want to search for. The list of found stations is automatically updated during input. 4. Tap the desired station. Introduction to the topic In media mode, you can play media files from data media on the Infotainment system and store your favourites for quick access. With some equipment levels, the following data media can be used as a media source: —USB data medium, e.g. USB stick. —Bluetooth device, e.g. mobile telephone. —SD map. With some equipment levels, the following types of media files can be played back: —Audio files, e.g. music. —Video files. (→ Online function, media) With some equipment levels and in some countries, you can also use streaming services Restrictions and notes on data media Dirty, overheated or damaged data media may be unusable. Observe the manufacturer’s instructions. Differences in the quality of data media from different manufacturers can interfere with media playback. Incorrect configuration of a data medium can render it unreadable. The read time of data media can be increased by the storage capacity, usage state (copying and deletion processes), file system, folder structure, and the amount of stored data. Playlists simply specify a playback sequence. They link to the location of the media files within the folder structure. There are no media files stored in a playlist. To play a playlist, the media files must exist in the locations on the data medium referenced by the playlist. No liability can be accepted for damaged, modified or lost files on data media. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 352: Playing A Media File

    Playing a media file Connecting and selecting a media source 1. Connect media source. 2. Tap My media and select the desired media source. Searching for and selecting media files You can search for and play media files from a media source in various ways. Searching in a selected media source All media files on the connected media source can be found by means of a folder structure or by using the full-text search. 1. Show folder structure. 2. Search through the folder structure for the desired track. Or: tap to start the full-text search. The input field is displayed. 3. Enter the name of the desired track. The list of found tracks is automatically updated during input. 4. Tap the desired track. If the selection is located in a folder on a media source at the start of playback, the media files located in this folder will be added for playback. If a playlist is played, all available tracks in the playlist will be added for playback. 5. Close the selection with . Saving a media file as a favourite Only media files that are saved to M y Media in the Music and Video folders can be stored as favourites. You can save individual tracks, albums, artists and genres. 1. Start playback of the desired track. 2. Open favourites list. 3. Tap a free memory location. Or: tap an already assigned favourite location and hold for around 3 seconds.

  • Page 353: Video Mode

    Entertainment playback via the Infotainment system You can play music and videos on the Infotainment system. Video mode In video mode, the Infotainment system display can play a video from a data medium. The video soundtrack is played on the vehicle loudspeakers. The video image is displayed only when the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle is in motion, the Infotainment system display is switched off. The video audio can continue to be heard. In some countries, no video image is displayed even when the vehicle is stationary for traffic safety reasons. (→ Online function, You can also play videos from streaming services, depending on the equipment and country media) . A stable internet connection is required for playback via a streaming service. Costs may be charged by the mobile operator. Functions and symbols Functions The functions and possible media formats depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries. —Media playback and media control via connected media sources. —Audio playback in the following formats: —AAC —APE —ALAC —FLAC —MP2 —MP3 —MP4 —Vorbis. —OPUS —WMA —WAV —Video playback in the following formats: —MPEG -1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg, .mkv, .avi). —ISO MPEG-4 ASP; Xvid (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .mkv, .avi). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 354 —ISO MPEG-4 AVC / H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .mkv, .avi). —Windows Media Video 9 (.wmv, .asf, .mkv, .avi). —Cross-device playlists. —Cross-source media database: My media. —The data of all media sources connected to the Infotainment system is stored in a media database. —If My media is selected, categories, e.g. music, and connected media sources are displayed first. —All media files of USB devices are filtered according to categories, e.g. albums. This category view is always displayed in My media. The classic folder structure of the individual USB data media is additionally located in the M y media folder. —Media search. —Media streaming (online). Symbols The symbols depend on the equipment and are not available in all countries and may also differ in appearance depending on the Infotainment system. General symbols 1. To open the main menu, open the start screen and tap . Or: tap MEDIA . Or: press MEDIA . Start playback. Pause playback. Go to previous track. Go to next track. Repeat current track. Repeat all tracks. Activate shuffle mode. Search current media source (list view). Close list view. Open favourites list. Go back to higher-level folder of the media source. Open the settings. Online functions OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 355: Streaming Services

    Symbols for media sources My media: select the cross-source media database M y media as the media source. Connected U SB devices and their folder structure can be selected under My media. Bluetooth audio: select a device connected via Bluetooth as the media source. Set up available streaming services. Already set up streaming services will be displayed in the list of media sources with their own logo. Symbols for categories and groups of media files Music tracks. Videos. Playlists. Albums. Artists. Genre. Podcasts. Audio books. Symbols for video playback Play video in full-screen mode. Minimise playback. With some equipment levels, the Infotainment system has online functions in media mode. Online functions in media mode are not available in all countries and vehicle models. The online functions in media mode include streaming services, for example. Prerequisites for using online functions in media mode: ✓ We Connect or We Connect Plus is available in the vehicle. ✓ You have an active We Connect user account. The vehicle is assigned to your user account. ✓ You have purchased a corresponding data plan for an internet connection from the In-Car Shop or you have ✓ available data volume on the SIM card of your mobile telephone and are connected to your vehicle via the Wi-Fi hotspot on your mobile telephone. Streaming services Conditions for using streaming services: OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 356 The prerequisites for using online functions in media mode are met. ✓ ✓ You have a user account for the respective streaming service: Some streaming services can only be activated or deactivated together, even if they are listed individually in the menu . Setting up streaming services Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, you can use streaming services directly via the Infotainment (→ Media mode) (→ Media mode) system . You require an internet connection in order to use streaming services 1. Select Media streaming as the media source. A list of available streaming services is displayed. 2. Select the desired streaming service. Either an input field will be displayed for input of the login data, or instructions will be shown for registration with the provider. 3. Enter the login data of the desired user account and confirm. The streaming service is added to the list of media sources as a new function button. Depending on the country, you may need to log in again to the streaming service if you change the privacy settings, for example. Introduction to the topic The current vehicle position is determined by means of a global satellite system. To enable optimal navigation to the destination, all readings and possible traffic information are compared with the available map material. Acoustic navigation announcements and visual guidance direct the driver to the destination. Depending on the country, some Infotainment system functions can no longer be selected when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. This is not a malfunction, but simply a legal requirement. WARNING If settings, destination inputs and changes for the navigation system are made while the vehicle is in motion, this can distract the driver and cause accidents and injuries. ● Drive with your full attention and with responsibility. ● Configure the settings and enter destinations and changes for the navigation only when the vehicle is stationary. The navigation may recalculate the route if the driver misses a turning. The quality of the navigation recommendations depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic jams.

  • Page 357: Navigation Announcements

    Road navigation is subject to continuous changes, e.g. new roads, road works, road closures, changes in the road names and house numbers. In the case of obsolete navigation data, there may be errors or inaccuracies during navigation. Function descriptions Navigation announcements Navigation announcements are acoustic driving instructions for the current route. The type and frequency of navigation announcements depends on the driving situation, e.g. start of route guidance, driving on a motorway or in a roundabout. A navigation announcement informing you that you have reached the destination area is given if the exact destination cannot be reached, e.g. because it is located in a non-digitised area. In addition, information on the direction and distance to the destination are displayed on the screen. During dynamic route guidance, you receive information about reported traffic jams on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalculated due to a traffic disruption or changed driving style. The volume of a navigation announcement can be adjusted or muted during output of the announcement. All other navigation announcements are given with this volume setting or are muted. Navigation announcements are not given if the Infotainment system has been muted. Adapting the navigation map For optimal viewing, you can also adapt the navigation map and map view with advanced finger gestures. Moving the navigation map Recommendation: use your index finger. 1. Use your finger to move the navigation map. Enlarging or reducing the map view Recommendation: use your index finger. 1. Tap the map twice in succession and keep your finger on the screen. 2. Move your finger upwards to zoom out from the map view. Move your finger downwards to zoom in on the map view. Enlarging or reducing the map view Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. 1. Using two fingers at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen. 2. Move your fingers together to zoom out from the map view. Move your fingers apart to zoom in on the map view. Tilting the map view Recommendation: use your index and middle finger. 1. Using two fingers that are horizontal to each other at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen.

  • Page 358: Route Plan

    Rotating the map view Recommendation: use thumb and index finger. 1. Using two fingers at the same time, tap the map and keep your fingers on the screen. 2. Turn your fingers clockwise or anticlockwise to rotate the map view. Route plan Several destinations can be defined one after another in the route plan. The starting point is always the vehicle position determined by the Infotainment system. The route plan contains information on relevant events, such as stopovers and suggested destinations, if navigation data is available. You can move the stopover destinations to another position within the list. When you tap an event, an additional window opens with further options. The options available depend on the event and the current settings. Opening and closing the route plan 1. Tap the route plan to open the route plan. 2. Tap to stop route guidance. 3. To stop route guidance to the destination or stopover, tap next to the destination in the route plan. Editing route guidance To edit route guidance, move the stopovers or the destination to the route plan. 1. Tap and hold the desired destination until it is visibly highlighted. 2. Move the destination to the desired position and release. The route will be recalculated. Additional window on the route plan If you tap the entries of the route plan, an extra window with additional options can appear. The possible options depend on the entry tapped. Functions in the additional window: Display on map Display the selection on the map. Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guidance. Direct route Start direct route guidance. Delete Delete stopover from route guidance. Bypass Avoid a traffic disruption. The route will be recalculated.

  • Page 359: Stored Data

    Setting preferred POI categories The system offers various POIs, e.g. filling stations, as quick selection symbols in destination input, in the route plan and on the map. You can prioritise display of these symbols under Basic function settings Preferred POI categories. The system also independently learns which category you prefer. Stored data The Infotainment system stores certain data, e.g. frequently driven routes and positioning data, so that you can enter destinations quickly and enjoy the most efficient route guidance. Deleting stored data 1. Tap Basic functions Delete usage pattern. 2. Tap confirmation to delete. Learning usage patterns While travelling, the navigation saves the routes travelled and destinations arrived at in order to create suggested destinations automatically. Destinations are learned depending on the time of day and the day of the week. The navigation system can suggest learned routes. Route guidance begins when one of the suggested routes is selected. The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it. The route is recalculated and will guide you back to the selected route via a direct alternative. Relevant traffic disruptions are taken into account in the route guidance. Relevant traffic disruptions will be avoided if an alternative route and the navigation data is available. If you drive an already learned route when route guidance is inactive, the destination will be transferred to the route plan. It is not necessary to actively start route guidance to the learned destination. Warnings may be given about traffic disruptions. A forecast arrival time will be displayed. You can activate or deactivate the function at any time and also delete the stored data for the function. Activating or deactivating “Learn usage pattern” 1. Tap Basic function settings to open the settings for this function. 2. Tap Learn usage pattern. Displaying suggested routes 1. Tap . Deleting stored data for “Learn usage pattern” function 1. Tap Basic function settings to open the settings for this function.

  • Page 360: Map Symbols

    —Simultaneous display of two navigation maps ( screen and instrument cluster). —Personal POIs. —3D City Maps. —Online Map Update. —Online Traffic Information. Symbols The symbols depend on the equipment and are not available in all countries and may also differ in appearance depending on the Infotainment system. General navigation symbols 1. To open the main menu, open the start screen and tap . Destination search. Display destination memory. Destinations and stopovers on the current route. Personal destination suggestions (home address, work address, favourite POI s nearby). Map symbols The function buttons and displays depend on the settings and the current driving situation. The map displays symbols for traffic information, e.g. traffic disruptions, and POI (→ Traffic information) s, e.g. filling stations, when navigation data is available Display current position. Display route options. Fully automatic map mode (alignment in direction of travel, position, zoom and tilt) . Determine driving orientation and map tilt. Map scale. Display additional window with further options. Map menu with settings for navigation and navigation announcements. Symbols in the additional window 1. To open the additional window, tap . Display route overview and alternative routes for current route guidance. Repeat the previous navigation announcement. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 361: Other Symbols

    Mute navigation announcements and adjust volume for navigation announcements. Navigation setup. Other symbols Destination search: detailed destination input for an address. Route plan symbols Display current position. Destination of the current route guidance. End the current route guidance. Close the route plan. Traffic disruptions Traffic disruptions are displayed on the map when navigation data is available (→ Traffic information) (→ Navigation) 1. Tap a traffic disruption to open an additional window showing details Traffic jam. Accident. Ice. Road closed. Risk of skidding. Danger. Road works. Strong winds. Entering a destination and starting route guidance Depending on the vehicle equipment, different functions are available for destination input. Certain functions are available only in some countries. (→ Navigation) The different functions for destination input can be found in the main menu of the navigation system You can more precisely limit the search by indicating preferences in the results list, such as “nearby”. Further information about the symbols on the Infotainment system display can be found in this owner’s manual (→ Navigation) Entering an address OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 362: Last Destinations

    Start route guidance by entering an address. The navigation system will suggest known destinations during input. You can also enter a new, as yet unknown address for route guidance. When entering the address, enter the name of the destination rather than the postcode. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Enter the address of the destination and select the desired destination. Or: tap and enter the address on the input screen. 3. Tap Route. Quick start 1. Tap . 2. Enter the address of the destination and tap and hold the desired destination for a few seconds. Enter the destination as accurately as possible. If you make a mistake when entering the destination, route guidance will not be possible or you may be navigated to the wrong destination. Recommended destinations The navigation system uses stored data such as the last and learned destinations, favourites, and home and work addresses so it can use this data for route guidance. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination. Route guidance starts automatically. Last destinations The navigation system stores up to ten destinations that you have driven to last in order to make them available for route guidance. A new destination automatically overwrites the oldest destination. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination.

  • Page 363: Off-Road Navigation

    1. When entering a destination, tap in the additional window. Selecting a destination and starting navigation 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination. 3. Tap Route. Quick start 1. Tap . 2. Tap the desired destination and hold for a few seconds. Selecting on the map The navigation map contains active areas at many locations which are suitable for destination input. To enter a destination, tap the desired position or location on the map. You can start route guidance if map data is available at this location. Destination input via the navigation map depends on the data status and is not possible for all positions. Use the offroad navigation function to enter a destination point with unknown data. Offroad navigation The offroad navigation function calculates routes to selected destination points with unknown data. If a destination point is not on known roads or there is no positioning data available for this point, the navigation system will calculate the route up to the nearest point on the known roads and then complete the route up to the destination point by a direct connection. To start offroad navigation, tap a free area without positioning data. Starting navigation 1. Tap 2. Move the map view until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be operated by extended (→ Navigation) tap gestures 3. Tap the desired destination or any destination point on the map without positioning data.

  • Page 364: Navigation Data

    Regions in the navigation data that are not used by the user may be removed from the system under certain circumstances, for example if there is limited memory space in the navigation data memory. If these regions should be needed again at a later point in time, the navigation system will download them again on request. No contract for mobile online services is needed for this. The service depends on the vehicle equipment and is available only in some countries. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Establish an internet connection, if this does not already exist. (→ Privacy settings) 3. Depending on the country, also select “Share my position” mode in the privacy settings Anyone who uses the vehicle as an anonymous guest must reset the privacy settings each time they start the (→ Privacy settings) vehicle Updating navigation data manually Current navigation data for larger regions, e.g. Western Europe, can be downloaded from the internet at www.volkswagen.com and stored on a suitable U SB data medium available commercially. If you switch off the Infotainment system, installation will be interrupted and will automatically continue once the unit is switched on again. 1. Download the navigation data and save on a U SB data medium. 2. Switch on the vehicle ignition. 3. Connect a USB data storage device to the Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary. The navigation data for regions that are currently frequently travelled is automatically updated in the background. No message appears in the Infotainment system while the navigation data is being updated, or once the update is complete. When you update navigation data manually, the U SB data medium must remain continuously connected. No message appears to indicate that the update has been completed.

  • Page 365: Traffic Information

    data storage device nor an internet connection. Displaying map data version 1. Tap HOME System information. Or: tap MENU System information. Traffic information Depending on equipment, reception of traffic information is not available in all Infotainment systems and not in all countries. The Infotainment system automatically receives detailed traffic information when connected to the internet. This information is indicated by symbols and colouring of the road network on the map. Reception of traffic information depends on the privacy settings in some countries. No traffic information is received in offline mode . Traffic disruptions (→ Navigation) Traffic disruptions, e.g. traffic jams, are shown as symbols on the navigation map The route plan displays current traffic disruptions when navigation data is available. When route guidance is active, traffic disruptions that are on the current route are displayed in the route plan. You can bypass these traffic disruptions by editing the route plan. Bypassing a traffic disruption 1. Tap the traffic disruption. 2. Tap Bypass. The route will be recalculated. Only one traffic disruption can be bypassed in this way for each route. Local warnings, e.g. about severe weather, can be output as a pop-up message via the Infotainment system. Traffic flow display The traffic flow is shown on the navigation map for current traffic disruptions by colouring of the road network. Orange Slow-moving traffic.
  • Page 366 Introduction to the topic You can connect your mobile telephone to the Infotainment system via the mobile phone interface and then use the Infotainment system to control the telephone functions. Sound is played back using the via the vehicle loudspeakers. Depending on equipment, you can connect up to two mobile telephones to the Infotainment system simultaneously (→ Mobile phone interface) Functions depend on the equipment and are not available in all countries – and depend on the mobile phone used and its operating system. High speeds, poor weather and poor road conditions, loud noise levels, also outside the vehicle, and network quality may impair telephone calls in the vehicle. The mobile phone interface may contain an aerial amplifier which improves the reception quality of the mobile telephone. As a general rule, it is only necessary to pair a device, e.g. mobile telephone, once. The device connection to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi can be restored at any time without having to pair the device again. When a telephone call is made using the hands-free system or at a loud volume, a conversation can also be heard by third parties outside the vehicle. Areas where special regulations apply Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile phone interface in areas where there is an explosion hazard. These areas are not always clearly signposted. This includes, for example: —Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. —Lower decks of ships and ferries. —The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas, such as propane or butane. —Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air. —All other places where the engine or mobile telephone must be switched off. WARNING In places where there is a risk of explosion, e.g. near filling stations, and in places with special regulations, ignition sparks, e.g. caused by electrostatic discharges or mobile phones, can lead to an explosion or fire and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile phone interface in potentially explosive areas, e.g. near filling stations, and in locations where special guidelines apply. ● Do not operate the mobile telephone and mobile phone interface in potentially explosive areas, e.g. near filling stations, and in locations where special guidelines apply. NOTICE The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. ● Always switch off your mobile telephone in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile devices is forbidden. Types of mobile phone interface Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the following mobile phone interface types may be present in your vehicle:...
  • Page 367 ) for transmission. This allows use of telephone functions via the Infotainment system and output via the vehicle speakers. —Comfort mobile phone interface. The Comfort mobile phone interface uses the HFP Bluetooth profile like the basic version of the mobile phone interface. (→ Charging options for The Comfort mobile phone interface may be equipped with a wireless charging function mobile devices) . In order to use the wireless charging function, you must place a suitable mobile telephone correctly in the stowage compartment. If you place a suitable mobile phone in the storage compartment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle aerial, depending on the equipment. This improves the reception and call quality. Wireless charging function and connection to the vehicle aerial Depending on equipment and model and in some countries, a connection to the vehicle aerials is automatically set up (→ Charging options for mobile devices) through use of the stowage compartment for the wireless charging function on the driver side. This can reduce interference signals that affect mobile telephone reception. If the reception or call quality does not improve or if interference signals can still be heard during mobile telephone reception, you can improve the connection by placing the mobile telephone the other way round, with the screen facing up, in the stowage compartment for the wireless charging function. Depending on equipment and in some countries, the wireless charging function can charge several mobile telephones at the same time. In this case, the connection to the external aerial can be established only if exclusively the stowage compartment on the driver side is used. Pairing, connecting and managing Pair a mobile telephone with the Infotainment system to use the functions of the mobile phone interface. Depending on equipment, you can connect up to two mobile telephones to the Infotainment system simultaneously. Only one device is active and can be used to make calls. You can use the second connected device to receive calls via the Infotainment system and for media playback. The available functions depend on the mobile telephone used and its operating system. The functions listed below may not be available in all Infotainment systems depending on the equipment and country. Pairing a mobile telephone The mobile telephone must be paired with the Infotainment system before the first connection is established. A user profile is then automatically stored in the Infotainment system. The pairing process can take a few minutes. Prerequisites: Bluetooth is activated on the mobile telephone. ✓ Bluetooth is activated in the Infotainment system. ✓ 1. Open the list of available Bluetooth devices on the mobile telephone and select the device name of the Infotainment system.

  • Page 368: Connecting A Mobile Telephone

    When some mobile telephones are paired, a is shown on the display of the mobile telephone. To finish the pairing procedure, enter this PIN on the Infotainment system. In some vehicles and depending on equipment, pairing and connection are possible using the quick access function on the start screen by tapping on the start screen. Depending on equipment, the wireless charging function may be deactivated while you are in the Known mobile phones menu. The wireless charging function will be reactivated when you leave the menu. Connecting a mobile telephone Prerequisite: ✓ A mobile telephone is paired with the Infotainment system. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the mobile telephone. Function descriptions User profiles An individual user profile is automatically created for every paired mobile telephone. Data from the mobile telephone is stored in the user profile, e.g. contact details. A maximum of ten user profiles can be stored in the Infotainment system simultaneously. Completely deleting stored data (→ First steps in the Infotainment system) 1. Reset the Infotainment system to the factory settings Active and passive connection At least one mobile telephone must be connected to the Infotainment system in order to use the functions of the mobile phone interface. If several mobile telephones are connected to the Infotainment system, you can switch between active and passive connections. Establish an active connection to the Infotainment system in order to operate the mobile phone interface with the desired mobile telephone. Difference between the connection types Active Mobile telephone is paired and connected. The functions of the mobile phone interface are performed with the data of this mobile telephone. Passive Mobile telephone is paired and connected. Only incoming calls can be accepted via the mobile phone interface. No other functions are available. Paired mobile telephones are stored in the Infotainment system even if they are not currently connected. Changing the connection type (passive to active) Prerequisite: OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 369: Managing Connections

    Several mobile telephones are connected to the Infotainment system simultaneously. ✓ 1. Tap . Or: tap the name of the active mobile telephone. Or: tap Replace. The mobile telephone with an active connection is highlighted. 2. Tap the name of the mobile telephone you require. Other mobile telephones then automatically have a passive connection. Managing connections Prerequisite: The mobile telephone is paired and connected. ✓ 1. Open the start screen and tap Mobile devices. 2. Tap the technology desired for the connection. Telephone book The telephone book is stored in the Infotainment system when a mobile telephone is paired with the Infotainment system for the first time. It may be necessary to confirm transfer on the mobile telephone. Depending on equipment, up to 5,000 contact entries can be stored in the telephone book. The telephone book is updated each time a new connection is established. The still existing telephone book can be used during the update. If conference calls are supported, the telephone book can be opened during a call and a further participant added to the call. If an image is stored for a contact, this can also be displayed in the list next to the entry. The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. Using the telephone Select a telephone number to start the call. Different functions are available for selecting a phone number. Using contact data If there are several phone numbers for each contact, you must select the phone number you require. 1. Tap . Or: tap and enter the name of the contact in the input field to search for a contact. Or: tap a favourite in the main menu of the mobile phone interface to call a favourite.

  • Page 370: Sending Text Messages

    Or: tap and filter entries in the call list ( e.g. missed calls). 2. To start the call, tap a number or, where applicable, a contact in the list. Entering a phone number manually 1. Tap and enter a phone number. 2. Tap to start the call. While you are entering a phone number, contacts that match the number will be shown on the Infotainment system display. Favourites and speed dial buttons A favourite from the telephone book can be assigned to a speed dial button. If an image is stored in the entry, this will be displayed on the speed dial button. (→ Mobile phone interface) Speed dial buttons must be assigned manually and are assigned to a user profile (→ Bluetooth) Assigning a speed dial button 1. Tap a free speed dial button. 2. Tap a contact from the telephone book or search for the contact using the search bar. If several phone numbers are stored for a contact, tap a number from the list. Editing a speed dial button 1. Tap and hold the speed dial button until the telephone book is opened. 2. Tap a new contact from the telephone book. If several phone numbers are stored for a contact, tap a number from the list. Calling a favourite 1. Tap the assigned speed dial button. Favourites are not automatically updated. If the phone number of a contact changes, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Deleting favourites from the speed dial button 1. Tap Manage favourites. Tap on the desired speed dial button to delete a favourite.
  • Page 371 1. Tap Text message New message and enter the message on the screen. 2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar. 3. Tap OK to send the message. Sending emails 1. Tap E-mail New message and enter the message on the screen. 2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar. 3. Tap OK to send the message. Functions and symbols of the mobile phone interface The functions and symbols are dependent on the equipment level and are not available in all countries. The available functions depend on the mobile telephone used and its operating system. The appearance of the symbols may differ depending on Infotainment system. Functions —Hands-free function. —SMS functions via Bluetooth: —Read SMS —Write an SMS , including templates. —Have SMS read out loud. —Message history. —Email functions via Bluetooth: —Read emails. —Write emails. Symbols in the main menu 1. To open the main menu, depending on the vehicle equipment, open the start screen and tap . Or: tap the PHONE sensor field .
  • Page 372 Open the settings. Symbols for phone calls Make or answer and display call. End or reject call. Mute hands-free system. Hold call. Continue call. Add a participant to a conference or start conference. SOS or Make emergency call (SOS). Obtain help in the event of breakdown. Voicemail. Obtain information about the Volkswagen brand and selected value-added services relating to traffic and travel. Symbols for call lists 1. Tap to open the call lists. or Incoming call. or Outgoing call. Missed call. Frequent calls or favourites from the mobile telephone, if supported by the mobile telephone. Phone number (work). Phone number (private). Mobile telephone number. Fax. Fax (business). Fax (private). Symbols for text messages OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 373 1. Tap to open the text messages. Template for text messages. Have text messages read out loud. Introduction to the topic The voice control allows you to perform certain functions by spoken commands. Types of voice control Depending on the language set in the Infotainment system, one of the following voice control types is available in the vehicle: —Command-based voice control (standard). —Advanced voice control (offline or online). Does my vehicle have voice control? Voice control is installed in the vehicle if the voice control button is present on the multifunction steering wheel or the VOICE button is present on the Infotainment system, or if your vehicle understands the activation word. In black with blue background: voice control is active and will recognise spoken words. Test voice control before starting a journey in order to familiarise yourself with the function. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 374: Supported Languages

    Differences in voice control systems Command-based voice control (standard) Only grammatically correct voice commands will be recognised by the voice control. Voice commands must follow a defined syntax in order to be recognised correctly, e.g.: “Navigate to [ Town, Street name, House number ]”. You will find further examples in the Infotainment system. Command-based voice control can be performed in every available language. Advanced voice control (offline or online) Voice commands can be freely formulated and colloquial. For example, the system will show the remaining time until arrival at your destination in response to the statement “How much longer do I have to drive?” Suggestions for voice commands depend on the set language and can be found in the Infotainment system. Advanced voice control works online and offline. In online mode, the voice commands are evaluated to provide an enhanced search for POI s, media and online radio stations. Messages can also be dictated. For online mode, you need a valid We Connect or We Connect Plus contract for the vehicle. If advanced voice control is available for your language, this will be used when voice control is activated. Supported languages The number of languages available in your country depends on the vehicle equipment. (→ Voice control) Start voice control by speaking the activation word available in your country OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 375: Voice Commands

    Starting and stopping voice control Voice commands Voice control recognises only voice commands in the language set in the Infotainment system. Observe the following tips for successful voice commands: ✓ Speak clearly and at normal volume. Speak slightly louder at higher speeds. Avoid excessive emphasis or strong dialect. ✓ Do not leave long pauses when speaking. ✓ ✓ Avoid exterior and background noise. ✓ Do not point the airflow from the vents towards the microphones or roof. Opening suggested voice commands 1. Tap HOME . Or: tap MENU . Depending on the content of the telephone book, it may be advisable to swap the order of the contact’s forename and surname to ensure it is reliably recognised from the telephone book. Starting the voice control function Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can start voice control using different methods: (→ Voice control) —Start with your voice: say the activation word —Start via multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button or —Start via the Infotainment system: tap VOICE . Depending on the mobile telephone and operating system and on some Infotainment systems, voice control of a connected mobile telephone can be started by pressing and holding the voice control button or the VOICE button .
  • Page 376 Activation word The words spoken in the vehicle are checked for the activation word in the Infotainment system circular buffer. Voice control starts if the Infotainment system recognises the activation word. The circular buffer is overwritten approximately every 15 seconds. There is no transmission of data or words spoken in the vehicle. The circular buffer is not active if the activation word is deactivated. Switching activation word on and off If the activation word is switched off, the voice control cannot be activated via the activation word. 1. Open the start screen and tap Voice control Voice control start/end sound or Activation word. Speaking activation word and activation word recognition Prerequisite: The Activation word is switched on in the settings. ✓ Здравей Volkswagen. Olá Volkswagen. Bonjour Volkswagen. Ahoj Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. Hej Volkswagen. Hola Volkswagen. Bonjour Volkswagen. Hei Volkswagen. Hello Volkswagen. Γεια σου Volkswagen. Ciao Volkswagen. ハロー Volkswagen. Hola Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. Hallo Volkswagen. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 377: Troubleshooting

    Olá Volkswagen. Cześć Volkswagen. 안녕 Volkswagen. Привет Volkswagen. Hej Volkswagen. Merhaba Volkswagen. Hello Volkswagen. Troubleshooting Voice control does not react —Voice control is not available in your language. —Set the correct system language in the Infotainment system. —Start voice control using the activation word or the voice control button on the multifunction steering wheel. —Voice commands are not recognised due to a system error. Please contact a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Voice control provides inappropriate answers —The voice control system has interpreted the question incorrectly. —Speak the voice command again clearly. Voice control does not perform function —The function cannot be performed by voice control. —The function cannot be performed in all languages. Suggestions for voice commands in the set language can be found in the Infotainment system. —Settings in the function prevent it from being switched on or performed. —The voice control system has not understood the voice command. —Insufficient data is available. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 378 Stowing luggage and loads Stowing luggage safely in the vehicle —Always distribute any loads in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Do not cover any ventilation openings. → —Always stow luggage and heavy objects in the luggage compartment and place them as far forwards as possible —Observe gross axle weight ratings and the gross vehicle weight rating . —Secure luggage in the luggage compartment to the fastening rings using suitable fixing and securing straps. —Also stow small objects safely. —If necessary, fold back the rear seat backrest and engage it securely. —If necessary, adjust the headlight range. Vehicles with dynamic headlight range control adapt automatically to the load. (→ Tyre pressure) —Adjust the tyre pressure according to the vehicle load. Observe the tyre pressure sticker WARNING Objects or animals that are not secured or are secured incorrectly can cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. This applies particularly if objects are struck when the airbag is triggered and then flung through the vehicle interior. ● Always stow all objects in the vehicle securely. Observe legal requirements when doing this. ● Stow items in the vehicle interior in such a way that they can never enter the airbag deployment zones while the vehicle is in motion. ● Secure animals in the vehicle using a system that is suitable for their weight and size. ● Always keep stowage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects loose in any of the vehicle’s open stowage areas, on the surface behind the rear seat backrest or on the dash panel. ● Remove any hard, heavy or sharp objects from items of clothing and bags inside the vehicle and stow them securely in the luggage compartment. WARNING If an incorrect sitting position is assumed due to stowed objects, serious or fatal injuries can occur in the event of sudden driving and braking manoeuvres and in accidents. ● Never stow objects on a seat if this is to be occupied and used by a person. WARNING Transporting heavy objects changes the vehicle’s handling due to the change in the centre of gravity and increases the braking distance. Heavy loads that are not properly stowed or secured can change the vehicle handling, e.g. as a result of the load slipping. This can lead to loss of control over the vehicle and cause serious or fatal injuries.

  • Page 379: Luggage Compartment Cover

    ● Load the luggage compartment only up to a height where no objects are in contact with the rear windows. NOTICE Carrier systems that are fixed on the rear spoiler can damage the vehicle. ● Do not secure any luggage carriers or other carrier systems such as bicycle carriers on the vehicle’s rear spoiler. Luggage compartment cover When the boot lid is opened and closed, the luggage compartment cover is also raised and lowered if the retaining straps are attached. → The luggage compartment cover is not suitable as a shelf for objects, not even for light pieces of clothing WARNING Objects or animals on the luggage compartment cover can damage the luggage compartment cover and cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of sudden driving and braking manoeuvres or accidents. ● Never transport any objects on the luggage compartment cover. ● Never transport any animals on the luggage compartment cover. NOTICE Incorrect handling of the luggage compartment cover may result in damage. ● Do not load the luggage compartment to such a height that the luggage compartment cover can press on the load when the boot lid is closed. ● Never close the boot lid when the luggage compartment floor is open or locked in position. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 380 Installing and removing the luggage compartment cover Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: removing and installing the luggage compartment cover. Removing the luggage compartment cover → Fig. 1 1. Unhook the retaining straps at the top on the boot lid (upper arrows). → Fig. 1 2. Lift the luggage compartment cover slightly and pull it out of the side holders towards the rear (lower arrows). Fitting the luggage compartment cover 1. Push the luggage compartment cover to the rear into the side holders in the luggage compartment → Fig. 1 (lower arrows). → Fig. 1 2. Hook the retaining straps onto the boot lid (upper arrows). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 381 Luggage compartment floor – Functions Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: opening the variable luggage compartment floor. Fig. 2 In the luggage compartment: locking the variable luggage compartment floor in position. Opening the variable luggage compartment floor 1. Grip the handle recess in the variable luggage compartment floor → Fig. 1 and lift the luggage compartment floor upwards. 2. To lock the luggage compartment floor in position, lift it up until it is held in position by the side restraints → Fig. 2 (close-up). Closing the variable luggage compartment floor 1. Lower the luggage compartment floor onto the side supports. Lowering the variable luggage compartment floor 1. Lift back the luggage compartment floor and push it under the guides → Fig. 1 (small arrows). 2. Place the luggage compartment floor on the floor covering. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 382: Fastening Rings

    NOTICE Incorrect use can damage the luggage compartment floor or the trim of the luggage compartment. ● Do not allow the luggage compartment floor to fall when closing it, but always guide it downwards carefully. ● Always distribute loads (maximum 50 kg (110 lbs) in the upper position of the variable luggage compartment floor) over as wide an area as possible in order to avoid point loads. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be compartments for stowing small items under the variable luggage compartment floor. The variable luggage compartment floor cannot be lowered in vehicles that are equipped with a subwoofer in the luggage compartment. Fastening rings Fig. 1 In the luggage compartment: fastening ring (illustration). 1 Fastening ring. There are fastening rings in the luggage compartment which can be used to secure loose items and luggage with the → Fig. 1 help of lashing, retaining or securing straps , . WARNING Unsuitable or damaged lashing, retaining or securing straps could tear in the event of a braking manoeuvre or accident. This could cause objects to be flung through the vehicle interior and lead to severe or fatal injuries. ● Always use suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. ● Pull lashing, retaining and securing straps taut crosswise over the load on the luggage compartment floor and attach the lashing, retaining and securing straps securely to the fastening rings. ● Make sure that the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings, particularly when stowing flat objects. ● Observe the signs on stowing loads that may be affixed in the luggage compartment depending on the vehicle equipment. ● Never secure a child seat using the fastening rings. WARNING Elastic tensioning straps must be stretched in order to secure them at the fastening rings and are therefore under tension. If elastic tensioning straps slip off and “snap” towards the body, the hooks attached to them can cause serious injuries. ●...
  • Page 383 ● Always first secure the elastic tensioning straps to the fastening rings in the front area of the luggage compartment. Then pull the elastic tensioning straps towards the load sill. Secure the elastic tensioning straps to the fastening rings so that they “snap” away from the body if they slip. Suitable lashing, retaining or securing straps and luggage securing systems are available from a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Bag hook Fig. 1 On the left and right in the luggage compartment: bag hooks. 1 Bag hooks. In the luggage compartment, there may be bag hooks for hanging light shopping bags. WARNING Items of luggage and other objects that are secured at bag hooks can tear off and be flung through the vehicle interior in the event of a braking manoeuvre or accident. This can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never use the bag hooks to lash down items of luggage or other objects. ● The bag hooks in the vehicle should only be used for lightweight object weighing max. 2.5 kg (approx. 5.5 lbs). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 384 Introduction to the topic The vehicle can be used to tow a trailer if it has the required technical equipment for this. Driving with a trailer not only places an extra load on the vehicle, but also requires increased concentration on the part of the driver. The additional trailer load will affect the amount of wear, fuel consumption and performance of the vehicle and, in certain circumstances, could shorten the service intervals. If the vehicle is driven under high loads, certain functions, e.g. the output of the air conditioning system, may be reduced or switched off to stop the vehicle from breaking down. Avoid long or steep uphill gradients. The engine torque may be reduced temporarily if the vehicle is driven under load for an extended time in order to avoid overheating of the engine or gearbox. Reduce your speed and observe the messages and illuminated warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster. The reduction in engine torque will be cancelled when the engine and gearbox are operating in the optimum temperature range again. The load that a vehicle can actually pull decreases under the following conditions: —Driving on uphill gradients. —Driving at high altitudes. —Driving at high outside temperatures. —Driving with a fully loaded vehicle, e.g. with passengers and luggage. —With increasing speed. Vehicles with start/stop system When using towing brackets that were not retrofitted by Volkswagen, the start/stop system must be deactivated (→ Start/stop manually before towing a trailer, and it must remain deactivated for as long as a trailer is being towed system) Trailer with function check for lighting No trailer with tail lights and brake lights must be operated with this vehicle that requires a function check of the tail and brake lights in its approval. Please ask the trailer manufacturer about the approval that is valid for your trailer. Unused ball coupling Swivel in the ball coupling or remove it if there is no trailer, bicycle carrier or similar attached to the ball coupling. This applies in particular if the unused ball coupling covers the number plate or the lighting at the rear of the vehicle. → Observe the country-specific regulations on use of a towing bracket Points to note Before driving with a trailer, pay attention to possible functional restrictions of the assist and parking systems. DANGER It is dangerous to transport people in a trailer and it may also be illegal. ● Never transport people in a trailer. WARNING Improper use of the towing bracket can lead to a loss of vehicle control, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Attach and use the trailer in accordance with the instructions supplied by the respective manufacturer.
  • Page 385 ● Accelerate particularly carefully and gently. ● Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres. ● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h ( 50 mph) when towing a trailer, or also 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cases. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are permitted. ● Reduce speed, particularly on uphill gradients and when driving downhill. ● Keep to country-specific speed limits, which may be lower for vehicles with trailers than for vehicles without trailers. ● Take particular care when overtaking and reduce your speed immediately if the trailer shows even the slightest sign of snaking. ● Never try to stop a vehicle and trailer from snaking by increasing your speed. ● Due to the higher load for the towing vehicle, pay attention to possible messages and to any warning and indicator lamps that light up in the instrument cluster. WARNING The start/stop system must always be switched off manually when towing a trailer using towing brackets that have not been retrofitted by Volkswagen. Otherwise faults can occur in the brake system, possibly resulting in accidents and serious injuries. If the connection to a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is interrupted, the anti-theft alarm (→ Anti-theft alarm) system may be triggered (→ Running in the In vehicles with a new engine, do not tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km (600 miles) engine) Some retrofitted towing brackets may cover the opening for fitting the towing eye. If so, the towing eye cannot be used for towing or tow-starting other vehicles. For this reason, the removed ball coupling of a retrofitted towing bracket should be stored in the vehicle at all times. Hitching a trailer OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 386: Trailer Socket

    Trailer socket The electrical connection between the towing vehicle and the trailer requires a 13-pin trailer socket. The pin assignment corresponds to DIN ISO 11446. If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use a suitable adapter. 1. Lift up the closure cap of the socket and insert the plug. 2. Turn the plug by quarter of a turn in clockwise direction until it completely engages in the socket. 3. Release the closure cap to lock the plug in position. 4. Check that the entire lighting system is working before starting your journey. If you are uncertain whether the electrical connection of the trailer with the vehicle is correct, please contact a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Connection to the anti-theft alarm The trailer is integrated in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are fulfilled: ✓ When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-theft alarm and a factory-fitted towing bracket. ✓ When the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer socket. When the vehicle and trailer electric systems are functional, fault-free and undamaged. ✓ When the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm is active. ✓ When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered as soon as the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted. For technical reasons, trailers with LED tail light clusters cannot be integrated into the anti-theft alarm system. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is not triggered as soon as the electrical connection to the trailer with LED tail light clusters is interrupted. Safety cable In some countries, unbraked and braked trailers must be secured by means of a safety or breakaway cable. Fig. 1 On the towing bracket: eye for securing the safety or breakaway cable (illustration). Depending on model, the eye for securing the safety or breakaway cable may be located on the neck of the ball head → Fig. 1 or next to the ball head directly on the ball coupling carrier (arrows). Observe the country-specific regulations on using a safety cable. Secure the safety or breakaway cable at the eye provided for this purpose on the ball coupling → Fig. 1 →...

  • Page 387: Loading A Trailer

    WARNING Any electrical cables that are not connected properly or are connected incorrectly could cause a power surge to the trailer. This could lead to faults in the entire vehicle electronics system and could also cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have all work on the electrical system carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never connect the trailer’s electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the towing vehicle’s tail light clusters or to other power sources. WARNING Contact between the pins in the trailer socket can lead to short circuits, overloading of the electrical system and failure of the lighting system, thereby causing accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never connect the pins in the trailer socket to one another. ● Have bent pins repaired by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING If the trailer is not properly secured, this could cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never place the trailer’s safety or breakaway cable loosely over the ball coupling. NOTICE If a trailer hitched to the vehicle is parked using the support wheel or on the trailer supports, the vehicle height may be lowered or raised due to any changes in the load or tyre damage. Powerful forces then act on the towing bracket and the trailer. This can cause damage to the vehicle and trailer. ● Please note that a trailer that is parked using the support wheel or the trailer supports must not remain hitched to the vehicle. If the engine is not running and electrical equipment is switched on in the trailer via the trailer socket, the 12- volt vehicle battery will discharge. If the 12-volt vehicle battery charge level is low, the electrical connection to the trailer will be interrupted automatically. Loading a trailer Basic information Always make sure that the vehicle and trailer are well-balanced. Do not load the trailer with more weight either at the front or rear. Always stow heavy items as close as possible to or over the axle. Always secure the load on the trailer → properly If the vehicle is approved for towing a trailer, observe any local regulations for driving with a trailer and using a towing bracket.

  • Page 388: Driving With A Trailer

    The maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can pull. The drawbar load is the weight that is exerted vertically from above on the ball coupling of the towing bracket. Volkswagen recommends always making full use of the maximum permitted drawbar load . The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small. However, the maximum permitted load exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling of the towing bracket must not be exceeded → The actually present drawbar load increases the weight on the rear axle and reduces the maximum load of the vehicle as a result. A higher drawbar load can be used in some countries subject to certain conditions. Observe the country-specific information and regulations. Gross combination weight The gross combination weight is made up of the actual weight of the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer. In some countries, trailers are divided into different classes. Volkswagen recommends that you contact a correspondingly qualified workshop to find out about suitable trailers. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Tyre pressure Follow the trailer manufacturer’s recommendations concerning the tyre pressure for the trailer tyres. (→ Tyre When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres on the towing vehicle with the maximum permitted tyre pressure pressure) WARNING Moving loads can severely impair the stability and driving safety of the vehicle and trailer, which can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always load the trailer correctly. ● Always secure loads using suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. WARNING Accidents and serious or fatal injuries can occur if you exceed the vehicle’s maximum permitted gross axle weight rating, drawbar load, gross vehicle weight rating or gross combination weight rating. ● Never exceed the specified values . ● Never let the actual weights at the front and rear axles exceed the gross axle weight ratings. ● Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight for the vehicle with weight at the front and rear of the vehicle. Driving with a trailer Headlight adjustment Towing a trailer can raise the front end of the vehicle so that the dipped beam dazzles other road users. Use the headlight range control to lower the light cone as required. Vehicles with dynamic headlight range control are adjusted automatically.

  • Page 389: Trailer Stabilisation

    —On downhill stretches, use the engine as an additional brake. The brake system could otherwise overheat and fail. —Vehicles with a manual gearbox: Select a lower gear before downhill gradients. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Select a lower gear in Tiptronic mode. —The vehicle’s centre of gravity and in turn the vehicle handling will change because of the trailer load and the increased gross weight of the vehicle and trailer. —The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen towing vehicle is very unfavourable. When driving in this situation, drive particularly carefully and slowly. Pulling off on uphill gradients when towing a trailer A vehicle towing a trailer is liable to roll back a short distance when moving off on an uphill slope depending on the gradient and the gross weight of the trailer and vehicle. When towing a trailer, pull off on uphill gradient as follows: 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Apply the handbrake firmly. 3. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: fully depress the clutch pedal and engage 1st gear. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: engage the gear selector position for forward driving. 4. Unlock hand brake and carefully release while holding down lock button. Press the accelerator in a controlled way at the same time. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: release the clutch pedal until you can feel the vehicle moving forwards. (→ Hill Start Assist) If necessary, observe the information on Hill Start Assist 5. Pull away slowly. 6. Only release the handbrake lever when the engine has sufficient power to move off. WARNING Incorrect trailer towing can cause loss of vehicle control and serious or fatal injuries. ● Please note that the vehicle handling changes when towing a trailer and when transporting heavy or bulky objects. ● Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. ● Always pay attention to the road ahead and drive carefully. ● Take particular care when overtaking and reduce your speed immediately if the trailer shows even the slightest sign of snaking. ●...
  • Page 390 The trailer stabilisation function can detect if an attached trailer is starting to snake from side to side and can provide countersteer. Trailer stabilisation is an extension of the Electronic Stability Control ( ESC). If trailer snaking is detected, the trailer stabilisation function automatically helps to reduce the trailer’s motion using counter steering assistance. Prerequisites for trailer stabilisation —The vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or a compatible towing bracket has been retrofitted. —Electronic Stability Control and traction control system ( TCS) are active. The indicator lamp or in the instrument cluster is not lit up. —The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer socket. —The vehicle speed is higher than approximately 60 km/h (37 mph). —The maximum drawbar load is being used. —The trailer must have a rigid drawbar. —Trailers with brakes must have a mechanical overrun system. System limits The trailer stabilisation system cannot react or will react in a restricted way in the following driving situations. —Trailer stabilisation is switched off when ESC is deactivated. —Light trailers that are snaking will not be recognised by the trailer stabilisation function and stabilised accordingly in all cases. —A trailer can still jack-knife on slippery roads with little grip, even if the towing vehicle is equipped with the trailer stabilisation system. —Trailers with a high centre of gravity might tip over before snaking starts. —Sudden braking procedures could occur automatically in extreme driving situations if the trailer socket is being used without a trailer (e.g. for a bicycle carrier with lighting). WARNING The trailer stabilisation system cannot replace the driver’s attention and operates only within the limits of the system. The trailer stabilisation system therefore cannot recognise all driving situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an undesired way. If you do not pay due attention, there is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Always pay due attention and do not rely exclusively on the system. The driver is always responsible for all driving tasks. → System limits ●...
  • Page 391 1 Ball head. 2 Retaining balls. 3 Catch (ball) for locking mechanism. 4 Centring device. 5 Shank. 6 Key. 7 Lock cover. 8 Handwheel. 9 Green marking on ball coupling. 10 Red marking on handwheel. The removable ball coupling is located in the luggage compartment, either in a side stowage area or under the luggage compartment floor. NOTICE If an unsuitable ball coupling is fitted, this may damage the vehicle and invalidate the type approval of the vehicle. ● Use the factory-supplied ball coupling or a ball coupling that has been approved for your vehicle model and its model year. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. Step 1: preparations 1. Before using the removable ball coupling for the first time, make a note of the number stamped on the 6 . This can be used if you need to acquire a replacement key. → Fig. 1 key 2. Remove the sealing plug from the ball coupling mounting under the rear bumper and stow in the vehicle. 3. Starting from the bottom right side, swivel the trailer socket as far as possible to the top left. This gives you access to the ball coupling mounting. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 392 8 , shank 5 and retaining balls 2 of the ball coupling are all → Fig. 1 4. Check that the mounting, handwheel → clean and not damaged . Clean if necessary. Step 2: check that the ball coupling is pre-tensioned The ball coupling cannot be fitted properly unless it is pre-tensioned. The following conditions must be fulfilled: → Fig. 1 on the handwheel must point towards the green marking on the tow-bar → Fig. 1 —The red marking → Fig. 1 and tow-bar of at least 4 mm ( 0.2 inches). —There must be a clearly visible gap between the handwheel → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 can be pressed fully into the shank —All retaining balls 6 is inserted in the lock, the arrow on the key is pointing to the open lock symbol on the → Fig. 1 —The key 8 and the key cannot be removed. → Fig. 1 handwheel If all these conditions are met, continue with Step 4. If the conditions are not met, continue with Step 3. Step 3: pre-tensioning the ball coupling If the tow-bar is not pre-tensioned, pre-tension the tow-bar as follows: 7 and insert the key in the lock.

  • Page 393: Step 5: Safety Check

    2. Guide the cable through the eye and hook in the snap hook WARNING Improper use of the towing bracket can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. 1 is less than 49 mm → Fig. 1 ● Never use the towing bracket if the smallest diameter of the ball head (1.9 inches). ● Use the ball coupling only if it can be properly secured, engaged and pre-tensioned. WARNING If the trailer is not properly secured, this could cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never place the trailer’s safety or breakaway cable loosely over the ball coupling. ● Do not touch the handwheel once the ball coupling has been pre-tensioned. When the ball coupling is pressed into the mounting, the handwheel will jump back to its original position. ● If the ball coupling cannot be fitted, have the towing bracket checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Do not use the towing bracket if you are unable to remove the key once the ball coupling has been mounted. This means that the ball coupling is not locked properly. ● Always secure the removed ball coupling safely in the luggage compartment. WARNING The ball coupling is heavy. When performing the safety check, the ball coupling could fall off and cause crush injuries. ● Always take care when performing the safety check. NOTICE The mounting on the vehicle, handwheel, shank and ball coupling retaining balls must all be clean and undamaged. Otherwise the ball coupling may not lock securely. ● Regularly check the mounting, handwheel, shank and retaining balls of the ball coupling for damage. ● Do not aim the jet of a high-pressure cleaner or steam cleaner directly at the ball coupling. This could wash the grease required for lubrication out of the mounting.

  • Page 394: Removing The Ball Coupling

    Removing the ball coupling Fig. 1 Overview: removable ball coupling. 1 Ball head. 2 Retaining balls. 3 Catch (ball) for locking mechanism. 4 Centring device. 5 Shank. 6 Key. 7 Lock cover. 8 Handwheel. 9 Green marking on ball coupling. 10 Red marking on handwheel. (→ Parking) 1. Park the vehicle 2. Unhitch the trailer and disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. If fitted, remove the adapters from the trailer socket. 7 and insert the key 6 in the lock. 3. Fold open the lock cover → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 → Fig. 1 4. Turn the key anticlockwise until the arrow on the key points to the open lock symbol on the 8 .
  • Page 395 → Fig. 1 8. Release the handwheel 9. Stow the ball coupling in the luggage compartment in the side stowage area or under the luggage compartment floor. WARNING The removable ball coupling is heavy. The ball coupling could fall off while it is being removed and cause crush injuries. ● Unlock the ball coupling only when the trailer has been unhitched. Dimensions and mounting points for retrofitting a towing bracket Fig. 1 Dimensions and mounting points for retrofitting a towing bracket. → Fig. 1 The distance dimensions must be observed in all cases when retrofitting a towing bracket. Always observe the minimum distance given from the middle of the ball coupling D to the surface of the road. This also applies when the vehicle is fully laden, including maximum drawbar load. A Attachment points. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 396 B 798 mm (approx. 31.4 in) C at least 65 mm (approx. 2.6 in) D 350 to 420 mm (approx. 13.8 to 16.5 in) E 333 mm (approx. 13.1 in) F 459 mm (approx. 18 in) G 1025 mm (approx. 40.4 in) H 1031 mm (approx. 40.6 in) Volkswagen recommends having the towing bracket retrofitted by a correspondingly qualified workshop. It may be necessary to perform conversion work on the cooling system or to fit heat shields, for example. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Mount the towing bracket in accordance with the supplied installation instructions. A retrofitted, non-removable towing bracket must not cover either the number plate or the lighting system at the rear of the vehicle. Observe the country-specific regulations on use of a towing bracket. Due to legal and technical requirements, the vehicle may not be approved for trailer towing in some countries. In this case, it is also not allowed to retrofit a towing bracket. Consult a suitably qualified workshop if you have any questions about retrofitting a towing bracket. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. DANGER Vehicles with a natural gas fuel tank must never be retrofitted with a towing bracket. In the event of a rear-end collision, there is a risk of an explosion that could cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never retrofit a towing bracket on vehicles with a natural gas fuel tank. WARNING Electrical cables that are not connected properly or are connected incorrectly can cause faults in the entire vehicle electronics system and also cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never connect the trailer’s electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail light clusters or to other unsuitable power sources. ● Use only suitable connectors to connect the trailer. ● Have retrofitting of a towing bracket on the vehicle performed by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership.
  • Page 397 Fitting a rear carrier system or bicycle carrier on the ball coupling Rear carrier systems include equipment such as bicycle carriers or hunters’ boxes, for example, which are installed on the ball coupling. Use only rear carrier systems that are intended by the manufacturer for the corresponding vehicle model, model year → and vehicle version Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. Mount the rear carrier system in accordance with the manufacturer’s assembly instructions. Maximum load of the rear carrier system Fig. 1 Recommended weight distribution on the rear carrier system. The load is made up of the rear carrier system and the items transported on it. The maximum recommended load of the rear carrier system installed on the ball coupling can deviate from the vehicle-specific drawbar load of the vehicle. However, the model-specific maximum drawbar load of the towing bracket must not be exceeded. Due to the lever effect, the load capacity decreases the further the centre of gravity of the rear carrier system is away from the ball head. → Fig. 1 Position heavy items as close as possible to the ball coupling Vehicle-specific maximum load In order to find out the recommended maximum load for your vehicle, check the drawbar load of your vehicle . The corresponding maximum load can then be read from the following table. Volkswagen recommends observing the specified number of bicycles on the rear carrier system in accordance with Regulation UN-R 55. Vehicle-specific drawbar Maximum load Number of bicycles load 50 kg (110 lbs) 50 kg (110 lbs) 55 kg (121 lbs) 55 kg (121 lbs) from 75 kg (165 lbs) 75 kg (165 lbs) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 398 A With a load of up to 55 kg ( 121 lbs): 500 mm (approx. 19.7 in). B With a load of 75 kg (165 lbs): 700 mm (approx. 27.6 in). For bicycle carrier systems with two bicycles, the maximum overhang must not exceed 500 mm (approx. → Fig. 2 A 19.7 in) from the middle of the ball head to the middle of the rail of the last bicycle carrier. The → Fig. 2 B overhang must not exceed 700 mm (approx. 27.6 in) for bicycle carrier systems with three bicycles. WARNING Incorrect use of a rear carrier system mounted on the trailer coupling of the towing bracket can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Make sure that the rear carrier system is suitable for use on your vehicle. ● Always read and observe the fitting instructions of the rear carrier system’s manufacturer. ● Never secure a rear carrier system on the ball neck below the ball head. The rear carrier system could slip due to the shape of the ball neck. Volkswagen recommends that you remove all add-on parts of the load on the rear carrier system before setting off. This includes bicycle bags and baskets, child seats or batteries. This helps improve the rear carrier system’s wind load and centre of gravity. Introduction to the topic Some vehicle models are designed for fitting a roof carrier. Roof carriers can be used to transport bulky items on the roof of the vehicle. If you are unsure whether a roof carrier can be fitted on your vehicle, please contact a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Only use roof carriers that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. If the vehicle is not approved for use with a roof carrier, do not use or retrofit a roof carrier. WARNING When transporting large, heavy, long or flat loads on the roof carrier, the vehicle’s handling and aerodynamics will change due to a shift in the centre of gravity and an increased susceptibility to crosswinds. This can cause accidents OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 399 ● Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. ● Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres. ● Ensure that your speed and driving style are always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. WARNING If the vehicle is not approved for use of a roof carrier or a roof carrier is fitted that is not approved for the vehicle, this can become detached while the vehicle is in motion and fall off the vehicle roof. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Use only roof carriers that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle. ● Do not fit a roof carrier if the vehicle is not approved for this. NOTICE Securing a roof carrier of any kind to a vehicle that is not approved for use with a roof carrier can lead to severe damage. ● Do not fit a roof carrier if the vehicle is not approved for this. Driving with a fitted roof carrier increases the air resistance of the vehicle and thus also the fuel consumption. The possible range of the vehicle is reduced as a result. This applies to all roof carriers and the objects transported on them, e.g. bicycles and skis. Fitting a roof carrier Fig. 1 Mounting points for base carriers. Special roof carriers must be used to transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surfboards or boats safely. The roof carriers for mounting on the roof railings are specifically called roof bars, while those for direct mounting on the vehicle roof are called base carriers. Use only roof carriers that are intended by the manufacturer for the corresponding vehicle model, model year and vehicle version. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. Mounting base carriers Mount the base carriers in accordance with the supplied assembly instructions. The bores or markings for securing the roof carrier are visible only when the doors are open. If necessary, unscrew the plastic screw from the bore opening. The front bores or markings are located on the undersides of the roof side members in the area of the door seal. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 400: Loading A Roof Carrier

    The rear bores or markings are located on the undersides of the roof side members in the area of the door seal or, depending on the vehicle equipment, at the top of the rear side windows. Once you have fitted the base carrier, you can then secure the respective load carrier on this → Remove the roof carrier in the following situations —The roof carrier is no longer needed. —Before entering a car wash. —When the vehicle height exceeds the required clearance height, e.g. in a garage. NOTICE The height of the vehicle is changed by the installation of a roof carrier and the load secured to it. The vehicle can be severely damaged if the clearance height is insufficient, e.g. in the case of underpasses and garage doors. ● Check and compare the height of the vehicle with clearance heights. NOTICE The vehicle may be damaged if the roof carrier and the load interfere with equipment-dependent components on the vehicle roof, e.g. roof aerial, and the movement path of the boot lid. ● Make sure that the roof carrier is positioned correctly on the roof and that there is no interference with any components. WARNING The luggage and the entire structure can become detached from the vehicle roof if the roof carrier and carrier structure are not secured and used correctly. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always fit the roof carrier and carrier structure correctly and in accordance with the manufacturer’s assembly instructions. ● Attach the roof carrier only at the specified mounting points. ● Always fit special carrier attachments for bicycles, skis, surfboards etc. correctly and in accordance with the manufacturer’s assembly instructions. ● Use the roof carrier and load carrier only if they are undamaged and fitted correctly. ● Check that the roof carrier is secured before starting your journey and tighten as necessary after driving a short distance. ● During a long trip, check all bolts and fasteners at each stop. ● Do not carry out any modifications or repairs to the roof carrier or the load carrier. Fitting a roof carrier increases air resistance and may reduce the vehicle’s range.

  • Page 401: Checking Mounting

    ● Do not exceed the load capacity of the roof carrier, even if the maximum roof load has not been reached. WARNING If loose or improperly secured loads fall off the roof carrier, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always use suitable and undamaged lashing, retaining or securing straps. NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged if the boot lid collides with the roof load. ● When opening the boot lid, make sure that it does not collide with the roof load. Safety information on using fuel WARNING Incorrect handling of fuel can cause explosions, fire, serious burns and other injuries. ● Switch off the engine, ignition, your mobile phone and other radio equipment before refuelling. ● Avoid electrostatic discharges by not entering the vehicle during refuelling. ● Make sure that the tank cap is closed properly and no fuel can escape. ● Observe the applicable safety instructions and local regulations on handling fuel. WARNING Incorrect refuelling can lead to fire, serious or fatal injuries and vehicle damage. ● Use only fuels that have been approved for the vehicle. ● Do not use fuels that contain metals and use only Volkswagen-approved service additives in the approved quantity. ● Immediately remove any fuel that is spilled from all vehicle components. CAUTION Fuel may leak out of the fuel canister and ignite. This could cause fire and injuries. ● Do not carry a fuel canister in the vehicle. Fuels can pollute the environment. Collect any service fluids that escape or are spilled and dispose of them correctly. The tank flap cannot be opened manually. Seek expert assistance in an emergency. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 402 Introduction to the topic The tank flap is located at the rear right-hand side of the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 403 Identification of fuels and fuel standards Fig. 1 On the inside of the tank flap: fuel information label (illustration). Fuel information label Different engines require different fuels. There is a factory-fitted fuel information sticker in the tank flap that → Fig. 1 indicates the fuel that must be used for the vehicle The designation and frame indicate the fuels that are suitable for the vehicle. This is the minimum requirement. The → vehicle must not be refuelled with lower-quality fuels or other fuel types Fuel standards The fuel that is used for refuelling must comply with one of the following standards. The vehicle must not be refuelled with other fuels → Where fuel complying with the specified standards is not available, a correspondingly qualified workshop will have information on which available fuels are suitable for the vehicle. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Petrol Fig. 2 Identification for petrol fuels with an ethanol content of 5%. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 404 Fig. 3 Identification for petrol fuels with an ethanol content of 10 %. Fig. 4 Identification for petrol fuels with an ethanol content of 20 %. E5 stands for petrol fuel with a maximum e thanol content of 5%. E10 stands for petrol fuel with a maximum e thanol content of 10 %. E20 stands for petrol fuel with a maximum e thanol content of 20 %. Fuel standard —EN 228 in the current version. —DIN EN 228 in the current version. —Resolucao ANP N° 40 (Brazil) in the current version. —Resolucion 576/2019 (Argentina) in the current version. —NOM-016-CRE-2016 (Mexico) in the current version. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 405: Natural Gas (Cng)

    Natural gas (CNG) Fig. 5 Identification for CNG – compressed natural gas. stands for Compressed Natural Gas. Fuel standard —EN 16723_2 (preferably CNG with a maximum of 10 mg sulphur per m ) in the current version. —DIN EN 16723_2 (preferably CNG with a maximum of 10 mg sulphur per m ) in the current version. NOTICE Using fuel that does not comply with the applicable standards and are not approved may reduce performance and cause damage to the engine and fuel system. ● Before refuelling, check whether the fuel to be filled corresponds to the specification on the pump. ● Refuel only with fuels that comply with the specified standard and identification. Petrol Petrol grades Petrol grades differ with respect to their Research Octane Number ( R ON ). The vehicle may also be filled with petrol that has a higher RON than the engine requires. However, this does not provide any advantage in terms of fuel consumption or engine output. The fuel information label may show several petrol grades (e.g. R ON 95, min. 91). The highlighted octane number, R ON 95 in the example above, is the preferred petrol grade for which the vehicle has been designed and optimised. The petrol grade listed as an alternative, RON 91 in the example above, can be used for refuelling only if the preferred grade, RON 95 in the example, is not available. Only refuel petrol engine vehicles with metal-free petrol ( without lead, manganese or iron) that does not have a → higher ethanol content than stated on the fuel information label The fuel quality affects the running properties, performance and service life of the engine. Refuel with fuel that OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 406: Refuelling Process

    → already contains suitable fuel additives Volkswagen recommends using “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline”. This fuel is available in a number of regions, e.g. North America, Central America and South America. Further information on “TOP TIER detergent gasoline” is available on the official website: https://www.toptiergas.com NOTICE Incorrect refuelling or unsuitable fuel additives can cause damage to the vehicle. ● Before refuelling, check whether the fuel to be filled corresponds to the specification on the pump. ● Refuel only with petrol that has the specified Research Octane Number (RON ) or a higher one. ● ● Use only Volkswagen-approved service additives in the approved quantity if necessary. NOTICE If petrol fuel with too low an octane number is filled in an emergency, vehicle damage can occur when driving for a longer period of time. ● Only run the engine at medium speeds and with a low engine load. ● Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. ● Refuel with petrol with the correct octane number as soon as possible. Refuelling Fig. 1 Behind the tank flap: tank cap ( illustration). Refuelling process (→ Vehicle key) 1. To unlock the tank flap, unlock the vehicle with the button in the vehicle key (→ Central locking button) Or: to unlock the tank flap, unlock the vehicle with the button in the driver door In vehicles with Keyless Access, the tank flap is unlocked automatically when the vehicle is unlocked. 2. Open the tank flap.

  • Page 407: Natural Gas

    WARNING Overfilling the fuel tank may cause the fuel to splash out and overflow. This could cause explosions, fires and serious or fatal injuries. ● Do not continue refuelling when the filler nozzle switches off for the first time. NOTICE If the fuel tank content is not consumed up to the reserve quantity at regular intervals, this may result in the fuel quality and system functions necessary for vehicle operation not being maintained. ● Refuel only when the indicator lamp lights up at least every six months. Fuels can pollute the environment. Collect any service fluids that escape or are spilled and dispose of them correctly. Natural gas Natural gas and types of natural gas Vehicles fitted with a natural gas engine may only be refuelled and driven with compressed natural gas ( CNG ). Refuelling with other types of natural gas is not permissible. The vehicle can run on bio-natural gas. Detailed information is available from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. → Do not make any design modifications to the gas filler neck → Only use approved adapters Natural gas quality and consumption Natural gas is available in two grades: H-gas and L-gas. H-gas has a higher calorific value and a lower nitrogen and carbon dioxide content. The higher the calorific value of the natural gas, the lower the levels of consumption. The calorific value and the nitrogen or carbon dioxide values may vary within one quality group. For this reason, the vehicle consumption may vary when using natural gas of the same quality. The vehicle engine management will automatically adapt to the different natural gas qualities. Both natural gas qualities can therefore be mixed in the natural gas fuel tank. You do not need to empty the natural gas fuel tank before refuelling with a different quality. The natural gas quality is displayed on the instrument cluster . WARNING Improper handling of natural gas can cause vehicle damage, fire, explosion and serious or fatal injury. ● Always refill the natural gas fuel tank with compressed natural gas ( C NG ●...
  • Page 408 ● Exit the danger zone and notify ambulance services, if necessary. ● Make use of professional assistance and have faults rectified. Safety notes on the natural gas system Regular checks of the natural gas system → External influences can damage or corrode natural gas fuel tanks . The vehicle keeper must therefore ensure that the natural gas system is checked (visual inspection) at least every four years by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The date for the next legally prescribed inspection of the natural gas system can be shown on the instrument cluster (→ Emission-relevant components) display . Observe any text messages, warning and indicator lamps that light up The vehicle keeper must have the natural gas fuel tank exchanged by a suitably qualified workshop before it reaches the end of its service life. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Please contact a suitably → qualified workshop for information on the service life of your natural gas fuel tanks . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Natural gas fuel tanks have a limited service life. Damaged or corroded natural gas fuel tanks could burst and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Have the natural gas fuel tanks checked ( visual inspection) every four years at the latest. ● Have the natural gas fuel tanks replaced in good time. ● Further information can be obtained from a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The natural gas tanks could be damaged if the underbody makes contact with the ground or in the event of a, rear, collision. If damaged natural gas tanks are filled, they could burst, causing severe or even fatal injuries. ● Drive immediately to a suitably qualified workshop and have the gas system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Do not refuel until the gas system has been examined. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 409: Refuelling Natural Gas

    Refuelling natural gas Fig. 1 Behind the tank flap: gas filler neck. 1 Closure cap. 2 Gas filler neck. 3 Seal on the gas filler neck. The fill couplings for natural gas systems have a variety of methods of operation. Contact trained filling station → personnel Refuelling process Please refer to the relevant information in the operating manual for the natural gas system. 1. Open the tank flap. → Fig. 1 1 2. Remove the closure cap from the gas filler neck → Fig. 1 2 3. Fit the filling coupling on the gas filler neck 4. Start refuelling. The natural gas fuel tank is full when the compressor switches off automatically. 5. To stop filling, press the stop button of the natural gas system. 6. After removing the filling coupling, check whether the sealing ring of the gas filler neck is present. Place the seal → Fig. 1 3 back in the gas filler neck → Fig. 1 1 → Fig. 1 2 7. Press the closure cap onto the gas filler neck and close the tank flap.

  • Page 410: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Urgent gas system inspection The warning lamp lights up red. It is urgent that the natural gas system be checked! Operation of the natural gas system may be restricted. The CNG operation not available text message is displayed. 1. Drive immediately to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. Have the gas system checked. Or: the CNG operation not available in X days text message is displayed. 1. Drive to a suitably qualified workshop within the specified period. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. Have the gas system checked. Gas system inspection The indicator lamp lights up white or yellow. The natural gas system must be checked. The CNG operation not available in XX days text message is displayed. 1. Drive to a suitably qualified workshop within the specified period. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2. Have the gas system checked. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 411 Introduction to the topic The components relevant to emission control reduce harmful emissions: (→ Catalytic converter) —Catalytic converter (→ Particulate filter) —Particulate filter (depending on equipment) WARNING Toxic gases can enter the vehicle interior if the engine runs in closed spaces. This can cause serious injuries and lead to death by suffocation. ● Never start the engine in enclosed spaces. ● Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed spaces. ● Do not leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. WARNING The components of the exhaust system become very hot and can ignite highly flammable materials, e.g. undergrowth, leaves, dry grass or spilt fuel. This can lead to a fire and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Always park the vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come into contact with highly flammable materials underneath the vehicle. ● Never apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, heat shields or particulate filter. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 412: Catalytic Converter

    Catalytic converter Observe the following information to help ensure the long-term functionality of the exhaust system and the catalytic converter in the petrol engine: —Only use fuel that has been approved for the vehicle. —Do not run the fuel tank empty . (→ Engine oil) —Do not overfill engine oil (→ Jump starting) —Do not tow-start the vehicle. Use jump leads If you notice misfiring, loss of power or uneven running when driving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle (→ Emission-relevant components) checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Otherwise unburned fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating. The emissions may have a sulphur-like smell even if the emission purification system is working properly. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 413: Particulate Filter

    Particulate filter Function The particulate filter (depending on the vehicle equipment) filters out soot particles in the exhaust gas. Regeneration In normal vehicle operation, the filter cleans itself. If it is not possible for the filter to clean itself, for example if the vehicle is only ever used for short trips, the filter will become saturated with soot. The diesel particulate filter requires cleaning (regeneration). Noises, slight smells and increased engine speeds may occur during regeneration. The radiator fan may run on while the vehicle is moving or when the engine has been switched off. To assist the regeneration of the particulate filter, Volkswagen recommends that you avoid making frequent short journeys. The soot in the particulate filter is burnt off at high temperatures on a periodic basis. During the periodic regeneration process, the yellow indicator lamp does not light up. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 414 Do not drive on! Seek expert assistance. Particulate filter clogged with soot The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The particulate filter is saturated with soot and requires regeneration. Prerequisite for regeneration trip: the engine is at operating temperature. For petrol engines 1.0 l to 1.8 l 1. Drive at a speed between around 50 km/h and 120 km/h ( 30 mph and 75 mph). The achieved temperature increase can burn the soot off the filter. 2. End the regeneration drive only when the indicator lamp goes out. 3. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop if the indicator lamp continues to light up after driving for approximately 40 minutes. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 2.0 l and 3.0 l 1. Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ( 50 mph). 2. To allow the vehicle to coast while a gear is engaged, take your foot off the accelerator completely for a few seconds. 3. Repeat this procedure (accelerate and coast) until the indicator lamp goes out. 4. If the indicator lamp does not go out after some time, go immediately to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Emissions-relevant fault The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Fault in an emissions-relevant component that can damage the vehicle. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the engine and exhaust system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Misfiring The indicator lamp flashes yellow. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 415 Misfiring is occurring that can damage the vehicle. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the engine and exhaust system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Sudden braking or driving manoeuvres, for example when an indicator lamp lights up or due to irregular engine running, can lead to accidents. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● Ensure that your speed and driving style are always appropriate for the current visibility, weather and road/traffic conditions. ● Always observe the applicable country-specific traffic regulations. There may be engine faults and fuel consumption may be higher if the indicator lamps are lit up or flashing. Introduction to the topic Observe any country-specific legislation when securing your vehicle in the event of a breakdown. WARNING In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident, a loose breakdown set, spare wheel, temporary spare wheel or loose vehicle toolkit could be flung though the vehicle interior. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always ensure that the vehicle toolkit, breakdown set and spare wheel or temporary spare wheel are always properly secured in the luggage compartment. WARNING Working with unsuitable tools or damaged tools from the vehicle toolkit can lead to accidents. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Never work with unsuitable or damaged tools from the vehicle toolkit. ● Seek expert assistance if no suitable vehicle tools are available. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 416 Stowage The vehicle toolkit may be located in various places in the vehicle, such as under the luggage compartment floor or in a side stowage area of the luggage compartment. Depending on the equipment level, the luggage compartment may contain a loose box with the vehicle toolkit. This enclosed vehicle toolkit is intended for a possible winter tyre change and does not need to be carried in the vehicle at all times . OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 417: Tyre Pressure Gauge

    Contents of the vehicle toolkit The scope of the on-board tool kit depends on the country and equipment. The following describes the maximum content. Fig. 1 Contents of the toolbox (illustration). 1 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for unscrewing or tightening slackened wheel bolts. The screwdriver blade is reversible. The screwdriver may be stowed under the box spanner. 2 Crank. 3 Hook for pulling off the centre covers, wheel covers and the wheel bolt caps. 4 Wheel wrench for loosening and tightening the wheel bolts. 5 Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt. Volkswagen recommends that you carry the wheel bolt adapter in the vehicle toolkit at all times. The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adapter. You will need this number to replace the adapter if it is lost. Make a note of the code number for the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place – but not inside the vehicle. 6 Screw-in towing eye. 7 Jack. After using the jack, crank it back to its original position so that it can be stowed safely. Tyre pressure gauge In some countries, there may also be a tyre pressure gauge in the vehicle. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 418 Fig. 2 Additional tool in the vehicle toolkit ( illustration). 1 Tyre pressure gauge (country-dependent). Servicing the jack If a jack is included in the vehicle toolkit, it is not generally subject to any maintenance intervals. 1. Grease the jack with a universal lubricant when necessary. Moving the windscreen wipers to service position The wiper arms can be lifted off the windscreen when in the service position. Fig. 1 Wipers in service position (illustration). Activating the service position via the wiper lever 1. Close the bonnet and the driver and front passenger doors. 2. Switch the ignition on and then off again. (→ Wipers) 3. Operate the flick wipe function Lifting the windscreen wiper arms → 1. Move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting 2. Hold and lift the wiper arms only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 419: Changing The Windscreen Wiper Blades

    Placing the wiper arms on the windscreen 1. Before starting your journey, take hold of the wiper arms carefully and only in the area of the wiper blade mounting and place them on the windscreen. 2. Press the wiper lever briefly in “flick wipe” direction with the ignition switched on. The wiper arms move back to their initial position. NOTICE If due care is not taken when working on the wiper arms, this can result in damage to the bonnet, windscreen or wiper arms. ● Lift the wiper arms carefully and always only when in service position. ● Never open the bonnet when the wiper arms have been lifted. ● Always place the wiper arms carefully back on the windscreen before starting a journey. Cleaning and changing wiper blades The factory-fitted windscreen wiper blades are coated with graphite. The graphite coating ensures that the wiper blade moves quietly over the window. If the graphite coating is damaged, the wiper will become louder. Check the condition of the wiper blades on a regular basis. → —Wiper blades that judder should be changed if damaged or cleaned if dirty Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. Wiper blades are available from a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Cleaning wiper blades Windscreen wipers: Move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting. 1. Lift the wiper arms, making sure that you hold them only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. 2. Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp sponge → 3. Place the wiper arms carefully back onto the windscreen. Changing the windscreen wiper blades Fig. 1 Changing the windscreen wiper blades. 1 Release button for the wiper blade. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 420 1. Move the wiper arms to the service position before lifting. 2. Lift the wiper arms, making sure that you hold them only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. 3. Press and hold the release button and simultaneously pull off the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 1 . → Fig. 1 4. Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and type on the respective wiper arm and push it on until it engages. 5. Place the wiper arms carefully back onto the windscreen. Changing the wiper blade for the rear window Fig. 2 Changing the wiper blade for the rear window. 1 Release button for the wiper blade. 1. When lifting a wiper arm, hold it only in the area of the wiper blade mounting. 2. Lift and fold back the wiper arm. → Fig. 2 3. Press and hold the release button 4. Tilt the wiper blade in the direction of the wiper arm → Fig. 2 and pull it off in the direction of the arrow at the same time. You may need to use some force to do this. 5. Insert a new wiper blade with the same length and design onto the wiper arm against the direction of the → Fig. 2 arrow. Push it on until it engages . The wiper blade must be in folded-down position to do this → Fig. 2 6. Carefully place the wiper arm back onto the rear window. WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe injuries.
  • Page 421 Exterior lighting in LED technology The exterior lighting may be designed using L ED technology. Owners cannot replace the LEDs themselves. If individual LEDs fail, this may be an indication that more LEDs are on the point of failure. In this case, have the light units checked and renewed if necessary by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. It may be illegal to drive with faulty exterior lights. WARNING If the vehicle lighting is not switched on as appropriate for the weather conditions, the road will not be illuminated sufficiently. Other road users may have difficulty seeing the vehicle or may not see it at all. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Check the lighting system and turn signals of the vehicle regularly. ● Repair the lighting system and turn signals if necessary. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 422 Introduction to the topic At the time of publication we are unable to provide an complete overview of the locations of the fuses for the electrical consumers. This is because the vehicle is under constant development, because fuses are assigned differently depending on the vehicle equipment level and because several electrical consumers may use a single fuse. You can get more information about the fuse layout from a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Several electrical consumers can share a single fuse. Conversely, a single consumer could have more than one fuse. Therefore fuses should only be replaced when the cause of the fault has been rectified. 1. If a new fuse blows again shortly after fitting, have the electrical system checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop as soon as possible. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The high voltage in the electrical system can cause electric shocks and serious burns. Contact with the electrical wiring of the ignition system can cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses and bridging an electrical circuit without fuses can cause serious damage or a fire in the vehicle. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Replace fuses only with fuses with the same rating and size. Make sure that the colour and markings are identical to the defective fuse. ● Never repair fuses. ● Never use a metal strip, paper clip or similar objects to replace a fuse. NOTICE If a fuse is replaced when the ignition is switched on, the engine is running, lights are switched on or when other electrical consumers are switched on, this can damage the electrical system. ● Switch off the engine and switch off the lights and other electrical consumers. ● Make sure that the engine cannot be started when changing a fuse. NOTICE Damage can also be caused at other locations in the electrical system if a fuse is replaced with a fuse that has a higher rating. ● Never replace a fuse with a fuse that has a higher rating. NOTICE Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical system.

  • Page 423: Fuses In The Engine Compartment

    Fuses in the engine compartment Opening the fuse box in the engine compartment Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: fuse box. 1 Fuse box cover. In some vehicles, a pair of plastic grippers for removing fuses is located on the inside of the cover of the fuse box or on the fuse carrier. Removing the cover 1. Open the bonnet. 1 . → Fig. 1 2. To unlock the fuse box cover, push the catches in the direction of the arrow 3. Lift off the cover. Installing the cover 1. Place the cover on the fuse box. 2. Press the cover down until the cover audibly engages into position on both sides. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 424: Fuse Assignment

    Fuse overview of the fuses in the engine compartment The overview shows the fuse locations of the electrical consumers relevant for the driver. The first column in the overview contains the location. The other columns contain the amp rating, the fuse type and the electrical consumer protected by the fuse. Depending on country and on the equipment of your vehicle, the fuse numbers and positions may differ to those given in the overview. If necessary, ask a correspondingly qualified workshop for the exact fuse layout. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fuse assignment Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: fuse locations. → Fig. 1 Fuse location 7.5 amps, ATO , brake light sensor. ® 30 amps, ATO , front wipers. ® OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 425: Fuses In The Dash Panel

    Fuses in the dash panel Opening the fuse box in the dash panel (left-hand drive vehicle) Fig. 1 On the driver side: fuse box cover in the dash panel (left-hand drive vehicle) Removing the cover 1. Reach behind the cover and pull off in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 1 Installing the cover 1. Align the cover on the opposite side and fold it closed in the opposite direction to the arrow until it audibly engages → Fig. 1 Opening the fuse box in the dash panel (right-hand drive vehicle) Fig. 2 In the dash panel on the front passenger side: fuse box cover in the dash panel (right-hand drive vehicle) 1 Restrictor. 2 Catches. Removing the cover OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 426 1. Open the glove box and empty if necessary. 2. Push restrictor upwards into the opening of the holder and pull out to the side in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 2 1 → Fig. 2 2 3. Push catches upwards in the direction of the arrow at the same time open the glove box further Installing the cover 1. Move glove box into position. 2. Insert the restrictor into the opening in the holder and slide upwards in the opposite direction to the arrow until → Fig. 2 1 it engages → Fig. 2 2 3. Carefully push the glove box forwards past the resistance of the catches Fuse overview of the fuses in the dash panel The overview shows the fuse locations of the electrical consumers relevant for the driver. The first column in the overview contains the location. The other columns contain the amp rating, the fuse type and the electrical consumer protected by the fuse. Depending on country and on the equipment of your vehicle, the fuse numbers and positions may differ to those given in the overview. If necessary, ask a correspondingly qualified workshop for the exact fuse layout. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fuse assignment Fig. 1 In the dash panel: fuse locations. → Fig. 1 Fuse location 10 amps, ATO , light switch. ® OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 427 30 amps, ATO , electric glass roof. ® 40 amps, ATO , central locking. ® 30 amps, ATO , blower regulator. ® 25 amps, ATO , Infotainment system. ® 30 amps, ATO , rear window heating. ® 7.5 amps, ATO , anti-theft alarm. ® 7.5 amps, ATO , anti-theft alarm. ® 7.5 amps, MINI , air conditioning block. ® 20 amps, ATO , horn. ® 15 amps, MINI , rear window wiper. ® 15 amps, MINI , exterior lighting, front left. ® 15 amps, MINI , exterior lighting, front right. ® 7.5 amps, MINI , exterior lighting, rear left. ® OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 428 7.5 amps, MINI , exterior lighting, rear right. ® 20 amps, ATO , cigarette lighter, sockets. ® Fuse locations for vehicles with factory-fitted towing bracket: 20 amps, JCASE , trailer control unit. ® 20 amps, ATO , trailer charging cable. ® 30 amps, JCASE , trailer control unit, right. ® 30 amps, JCASE , trailer control unit, left. ® Electric windows and electrically adjustable seats may be protected by circuit breakers or control units which switch on again automatically a few seconds after the overload, e.g. frozen windows, has been rectified. Changing blown fuses Preparations 1. Switch off the ignition, the lights and all electrical consumers. Detecting a blown fuse Fig. 1 Blown fuse (illustration). OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 429: Fuse Types

    , MINI ) has blown, this can be recognised from the top and side through the transparent ® ® —If a flat blade fuse (ATO housing due to the melted metal strip → Fig. 1 ) has blown, this can be recognised from the top through the transparent housing due to ® —If a cartridge fuse (JCASE → Fig. 1 the melted metal strip Fuse types ® —Standard flat blade fuse (ATO ® —Small flat blade fuse (MINI ® —Cartridge fuse (JCASE Colour coding of fuses Fuses (ATO - MINI ® ® Colour Amp rating Black 1 amps Purple 3 amps Orange 5 amps Brown 7.5 amps 10 amps Blue 15 amps Yellow 20 amps White or clear 25 amps OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 430: Changing Fuses

    Green 30 amps Light green 40 amps Fuses (cartridge, JCASE ® Blue 20 amps Pink 30 amps Green 40 amps 50 amps Yellow 60 amps Changing fuses Fig. 2 Plastic grippers for pulling out and inserting a fuse (illustration). 1. If applicable, take the plastic grippers out of the fuse box or the cover of the respective fuse box → Fig. 2 2. Push the plastic grippers clip suitable for the fuse type onto the fuse from the top or the side. 3. Remove the fuse. 4. If the fuse has blown, replace it with a new fuse with the same rating (same colour and same markings) and OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 431 → same size 5. Once the new fuse has been inserted, put the plastic grippers back in the cover. 6. Insert the cover again or close the fuse box cover. NOTICE You can damage another location in the electrical system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating. ● Never replace a fuse with a fuse that has a higher rating. Introduction to the topic → For technical reasons, your vehicle may not be push-started . If the engine cannot be started because the 12-volt vehicle battery is flat, the discharged battery can be connected to the 12-volt battery of another vehicle to start the engine. In vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the vehicle interior or luggage compartment, the jump leads must always be connected to the jump-start connection points in the engine compartment. WARNING Using the jump leads incorrectly or performing the jump start procedure incorrectly can cause the 12-volt vehicle battery to explode. This can result in serious injuries. ● Always read and observe the warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work on the 12-volt (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) vehicle battery ● Never confuse the positive battery terminal with the negative battery terminal. ● Never perform jump starting on a vehicle with a frozen or thawed 12-volt vehicle battery. WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is jump started. The explosive gas can ignite due to sparks when carrying out jump starting. This can result in serious injuries. ● Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit cigarettes away from the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Avoid electrostatic discharge in the vicinity of the 12-volt vehicle battery. NOTICE Tow-starting the vehicle can cause considerable damage to the vehicle. ● Perform jump starting to start the engine. NOTICE A discharged 12-volt vehicle battery can already freeze at temperatures around 0°C (around +32°F) and can be damaged and fail.
  • Page 432 Jump-start connection point (earth) Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: jump-start connection point (earth). – The jump-start connection point ( earth) is used for connecting the black jump lead. The vehicle can be jump-started or be used to jump-start another vehicle via the jump-start connection point (earth). OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 433 Jump-start connection point (positive) Fig. 1 In the engine compartment underneath a cover: positive jump-start connection point. + In vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, jump-start connection point ( positive) for connecting the red jump lead is located in the engine compartment. The vehicle can be jump-started or be used to jump-start another vehicle via the positive jump-start connection point. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 434 Jump starting preparations and procedure Preparations Observe the following when performing jump starting: → —Wear eye protection and protective gloves —Observe the jump lead manufacturer’s operating instructions. —Open the bonnet. —When performing jump starting, always use jump leads with fully-insulated terminal clamps and defect-free → insulation —Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the vehicle providing jump starting assistance and the vehicle being jump started. Otherwise, current could start to flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. —Ensure that the terminal clamps have good metal-to-metal contact with the terminals. Jump leads A suitable jump lead is needed in order to jump start another vehicle or have your vehicle jump started. The jump leads of the vehicle that is doing the jump starting must have at least the following cross-sections when performing jump starting. — Vehicles with a petrol engine: When jump starting the vehicle with a discharged 12-volt vehicle battery, the cable cross-section must be at least 25 mm (0.038 in — Vehicles with diesel engine: When jump starting the vehicle with a discharged 12-volt vehicle battery, the cable cross-section must be at least 35 mm (0.054 in Vehicle receiving jump starting assistance 1. Make sure that the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery is properly connected to the 12-volt vehicle electrical system. 2. If a 12-volt vehicle battery with a battery window is installed, check the colour of the window . If the battery window is light yellow or colourless, do not jump start the vehicle. Seek expert assistance. Vehicle providing jump starting assistance 1. Observe the vehicle manufacturer's operating instructions. 2. Make sure that the vehicle battery providing assistance has the same voltage ( 12 volts) and approximately the same capacity as the flat 12-volt vehicle battery. Observe the information on the label of the vehicle battery in the vehicle providing jump starting assistance. Jump starting in vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the engine compartment OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 435 Fig. 1 Diagram showing how to connect jump leads in vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the engine compartment. 1 Positive battery terminal on the vehicle that is being jump started. 2 Positive battery terminal on the vehicle that is providing jump starting assistance. 3 Suitable earth connection in the vehicle that is providing jump starting assistance: preferably the jump-start connection point (earth), a solid metal part which is securely bolted onto the cylinder block, or the cylinder block itself. 4 Jump-start connection point (earth) on the vehicle being jump-started . → Fig. 1 Connect the jump leads only in the order A – B – C – D 1. Switch off the ignition in both vehicles. 2. If present, fold open the cover on the positive battery terminal on the 12-volt vehicle battery in the engine compartment. 3. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal of the 12-volt vehicle battery with the 1 → Fig. 1 → discharged 12-volt vehicle battery 4. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive battery terminal of the vehicle providing assistance 2 . → Fig. 1 5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to an earth jump-start connection point on the vehicle with the 12- 3 . → Fig. 1 volt vehicle battery providing assistance Or: if no earth jump-start connection point is present, connect the end of the black jump lead to a solid metal part that is securely bolted onto the cylinder block or to the cylinder block itself on the vehicle with the 12-volt 3 .
  • Page 436 Fig. 2 Diagram showing how to connect jump leads in vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the vehicle interior. 1 Jump-start connection point (positive) on the vehicle being jump-started . 2 Positive battery terminal on the vehicle that is providing jump starting assistance. 3 Suitable earth connection of the vehicle that is providing jump starting assistance. Preferably a jump-start connection point (earth), otherwise a solid metal part that is securely bolted onto the cylinder block, or the cylinder block itself. 4 Jump-start connection point (earth) on the vehicle being jump-started . → Fig. 2 Connect the jump leads only in the order A – B – C – D 1. Switch off the ignition in both vehicles. 2. If present, fold open the cover on the positive jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. 3. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive jump-start connection point of the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery → Fig. 2 → 4. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive battery terminal of the vehicle providing assistance 2 . → Fig. 2 5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to an earth jump-start connection point on the vehicle with the 12- → Fig. 2 volt vehicle battery providing assistance Or: if no earth jump-start connection point is present, connect the end of the black jump lead to a solid metal part that is securely bolted onto the cylinder block or to the cylinder block itself on the vehicle with the 12-volt → Fig. 2 vehicle battery providing assistance 6. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to the earth jump-start connection point on the vehicle with the 4 → Fig. 2 →...
  • Page 437 2. Wait a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery. If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about 1 minute. Please contact an expert if the vehicle’s engine still will not start. Removing the jump leads 1. Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights, if switched on. 2. Turn on the air conditioning blower and rear window heater in the vehicle with the discharged 12-volt vehicle battery. This helps minimise the voltage peaks generated when the leads are disconnected. 3. After jump starting, the jump leads should be removed only in the order D – C – B – A → Fig. 1 or → Fig. 2 4. If present, close the cover of the positive jump-start connection point or the positive terminal on the 12-volt vehicle battery. After jump starting, have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Jump starting the vehicle incorrectly can cause the 12-volt vehicle battery to explode, which can lead to serious injuries. ● Always wear suitable eye protection and protective gloves. ● Never bend over the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Always first connect the positive lead and then the negative lead. ● Never connect the negative lead to parts of the fuel system or to the brake lines. ● Make sure that there is no contact between the uninsulated parts of the terminal clamps. ● Make sure that the insulation of the leads is in perfect condition. ● Do not allow the lead attached to the positive battery terminal on the 12-volt vehicle battery to touch electrically conductive parts of the vehicle. NOTICE A discharged 12-volt vehicle battery can already freeze at temperatures around 0°C (around +32°F) and can be...

  • Page 438: Notes On Towing

    or even fatal injuries. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock during towing. ● If the power supply of the vehicle fails during towing, stop towing immediately and seek expert assistance. NOTICE When pushing the vehicle by hand, the tail light clusters, side spoilers on the rear window and large panels can be damaged. The rear spoiler can become detached. ● When pushing the vehicle by hand, do not press on the tail light clusters, side spoilers on the rear window, large panels and the rear spoiler. Towing (→ Tow-starting or towing) Towing is where a vehicle that cannot be driven is pulled with the aid of another vehicle. The vehicle can be towed with a tow-bar or a tow-rope: —The maximum permitted towing speed is 50 km/h ( 30 mph). —The maximum permitted distance is 50 km ( 30 miles). It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. Use a tow-rope only if you do not have a tow-bar. The tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the strain on both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material. Towing with a breakdown truck If the vehicle is to be raised at one axle for towing, the vehicle must be raised only at the following axle: —Front axle WARNING Vehicle components can be severely damaged by incorrectly secured tow-ropes or tow-bars. The risk of accident is increased and serious or fatal injuries may be caused. ● Attach the vehicle only at the points provided for recovery and towing. ● Never attach the tow-rope or tow-bar to axle or running gear components. ● Seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported standing on a breakdown truck if necessary. Notes on towing It is still possible to activate the turn signals in a vehicle that is being towed, even if the hazard warning lights are switched on. To do this, operate the turn signal and main beam lever in the required direction while the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning lights will not flash while the turn signal is being used. The hazard warning lights will start flashing again automatically as soon as the turn signal and main beam lever is moved back to the neutral position.
  • Page 439 —The steering lock cannot be released. —If the steering function or the operating clearance of the wheels cannot be ensured after an accident. 1. If the vehicle cannot be towed on its own wheels, seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported on a breakdown truck if necessary. Towing Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the points provided: —Towing eye. —Ball coupling. WARNING Vehicle components can be severely damaged by incorrectly secured tow-ropes or tow-bars. The risk of accident is increased and serious or fatal injuries may be caused. ● Attach the vehicle only at the points provided for recovery and towing. ● Never attach the tow-rope or tow-bar to axle or running gear components. ● Seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported, if necessary in standing condition on a breakdown truck. Preparations —Ensure that the tow-rope is not twisted. Otherwise a towing eye can become unscrewed during towing. —Switch on the ignition and hazard warning lights on both vehicles. However, observe any regulations to the contrary. —Observe the legal regulations and notes on towing in the owner’s manual of the other vehicle. Pulling vehicle (front) 1. The tow-rope must be taut before you drive off properly. 2. Press the accelerator carefully. 3. Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. 4. Do not exceed the maximum permitted trailer weight. 5. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: engage the clutch particularly gently when moving off. Pulled vehicle (rear) 1. Make sure that the ignition is always switched on so that the steering wheel is not locked and you can operate the turn signals and wipers if necessary. The brake servo and power steering function only when the engine is running. Otherwise you must press the brake pedal with significantly more force and also use more effort for steering. (→ Keyless Access) 2. Make sure that the vehicle key is always in the vehicle during towing 3. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Select position .
  • Page 440 NOTICE The steering lock cannot be released if the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is not sufficient. The vehicle can be damaged during towing. ● In the event of power failure or malfunctions, start the engine, if necessary by jump starting, in order to release the steering lock. ● Seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported standing on a breakdown truck if necessary. Fitting the towing eye at front Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover in the bumper. 1. Before towing, check that the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. (→ Tow-starting or towing) 2. Comply with the notes on towing 3. If this is not the case, seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported on a breakdown truck if necessary. → The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle NOTICE Use of a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage the vehicle. ● Always use the towing eye from the supplied vehicle toolkit or another suitable towing eye for towing. Fitting the towing eye at front Fig. 1 In the front bumper on the right: removing the cover, variant 1. Fig. 2 In the front bumper on the right: removing the cover, variant 2. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 441: Fitting The Rear Towing Eye

    Fig. 3 In the front bumper on the right: screwing in the towing eye, variant 1. Fig. 4 In the front bumper on the right: screwing in the towing eye, variant 2. 1. Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment. 2. Press the marked area of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the cover catch → Fig. 1 3. Remove the cover, allow it to hang on the vehicle or place it in the vehicle if necessary → → Fig. 3 → 4. Turn the towing eye as shown by the arrow into the threaded hole and tighten as far as possible Use a suitable object to screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. 5. After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it in the opposite direction to the arrow using a suitable object. 6. Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. 7. Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. WARNING If the towing eye is not screwed fully and securely into the mounting, it may be wrenched out of the mount. This can result in accidents and severe injuries when towing. ● Before towing, check whether the towing eye is screwed in fully. NOTICE Improper removal and fitting of the cover and towing eye can cause damage the vehicle’s paint and body. ● Always remove and fit the cover and the towing eye carefully. Fitting the rear towing eye Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mounting for the towing eye is located behind the cover in the bumper. 1. Before towing, check that the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 442 1. Before towing, check that the mounting with screw thread is available for the towing eye. 2. Comply with the notes on towing. 3. If this is not the case, seek expert assistance and have the vehicle transported on a breakdown truck if necessary. → The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle NOTICE Use of a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage the vehicle. ● Always use the towing eye from the supplied vehicle toolkit or another suitable towing eye for towing. Fitting the rear towing eye Fig. 1 In the rear bumper on the right: removing the cover. Fig. 2 In the rear bumper on the right: screwing in the towing eye. 1. Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment. 2. Press the marked area of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the cover catch → Fig. 1 → 3. Remove the cover, allow it to hang on the vehicle or place it in the vehicle if necessary → Fig. 2 → 4. Turn the towing eye as shown by the arrow into the threaded hole and tighten as far as possible Use a suitable object to screw the towing eye fully and securely into the mounting. 5. After you have finished towing, remove the towing eye by unscrewing it in the opposite direction to the arrow using a suitable object. 6. Insert the cap in the respective recess and press in until it engages. 7. Clean the towing eye if necessary and place it back in the vehicle toolkit in the luggage compartment. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 443 Vehicles with towing bracket In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket there is no mounting for the screw-in towing eye behind the cover. 1. Swivel out or fit the ball coupling and use this for towing. NOTICE If you use an unsuitable tow-bar, the ball coupling and the vehicle could be damaged. ● For towing, always use only a tow-bar that is specifically intended for fitting on a ball coupling. ● Use a tow-rope for towing if you do not have access to a suitable tow-bar. Safety notes for working in the engine compartment The engine compartment of a motor vehicle is a hazardous area. You should carry out work in the engine compartment only if you know exactly how to perform the required tasks, are aware of the general safety procedures and have access to the correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. Failing to carry out work correctly can → cause serious injuries . Have all work carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The engine compartment is a hazardous area. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries can occur whenever work is performed in the engine compartment. ● Always be extremely careful and cautious during all work. ● Perform work in the engine compartment only if you are familiar with the necessary tasks. ● Have the necessary work carried out by a suitably qualified workshop if you are uncertain about how to carry out work in the engine compartment. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Firmly apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to position or move the gear lever to neutral position before carrying out any work in the engine compartment. ● Switch off the ignition and keep the vehicle key in a safe place far enough away from the vehicle so that the engine cannot be started accidentally. ● Never touch hot components of the engine. ● Always ensure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment. ● Always keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave children unsupervised.
  • Page 444 Escaping hot steam or hot engine coolant and hot vehicle parts can cause severe burns. ● Never open or close the bonnet if steam or coolant is escaping. ● Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment. WARNING The cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. If the cap is opened carelessly, engine coolant can spray out and cause severe burns or fatal injuries. ● Never open the cap of the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. ● If you have to open the coolant expansion tank, always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth. ● Turn the cap of the coolant expansion tank slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while exerting slight downwards pressure on the cap. WARNING Additional insulating materials, e.g. blankets in the engine compartment, or objects left in the engine compartment, e.g. cleaning cloths or tools, can cause malfunctions, damage to the engine and fire. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Never cover the engine with blankets or other insulating materials. ● Never leave objects in the engine compartment. → Always park the vehicle on a horizontal and firm surface before carrying out any work in the engine compartment (→ Parking) WARNING If the vehicle is not secured against rolling away during maintenance work, unintended vehicle movement may occur. This can result in accidents and severe or fatal injuries. ● Deactivate the start/stop system manually. ● Never work underneath a vehicle if it is not adequately secured against rolling away. ● Make sure that the vehicle is on a horizontal and firm surface and that the wheels are blocked when working under the vehicle while the wheels are touching the ground. ● In addition, support the vehicle securely with suitable trestles when working under the vehicle. The jack is not sufficient for this task and can fail. WARNING High voltage of the electrical system can cause electric shocks and burns. This can result in serious or fatal injuries.

  • Page 445: Opening And Closing The Bonnet

    Opening and closing the bonnet Fig. 1 In the footwell on the driver side: bonnet release lever (schematic diagram). Fig. 2 Above the radiator grille: bonnet control lever. Fig. 3 In the engine compartment: bonnet stay in the holder. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 446: Opening The Bonnet

    Fig. 4 On the bonnet: holder for bonnet stay ( illustration). Opening the bonnet → Fig. 1 1. Open the driver door and pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow The bonnet is released from the lock carrier catch by spring force → 2. To open the bonnet fully, lift the bonnet slightly while simultaneously pressing the opening lever in the direction of the arrow → Fig. 2 3. Take the bonnet stay out of its holder → Fig. 3 in the direction of the arrow and insert it into the retainer for the bonnet stay → Fig. 4 Closing the bonnet 1. Lift the bonnet slightly and hold → → Fig. 4 → Fig. 3 2. Unhook the bonnet stay from the retainer for the bonnet stay and push it into its holder 3. Let the bonnet drop into the catch of the lock carrier from a height of about 20 cm ( around 8 inches) – do not press it down. → The bonnet is flush with the body parts around it when it is closed properly If the bonnet has not closed properly, lift it and then close it again. If the bonnet is not closed properly, a corresponding display appears in the instrument cluster display. The display goes out when the bonnet is closed properly. WARNING If the bonnet is not closed properly, it can open suddenly while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.
  • Page 447 ● Open the bonnet only when the wiper arms are flush to the windscreen and when they are switched off. ● Always fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen before driving away. Display → A symbol on the instrument cluster display indicates if the bonnet is open or is not closed properly Do not drive on! 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. 2. If necessary, lift the bonnet and then close it again. This symbol is also visible when the ignition is switched off and will go out a few seconds after the vehicle has been locked when all doors are closed. WARNING Failure to observe displayed warnings can lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic and can cause accidents, serious injuries and even death. ● Never ignore warnings. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. ● Do not drive on and seek expert assistance if the warning lamp does not go out. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 448 Service fluids and consumables All service fluids and consumables ( e.g. coolant, engine oils and batteries) are being constantly further developed. Have service fluids and consumables replaced by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING When work is performed on the fuel system, electrical discharge and flying sparks can cause fires and serious or fatal injuries. ● Always disconnect the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Always have a fully functional and tested fire extinguisher to hand. ● Ensure that the vehicle is unlocked when the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected as otherwise the anti-theft alarm will be activated. WARNING Service fluids can be toxic. Improper use and storage can cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Store service fluids only in the closed original container. ● Never store service fluids in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers could drink them. ● Keep children away from all service fluids and consumables. ● Always observe and follow the information and warnings on the service fluid packaging. ● When using products that give off harmful fumes, always work outdoors or in a well-ventilated area. WARNING Service fluids and some materials in the engine compartment are highly flammable and can ignite upon contact with hot surfaces, sparks and naked flames. This can lead to a fire and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never smoke in the vicinity of the engine compartment. ● Never work in the direct proximity of sparks or naked flames. ● Never work in the direct proximity of heating systems, water heaters or any other naked flames. ● Never spill service fluids onto the engine.

  • Page 449: Washer Fluid

    Washer fluid Basic information The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap (illustration). → Fig. 1 The washer fluid reservoir is identified by the symbol on the cap 1. The washer fluid level should be checked regularly and refilled as necessary. Preparations 1. Prepare the vehicle for working in the engine compartment . 2. Open the bonnet. Checking and refilling 1. Check whether there is enough washer fluid in the reservoir. 2. Use only clear water with a suitable alcohol-based windscreen washer fluid for refilling. Observe the mixture → → instructions on the packaging of the windscreen washer fluid 3. At low outside temperatures, add a special anti-freeze agent so that the fluid cannot freeze. Observe the mixture instructions on the packaging of the anti-freeze agent. There is a strainer in the filler throat of the washer fluid reservoir. The strainer keeps large dirt particles away from → the washer jets when refilling Do not use distilled water to refill the washer fluid reservoir. WARNING Unsuitable additives in the washer fluid can leave an oily film on the vehicle windows. This can reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and can cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Never mix coolant additive or other unsuitable additives into the washer fluid. NOTICE OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 450 Use of an acidic cleaning agent can lead to damage and to failure of the washer jets. ● Never fill an acidic cleaning agent, e.g. a vinegar-based cleaner, into the washer fluid reservoir. NOTICE Mixing different windscreen washer fluids can lead to flocculation of ingredients in the fluid and cause clogging of the washer jets. ● Use only suitable alcohol-based windscreen washer fluids. ● Never mix different windscreen washer fluids with each other. NOTICE When refilling windscreen washer fluid, dirt particles can enter the washer fluid reservoir if the strainer is damaged or not present. The washer jets could become clogged. ● Remove the strainer only for cleaning. ● Replace the strainer if it is damaged or missing. Introduction to the topic Engine oils are matched to the requirements of the engines, exhaust purification systems and fuel quality. Due to the way in which a combustion engine works, engine oil always comes into contact with combustion residues and fuel, which has an effect on the ageing process of the oil. The correct engine oil is important for the function and service life of the engine. A special multigrade high-lubricity oil has been filled at the factory and this can normally be used as an all-season oil. The vehicle can consume engine oil. Engine oil consumption can vary and can change during the service life of the vehicle. Depending on driving style and operating conditions, engine oil consumption can be up to 1 l (1 qt) per 2,000 km (1,200 miles). In new vehicles, it is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km (3,100 miles). The engine oil level must therefore be checked at regular intervals, preferably before long journeys. WARNING Engine oil becomes extremely hot when the engine is running. If engine oil is handled without due care, this can cause serious burns to the body. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always allow the engine to cool down before performing any work with engine oil. WARNING Engine oil is toxic. Contact with engine oil, and especially ingestion of engine oil, can cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Seek medical attention immediately after swallowing engine oil. ● Seek medical attention if you have health problems after working with engine oil. ● Always keep engine oil out of the reach of children and only in the original sealed container. This also applies to used oil until it is disposed of.
  • Page 451 Engine oil standards Vehicles with an engine oil sticker There is a sticker on the lock carrier in the front of the engine compartment that indicates which engine oil is to be used for filling → Fig. 1 Fig. 1 In the marked area: location of the sticker for the engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity (illustration). If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that complies with the specified engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity → Fig. 2 Fig. 2 Sticker showing the engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity (illustration). 1 Information about the engine oil standard. 2 Information about the engine oil viscosity. If the specified engine oil → Fig. 2 is used, the engine oil level can be corrected as often as necessary (→ Engine oil) If you do not have access to engine oil that complies with the prescribed standard, in an emergency you may top up with a maximum of 0.5 l (0.5 qt) of the following oils once before the next regular oil change: —Petrol engines: standards VW 504 00 and ACEA C3, ACEA C4, API SP or ILSAC GF-6A. All viscosity classes of these standards are permitted. —Natural gas engines: standards VW 504 00 and ACEA C3, ACEA C4, API SP or ILSAC GF-6A. All viscosity classes of these standards are permitted. It is recommended to have the oil change carried out by a suitably qualified workshop. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 452: Changing Engine Oil

    NOTICE The use of engine oils that are not approved in accordance with the corresponding VW standard can cause engine damage. ● Use only engine oils that meet the quality requirements of the corresponding VW standard for refilling. ● Only in an emergency, top up with a maximum of 0.5 l ( 0.5 qt) engine oil of the engine oil standards mentioned differently. Volkswagen recommends Volkswagen genuine oil. Changing engine oil The engine oil must be changed regularly and in accordance with the service interval (→ Service) Additives in the engine oil can cause new engine oil to discolour quickly. This is normal and does not mean that the engine oil should be changed more frequently. WARNING Engine oil can cause environmental damage, severe burns or a fire if the engine oil is changed carelessly. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always allow the engine to cool down completely before changing the engine oil. ● Always wear eye protection when changing engine oil. ● Keep your arms horizontal when unscrewing the oil drain plug with your fingers to prevent the emerging oil from running down your arm. ● Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be at least large enough to hold the entire filling quantity of engine oil. NOTICE Oil and filter changes require special tools and expert knowledge. Vehicle damage can result if this work is not carried out correctly. ● You should always have engine oil and filter changes performed by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Dispose of the engine oil in an environmentally responsible manner and only at a collection point for used oil, e.g. a recycling centre or specialist company. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 453: Checking The Engine Oil Level

    Checking the engine oil level and adding engine oil Preparations Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: engine oil filler opening cap (illustration). To avoid an incorrect reading of the engine oil level, observe the following steps: (→ Parking) 1. Park the vehicle safely on a horizontal and firm surface with the engine at operating temperature 2. Wait for at least 5 minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the sump. 3. Open the bonnet. 4. Identify the engine oil filler opening and oil dipstick. → Fig. 1 The engine oil filler opening can be recognised by the symbol on the cap and the oil dipstick has a coloured handle. Checking the engine oil level Fig. 2 Engine oil level markings on the oil dipstick (variants). A Engine oil level is too high. B Engine oil level in the normal range. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 454: Adding Engine Oil

    C Engine oil level too low. The steps should be carried out in the given order only: 1. Pull the oil dipstick out of the guide tube and wipe it off with a clean cloth. 2. Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube again as far as it will go. If there is a marking on the oil dipstick, this marking must fit in the corresponding groove at the top end of the guide tube when inserting. → Fig. 2 3. Pull out the oil dipstick again and read the engine oil level on the dipstick as follows A Engine oil level too high – observe the messages on the instrument cluster display or contact a correspondingly qualified workshop, if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Engine oil level in the normal range. The engine oil can be filled to the upper limit of this range, for example if the engine is operated at high loads. C Engine oil level too low. It is essential to refill engine oil. If necessary, observe the messages in the instrument cluster display. 4. After reading off the engine oil level, push the oil dipstick back into the guide tube as far as it will go. If necessary, continue to refill with engine oil. When the vehicle is working particularly hard, the engine oil level should be kept within the upper permissible area, for instance during extended motorway trips in summer or when climbing mountain passes. Adding engine oil WARNING When refilling, engine oil can spill or overflow and ignite if it gets onto hot engine parts. This can cause fires or burns. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always ensure that the engine oil filler opening cap is securely tightened after refilling, and that the dipstick is properly inserted back into the guide tube. ● Always ensure that no engine oil is spilled on cold engine components. These steps should be followed in the given order only → → → Fig. 1 1. Unscrew the engine oil filler opening cap 2. Fill engine oil gradually in small quantities, not more than 0.5 l (0.5 qt) in total, or observe the recommendation...

  • Page 455: Troubleshooting

    2. Select and tap the Car function button. 3. Tap the Settings function button. 4. Tap the Service function button. After a service event, the service message will be updated after around five days or after you have driven around 500 km (311 miles). Until then, the Infotainment system screen shows I nspection in --- km / --- days Oil change: in -- - km / --- days. NOTICE If the engine oil level is too high after topping up and the engine is started, this can damage the engine. ● Do not start the engine and seek qualified professional assistance. NOTICE The use of incorrect service fluids could result in serious malfunctions and engine damage. ● When refilling service fluids, ensure that you pour the correct service fluids into the correct openings. Volkswagen recommends the use of approved engine oils in accordance with the respectively relevant VW standard. If you cannot find the cap and oil dipstick, please contact a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Troubleshooting Engine oil pressure too low The warning lamp flashes red. A message is shown on the instrument cluster display. Do not drive on! The engine could otherwise be damaged. 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so (→ Parking) 2. Switch off the engine. (→ Engine oil) 3. Check the engine oil level 4. Do not drive on or leave the engine running if the warning lamp is flashing even when the engine oil level is...
  • Page 456 4. If necessary, fill engine oil gradually in small quantities, not more than 0.5 l (0.5 qt) in total, or observe the filling recommendation on the instrument cluster display. 5. Do not drive on or leave the engine running if the indicator lamp is lit up, even though the engine oil level is correct. The engine could otherwise be damaged. Seek expert assistance. Engine oil level too high The indicator lamp lights up yellow. A message is shown on the instrument cluster display. (→ Parking) 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so 2. Switch off the engine. (→ Engine oil) 3. Check the engine oil level 4. If the engine oil level is too high, do not drive on or leave the engine running. The engine could otherwise be damaged. Seek expert assistance. Fault in engine oil system The indicator lamp flashes yellow. A message is shown on the instrument cluster display. 1. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Introduction to the topic Do not work on the cooling system unless you are familiar with the task, aware of the general safety procedures and have the correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. Failing to carry out work correctly can cause serious → injuries . Have all work carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Information on warning and indicator lamps that light up can be found in the troubleshooting sections at the end of the chapter (→ Coolant) WARNING Coolant is toxic. Contact with coolant, particularly if coolant is swallowed, can lead to serious or fatal injuries. ● Consult a doctor immediately if you have swallowed coolant. ● Consult a doctor if you experience health problems after working with coolant.

  • Page 457: Coolant Specification

    ● Wash your skin with soap and water after working with coolant. WARNING Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside temperatures, causing the vehicle to break down. This can lead to the heating no longer working in the vehicle. Vehicle occupants with inadequate winter clothing could freeze to death. ● Make sure that the coolant additive is always adapted corresponding to the ambient temperature. ● Use only coolant additives that have been approved by the manufacturer. Coolant and coolant additives can pollute the environment. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and in an environmentally responsible way. Coolant specification The cooling system is filled at the factory with a mixture of specially prepared water and at least 40% coolant additive G12evo (TL 744-L). The proportion of coolant additive must always be at least 40% to protect the cooling system. If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of anti-freeze additive can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant additive should not exceed 55 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and the cooling effect. The coolant additive is dyed a violet colour. The mixture of water and a coolant additive offers anti-freeze protection down to around -25°C (around -13°F), protects the alloy parts in the cooling system against corrosion, prevents limescale deposits and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant. When refilling the coolant, a mixture of distilled water and at least 40% of the coolant additive G12evo must be used → in order to obtain the optimum corrosion protection NOTICE The colour of the coolant results from mixing the purple coolant additive with distilled water. If the liquid in the coolant expansion tank is not violet but brown, for example, the suitable coolant has been mixed with another unsuitable coolant. This can result in serious malfunctions or damage to the drive and cooling system. ● Use only coolant additives that have been approved by the manufacturer. ● Have the coolant replaced immediately by a suitably qualified workshop if it has a brown colour. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● When adding coolant additives, never mix genuine coolant additives with other coolant additives that have not been approved by Volkswagen. Coolant and coolant additives can pollute the environment. 1. Spilt service fluids must be collected and disposed of properly and with respect for the environment. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 458: Checking The Coolant Level

    Checking the coolant level and refilling coolant Preparations (→ Parking) 1. Park the vehicle safely on a horizontal and firm surface → 2. Allow the engine to cool down 3. Open the bonnet. → Fig. 1 The coolant expansion tank is identified by the red symbol on the cap Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: coolant expansion tank cap (illustration). WARNING Escaping hot steam or hot engine coolant and hot vehicle parts can cause severe burns. ● Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant coming out of the engine compartment. ● Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment. WARNING The cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. If the cap is opened carelessly, engine coolant can spray out and cause severe burns or fatal injuries. ● Never open the cap of the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. ● Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth if you have to open the cap of the coolant expansion tank. ● Turn the cap of the coolant expansion tank slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while exerting slight downwards pressure on the cap. Checking the coolant level OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 459: Adding Coolant

    The coolant level cannot be checked accurately in all models as visibility of the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank may be obstructed. If the coolant level cannot be read exactly, contact a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 1. When the engine is cold, check the coolant level at the side markings of the coolant expansion tank → Fig. 2 The coolant level must be between the marks. 2. Have coolant added if the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank is below the minimum marking “min”. When the engine is warm, the engine coolant level may be slightly above the upper mark. 3. Do not add coolant if there is no longer any coolant visible in the coolant expansion tank → Adding coolant 1. Unscrew the lid carefully → (→ Coolant) 2. Fill only with new coolant according to Volkswagen’s specification If in an emergency you do not have access to coolant in the required specification, add only distilled water initially. Then have the correct mixture ratio with the coolant additive restored by a suitably qualified workshop → as soon as possible. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership 3. Add coolant up to the upper level marking. After adding the coolant, the coolant level must be between the → Fig. 2 markings on the coolant expansion tank 4. Close the cap tightly. 5. Check the coolant level after one day. If the level of the coolant tank drops below the “min” marking again, visit a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the cooling system checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Coolant expands when it is heated. If coolant is added so that the level is above the marked area, excess coolant could escape and damage the vehicle. ● Do not fill coolant above the top edge of the marked area on the coolant tank.
  • Page 460 Air may have entered the cooling system if there is no longer any coolant in the coolant expansion tank. This could cause damage to the engine. ● Do not drive on. ● Do not add coolant. ● Seek expert assistance. NOTICE Use of water other than distilled water can cause considerable corrosion damage in the engine due to the chemical substances contained in the water. This can lead to failure of the engine. ● Refill only with distilled water! ● Have the fluid in the cooling system completely replaced by a suitably qualified workshop if you have not refilled with distilled water. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Use of the wrong service fluids can cause serious malfunctions and damage the engine. ● When refilling or replacing service fluids, ensure that you pour the correct service fluids into the corresponding openings. Troubleshooting Coolant The warning lamp flashes red. The engine coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Do not drive on! The engine could otherwise be damaged. 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so (→ Parking) 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Allow the engine to cool down. (→ Coolant) 4. Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank 5. Do not drive on or leave the engine running if the warning lamp does not go out even though the coolant level is correct. 6. Seek expert assistance.
  • Page 461 Introduction to the topic Brake fluid will gradually absorb water from the surrounding air over the course of time. The brake system will be damaged if there is too much water in the brake fluid. The boiling point of the brake fluid is also considerably reduced by the water content. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock in the brake system if the water content is too high. Vapour locks reduce the braking efficiency, considerably increase braking distance and can even cause the brake system to fail completely. Your own safety and that of other road users depends on having a brake system that functions properly at all times. WARNING Brake fluid is toxic. Contact with brake fluid – particularly if swallowed – can lead to serious or fatal injuries. ● Consult a doctor immediately if you have swallowed brake fluid. ● Consult a doctor if you experience health problems after working with brake fluid. ● Always keep brake fluid out of the reach of children and only in the closed original container. ● Never store brake fluid in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers could drink the brake fluid in them. ● Avoid regular contact with brake fluid in order to prevent damage to the skin. ● Protect your skin, face and particularly your eyes when working with brake fluid. ● Do not eat, drink or smoke when working with brake fluid. ● Wash your skin with soap and water after working with brake fluid. NOTICE Brake fluid that has leaked or been spilled will attack vehicle surfaces. The vehicle paintwork, plastic parts and tyres could be damaged as a result. ● Wipe off brake fluid that has leaked or been spilled immediately from all parts of the vehicle. ● Then rinse all components with sufficient amounts of water. Brake fluid can pollute the environment. Any spilt service fluids must be cleaned up and disposed of properly. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 462: Brake Fluid Specification

    Brake fluid specification Volkswagen has developed a brake fluid that has been optimised for the brake system in the vehicle. To ensure the best possible operation of the brake system, Volkswagen expressly recommends the use of brake fluid compliant with VW standard 501 14. Before using a particular brake fluid, check that the specifications printed on the container correspond to the vehicle requirements. Brake fluid that is compliant with VW standard 501 14 is available from Volkswagen dealerships. If this brake fluid is not available and it is necessary to use another high-quality brake fluid instead, brake fluid that is compliant with DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 can be used. Not all brake fluids that are compliant with DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 have the same chemical composition. Some of these brake fluids may contain chemicals that can damage or destroy brake system components over time. Brake fluid that is compliant with VW standard 501 14 fulfils the requirements of DIN ISO 4925 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 463: Checking The Brake Fluid Level

    Checking the brake fluid Preparations (→ Parking) 1. Park the vehicle safely on a horizontal and firm surface 2. Open the bonnet. Checking the brake fluid level Fig. 1 In the engine compartment: cap of the brake fluid reservoir. The brake fluid reservoir can be recognised by its cap → Fig. 1 The brake fluid level cannot be checked accurately in all models as a flap or engine components may partially conceal the brake fluid container. —If the brake fluid level cannot be read exactly, please seek assistance from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —If the brake fluid is not between the min. and max. markings of the brake fluid reservoir, seek assistance from a → suitably qualified workshop . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The brake fluid level drops slightly during vehicle operation as the brake pads wear and the brakes are automatically adjusted. WARNING An overly low brake fluid level or unsuitable brake fluid can cause brake failure or reduced braking efficiency. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have the brake system and brake fluid level checked regularly. ● Make sure that the correct brake fluid is used. ● Use only brake fluid that is explicitly compliant with VW standard 501 14. ● Use a high-quality brake fluid according to D IN ISO 4925 CLASS 6 or the US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 only in exceptional cases if a brake fluid according to VW standard 501 14 is not available. ● Changing the brake fluid The brake fluid should be changed regularly. Appropriately qualified workshops can provide information on the...

  • Page 464: Brake Fluid Level

    WARNING Old brake fluid can form vapour bubbles due to absorbed moisture when the brakes are subjected to heavy use and reduce the braking effect to the point of total failure. This can result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have the brake fluid changed regularly. ● Have the brake system filled only with new brake fluid. Troubleshooting Brake fluid level The warning lamp lights up red. The brake fluid level is too low. Do not drive on! This can result in brake failure. (→ Parking) 1. Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it possible and safe to do so 2. Check the brake fluid level. 3. Seek expert assistance if the brake fluid level is too low. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 465 Introduction to the topic The 12-volt vehicle battery is a component of the electrical system and serves to supply power in the vehicle. In the scope of maintenance work, the 12-volt vehicle battery is checked and where required, replaced. You should only carry out work on the electrical system if you know exactly how to perform the required tasks, are aware of the general safety procedures and have access to the correct equipment, service fluids and suitable tools. → Failing to carry out work correctly can cause serious injuries . All work should be carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Information on warning and indicator lamps that light up can be found in the troubleshooting sections at the end of (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) the chapter Battery switch-off in an accident in which the airbag is triggered In vehicles with a 12-volt vehicle battery in the vehicle interior or luggage compartment, the electrical connection to the 12-volt vehicle battery is automatically disconnected pyrotechnically in the event of an accident in which the airbags are triggered. This prevents a short circuit. You can find further information on the location of the vehicle (→ 12-volt vehicle battery) battery in the section Explanation of the warnings on the 12-volt vehicle battery Always wear eye protection! Electrolyte is very corrosive and caustic. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection! No fire, sparks, naked lights or smoking! A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is charging! Always keep children away from electrolyte and the 12-volt vehicle battery! Always observe the owner’s manual! WARNING Any work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire or electric shocks. This can cause serious injuries. ● Read and always observe the warnings on the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers before carrying out any work on the 12-volt vehicle battery and also disconnect the negative cable from the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Children should always be kept away from electrolyte and the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● When working with the 12-volt vehicle battery, ensure that your hands, arms and face in particular are protected from acid spillage. ● Always wear eye protection and protective gloves.
  • Page 466 WARNING Discharged 12-volt vehicle batteries can already freeze at temperatures of around 0°C (+32°F). Acid can leak from a 12-volt vehicle battery that has frozen and then thawed again and can cause damage to the vehicle in the long term. ● Never charge a 12-volt vehicle battery which is frozen or has been frozen. ● The 12-volt vehicle battery must be replaced if it has ever frozen. NOTICE Ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. ● Do not expose the 12-volt vehicle battery to direct sunlight for an extended period. NOTICE The 12-volt battery can freeze and be destroyed as a result. ● Protect the 12-volt vehicle battery against frost if the vehicle is left standing for extended periods. When you start the engine after the 12-volt battery has been totally discharged or after jump starting, you may find that system settings (time, date, personal convenience settings and programming) have been changed or deleted. Check and correct the settings once the 12-volt vehicle battery has recharged sufficiently. Checking the electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery is maintenance-free. Check the electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery regularly: —On vehicles with high mileages. —In countries with a warm climate. —On vehicles with an old 12-volt vehicle battery. Location of 12-volt vehicle battery Depending on the vehicle equipment, the 12-volt vehicle battery may be located in the engine compartment or under or behind a cover in the luggage compartment. Preparations 1. Prepare the vehicle for working in the engine compartment. 2. Wear eye protection and protective gloves. 3. Open the bonnet. Checking the electrolyte level on vehicles with 12-volt vehicle battery in the engine compartment WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Contact with battery acid – especially if swallowed – can cause severe burns.
  • Page 467 ● Wash your skin with soap and water after working on the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● In case of acid contact on skin and hair, remove all soiled or soaked clothing and wash skin and hair with water. Consult a doctor. ● If acid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse the affected area gently with water for a few minutes. Then consult a doctor immediately. ● Drink plenty of water immediately and swallow activated charcoal if you have swallowed acid. Consult a doctor immediately. ● Leave the danger area and breathe fresh air if you have inhaled acid mist. Consult a doctor immediately. WARNING A highly explosive gas mixture is produced when working on the 12-volt vehicle battery. The explosive gas emitted from the 12-volt vehicle battery could be ignited by sparks. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit cigarettes away from the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid generating sparks and electrostatic discharge. Depending on equipment, it may be necessary to remove an additional bracket in order to view the battery window. An additional tool that is not included in the vehicle toolkit is required for this purpose. Always have the electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery checked by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fig. 1 On the top of the 12-volt vehicle battery: battery window (illustration). Ensure that enough light is available for you to clearly see the colour indicator in the round window on the top of the → Fig. 1 12-volt vehicle battery Light yellow or without colour —The electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is too low. Have the 12-volt vehicle battery replaced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Black —The electrolyte level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is correct. For technical reasons, it is not possible to check the electrolyte level of 12-volt vehicle batteries that are marked as . The battery can be checked by a appropriately qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Checking the electrolyte level on vehicles with 12-volt vehicle battery in the luggage compartment OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 468 On vehicles with the 12-volt vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, the electrolyte level cannot be checked for technical reasons. 1. Go to a suitably qualified workshop to have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery If you suspect that the 12-volt vehicle battery is damaged or faulty, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the 12-volt vehicle battery checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Charging the 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery should be charged by a correspondingly qualified workshop, as the technology used in → factory-fitted 12-volt vehicle batteries requires voltage-limited charging . Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Replacing the 12-volt vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its installation location and has special safety features. If a 12-volt vehicle battery has to be replaced, the replacement part must be installed by a workshop qualified to do this. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. For component information on size and the required maintenance, capacity and safety features, please contact a correspondingly qualified workshop, which must have the necessary technical documentation and equipment. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The ventilation opening of the 12-volt vehicle battery must always be on the negative terminal side: the → ventilation opening on the positive terminal side must always be sealed Only maintenance-free 12-volt vehicle batteries compliant with the standards TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 should be used. These standards must be dated October 2014 or later. The 12-volt vehicle battery must always be replaced by a workshop qualified to do this, as the vehicle electronics must be adapted as part of the replacement process. Only workshops qualified to do this have the technology required to carry out this adjustment and also the correct replacement batteries. Disconnecting the 12-volt vehicle battery Please note the following if the 12-volt vehicle battery has to be disconnected from the electrical system in the vehicle: 1. Switch all electrical consumers off. 2. Unlock the vehicle before disconnecting the battery in order to avoid triggering the anti-theft alarm. → 3. First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable Connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery Please observe the following if the 12-volt vehicle battery has to be connected to the electrical system in the vehicle: 1. Switch all electrical consumers off.
  • Page 469 If the 12-volt vehicle battery was disconnected for an extended period, the system may not able to calculate or (→ Service interval display) correctly display the time when the next service is due . Observe the maximum permissible service intervals . Vehicles with starter button: Perform the following actions if the ignition cannot be switched on after connecting the 12-volt vehicle battery: 1. Lock and unlock the vehicle from the outside. 2. Try to switch on the ignition again. 3. Please seek expert assistance if the ignition cannot be switched on. Automatic switch-off for electrical consumers If the ignition is switched on for an extended period when the engine is switched off or the side or parking lights are switched on for a long time when the vehicle is parked, the intelligent onboard supply management system cannot always prevent discharge of the 12-volt vehicle battery. If the 12-volt vehicle battery is subject to high loads, the intelligent onboard supply management system automatically performs various measures to prevent discharge of the 12-volt vehicle battery. —The idling speed is increased so that the alternator provides more electricity. —The performance of large electrical consumers may be reduced or they may be switched off completely. —The power supply to the 12-volt socket may be interrupted briefly while the engine is being started. Discharge of 12-volt vehicle battery It may not be possible to start the engine if the battery is discharged. The 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged in the following situations: —By long standing periods without running the engine, especially if the ignition is switched on. —Through use of electrical consumers when the ignition is switched off. WARNING Use of a 12-volt vehicle battery that does not have the same specifications and dimensions as the factory-fitted 12- volt vehicle battery can lead to short circuits or cause a fire. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always use a maintenance-free and leak-proof 12-volt vehicle battery that has the same specifications and dimensions as the factory-fitted 12-volt vehicle battery. WARNING Improper mounting of 12-volt vehicle batteries can lead to short circuits or cause a fire. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Always secure the 12-volt vehicle battery at the mounting points provided in the vehicle. ● Fit all covers necessary for the vehicle on the battery again. WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the 12-volt vehicle battery is being charged. Sparks or naked flames can ignite the explosive gas mixture. This can result in serious burns.

  • Page 470: Volt Power Supply

    12-volt vehicle battery that has frozen and then thawed again and can cause damage to the vehicle in the long term. ● Never charge a 12-volt vehicle battery which is frozen or has been frozen. ● The 12-volt vehicle battery must be replaced if it has ever frozen. WARNING If the hose for the central gas venting system is not correctly secured on the 12-volt vehicle battery, the highly explosive gas mixture that is produced during vehicle operation can enter the vehicle interior. The explosive gas can ignite and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● In vehicles with the 12-volt vehicle battery in the vehicle interior or luggage compartment, make sure that the hose for the central gas venting system is connected properly to the 12-volt vehicle battery. The vent line must always be attached on the negative terminal side of the 12-volt vehicle battery. ● Always make sure that the opening on the positive terminal side of the 12-volt vehicle battery is sealed. CAUTION Incorrectly connected cables can cause a short circuit. This can damage the vehicle electronics system and cause injuries. ● First connect the positive cable and then the negative cable. NOTICE If the 12-volt vehicle battery is disconnected or connected when the ignition is switched on or when the engine is running, this can result in damage to the electrical system and electronic components and electrical malfunction can occur. ● Never connect or disconnect the 12-volt vehicle battery if the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. NOTICE If accessories that supply electric power are connected to the 12-volt socket to charge the 12-volt vehicle battery, this can damage the electrical system and the electronic components and lead to electrical malfunctions. ● Never connect equipment that supplies electric power, such as solar panels or a battery charger, to the 12-volt socket to charge the 12-volt vehicle battery. 12-volt vehicle batteries may contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. Dispose of the 12- volt vehicle battery in accordance with the relevant regulations. Electrolyte can pollute the environment. Clean up any service fluid leakages and dispose of them properly. Troubleshooting 12-volt power supply The warning lamp lights up red. A message is shown on the instrument cluster display. Do not drive on! Possible failure of the electrical system.
  • Page 471 12-volt power supply The indicator lamp lights up yellow. A message is shown on the instrument cluster display. Messages about the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery. 1. Allow the engine to run so that the 12-volt vehicle battery can be recharged. 2. Seek expert assistance if the message about the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery does not disappear after a few minutes in spite of the measures performed. Messages about the 12-volt power supply. 1. Seek expert assistance. When the yellow indicator lamp is lit up, the start/stop system cannot start the engine. When the yellow indicator lamp has gone out, the charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is sufficient for an automatic engine restart. Introduction to the topic Wheels are the most heavily loaded and most underestimated parts of a vehicle. Wheels are very important as the narrow tyre surfaces are the only contact between the vehicle and the road. The wheels and tyres approved by Volkswagen have been carefully selected. The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style, handling and correct fitting. Wheel rims, tyres and wheel bolts Wheel rims, tyres and wheel bolts are matched to the vehicle type. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the correct length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that the brakes work properly and that the vehicle drives quietly and safely. For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheel rims from other vehicles. This can also apply to wheel rims of the same vehicle type. Always contact a suitably qualified workshop if you wish to change to other tyre and wheel rim combinations. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The correct wheel bolts must be used for all vehicle types; these bolts must always be tightened with the correct tightening torque (→ Wheel bolts) WARNING Incorrect handling of wheels can reduce vehicle safety and cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. (→ Tyre ● Check the tyre pressure regularly when the tyres are cold and always maintain the specified pressure pressure) . If the tyre pressure is too low, it is possible that the tyre temperature will increase to such an extent when driving that the tread peels off and the tyre bursts. ● Check the tyres regularly for damage and wear. ● Never exceed the top speed and load permitted for the fitted tyres.
  • Page 472 Incorrectly tightened or missing wheel bolts can lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Always tighten the wheel bolts with the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench available, tighten the wheel bolts with the wheel wrench and have the torque checked immediately by the nearest suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never drive if wheel bolts are missing or loose. ● Always use wheel bolts that match the wheel rims and the vehicle type. ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolt and the threads in the wheel hubs. This could cause the wheel bolts to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. ● Make sure that the wheel bolts and threads of the wheel hubs are clean, smooth running and free of oil and grease. ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rim rings. WARNING Improper mounting of the tyre on the rim can cause the rim to be damaged and the tyre to suddenly lose air or burst while driving. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Have tyres fitted on the wheel rims only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Handling tyres Avoiding damage to tyres —Drive over kerbs and other low obstacles slowly and at right angles so that the two front wheels come into contact with the obstacle at the same time. —Check the tyre pressure regularly. —Check the tyres for damage such as cuts at regular intervals. (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) —Never exceed the maximum speed and load permitted for the tyres that are fitted —Damaged or worn tyres must be replaced immediately . → —Protect the tyres from contact with aggressive substances, including grease, oil, petrol and brake fluid —Replace missing dust caps on the valves immediately. —Remove foreign bodies that have not yet penetrated to the inside of the tyre . (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) —Observe all warnings of the tyre monitoring system...

  • Page 473: New Tyres

    ● Always keep chemicals, oils, lubricants, fuel, brake fluid and other corrosive substances away from the tyres. Storing tyres —Always store tyres in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. —Do not store tyres mounted on the rim vertically. —Any tyres not fitted on rims should be kept in suitable sleeves to protect against dirt and should be stored vertically (standing on the tread). Tyres that are more than six years old Tyres age through physical and chemical processes that can impair their function. Tyres that have been stored unused for an extended period of time age more quickly than tyres that are used all the time. Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres that are more than six years old with new tyres. This also applies to tyres which appear to still be in good condition and whose tread depth has not yet reached the minimum value stipulated by legislation → Winter and all-season tyres also largely lose their effectiveness through ageing – regardless of the remaining tread depth. (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) The age of each tyre can be determined on the basis of the manufacturing date WARNING Old tyres can suddenly lose air or burst, especially at high speeds. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Use tyres that are more than six years old only if you have no alternative. In this case, drive slowly and with extra care at all times, even if the tyres have never been used. New tyres —Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km ( 370 mi) with new tyres as the tyres have to be run in. Tyres that → have not been run in have reduced grip and braking efficiency —Use tyres of the same type, size ( rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern on all four wheels. —The tread depth of new tyres may vary between tyre models and manufacturers due to different design features and tread designs. WARNING New tyres will have to be run in as they will initially have reduced grip and braking effect. This can lead to loss of vehicle control, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Run in new tyres. Drive with appropriate caution during the first 600 km ( 370 mi).
  • Page 474 —Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. → —Never use tyres with an effective size that is larger than Volkswagen-approved tyres Volkswagen Genuine tyres The vehicle may be fitted with Volkswagen Genuine tyres at the factory. These tyres are marked with the symbol and have been especially matched to this vehicle. When used correctly Volkswagen Genuine tyres meet the highest standards with respect to safety and vehicle handling. Re-synchronising the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must be re-synchronised each time one or more wheels is changed. This also applies (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) if the wheels have been swapped, e.g. from the front to the rear WARNING Wheels must have the necessary clearance. If there is no clearance, the tyres may come into frictional contact with parts of the running gear, bodywork and brake lines. This can lead to failure of the braking system, detachment of the tread surface, tyre bursting and thus serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Only use tyres whose dimensions are not larger than the dimensions of the tyre brands approved by Volkswagen and which do not rub against parts of the vehicle. WARNING Dirt can damage the valves and cause them to leak so that the tyre loses air. If the tyre pressure is too low, it is possible that the tyre will heat up to such an extent when driving that this can result in tread separation and the tyre bursting, which can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Never drive without valve caps. NOTICE Driving over potholes and kerb edges can deform the tyres. This can cause damage to the tyres and wheel rims. ● Avoid strong impacts and drive around obstacles if possible. NOTICE Dirt can damage the valves. ● Never drive without valve caps. NOTICE When swapping to other wheels, the valves can be damaged. ● Do not drop dismounted wheels on the rim. Old tyres should be disposed of properly and as required by legislation.

  • Page 475: Checking The Tyre Pressure

    Avoid damaging wheel rims —Missing hubcaps can lead to damage to the wheel rims and wheel bolts. Fit missing hubcaps before every journey. —Drive over kerbs and other low obstacles slowly and at right angles so that the two front wheels come into contact with the obstacle at the same time. —Replace missing dust caps on the valves immediately. —Check the tyre pressure regularly. Wheel rims with bolted rim rings or trim elements Rims with bolted-on rim rings or trim elements consist of several components. These components are joined together using special bolts. Damaged wheel rims must be replaced and must always be repaired only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Wheel rim identification In some countries, new wheel rims must contain information on certain properties. The following information may be provided on the wheel rim: —Seal of conformity. —Rim size. —Name of manufacturer or brand name. —Date manufactured (month/year). —Country of origin. —Production number. —Raw materials batch number. —Product code. WARNING The use of unsuitable or damaged wheel rims can impair vehicle safety and cause accidents and serious injury. ● Use only wheel rims that have been approved for the vehicle. ● Check the wheel rims regularly for damage and replace them if necessary. WARNING Incorrect loosening and tightening of the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rim rings can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rim rings. ● Have all work on wheel rims with bolted-on rings carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Checking the tyre pressure The wrong tyre pressure will have a negative effect on the vehicle’s response and lead to high levels of wear or even a burst tyre →...
  • Page 476 —After adjusting the tyre pressures, always screw the caps onto the valves and observe the information on the tyre monitoring system. —Always use the tyre pressure specified on the sticker. Never exceed the maximum tyre pressure which is given on the sidewall of the tyre — If the tyre size of the mounted tyres differs from the specifications on the type plate or tyre pressure sticker, the correct tyre pressure must be determined. Location of the tyre pressure sticker The sticker provides the correct tyre pressure for approved tyres and is located either on the driver door pillar → Fig. 2 or inside the tank flap. Fig. 1 Symbols on the tyre pressure sticker. A Tyre pressure for the tyres on the front axle. B Tyre pressure for the tyres on the rear axle. 1 Note: check the tyre pressure when the tyres are cold. 2 Tyre pressure for partial load. 3 Vehicle-dependent: comfort tyre pressure for partial load. 4 Tyre pressure for full load. 5 Tyre pressure level for the spare wheel, collapsible spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. Fig. 2 On the driver door pillar: tyre pressure sticker (alternatively on the inside of the tank flap) . The appearance of the sticker may differ between vehicles. It may contain additional tyre sizes that are not approved for your specific vehicle. For information on the tyre sizes approved for your vehicle, refer to the vehicle registration certificate or the EC Certificate of Conformity, or ask a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 477 Comfort tyre pressure Depending on the vehicle, the tyre pressure sticker may show details of a comfort tyre pressure → Fig. 1 . The comfort tyre pressure allows increased driving comfort. Fuel consumption may increase when driving with comfort tyre pressure. WARNING Underinflation can cause the tyre to suddenly lose pressure while the vehicle is motion, the tread to peel off or the tyre to burst. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres will wear prematurely and the car will not handle well. Incorrect tyre pressure can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Check tyre pressures regularly, at least once a month, and before every long journey. ● Always adjust the tyre pressure to the corresponding load condition. ● Never reduce the increased tyre pressure of warm tyres. WARNING Excessive speeds and overloading of the vehicle can cause overheating, sudden tyre damage including tyre bursts and detachment of the tread. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) ● Never exceed the maximum load capacity of the fitted tyres (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) ● Never exceed the permitted maximum speed of the fitted tyres NOTICE Careless handling of the tyre pressure gauge can damage the valve. ● When attaching the tyre pressure gauge, ensure that you do not position it at an angle to the valve stem. Underinflated tyres will result in increased fuel consumption. Tyre pressure for the spare or temporary spare wheel Depending on equipment, the vehicle is delivered from the factory with different variants of a spare wheel or temporary spare wheel: Full spare wheel The full spare wheel is a wheel whose size and tread correspond to that of the normal tyres. The tyre pressure for the full spare wheel correspond to the tyre pressure of the normal tyres and is specified on the tyre pressure sticker (→ Tyre pressure) Space-saver spare wheel OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 478: Temporary Spare Wheel

    Fig. 1 Space-saver spare wheel. The space-saver spare wheel can be recognised by a sticker and the inscription “80 km/h” or “50 mph” → Fig. 1 . This is the maximum speed at which you are permitted to drive with this tyre. Do not cover the sticker during use of the wheel. Even if the space-saver spare wheel is a normal wheel, it must be used only in the event of a breakdown and for a short time. The tyre pressure for the space-saver spare wheel is 3.5 bar ( 50 psi / 350 kPa). Temporary spare wheel Fig. 2 Temporary spare wheel. The temporary spare wheel consists of a special wheel rim that has a significantly narrower tyre than the normal tyres. → Fig. 2 The temporary spare wheel can be recognised by a sticker and the inscription “80 km/h” or “50 mph” . This is the maximum speed at which you are permitted to drive with this tyre. Do not cover the sticker during use of the wheel. The tyre pressure for the temporary spare wheel is 4.2 bar ( 60 psi/420 kPa). Checking the tightening torque The correct wheel bolts must be used for all vehicle types; these bolts must always be tightened with the correct tightening torque. The tightening torque of the wheel bolts must be checked regularly with a properly functioning torque wrench. In addition, the tightening torque must be checked immediately after every wheel change with a properly functioning torque wrench. If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, the wheel bolts and thus the wheel can become loose while the vehicle is in motion. The wheel bolts and the threads could be damaged if the OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 479: Rotating Wheels

    If the wheel bolts are corroded and stiff, they must be renewed and the wheel hub threads cleaned before the tightening torque is checked. Never grease or oil the wheel bolts or the threads of the wheel hubs. Tightening torque for wheel bolts The tightening torque for wheel bolts is specified in the chapter Changing a wheel (→ Wheels and tyres) WARNING If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, the wheel bolts and thus the wheel can become loose while the vehicle is in motion. The wheel bolts and the threads could be damaged if the tightening torque is too high. Incorrectly tightened or missing wheel bolts can lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Always tighten the wheel bolts with the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench available, tighten the wheel bolts with the wheel wrench and have the torque checked immediately by the nearest suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never drive if wheel bolts are missing or loose. ● Always use wheel bolts that match the wheel rims and the vehicle type. ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolt and the threads in the wheel hubs. This could cause the wheel bolts to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. ● Make sure that the wheel bolts and threads of the wheel hubs are clean, smooth running and free of oil and grease. ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rim rings. Rotating wheels Fig. 1 Diagram showing how to swap wheels ( illustration). → Fig. 1 Regularly rotating the wheels as shown in the illustration is recommended to help ensure that tyres wear evenly. All the tyres will then last for about the same time. Volkswagen recommends having a wheel change carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 480: Tread Depth

    Checking the tread depth Tread depth Most driving situations require the highest possible tread depth. The tyres should have the same tread depth, at the minimum on each axle → . This is especially true in wet or wintry road conditions. In most countries, the minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (1/16 in), measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators. Observe any deviating country-specific legal regulations. Observe any country-specific legal requirements relating to the permissible minimum tread depths for winter and all- year tyres. Tyre wear The tyre wear is affected by several factors: —Style of driving. —How well the tyres are balanced. —Adjustments made to the running gear. Wheel imbalance may develop when the vehicle is driven; you will notice this by the nervous steering response. Unbalanced wheels will affect the level of tyre wear. In this case the wheels should be balanced again. Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. The wheel alignment should be checked by a suitably qualified workshop if tyres show excessive wear. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Tyre wear due to sporty driving Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. If you drive with a sporty driving style, check the tread depth every 5,000 to 10,000 km (around 3,107 to 6,214 mi). Tread wear indicators in tyres Fig. 1 In the tread grooves: tread wear indicator. → Fig. 1 There are 1.6 mm (1/16 in) high wear indicators in the tread base of the tyres. Markings on the tyre sidewall → Fig. 1 indicate the position of the tread wear indicators The tread wear indicators show if a tyre is worn down. The tyre must be replaced at the latest when the tread depth is just down to the tread wear indicator. The tread wear indicators of all tread grooves must be checked when the tread depth is checked. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 481: Winter Tyres

    Worn tyres are a safety risk and make it difficult to control the vehicle well. They also increase the braking distance and the risk of skidding. Worn tyres have significantly reduced grip. On wet roads in particular, the vehicle will be more at risk of aquaplaning. Worn tyres can lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Replace the tyres with new tyres at the latest when the tyres are worn down to the tread wear indicators. Winter tyres Summer tyres have less grip on icy or snow-covered roads. Winter or all-season tyres improve the handling and braking characteristics in winter road conditions. Volkswagen recommends that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle at temperatures below +7°C (+45°F) or in winter road conditions. This also applies to models with all-wheel drive. Winter and all-season tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm (around 5/32 in). The following applies when using winter tyres: —Observe any country-specific legal requirements. —Use winter tyres on all four wheels at the same time. —Only use in winter road conditions. —Only use the sizes of tyre that have been approved for the vehicle. —Winter tyres must have the same belt type, size and the same tread pattern. —Observe the maximum speed permitted by the speed index. Speed limitation (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) Winter tyres have a speed limit depending on the speed index You can set a speed warning using the V ehicle settings and the Tyres menus in the Infotainment system. If you use V-rated winter tyres, the speed limits and required tyre pressure are determined by the engine size. You must ask a correspondingly qualified workshop about the maximum permitted speed and required tyre pressure. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The improved vehicle handling as a result of winter tyres on wintry roads does not constitute a reason to take safety risks, as this may result in loss of vehicle control and serious injuries. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather and road or traffic conditions. The vehicle handling is better if summer tyres are fitted at temperatures above +7°C (+45°F). The rolling noise is quieter, the tyre wear lower and the energy efficiency higher in this case. In vehicles with a Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator, the system has to re-synchronise after changing to winter tyres (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) The speed limit and load capacity of winter tyres may differ from those of summer tyres.

  • Page 482: Snow Chains

    Only fine-linked snow chains that add no more than about 9 mm (around 6 J x 16 ET 45 23/64 in). Volkswagen recommends that you ask a correspondingly qualified workshop for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain sizes. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Snow chains may only be used on tyre and wheel rim combinations that are approved for driving with snow chains. Remove hubcaps and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety reasons, cover caps must then be fitted over the wheel bolts. Caps are available from a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Using snow chains with fitted temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel. 1. In event of a flat tyre on one of the front wheels, fit the temporary spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel on the rear axle. 2. Replace the damaged front wheel with the removed rear wheel. Observe the direction of rotation. Volkswagen recommends fitting the snow chains before fitting the wheel. WARNING The use of snow chains that are unsuitable for your vehicle or the incorrect installation of snow chains can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Always use the correct snow chains. ● Use snow chains only on the tyre and wheel rim combinations approved by Volkswagen. ● Observe the fitting instructions of the snow chain manufacturer. ● When snow chains are fitted, never exceed the maximum speed specified by the snow chain manufacturer or the legally permitted maximum speed. NOTICE If snow chains are used on road sections where there is no snow, they will adversely affect the vehicle handling and damage the tyres and will also be quickly destroyed. ● Always remove the snow chains on road sections where there is no snow. NOTICE Snow chains that are in direct contact with the wheel rim can scratch or damage it. ● To avoid damage, use snow chains with integrated wheel rim protection. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 483 (→ Changing a wheel) 3. Changing a damaged wheel . Seek expert assistance if necessary. Or: seal damaged wheel with the breakdown set and inflate (→ Breakdown set) 4. If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the next correspondingly qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Foreign body embedded in the tyre A foreign body is embedded in the tyre or between the tread blocks. 1. Leave the foreign body in the tyre if it has entered the inner tyre. Foreign bodies that are stuck between the tyre tread blocks can be removed. (→ Changing a wheel) 2. Changing a damaged wheel . Seek expert assistance if necessary. (→ Breakdown set) Or: seal damaged wheel with the breakdown set and inflate 3. Check and adjust the tyre pressure. 4. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Tyres lose grip The vehicle suffers from loss of grip when cornering and breaks away. The braking distance is longer and the traction control system (TCS ) and anti-lock brake system (ABS) intervene earlier. (→ Tread depth and tread wear The tyres may be worn so much that they can no longer guarantee sufficient grip indicators) 1. Drive slowly and cautiously to the next suitably qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Wheel bolts are difficult to undo The wheel bolts can corrode over the course of time. This makes it difficult to undo the wheel bolts. 1. Seek expert assistance or drive slowly and cautiously to the next suitably qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 484 WARNING If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side while the vehicle is in motion, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Tyre damage can lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Slow down immediately and stop as soon as the traffic situation permits and it is safe to do so. ● Check the tyres and wheel rims for damage. ● Never drive on if tyres or wheel rims are damaged. Seek expert assistance instead. ● If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the nearest suitably qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Function of the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator warns the driver when the tyre pressures are too low. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator is a tyre monitoring system and uses data from the ABS sensors and other functions to check the speed of rotation and the rolling circumference of the individual wheels when the vehicle is in motion. If a tyre loses air or the tyre pressure is too low, the rolling circumference decreases and the speed of rotation increases. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator shows a change in rolling circumference of the tyres with the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. The following situations can also lead to a change in the speed of rotation: —If the tyre pressure has been changed. —If the tyre has structural damage. —If the vehicle is loaded more heavily on one side. —If snow chains have been fitted. —If a temporary spare wheel has been fitted. —If one wheel per axle has been changed. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not work if there is a fault in the (→ Brake support systems) or ABS Reference pressure The reference pressure for the tyre monitoring system is the recommended tyre pressure for cold factory-fitted tyres (→ Tyre at maximum load. The reference pressure corresponds to the information on the tyre pressure sticker pressure) If the tyre pressure of all four tyres has been adjusted correctly, the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must be re- (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator)
  • Page 485 ● Check the tyre pressure regularly when the tyres are cold and always maintain the specified pressure (→ Tyre pressure) corresponding to the tyre pressure sticker for the tyres fitted on the vehicle ● Check the tyres regularly for signs of wear or damage and replace worn or damaged tyres immediately. ● Never exceed the top speed and load permitted for the fitted tyres. WARNING If the vehicle is driven with a tyre pressure that is too low, the tyre could heat up to such an extent that the tread becomes detached and the tyre bursts. This could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will not handle well. Different tyre pressures or tyre pressures that are too low can increase tyre wear, reduce vehicle stability, extend the braking distance and lead to tyre damage, tyre failure and loss of control over the vehicle. This can result in serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Always observe the warnings of the tyre monitoring system. If the indicator lamp lights up, stop immediately in a place that is safe from traffic and check all tyres (→ Tyre pressure) ● The driver is responsible for the correct tyre pressure. Check the tyre pressure regularly when the tyres are cold and always maintain the specified pressure corresponding to the tyre pressure sticker for the tyres fitted on the vehicle (→ Tyre pressure) . The tyre monitoring system cannot function correctly unless all cold tyres have the correct tyre pressure. ● If the tyre is not flat and it is not necessary to change the wheel immediately, drive at low speed to the nearest correspondingly qualified workshop and have the tyre pressure checked and corrected (→ Tyre pressure) Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) ● Always adapt the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator correctly WARNING Excessive speeds and overloading of the vehicle can cause overheating, sudden tyre damage including tyre bursts and detachment of the tread. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 486: Regular Maintenance

    (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) ● Never exceed the maximum load capacity of the fitted tyres (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) ● Never exceed the permitted maximum speed of the fitted tyres If the tyre pressure is too low, this will increase fuel consumption and tyre wear. When new tyres are driven at high speeds for the first time, they can expand slightly and trigger a one-off tyre pressure warning. Old tyres should be replaced only by tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. Do not rely only on the tyre monitoring system. Check your tyres regularly to ensure that they are properly inflated and have no signs of damage, such as punctures, cuts, cracks, and blisters. Remove any objects that become embedded in the tyre tread but have not penetrated into the body of the tyre itself. Limits of the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Regular maintenance The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not remove the need for regular maintenance and inspection of tyres. The driver is responsible for ensuring the correct tyre pressure is maintained at all times, even if the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator does not give any warning that the tyre pressure is too low. The tyre pressure of all tyres must be checked monthly on the cold tyres and correspond to the vehicle manufacturer's specifications on the tyre pressure sticker. This also applies to the tyre pressure of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. (→ Tyre The recommended tyre pressure for the factory-fitted tyres is indicated on the tyre pressure sticker pressure) Malfunction not remedied If the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator shows a malfunction, tyre pressure cannot be monitored correctly. A malfunction of the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator can have various causes, e.g. due to replacement of a wheel or tyre. When a wheel or tyre has been replaced, check whether the indicator lamp is indicating a system malfunction to ensure that the (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator is functioning properly Sporty driving style The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator may react with a delay or not display anything at all in the event of a sporty driving style, when driving on snow-covered or icy roads or unpaved roads or when driving with snow chains. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 487 Adapting the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator must be adapted again under the following conditions: —If the tyre pressures have been changed. —If one or more wheels have been changed. —If the wheels are swapped over, e.g. from front to rear. The Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator may only be adapted again if all the tyres have been filled at the correct tyre pressure when measured on a cold tyre. To measure the cold tyre pressure, the vehicle must have been stationary for 3 hours or driven only a few kilometres at a slow speed during this time. After a warning about the tyre pressure being too low, switch the ignition off and then back on again. This is necessary before you can adapt the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator again. 1. Switch on the ignition. (→ Vehicle settings menu) 2. Depending on the version, press the button or function button and open the Vehicle menu in the Infotainment system. Or: press the button or function button, depending on the version. 3. If present, tap Setup . 4. Tap Tyres . 5. Tap SET . 6. When all four tyre pressures correspond to the required values, tap C onfirm . After an extended driving time of at least 20 minutes and driving at different speeds, the system will automatically learn the new values and monitor them. WARNING If the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator is adapted when the tyre pressure is too high or too low, the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator may issue incorrect warnings or not issue a warning even though the tyre pressure is dangerously low. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries.

  • Page 488: Low Tyre Pressure

    Troubleshooting for Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Low tyre pressure The indicator lamp lights up yellow. There is a loss of pressure in one or more tyres or the tyre is structurally damaged. Stop the vehicle immediately in a place that is safe from traffic. 2. Check the tyres for visible damage. 3. If the tyres are not visibly damaged, drive slowly to the nearest filling station and check the tyre pressures. Adjust the tyre pressures if necessary. 4. If a tyre is damaged, replace the damaged wheel . Seek expert assistance if necessary. Or: seal damaged wheel with the breakdown set and inflate . 5. Re-synchronise the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) 6. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Fault in the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator The indicator lamp flashes for about 1 minute and then remains lit continuously yellow. There is a system fault. Stop the vehicle immediately in a place that is safe from traffic. 2. Switch the ignition off and then back on again. (→ Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator) 3. Re-synchronise the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 4. If the fault persists, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Driving on unpaved roads for long periods or a sporty driving style can temporarily deactivate the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator. In the event of a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for about 1 minute and then light up continuously. However, the indicator lamp will go out when the road conditions or driving style change. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 489 Introduction to the topic You should carry out a wheel change yourself only when the vehicle is parked safely, you are familiar with the safety procedures and have access to the correct equipment. Some models are delivered from the factory without a jack or box spanner. If this is the case, have the wheel change carried out by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. If the vehicle is delivered from the factory with a jack, this is designed only for changing a wheel when one wheel is damaged and has to be replaced. If both tyres on one side of the vehicle, both tyres on one axle, or all tyres are damaged, go to a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The following steps must be carried out in order to change a wheel. 1. Prepare vehicle for the wheel change (→ Changing a wheel) (→ Subwoofer) 2. Vehicle- and equipment-dependent: remove subwoofer (→ Spare wheel and temporary spare wheel) 3. Remove spare wheel (→ Wheel cover) (→ Wheel bolt caps) 4. Remove wheel cover or wheel bolt caps (→ Wheel bolts) 5. Loosen the wheel bolts (→ Jack) 6. Jack up the vehicle 7. Remove the damaged wheel and fit the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel (→ Wheels and tyres) WARNING Changing a wheel at the side of the road can be dangerous. If the vehicle and work area are not adequately secured, this can result in serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Change the wheel yourself only if you are familiar with the necessary actions. Otherwise, seek assistance from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. ● Park the car at a safe distance from moving traffic.

  • Page 490: Preparing The Vehicle

    Preparing the vehicle Checklist The following actions must always be carried out in the given order in preparation for changing the wheel → 1. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic. Observe all the important information on parking (→ Parking) . The ground must be firm and level. Soft ground or surfaces at an incline under the vehicle jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, use a large, strong board or similar support for the jack. (→ Centre console) 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights 3. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle and go to a safe place away from moving traffic, e.g. behind the safety barrier. Observe country-specific regulations on high-visibility waistcoats. 4. Place the warning triangle in position to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 5. Adjust the steering wheel so that the wheels point straight forwards. 6. Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being worked on with a stone, collapsible chocks or another suitable object. 7. When towing a trailer: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly . 8. Remove any items of luggage from the luggage compartment. 9. Remove the collapsible spare wheel, spare wheel or temporary spare wheel and the vehicle toolkit from the luggage compartment. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Always observe the items on the checklist. ● Observe the generally valid safety precautions. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 491 Subwoofer The subwoofer is located next to the spare wheel well under the luggage compartment floor. Never attempt to repair or remove the subwoofer yourself. NOTICE The subwoofer could be damaged if any liquids get into the luggage compartment. ● Remove any liquid that has leaked out immediately, for example using a dry cleaning cloth. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 492 Removing the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel Fig. 1 Under the luggage compartment floor: handwheel for securing the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. Removing the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel 1. Open the boot lid. 2. Fold up or remove the luggage compartment floor. 3. Lift up the floor covering, if present, and remove. 4. Remove the vehicle toolkit with the container. 5. Fully unscrew the handwheel in the middle of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel → Fig. 1 anticlockwise. 6. Remove the spare wheel, collapsible spare wheel or temporary spare wheel. Stowing the removed wheel 1. If the removed wheel fits into the spare wheel well: place the removed wheel into the spare wheel well with the front side of the wheel rim facing downwards so that the centre hole in the rim is positioned exactly above the hole or threaded pin. If the replaced wheel does not fit into the spare wheel well, stow the wheel securely on the luggage compartment floor in the luggage compartment. 2. Screw the handwheel clockwise onto the threaded pin until the replaced wheel is firmly secured. 3. Return the vehicle toolkit to the container and stow the container in the luggage compartment. 4. If present, place the floor covering in the luggage compartment. 5. Replace the luggage compartment floor. 6. Close the boot lid. If the spare wheel tyre is not the same as the tyres on the vehicle If the spare wheel tyre differs from the other tyres on the vehicle, the spare wheel must be used only in the event of a → tyre failure and for a short time Observe these driving guidelines: OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 493: Removing Wheel Covers

    —Do not drive faster than 80 km/h ( 50 mph). —Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and fast driving through bends in the road. (→ Snow chains) —Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel —The tyre pressure must be checked as soon as possible after fitting the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel (→ Tyre pressure) The tyre pressure of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel must be checked each time the tyre pressure of the tyres in use is checked, at least once a month. The tyre pressure of the cold tyre on the spare wheel and temporary (→ Tyre pressure) spare wheel must correspond to the information on the tyre pressure sticker. WARNING Incorrect use of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and cause fatal injuries. ● Do not use the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel under any circumstances if it is damaged or worn down to the tread wear indicators. ● If the spare wheel tyre is not the same as the tyres on the vehicle or you are using a temporary spare wheel, never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Some vehicles may be equipped with a temporary spare wheel instead of a spare wheel. The temporary spare wheel can be recognised by a sticker and the text “80 km/h” or “50 mph”. This is the maximum speed at which you are permitted to drive with this tyre. Do not cover the sticker during use of the wheel. ● Never drive further than 200 km ( 125 miles) with a temporary spare wheel if it is fitted to the drive axle. ● Do not accelerate quickly, brake suddenly or drive at high speed through bends. ● Replace the temporary spare wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The temporary spare wheel is designed for a short period of use only. ● Always secure the temporary spare wheel with the wheel bolts supplied from the factory. ● Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at a time. ● Never drive using more than one spare wheel that differs from the normal tyres. (→ Tyre ●...
  • Page 494 The wheel cover protects the wheel bolts and must be fitted again after changing the wheel. (→ Vehicle toolkit) 1. Take the hook from the vehicle toolkit 2. Insert the puller into one of the holes in the wheel cover. 3. Use the puller to pull off the wheel cover in the direction of the arrow. If necessary, use a box spanner to do this → Fig. 1 Fitting wheel covers (→ Wheels and tyres) 1. Check the correct position of the anti-theft wheel bolt 2. Press the wheel cover onto the wheel rim so that the valve hole is located over the tyre valve. Please ensure the cover engages securely all the way round. WARNING Using unsuitable hubcaps, or fitting them incorrectly, can cause accidents and serious injuries. Incorrectly fitted hubcaps can become loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger other road users. ● Do not use damaged hubcaps. ● Check that the wheel cover has engaged securely around the entire circumference. WARNING Incorrectly fitted hubcaps can interrupt or reduce the air supply for cooling the brakes. This also applies if hubcaps are retrofitted. If the airflow is not sufficient, the braking distance could increase significantly. This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Check that the cutout for the tyre valve in the wheel cover is located in the correct position. ● Check that the wheel cover has engaged securely around the entire circumference. NOTICE The wheel cover may be bolted on and can be damaged if it is pulled off. ● Do not use force to pull off wheel covers that are bolted on. Removing and fitting the wheel bolt caps Removing the caps Fig. 1 Removing the wheel bolt caps. The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be fitted fully back in position after changing the wheel. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 495 (→ Vehicle toolkit) 1. Take the hook from the vehicle toolkit 2. Insert the hook through the opening in the cap. → Fig. 1 3. Use the hook to pull off the cap in the direction of the arrow Fitting the caps 1. Press the caps onto the bolts as far as they will go. The anti-theft wheel bolt has a separate cap. It only fits onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and not onto the conventional wheel bolts. Loosening wheel bolts Fig. 1 Loosening wheel bolts. Use a suitable box spanner to loosen the wheel bolts. Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. 1. Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as far as it will go. → 2. Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn anticlockwise If one of the wheel bolts is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the box spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and ensure that you have a secure footing. Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt 1. Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt out of the vehicle toolkit. 2. Push the adapter onto the anti-theft wheel bolt as far as it will go. 3. Push the box spanner onto the adapter as far as it will go. → 4. Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn anticlockwise If one of the wheel bolts is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the box spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and ensure that you have a secure footing. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 496: Jacking Points

    If the wheel bolts are removed or undone by more than one turn before the vehicle is raised with the jack, the wheel can fall off and the vehicle could tip as a result. This can cause serious injuries. ● Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. ● Never place any part of your body, e.g. your arm, underneath the vehicle while you are loosening the wheel bolts. Lifting the vehicle with the jack Jacking points Fig. 1 On the sill: markings for the jacking points. The jack may be positioned only at the reinforcements on the underbody, which are located behind the markings on the body → Fig. 1 . Always use the jacking point closest to the wheel that is being changed → Applying the jack Fig. 2 Correct alignment of the jack. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 497: Changing A Wheel

    5. Position the jack and simultaneously continue to crank the claw up until it is in position around the jacking → Fig. 3 point underneath the vehicle 6. Crank the jack further until the wheel is just clear of the ground. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Always observe the items on the checklist. ● Observe the generally valid safety precautions. WARNING Incorrect use of the vehicle jack can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack, which can lead to serious or fatal injury. ● Never jack up the vehicle if more than one wheel is damaged. ● Never jack up the vehicle when the engine is running. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is jacked up. Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall off the jack. ● Fit the jack only at the described jacking points. The jack claw must grip the vertical rib under the side member → Fig. 3 securely ● Use only vehicle jacks that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle. Other vehicle jacks could slip out of position – this includes vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen models. ● Jack up the vehicle only on a flat and firm surface. Soft ground or surfaces at an incline under the vehicle jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, use a large, strong board or similar support for the jack. ● Use a non-slip base such as a rubber mat to prevent the jack from slipping on a smooth surface, such as a tiled floor. ● Never place any part of your body, e.g. your arm, underneath the vehicle if the latter is only supported by the jack. If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support for the vehicle. Changing a wheel Removing the wheel OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 498 Fig. 1 Unscrew the wheel bolts with the wheel wrench. 1. Observe the checklist (→ Changing a wheel) 2. Loosen the wheel bolts (→ Wheel bolts) (→ Jack) 3. Jack up the vehicle → Fig. 1 4. Using the wheel wrench , completely unscrew loosened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface. 5. Remove the wheel. Fitting the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel Fig. 2 Correct position of the anti-theft wheel bolt. (→ Tyre lettering and tyre type) 1. Note the tyre direction of rotation 2. Put the wheel in place. 3. Use the adapter to screw the anti-theft wheel bolt clockwise to the correct position and tighten it slightly. 2 or 3 → Fig. 2 On wheels with a wheel cover, the anti-theft wheel bolt must be screwed in at position according to the position of the tyre valve 1 . The wheel cover can otherwise not be fitted. 4. Screw in wheel bolts in a clockwise direction, and tighten them slightly. 5. Lower the vehicle with the jack. → 6. Use the box spanner to tighten all the wheel bolts securely in a clockwise direction . Do not tighten the bolts in clockwise or anticlockwise sequence. Tighten them in diagonal sequence.
  • Page 499 After changing a wheel 1. Clean the tools and place them back in the foam rubber holder in the luggage compartment. 2. Stow the changed wheel securely in the luggage compartment. 3. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible at the nearest qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 4. The damaged tyre should be replaced as soon as possible. Tightening torque for wheel bolts Specified tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel or alloy wheel rims: —120 Nm (88 ft-lbs). If the wheel bolts are corroded and stiff, they must be renewed and the wheel hub threads cleaned before the tightening torque is checked. Never grease or oil the wheel bolts or the threads of the wheel hubs. The tightening torque should be checked with a properly functioning torque wrench immediately after changing a wheel. WARNING If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, the wheel bolts and thus the wheel can become loose while the vehicle is in motion. The wheel bolts and the threads could be damaged if the tightening torque is too high. Incorrectly tightened or missing wheel bolts can lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Always tighten the wheel bolts with the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench available, tighten the wheel bolts with the wheel wrench and have the torque checked immediately by the nearest suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never drive if wheel bolts are missing or loose. ● Always use wheel bolts that match the wheel rims and the vehicle type. ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolt and the threads in the wheel hubs. This could cause them to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. ● Make sure that the wheel bolts and threads of the wheel hubs are clean, smooth running and free of oil and grease. ● Never loosen the bolts on wheel rims with bolted-on rim rings. WARNING If the wrong wheel bolts are used, the wheel bolts can come loose while driving and lead to loss of control over the vehicle, serious accidents and fatal injuries.
  • Page 500 Use the breakdown set only when the vehicle has been safely parked and you are familiar with the work and safety precautions needed. Otherwise seek expert assistance. The tyre sealant must not be used: —If the wheel rim is damaged. —If the outside temperature is below -20°C ( -4°F). —If there are cuts or punctures in the tyre that are larger than 4 mm ( around 5/32 in). —If the vehicle was driven with very low tyre pressure or a flat tyre. —If the use-by date on the tyre filler bottle has expired. —If a foreign object has been removed from the tyre. WARNING The use of breakdown sets at the edge of the road can be dangerous. If the vehicle and work area are not adequately secured, this can result in serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Only use the breakdown set if you are familiar with what is required. Otherwise, seek assistance from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. ● Park the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic (→ In an emergency) (→ Parking) ● Make sure that the surface the vehicle is parked on is level and firm. ● All passengers, and children in particular, must be at a safe distance and away from your area of work. ● To warn other road users, switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle. ● When using the breakdown set, never lift the vehicle with a jack, even if the jack is approved for the vehicle. WARNING Tyres that have been filled with sealant will not handle in the same way as an undamaged tyre. Excessive loads on the sealed tyre can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h ( 50 mph).

  • Page 501: Sealing And Inflating Tyres

    → Always carry out the following actions in the given order 1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from moving traffic and on a flat and firm surface. Observe all the (→ Parking) important information on parking (→ Centre console) 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights 3. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle and go to a safe place away from moving traffic, e.g. behind the safety barrier. Observe country-specific regulations on high-visibility waistcoats. 4. Place the warning triangle in position to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 5. Check whether the puncture can be repaired with the breakdown set (→ Breakdown set) 6. When towing a trailer: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly . 7. Remove any items of luggage from the luggage compartment. 8. Take the breakdown set out of the luggage compartment. 9. Do not remove the foreign object, e.g. a screw, from the tyre. WARNING Ignoring any of the items on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and severe injuries. ● Always observe the items on the checklist. ● Observe the generally valid safety precautions. Sealing and inflating tyres The breakdown set is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment. Sealing a tyre Fig. 1 Contents of the breakdown set (illustration). 1 Sticker with the maximum permitted speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”. 2 Tyre sealant tube with plug. 3 Tyre filler bottle. 4 Spare valve core.
  • Page 502 → Fig. 1 5 There is a slot for the valve core on the lower end of the valve core extractor . This is required for extracting the valve core from the tyre valve and then screwing it back into the valve again. This also applies to the spare valve core 4 . → Fig. 1 1 1. Take the sticker from the breakdown set and stick it on the dash panel within the driver's field of vision. 2. Unscrew the cap from the tyre valve. → Fig. 1 5 3. Use the valve core extractor to unscrew the valve core from the tyre valve. Place the core on a clean surface. → Fig. 1 3 4. Shake the tyre filler bottle vigorously to and fro several times. → Fig. 1 2 5. Screw the tyre sealant tube tightly onto the tyre filler bottle in a clockwise direction. The seal on the top of the bottle is pierced when doing so. → Fig. 1 2 6. Remove the plug from the filler hose and place the open end fully on the tyre valve.
  • Page 503 Fig. 3 Connecting the tyre filler hose. The compressor from the breakdown set may be operated from the 12-volt socket, even if the power stated on the type plate of the compressor exceeds the maximum power rating of the socket. 1 from the rear of the compressor. → Fig. 2 1. Remove the tyre filler hose 1 with the wing nut 2 into the mount for the tyre filler hose 7 so that 2. Insert the tyre filler hose → Fig. 2 the wing nut is pointing to . → Fig. 2 → Fig. 3 3. Turn the wing nut in clockwise direction until the wing nut is pointing to 1 of the compressor tightly onto the tyre valve. → Fig. 2 4. Screw the tyre filler hose 5. Start the engine and let it run. 4 into one of the vehicle's 12-volt sockets → Fig. 2 (→ Sockets) 6. Insert the 12-volt plug 6 .
  • Page 504 Inflating the tyre (variant 2) Fig. 4 Compressor in the breakdown set (illustration). 1 Tyre pressure display. 2 Air bleed button. 3 12-volt plug. 4 ON/OFF switch. 5 Compressor. 6 Tyre filler hose. The compressor from the breakdown set may be operated from the 12-volt socket, even if the power stated on the type plate of the compressor exceeds the maximum power rating of the socket. 6 of the compressor tightly onto the tyre valve. → Fig. 4 1. Screw the tyre filler hose 2. Start the engine and let it run. 3 into one of the vehicle's 12-volt sockets → Fig. 4 (→ Sockets) 3. Insert the 12-volt plug 4 . 4. Switch on the compressor with the ON/OFF switch → Fig. 4 5. Run the compressor until the tyre pressure has reached 2.0 – 2.5 bar ( 29 – 36 psi/200 – 250 kPa). Maximum running time: 10 minutes →...
  • Page 505 → Fig. 2 3 → Fig. 4 1 display or 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa) and lower: 1. Do not drive on! The tyre cannot be sealed adequately with the breakdown set → . Seek expert assistance. 1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa) and higher: 1. Adjust the tyre pressure back to the correct value. 2. Drive carefully to the nearest suitably qualified workshop. Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. 3. Have the damaged tyres replaced by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING The tyre filler hose and compressor can become hot when inflating the tyre and cause burns if touched. ● Protect your hands and skin from hot components. ● Do not place the hot tyre filler hose or the hot compressor on any inflammable materials. ● Allow the tyre filler hose and compressor to cool down before you stow them. WARNING If the defective tyre cannot be sealed adequately with the breakdown set, the tyre will lose air when driving. This can lead to tyre failure, loss of control of the vehicle, accidents, serious injuries and death. ● If the tyre will not inflate to at least 2.0 bar ( 29 psi/200 kPa), the tyre is too damaged. The sealant is unable to seal the tyre. Do not drive on and seek expert assistance instead. ● Do not carry on driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa) or less after driving for 10 minutes. Seek expert assistance instead.
  • Page 506 Fig. 1 International tyre lettering. → Fig. 1 Tyre lettering (example), meaning Product name Individual tyre designation of the manufacturer. The tyre complies with the legal requirements of the USA Department of Transportation, responsible for tyre safety standards. Tyre identification number (TIN – possibly only on the inside of the wheel) and date of manufacture: JHCO CHWS 2213 Identifier of producing plant and specifications of JHCO CHWS the tyre manufacturer on size and characteristics. 2,213 Date of manufacture: 22nd week in 2013. Information for the end user concerning comparative values for specified basic tyres (standardised test procedure) : Relative life expectancy for the tyre, with reference to a US-specific standard test. Tyres with the specification 280 wear at a rate of 2.8 times more slowly than standard TREADWEAR 280 tyres that have a treadwear value of 100. The performance of tyres is determined by how they are used and can significantly deviate from standard values due to driving style, maintenance, road surface and climatic conditions. Wet braking performance of the tyre ( AA , A , B or C ). The wet braking performance is tested under controlled conditions on certified test tracks. Tyres marked C have a low TRACTION AA traction performance. The traction value assigned to the tyres is based on linear traction tests and does not include acceleration and lateral stability or aquaplaning and traction under maximum load.
  • Page 507 350 KPA (51 psi/3.51 bar) (→ Winter tyres) Denotes winter tyres (mud and snow tyres) . Studded snow tyres are M+S or M/S or labelled with an E after the S . (→ Tread depth and tread wear Indicates the position of the tread wear indicator indicators) Brand name , logo Manufacturer. Marking for Volkswagen Genuine tyres . Country of manufacture. Made in Germany Country-specific identification for China ( China Compulsory Certification). Country-specific identification for Brazil. 023 Indicates conformity with international regulations with the number of the country that granted approval. Approved tyres which comply with ECE regulations are E4 e4 0200477-b identified with E , tyres which comply with EC regulations are identified with e . This is followed by the multiple-digit approval number. Tubeless radial tyre. RADIAL TUBELESS Size designation: Identification for passenger vehicle.

  • Page 508: Low-Profile Tyres

    1 NYLON → Fig. 1 Tyre lettering (example), meaning The tyre lettering is located on both sides. Certain labels may only be found on one side of the tyre, e.g. tyre identification number and manufacturing date. Any further numbers and letters are internal codes used by the tyre manufacturer or country-specific codes. Low-profile tyres Low-profile tyres have a wider tread surface, larger rim diameter and lower side walls than conventional wheel/tyre combinations. Low-profile tyres can improve the vehicle's handling and precision. They may however result in a less comfortable ride on uneven road surfaces and tracks. Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. The direction of rotation must be observed in all cases. This guarantees the best possible running characteristics. If, however, the tyre is fitted in the opposite direction to the tread pattern, you must take more care when driving as the tyre is now no longer being used according to its designation. The tyres must be replaced as quickly as possible or be fitted with the tread in the correct direction. Asymmetrical tyres Asymmetrical tyres take into account the differing behaviour of the inner and outer areas of the tread pattern. The sidewalls of asymmetrical tyres are marked to indicate "inside" or "outside". Always observe the correct tyre position on the wheel rim. Tyre load The load index indicates the maximum load capacity of an individual tyre in kilograms ( tyre load). Examples: 425 kg (936 lbs) 462 kg (1,018 lbs) 487 kg (1,073 lbs) 515 kg (1,135 lbs) 545 kg (1,201 lbs) OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 509 560 kg (1,234 lbs) 615 kg (1,355 lbs) 630 kg (1,388 lbs) 650 kg (1,433 lbs) 690 kg (1,521 lbs) 730 kg (1,609 lbs) 775 kg (1,708 lbs) 800 kg (1,763 lbs) 825 kg (1,818 lbs) 850 kg (1,873 lbs) 875 kg (1,929 lbs) 900 kg (1,984 lbs) Speed index The speed index indicates the maximum permitted speed that may be driven with the tyre. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 510 Maximum load and speed range for tyres Vehicles in the EU and the so-called EU user states are issued an EC Certificate of Conformity. This details the size, diameter and speed range of all tyres approved by Volkswagen for the relevant vehicle type. The type plate shows whether there is an EC Certificate of Conformity for this particular vehicle . —If the type plate has a row marked “Permit” then the vehicle has an EC Certificate of Conformity. —If there is no type plate, or no row marked “Permit” the vehicle does not have an EC Certificate of Conformity. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 511: Service Work

    Service work and digital service schedule Recording the service work performed (“digital service schedule”) The service records are stored in a central system by your suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. This transparent documentation of the service history allows the service operations performed to be reproduced at any time. Each time you have your vehicle serviced, Volkswagen recommends asking for a printed service record, which contains all service work stored in the system. Regular servicing of your vehicle not only maintains its value, it also ensures that your vehicle remains roadworthy and in working order. You should therefore have your vehicle serviced according to the Volkswagen guidelines. With every service, the printout of the previous service record is replaced by a current printout. The digital service schedule is not available in some countries. In this case, your suitably qualified workshop will inform you about the documentation process for service work. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Service work The following information is documented in the digital service schedule by your suitably qualified workshop or Volkswagen dealership: —When which service was carried out. —Whether any repairs are recommended, such as replacement of the brake pads in the near future. —Whether you had any special requests before or during the maintenance work. Your service advisor will note these on the order. —Which components and service fluids were changed. —When your next service is scheduled for. The LongLife mobility guarantee is valid until the next inspection is due. Documentation takes place at every due inspection. The type and scope of service work may differ from vehicle to vehicle. Information on specific work for your vehicle can be requested from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Inadequate servicing and failure to adhere to service intervals can result in breakdowns, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Service work should be carried out by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by inadequate service work or the lack of availability of parts. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 512: Service Interval Display

    Fixed service interval or flexible service interval The service events differ according to oil change service and inspection. The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster serves as a reminder for the due date of the next service event. Either the fixed service interval or flexible service interval will be used for the oil change service, depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine type and the operating conditions. (→ Driving data display (multifunction display)) The engine code can be accessed via the Service menu How do I know which type of service applies to my vehicle? Information on the type of service that the vehicle requires can be obtained from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Point to note for the flexible service interval With the flexible service interval, you need to have an oil change service carried out only if your vehicle requires one. To determine this point in time, individual operating conditions and personal driving style are taken into account. An important part of the flexible service interval is the use of LongLife engine oil instead of the conventional engine oil. Observe and follow the information on the motor oil specification according to the VW standard . If you do not wish to have the flexible service interval, you can opt for the fixed service interval instead. However, a fixed service interval can affect your service costs. Your service advisor will be pleased to advise you. Service interval display Depending on the vehicle equipment, scheduled services for your vehicle may be displayed in the service interval display in the instrument cluster display (→ Service interval display) and in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system (→ Vehicle settings menu) . This service interval display provides information on services that include an oil change or inspection. When the respective service is due, additional work that is due can also be carried out, e.g. changing brake fluid and spark plugs. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 513 Information on operating conditions The specified service intervals and scope of service always apply to vehicles used under normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is operated under heavy-duty conditions, some work will have to be performed before the next service is due or at shorter intervals than those specified. Extreme conditions include: —Fuels containing sulphur. —Regular short trips. —Long periods of engine idling, e.g. taxis. —Use in areas with high levels of dust. —Regular trailer towing. —Mainly stop-and-go operation, e.g. in the city. —Driving mainly in winter conditions This applies particularly to the following components ( depending on the vehicle equipment): —Enhanced air filter with activated carbon —Air filter. —Toothed belt. —Particulate filter. —Engine oil. The service advisor at your qualified workshop will be pleased to advise you whether your vehicle requires more frequent work due to the conditions under which it is used. WARNING Inadequate servicing and failure to adhere to service intervals can result in breakdowns, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Service work should be carried out by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Volkswagen is not responsible for any vehicle damage caused by inadequate service work or the lack of availability of parts. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 514: Inspection Work

    Scope of service The scope of service includes all inspection work and maintenance work that is required to keep your vehicle roadworthy (depending on the operating conditions and vehicle equipment, e.g. engine, gearbox or service fluids) . A suitably qualified workshop can provide details of the work that is required for your vehicle. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Or you can find this out using the electronic repair and workshop information system erWin (→ Repairs and technical modifications) Inspection work For example, the systems listed below can be tested. Electrics —12-volt vehicle battery: replace if necessary. —Lighting. —Horn. —Headlight setting. —Reset service interval display. Engine and gearbox —Exhaust system. —Gearbox and final drive. —Natural gas system. —Poly V-belt. —Cooling system. —Engine and components in the engine compartment. —Engine oil level. Running gear —Swivel joints and track rods. —Tyres. —Brake system. —Drive shaft boots. —Coupling rod and stabiliser mountings. —Breakdown set. —Steering. —Shock absorbers and coil springs. Body —Roof systems. —Windscreen. —Body corrosion. —Windscreen wiper system and window washer system. —Door arrester. —Underbody.

  • Page 515: Servicing Work

    and mileage or only time or mileage . For example, the following service fluids and components can be changed. —Additives. —Enhanced air filter with activated carbon —Brake fluid. —Natural gas tank and lines. —Natural gas system filter. —Gearbox oil filter and, if necessary, gearbox oil filter. —Air filter. —Engine oil and, if necessary, engine oil filter. —Oils in the final drive and differential. —Particulate filter. —Toothed belt and tensioning roller. —Spark plugs. It is also possible to have servicing work carried out in between the displayed scheduled service events. The scope of service is subject to change for technical reasons, e.g. continuous further development of components. Your correspondingly qualified workshop always has the latest information about any changes. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Notes on vehicle care Regular and expert care helps to maintain your vehicle's condition. The longer contamination or dirt is left on the surface of vehicle components, the more difficult it can become to clean and treat them. Extended exposure may mean that it is no longer possible to remove contamination or dirt. Consult a suitably qualified workshop if you have any questions about care products or if components are not listed. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Appropriate accessories are available from a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. Follow the application instructions on the packaging. WARNING Improper care and cleaning of components can irreparably damage the safety features of the vehicle, e.g. the airbag units, and prevent them from functioning properly. This can lead to serious injuries in the event of an accident. ● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. ● Always use approved or recommended cleaning products.

  • Page 516: Washing The Vehicle

    WARNING Dirty, misted-up or iced-up windows reduce visibility and can prevent the safety features of the vehicle from functioning properly. This can result in accidents and serious or even fatal injuries. ● Drive only when you have a clear view through all windows. ● Do not treat the windscreen with water-repellent window coating agents. In unfavourable conditions, they can cause increased dazzle. WARNING Care products may be toxic, highly flammable and caustic. Improper use of care products or the use of unsuitable care products can cause burns and poisoning and can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Observe the instructions supplied with the product. ● Store care products only in the closed original container. ● Keep children away from all care products. ● Use care products only outside or in well-ventilated rooms so that you do not breathe in any toxic vapours. ● Never use turpentine, engine oil, fuel, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids for vehicle care. NOTICE Contamination with aggressive and solvent-based ingredients can cause irreparable damage to the vehicle equipment, e.g. even if left for only a short time on seat covers or trim parts. ● Do not let contamination or dirt dry. ● Have stubborn stains removed by a suitably qualified workshop. Washing the vehicle Washing the vehicle regularly prevents effects of soiling that can damage the paint. Vehicles with a matt paint finish require special care due to the special paint characteristics. → → To wash your vehicle correctly and properly, please observe the following information WARNING After a car wash, the braking action may be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or iced up in winter. The braking distance will increase as a result. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Carry out a few careful braking operations to dry the brakes and remove any coating of ice when visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

  • Page 517: Automatic Car Washes

    affected locations with the cleaning clay without exerting pressure. —Spray grease and fingerprints with matt paint finish spray and rub off with a soft microfibre cloth. —Rinse off petrol residue immediately with plenty of water. Automatic car washes —For vehicles with matt paint, never select a wash program with wax or use a drying agent. —For vehicles with matt paint, use only textile car washes and never car washes that use brushes. —Do not select cleaning programmes with hot wax for vehicles with decorative and protective films. —Preferably use car washes without brushes. —Regularly have the bottom of the vehicle thoroughly cleaned to remove residue. —Please observe information of the car wash operator, especially where add-on parts such as spoilers are concerned → The windows must be closed and the exterior mirrors must be folded away. ✓ ✓ The handbrake must be released. ✓ Vehicles with steering lock: If the vehicle is mechanically pulled through the car wash, the steering must not lock (→ Steering) (→ Rain and light sensor) The windscreen wipers and the rain and light sensor are switched off. ✓ ✓ If present: the roof aerial was unscrewed and removed. NOTICE Car washes that scan the contours mechanically can damage the vehicle and add-on parts, e.g spoilers. ● Observe the information of the car wash operator, particularly if there are add-on parts on the vehicle. High-pressure cleaner Fig. 1 Warning sign: do not use a high-pressure cleaner in the marked area. —Never use rotary nozzles. Observe the manufacturer’s instructions. —Use water up to a maximum temperature of +60°C ( +140°F) only. —Move the jet of water uniformly so that the nozzle is at least 50 cm ( 20 inches) away from all the vehicle components. —Do not point the water jet at the same location for too long. —Aim the water jet indirectly at sensitive vehicle components if possible, e.g. rubber seals, side windows, gloss strips, tyres, sensors, camera lenses, decorative and protective film.

  • Page 518: Caring For And Cleaning The Vehicle Exterior

    5. Rinse off with plenty of water. 6. Allow the vehicle to dry in the air. Remove water residue with a chamois leather. NOTICE Washing the vehicle incorrectly can damage the paint surface and destroy the matt paint effect. ● Never use wash programs with wax preservation. ● For cleaning, use only cleaning agents that do not contain solid matter or abrasives, e.g. cleaning shampoos or insect remover. ● Do not use insect sponges or coarse sponges. NOTICE The drainage channels for the plenum chamber may become blocked by leaves and dirt. Water that does not drain off can get into the vehicle interior and cause damage. ● Remove leaves and other loose objects with a vacuum cleaner or by hand. ● Have the area under the perforated cover cleaned at regular intervals by a qualified workshop. ● Make sure that large quantities of water do not enter the plenum chamber, e.g. due to use of a high-pressure cleaner. Wash the vehicle in dedicated cleaning areas only. This prevents any waste water contaminated by oil from entering the sewage system. Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior The following overview contains recommendations for cleaning and care of individual vehicle components. NOTICE Incorrect cleaning and care may cause vehicle damage. ● Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. ● Do not use excessively hard or abrasive cleaning tools. Windows, glass surfaces —Remove wax residue, e.g. from care products, using a suitable glass cleaner or with the Volkswagen Genuine cleaning cloth. —Remove snow with a hand brush. — Remove ice with a plastic scraper. Move the scraper in one direction only. —Thaw ice with a suitable de-icer or with Volkswagen Genuine de-icer. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 519 —Clean the wiper blades or replace them as required. Paint Always treat surfaces with care so as not to remove the paint. —Use a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water or cleaning clay to remove any light dirt immediately, e.g. deposits, insect residue, or cosmetics. —Remove overflowing fuel or service fluids immediately. —Moisten flash rust deposits with a soap solution. Then remove any deposits with cleaning clay. —Have corrosion removed by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —In the event of paint damage, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop and have the paint damage repaired. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Waxing protects the paintwork. The vehicle should be protected again using a preservative wax at the latest when water no longer clearly forms small drops and runs off the paintwork when the vehicle is clean. —In the case of matt paint, use a soft sponge to apply a special wax for matt paints to the cleaned vehicle. Remove excess wax with a microfibre cloth. Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by applying wax. NOTICE The surface of matt paintwork will be irreparably damaged by polishing the paint. ● Never polish matt-painted surfaces. Even if a preservative wax is used regularly in the car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting the paint with suitable hard wax or with Volkswagen Genuine hard wax at least twice a year. Plenum chamber, engine compartment Fig. 1 Between the engine compartment and the windscreen: plenum chamber (illustration). 1 Perforated cover on plenum chamber. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 520 There is a risk of accident and fire when working on the engine or in the engine compartment. Serious injuries may occur. ● Note the operations required and the necessary safety precautions before performing any work in the engine (→ In the engine compartment) compartment ● If you are not familiar with the work, have the work carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE The drainage channels for the plenum chamber may become blocked by leaves and dirt. Water that does not drain off can get into the vehicle interior and cause damage. → Fig. 1 1 ● Have the area under the perforated cover cleaned regularly by a suitably qualified workshop Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Water that has entered the plenum chamber via a manual process ( e.g. from a high-pressure cleaner) can cause considerable damage to the vehicle. ● Remove leaves and other loose objects with a vacuum cleaner or by hand → Fig. 1 ● Always have cleaning of the engine compartment performed by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Sensors, camera lenses Fig. 2 At the rear of the vehicle: rear view camera system in the Volkswagen badge (illustration). —Clean the area in front of the sensors or camera with a soft cloth and solvent-free cleaning agent. —Use the same method to clean sensitive surfaces on the rain and light sensor and the camera window on the windscreen as used for glass surfaces (depending on vehicle equipment). —Remove snow with a hand brush. —Never use warm or hot water. —Thaw ice with a suitable de-icer or with Volkswagen Genuine de-icer. Cleaning the rear view camera system 1. Switch on the ignition.
  • Page 521 Decorative films, protective films —Remove soiling in the same way as for paint. Use a suitable plastic cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine plastic cleaner for matt decorative films. —Treat the vehicle with liquid hard wax every three months after washing and removing dust. Only use clean, soft microfibre cloths to apply the wax. Do not use hot wax – also not in car washes! —Stubborn dirt: remove carefully using white spirits, and then rinse with warm water. The durability and colour of decorative and protective films may be affected by environmental influences such as sunlight. Decorative films may show signs of wear and ageing after around one to three years, and protective films after two to three years. In very hot climates, decorative films may become faded within one year and protective films within two years. Trim parts made of chrome-plated plastic, aluminium or stainless steel —Clean the surface with a suitable chrome and aluminium care product or with the Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminium care product. —Chrome-plated trim parts can be preserved with a suitable hard wax or Volkswagen Genuine hard wax. Headlights, tail light clusters —Remove soiling using a soft sponge soaked with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not use any cleaning agents that contain alcohol or solvents. —Remove stubborn dirt with a suitable chrome and aluminium care product or with the Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminium care product. Wheels —Remove dirt and gritting salt deposits with plenty of water. —Clean dirty alloy wheels with a suitable wheel rim cleaner or with Volkswagen Genuine wheel rim cleaner. Volkswagen recommends treating the wheel rims with a suitable hard wax or with Volkswagen Genuine hard wax every three months. —Repair any damage to the protective paint coating immediately with a touch-up pen. Go to a correspondingly qualified workshop if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. —Remove brake dust with a suitable wheel rim cleaner or with Volkswagen Genuine wheel rim cleaner. Door lock cylinders 1. Thaw door lock cylinders with a suitable door lock de-icer or with Volkswagen Genuine de-icer. Do not use door lock de-icer containing degreasing substances. Cleaning and care of the vehicle interior The following overview contains recommendations for cleaning and care of individual vehicle components. NOTICE Improper cleaning and care may damage the vehicle. ● Always observe the described tasks for vehicle care and cleaning. ● Do not use a steam cleaner, brushes or hard sponges etc. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 522: Natural Leather

    ● Have stubborn stains removed by a qualified workshop. Windows —Clean windows with a glass cleaner. —Wipe the windows dry with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth. Textiles, microfibre cloth and leatherette —Regularly remove dirt particles adhering to surfaces with a vacuum cleaner so that the material is not permanently damaged by abrasion. —Remove dirt with a suitable interior cleaner or with Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner. —In the case of grease-based soiling such as oil, use a suitable interior cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner. Dab off dissolved grease and colour particles with an absorbent cloth. Then treat with water if necessary. —In the case of soiling caused by ballpoint pens or nail vanish, for example, use a suitable interior cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner. If necessary, treat subsequently with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. —Never use leather care agents, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar. —Never use high-pressure cleaners, steam cleaners and coolant spray. Natural leather —Remove fresh contamination using a cotton cloth with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not allow fluids to seep into the seams. —In the case of soiling caused by ballpoint pens or nail vanish, for example, use a suitable leather cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine leather cleaner. —Treat dried-in stains with a suitable leather cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine leather cleaner. —For grease-based soiling such as oil, remove fresh stains with an absorbent cloth. —Apply leather care agent for seating furniture regularly and each time after the leather is cleaned. If the vehicle is parked outdoors for long periods, you should cover the leather to protect it from direct sunlight. Never treat leather with solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar. Plastic parts —Clean with a soft, moist cloth. —If stubborn soiling cannot be removed with mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water, use a solvent-free plastic cleaning agent or Volkswagen Genuine plastic cleaner if necessary. Trim parts, trim strips made of chrome, aluminium or stainless steel —Clean with a clean, soft cloth and mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water in a dust-free environment. —Treat anodised surfaces with a suitable chrome and aluminium care product or with the Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminium care product. Control elements OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 523: Rubber Seals

    1. Remove coarse dirt and other dirt that is difficult to reach using a soft brush. 2. Use a clean, soft cloth with some mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. Do not allow liquids to enter the controls. Displays and screens Do not clean the instrument cluster display and Infotainment system screen with a dry cloth. 1. Switch off the Infotainment system temporarily before cleaning. 2. Use a suitable cleaning cloth or Volkswagen Genuine cleaning cloth with a little water, a suitable glass cleaner or LCD cleaner. Rubber seals —Clean with a soft and lint-free cloth as well as plenty of water. — Regularly treat with a suitable rubber care product or the Volkswagen Genuine rubber care product. Seat belts 1. Carefully pull the seat belt right out and leave it out. 2. Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush. 3. If necessary, clean the seat belt with a mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water. 4. Leave the belt fabric to dry completely and then allow it to roll up. WARNING Improper cleaning of the seat belts, their anchorages and the belt retractors can cause damage and prevent them from functioning properly. This can result in serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Never carry out any modifications on the seat belts for cleaning. ● Never clean the seat belts and their components with chemical agents. ● Do not use any caustic liquids, solvents or sharp objects. ● Protect the belt buckles against the ingress of liquids and foreign bodies. ● Let the cleaned seat belt to dry completely before allowing it to retract. Wooden trims Clean with a soft cloth and some mild soap solution consisting of a maximum of two tablespoons of neutral soap diluted in one litre of water.

  • Page 524: Accessories And Replacement Parts

    The signs of wear and soiling visible due to normal use are naturally more easily visible in the case of light- coloured materials in the vehicle interior. These signs of use cannot be prevented and also represent unavoidable ageing due to normal use. Please observe the corresponding care instructions. Accessories and replacement parts Seek advice from a suitably qualified workshop before purchasing accessories, replacement parts or service fluids, for example if the vehicle is to be retrofitted with accessories or if parts have to be renewed. Qualified workshops can provide information on legal requirements and also recommend accessories, replacement parts and service fluids. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Volkswagen recommends using Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories, which you can purchase from a Volkswagen dealership. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. A suitably qualified workshop also has the specialist skills for correct installation. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Although the market is constantly scrutinised, Volkswagen cannot assume responsibility for the reliability, safety and suitability of products Volkswagen has not approved. Volkswagen can therefore assume no responsibility for these parts, even if they have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate. Always contact a suitably qualified workshop if you wish to change to different tyre and rim combinations. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Any retrofitted equipment which has a direct effect on the control of the vehicle must be approved by Volkswagen for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (approval symbol of the European Union). These devices include cruise control systems or electronically controlled damping systems, for example. Any additional electrical components fitted that do not serve to control the vehicle itself must bear the mark (manufacturer declaration of conformity in the European Union) . Such devices include refrigerator boxes, computers and ventilator fans. WARNING Use of unsuitable replacement parts and accessories can lead to vehicle malfunctions. This also applies to work, modifications and repairs that are not carried out properly. This can lead to vehicle damage and accidents with serious or fatal injuries. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Never fit parts to your vehicle that differ in their design or characteristics from the factory-fitted parts. ● Use only wheel rim and tyre combinations that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. WARNING OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 525 Objects in the deployment zone of the airbags can be flung through the vehicle interior if the airbags are triggered. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. ● Never secure or position objects in the deployment zones of the airbags. NOTICE With some engines, retrofitting an engine preheating system can lead to malfunctions and vehicle damage. ● Consult a suitably qualified workshop about retrofitting an engine preheating system. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Sensors and cameras Incorrectly performed repairs, structural changes to the vehicle, e.g. lowering the suspension, retrofitted add-on parts or changes to the trim can lead to sensors and cameras being displaced or damaged. This can interfere with → important functions of driver assist systems —Observe the positions of sensors and cameras in the vehicle overview when performing repairs or modifications. Add-on parts or modifications in the area of sensors and cameras WARNING If the area in front of and around sensors and cameras is covered – such as by number plates, number plate holders with trim frames, additionally applied films or paintwork on the sensors and similar – this may prevent correct functioning of the driver assist systems. Failure of the driver assist systems can lead to accidents and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Do not apply any additional films in front of or around sensors. ● Install the number plate or the number plate holder with trim frame only in the intended position. Always consult a suitably qualified workshop if you want to fit a number plate or number plate holder with trim frame. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. NOTICE Incorrect installation of number plates and number plate holders with trim frames can damage components, such as cables or sensors. ● Install the number plate or the number plate holder with trim frame only in the intended position. ● Always consult a suitably qualified workshop if you want to fit a number plate or number plate holder with trim frame. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The number plate holder with trim frame is used for mounting the official number plate. On some vehicle models, the Volkswagen badge can impair the view of the radar sensor in the front area. You should therefore operate the vehicle only with the original Volkswagen badge or a badge approved by Volkswagen. Damage in the area of sensors and cameras WARNING If the area around sensor and cameras is damaged, e.g. by stone chips or impacts when parking, this can prevent...
  • Page 526 Repairs and technical modifications Repairs and technical modifications must always be carried out according to Volkswagen specifications → Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause faults. As the electronic components are linked together in networks, these faults may indirectly affect the working of other systems. This can seriously impair vehicle safety, lead to excessive wear of components and also invalidate the type approval for the vehicle. The Volkswagen dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by technical modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. The Volkswagen dealership is not responsible for damage caused by technical modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. Such damage is not covered by the Volkswagen guarantee. Have all repairs and technical modifications carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership that supplies Volkswagen Genuine Parts ® Volkswagen repair information Volkswagen Service information and official Volkswagen repair information can be obtained for a fee. Customers in Europe, Asia, Australia, Africa, Central and South America: Please contact a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Or register on the internet portal erWin (electronic repair and workshop information): https://erwin.volkswagen.de Customers in North America and Canada: To order printed service information please contact: Volkswagen Technical Literature Ordering Center literature.vw.com You can also register online in the e rWin internet portal: https://erwin.vw.com Diagnostic interface (OBD) There is a diagnostic interface in the vehicle interior for reading the event memories ( OBD ). Event memories document any errors that have occurred and any deviations from the nominal values in the → electronic control units The diagnostic interface (OBD ) is located in the footwell on the driver side underneath the dash panel, or behind a cover next to the bonnet release lever. The event memory should only be read and reset by a suitably qualified workshop. Additional information on the stored data is available from suitably qualified workshops. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership.
  • Page 527 Engine and transmission guard An engine and transmission guard can reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle's underbody and sump, for example when driving over kerbs, drive entrances or unsurfaced roads. Have retrofitting carried out by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. An engine and transmission guard may not be available in all countries. WARNING Incorrect repairs and modifications to the vehicle can impair the effectiveness of the driver assistance systems and the airbags when they trigger. This can cause malfunctions and lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. WARNING Incorrectly performed repairs and modifications on the vehicle, e.g. through use of unsuitable parts, can damage the vehicle and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never fit parts to your vehicle that differ in their design or characteristics from the factory-fitted parts. ● Use only wheel rim/tyre combinations that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen Genuine Parts or Volkswagen Genuine Accessories. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. WARNING Use of the diagnostic connection for other than its intended purpose can cause malfunctions and lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries. ● Never read the event memory yourself using the diagnostic interface. ● Never upload data to the vehicle yourself using the diagnostic connection. ● The event memory should be read only by a suitably qualified workshop using the diagnostic connection. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Repairs and faults in the airbag system → Repairs and technical modifications must always be carried out according to Volkswagen specifications Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, the doors, the front seats, the roof or the bodywork should only be carried out by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. System...

  • Page 528: Electromagnetic Radiation

    WARNING Use of unsuitable replacement parts and accessories can cause malfunctions and damage to the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the airbag system. This also applies to work, modifications and repairs that are not carried out properly. This can lead to vehicle damage and accidents with serious or fatal injuries. ● Have repairs and modifications to your vehicle carried out only by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. ● Please note that the airbag unit cannot be repaired, but must be replaced. ● Never install recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-of-life vehicles in your vehicle. ● Never fit parts to your vehicle that differ in their design or characteristics from the factory-fitted parts. WARNING Modification of the vehicle suspension, including the use of non-approved wheel rim and tyre combinations, can change how the airbag functions. This can result in serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Never install components in the suspension system which do not have the same characteristics as the original factory-fitted components. ● Never use wheel rim/tyre combinations that have not been approved by Volkswagen. Mobile communication in the vehicle Electromagnetic radiation If a mobile telephone or radio device is used without being connected to the external aerial, the electromagnetic radiation will not be optimally directed to the outside of the vehicle. Increased levels of radiation in the vehicle interior may occur in areas with poor signal in particular, for instance in rural areas. This could constitute a health → hazard Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, a suitable mobile phone interface can be used to connect the mobile telephone to the external aerial. The connection quality is improved and the range is increased. Using the telephone Many countries require a hands-free system to be used when using a telephone inside the vehicle, e.g. via a Bluetooth → connection. Before use, secure the mobile telephone to a suitable bracket or stow it in a storage compartment ® so that it cannot slip around, e.g. in the centre console.
  • Page 529 Mobile telephones that are not secured or not properly secured could be flung through the vehicle interior in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident and cause serious injuries. ● Secure or stow a mobile telephone and accessories safely and outside the deployment zone of the airbags. WARNING If a mobile telephone or two-way radio that is not connected to an external aerial is used, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed limit values. This also applies to external aerials which have not been correctly installed. This can endanger the health of the driver and the vehicle occupants. ● Keep a distance of around 20 cm ( around 8 inches) between a device’s aerial and an active medical implant, e.g. a pacemaker. ● Do not carry device which is operationally ready close to or directly above an active medical implant, e.g. in a breast pocket. ● Switch off the device immediately if you suspect it may be interfering with an active medical implant or any other medical device. Volkswagen dealership warranty Volkswagen dealerships guarantee that the vehicles they sell are free from defects. The dealerships are also responsible for handling warranty claims. Please refer to your sales contract or contact your Volkswagen dealership for details of the warranty and guarantee conditions. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 530: Warranty Exclusions

    Warranty for the paintwork and body Volkswagen dealerships provide a warranty on the paintwork and body of all vehicles purchased from them. In addition to the warranty conditions for factory-new Volkswagen vehicles ( as detailed in the purchase contract), the Volkswagen dealer guarantees that the body of any vehicles it sells will not be affected by paint imperfections or corrosion perforation for a specified period: —A three-year warranty on paint defects. —A twelve-year corrosion perforation warranty. Here, corrosion perforation refers to rust forming on the inside (cavity) of the body and causing holes in the sheet metal. If such damage occurs nevertheless, it will be repaired free of charge for parts and labour by any Volkswagen dealership. Warranty exclusions The warranty does not cover the following: —Damage caused by external influence or insufficient care. —Imperfections on the body or paintwork which are not repaired promptly according to manufacturer specifications. —Corrosion perforation that is directly related to body repairs not being carried out according to manufacturer specifications. If the body is repaired or painted, your Volkswagen dealership will confirm your warranty against corrosion perforation for the repaired area. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 531 LongLife mobility guarantee In many European countries, Volkswagen dealerships offer a comprehensive LongLife mobility guarantee for new vehicles. It applies from vehicle delivery until the first scheduled inspection. If you purchase your new vehicle directly from Volkswagen, Volkswagen will issue the LongLife mobility guarantee from the time of delivery until the first due inspection. Your Volkswagen service partner will extend the LongLife mobility guarantee until the following inspection if the due inspection is carried out at that workshop. The service costs include the entire guarantee package. Please ask your Volkswagen dealership for details of services, conditions and time limits relating to the LongLife mobility guarantee. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 532: Declaration Of Conformity

    Declaration of conformity The corresponding manufacturer hereby declares that the components listed below were compliant with the basic requirements and any other relevant regulations and laws at the time the vehicle was produced. Components —12-volt socket. —Depending on the vehicle equipment and country, additional sockets with a voltage of 100 to 230 volts (→ Sockets) Placing of manufactured goods on the GB market (England, Wales and Scotland): The UKCA (UK Conformity Assessed) marking is a new UK product marking that is used for goods being placed on the market in Great Britain (England, Wales and Scotland). UK Product Safety and Metrology Regulations This vehicle has various devices installed that are subject to UKCA product regulations. The following acts as the importer of these devices for the United Kingdom market within the meaning of the Product Safety and Metrology Regulations: Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd. Yeomans Drive, Blakelands Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN United Kingdom OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 533 Valid in EU countries where the General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union is effective: Data processing in the vehicle Your vehicle is fitted with electronic control units. Control units process data that they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange with each other, for example. Some control units are required for the safe functioning of your vehicle. Other control units support you when driving (driver assist systems), while others enable convenience features or additional functions of the Infotainment system. Personal reference (→ Vehicle identification number) Each vehicle is given a unique vehicle identification number . This vehicle identification number can be traced back to the current and former owners of the vehicle using information provided by the relevant authorities. There are also other ways of tracing the vehicle to the owner or driver, via data collected for the vehicle e.g. the registration number. The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be personal data or under certain conditions is personal data. Depending on the vehicle data available, it may be possible to draw conclusions, e.g. about your driving behaviour, your location or your route or your usage behaviour. Your rights regarding data protection In accordance with applicable data protection law, you have certain rights vis-à-vis Volkswagen when your personal data is processed. Accordingly, you are entitled to receive comprehensive information free of charge from Volkswagen and third parties (e.g. breakdown services or qualified workshops used and providers of online services in the vehicle) if they have stored your personal data. You are entitled to request information concerning what personal data and for what purpose it is stored as well as where the data originates from. Your right to information also includes the transfer of data to other bodies. Data that is only stored locally in the vehicle can be read out with expert assistance, for example at a suitably qualified workshop. This service may be subject to a fee. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Further information on your legal rights, e.g. your right to have your data deleted or corrected, can be found in the applicable data protection information on the Volkswagen website including the contact details and a reference to the data protection officer. You can find detailed information on data processing in the Privacy Policy in your Infotainment system M enu Legal information or Home Legal information. Legal requirements for the disclosure of data If legal requirements exist, Volkswagen is obliged to disclose data stored at Volkswagen to the extent required to government agencies in individual cases, e.g. as part of a police investigation of a criminal offence.

  • Page 534: Convenience Functions

    Depending on the technical equipment, the following data is stored: —Operating states of system components, e.g. filling levels, tyre pressure, status of the vehicle battery. —Faults or malfunctions in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes. —System reactions to specific driving situations, e.g. triggering of an airbag, intervention of the stability control systems. —Information on events which damaged the vehicle. In special cases, e.g. when the vehicle has detected a malfunction, it may be necessary to store data that would normally only be volatile. If you make use of services, e.g. repairs or maintenance work, the stored operating data can, if necessary, be read and used together with the vehicle identification number. The data can be read from the vehicle by employees of the service network (e.g. qualified workshops) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). The same applies to warranty cases and quality assurance measures. The data is read via the legally prescribed O BD connection (on-board diagnosis) in the vehicle. The operating data that is read documents the technical status of the vehicle or individual components thereof and provides support with fault diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. This data, in particular information on component load levels, technical events, operating errors and other faults, is transmitted to Volkswagen together with the vehicle identification number in cases where this is expedient. Furthermore, the manufacturer is liable for the product. Here too, Volkswagen uses operating data from vehicles for product recalls, for example. This data can also be used to check the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by an authorised workshop or at your request as part of repair or service work. Reprogramming control units All data for the control of components is stored in the control units. Some convenience functions can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If the convenience functions are reprogrammed, the specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual will no longer match the original functions. The reprogramming can be entered into the digital service schedule by a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. A suitably qualified workshop can provide information about any potential reprogramming. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Convenience functions You can store and change convenience settings ( customisation) in the vehicle, extract data from the vehicle when using online services, or reset or delete them. Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, this includes, for example: —Settings of the seat and steering wheel positions.

  • Page 535: Infotainment System

    Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, this includes, for example: —Media files for playback of music, films or photos in an Infotainment system. —Address book data for use with a hands-free system or navigation system. —Navigation destinations entered. —Data on the use of online services. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or located on a device that you have connected to the vehicle, e.g. mobile telephone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is transmitted to third parties only at your request, in particular in relation to the use of online services and in accordance with your personal settings. Integration of mobile telephones If your vehicle contains the necessary equipment, you can connect your mobile telephone or any other mobile end device to your vehicle so that you can control this device via the controls integrated in the vehicle when the corresponding functions are available. For example, images and sounds from the mobile telephone can be output through the Infotainment system. At the same time, certain information is sent to your mobile telephone. This includes location data and further general vehicle information, depending on the type of integration. For more details, refer to the information about display of apps in the Infotainment system. This enables you to use selected mobile telephone apps in the vehicle, e.g. navigation or music player. The mobile telephone and vehicle do not interact in any other ways than those described here; in particular the device does not actively access vehicle data. The type of further data processing depends on the app provider. The settings that you can adjust here depend on the app you are using and the operating system on your mobile telephone. Online services If your vehicle is equipped with a connection to a mobile network, your vehicle will be able to exchange data with other systems. The vehicle can be connected to a mobile network using a transmitter and receiver unit in the vehicle or using your own mobile end devices, e.g. mobile telephones. This mobile network connection enables you to use online functions. This includes online services and apps provided by Volkswagen or other third-party providers. Manufacturer services In the case of Volkswagen online services, Volkswagen describes the respective functions in a suitable place, e.g. in a separate service description or on an Internet page, and the associated privacy information is provided. Personal data may be required in order to provide online services. For this, data is exchanged over a secure connection, e.g. using the designated IT systems of the manufacturer. Any collection, processing and use of personal data that goes beyond the provision of the service takes place exclusively according to legal regulations, contractual agreements or the necessary permission. You can activate and deactivate the services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee and in some cases also disable the vehicle's entire data connection. This does not apply to any functions and services required by law, e.g. emergency call systems. Third-party services If you are able to use online services provided by a party other than the manufacturer, these services are the sole responsibility of the provider in question and are subject to this provider's data protection policy and terms and conditions of use. Volkswagen has no influence on the data processing that takes place here and the content OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 536: Event Data Recorder

    Please refer to the provider in question for information about the type, scope and purpose of the collection and use of personal data related to third-party services. Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The event data recorder’s main job is to record data in accidents or situations similar to an accident, e.g. when an airbag is triggered or when the vehicle collides with an obstacle on the road, which then supports analysis of how a vehicle system behaved. The event data recorder is intended to record data relating to driving dynamics and the restraint system for a short period of 30 seconds or less. The event data recorder of this vehicle is intended to record the following data, amongst other things: —How various systems in your vehicle have functioned. —Whether the driver and front passenger seat belts were fastened/secured. — The extent to which the driver pressed the brake or accelerator pedal ( if at all). —How fast the vehicle was travelling. This data helps to obtain a better understanding of the circumstances in the situations where accidents and injuries have occurred. Data from driver assist systems is also recorded. In addition to information about whether the systems were switched on or off, available only to a restricted extent or inactive, it is also possible to determine whether these functions steered, accelerated or braked the vehicle in the above-described situations. Depending on the vehicle equipment, these systems include the following: —Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC —Lane keeping system (Lane Assist). —Park Assist Plus. —Park Distance Control. —Emergency braking functions (Front Assist). The data of the event data recorder is recorded by your vehicle only if an unusual situation similar to an accident occurs. No data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions. In addition,no personal data, e.g. name, gender, age or accident location, is recorded. However, third parties such as law enforcement agencies can use appropriate means to link the content of the event data recorder with other sources of data and thus establish a reference to persons as part of an accident investigation. Special equipment and access to the vehicle or event data recorder are necessary in order to read data from the event data recorder. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, third parties such as law enforcement agencies that have the corresponding equipment can read out the information if they have access to the vehicle or event data recorder. Volkswagen will not access, read or process data from the event data recorder unless the vehicle keeper grants their permission. Exceptions to this are contractual or legal provisions. Due to its legal product monitoring obligations, Volkswagen is entitled to use the data for field monitoring and also for research purposes and quality improvements. For research purposes, Volkswagen makes the data available to third parties in anonymous form, in other words without any reference to the individual vehicle or vehicle keeper. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 537 Infotainment system and antennas The aerials for the Infotainment system are installed at different points in the vehicle: —On the inside of the rear window. —On the roof of the vehicle. Aerials on the interior of the windows can be identified as thin wires. NOTICE Aerials located on the inside of the windows could be damaged by corrosive or acidic substances or if hard objects rub against the window. ● Do not affix any stickers over metal wires, e.g. in the area of the rear window. ● Never clean the aerials with corrosive or acidic agents. NOTICE A retrofitted Infotainment system that is not compatible with the aerial amplifier fitted as standard can damage the aerial amplifier. ● Consult a suitably qualified workshop before retrofitting an Infotainment system. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 538: Component Protection

    Component protection Some electronic components and control units are fitted with component protection as standard, e.g. the Infotainment system. The component protection permits a correspondingly qualified workshop to legitimately install or replace components and control units. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. The component protection prevents the full operation of factory-supplied components outside the vehicle in the following situations: —Installation in other vehicles, e.g. after theft. —Operation of components outside the vehicle. If a text message about component protection appears in the display of the instrument cluster or the screen of the Infotainment system, go to a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 539: Third-Party Copyright Information

    Third-party copyright information https://www.volkswagen.com/softwareinfo Some of the products installed in the vehicle contain software components for which Open Source licences are required. A list of the Open Source software components used including information on copyright as well as the respective Open Source licence conditions and the corresponding licence text is available via the aforementioned website. The source code of certain Open Source software components can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle. The manufacturer will make the source code available to you in accordance with the relevant licence conditions. You will be charged only for the actual costs of provision, e.g. shipping costs. You can find the required information at the aforementioned website. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 540 Information stickers and plates Stickers and plates showing important information for vehicle operation are factory-fitted in the engine compartment and on certain vehicle parts. —Never remove stickers and plates or render them illegible. —If vehicle parts bearing stickers or plates are removed from the vehicle, replacement stickers or plates with the same information must be applied properly to the new parts by a correspondingly qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. Safety certificate There is a safety certificate on the door pillar of the driver door which states that all necessary safety standards and specifications from the transport safety authorities of the particular country were met at the time of production. The month and year of production and the vehicle identification number may also be listed. Observe the information in (→ Safety certificate) the owner’s manual WARNING Removal of stickers and signs reduces the amount of information about sources of danger and can result in less attention being paid when working on the vehicle. This can lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Never remove stickers or signs or make them illegible. ● Observe legal requirements. ● Observe the owner's manual. NOTICE Removal of stickers and signs increases the risk of incorrect operation and can result in damage to the vehicle. ● Never remove stickers or signs or make them illegible. ● Observe legal requirements. ● Carry out servicing work in accordance with the specifications. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 541 → Refrigerant oil in the air conditioning system The air conditioning system is filled with a refrigerant oil. Consult a suitably qualified workshop for information about the type and quantity of the refrigerant oil used. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership (→ Repairs and technical modifications) Warning: the air conditioning system must always be serviced by trained specialists. Type of refrigerant. Type of refrigerant oil. See workshop information (available only for Volkswagen dealerships). The air conditioning system must always be serviced by trained specialists. Flammable refrigerant. Make sure you dispose of all components correctly and never install components taken from older vehicles or recycling facilities into the vehicle. DANGER Maintenance of the air conditioning system by unqualified personnel may jeopardise operating processes and cause serious and fatal injuries. ● Have the air conditioning system serviced only by qualified personnel who are trained according the nationally required standards, such as SAE standard J2845. ● Observe the service intervals specified by Volkswagen. Please contact a suitably qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. DANGER The refrigerant is flammable and can lead to serious and fatal injuries if maintenance is not performed correctly. ● Only have the air conditioning system serviced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. ● Keep the vehicle away from naked flames, sparks and other sources of ignition. DANGER The refrigerant is pressurised and can explode if heated. This can lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries. ● Only have the air conditioning system serviced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. ● Keep the vehicle away from naked flames, sparks and other sources of ignition. DANGER The refrigerant can form toxic vapours if it comes into contact with hot surfaces. If these are breathed in, this can result in poisoning or even death. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 542 ● Only have the air conditioning system serviced by a correspondingly qualified workshop. NOTICE Repairing or replacing the evaporator with spare parts from end-of-life vehicles or recycling may damage the air conditioning system. ● Never have repairs on the evaporator carried out with replacement parts from end-of-life vehicles or from recycling. Information in accordance with the EU Chemicals Regulation REACH In keeping with the European regulation on chemicals R EACH Volkswagen would like to inform you about substances that may be contained in your vehicle. You can access this information online using your vehicle identification number : https://reachinfo.volkswagen.com OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 543: Product Recycling

    Product recycling Disposal of used batteries Used batteries must be collected separately and recycled by the end user. This is indicated by the symbol with the crossed-through waste bin . As the end user, you are required by law to return used batteries → —In EU member states and other states, device batteries and vehicle batteries can be returned to your Volkswagen dealership or approved return systems. —Further information on return and recycling can be obtained from your Volkswagen dealership. Disposal of old electrical and electronic devices Your vehicle contains electrical and electronic devices, e.g. remote controls. These devices are marked with a symbol showing a crossed-through waste bin . The corresponding legal regulations stipulate that old devices with this marking must be collected and disposed of separately from normal household waste. You can hand in these devices at local collection points or any nationally authorised return systems. In Germany, retailers with a sales area of at least 400 m for electrical devices and food retailers with a total sales area of at least 800 m who offer new electrical devices are obliged to take back these devices free of charge. When purchasing a new device, the end user is entitled to return an equivalent old device. The same also applies for delivery to private households and sale via the internet. Small old devices can be returned to retailers even if no new device is purchased. Your Volkswagen dealership is also obliged to take back up to three old devices with an edge length of less than 25 cm free of charge. —Batteries, rechargeable batteries or lamps that are not a fixed part of the device must be removed first and disposed of accordingly. —You must delete all stored personal data before disposing of the old devices. Further information on return and recycling can be obtained from your Volkswagen dealership. WARNING If batteries containing lithium are damaged, gaseous or liquid substances may escape, posing a significant risk to health and the environment. A short circuit of the terminals can also cause a fire or explosion. This can result in serious or fatal injuries. ● Handle batteries containing lithium with special care. ● Never heat batteries containing lithium. ● Never damage batteries containing lithium. ● Never short circuit the battery terminals.
  • Page 544 Fig. 1 Recycling information for France. → Fig. 1 Observe the recycling information , which includes the following items: —Vehicle key —Remote control for the auxiliary heater and auxiliary ventilation —Valet keycard Fig. 2 Recycling information for France. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 545: Returning End-Of-Life Vehicles

    Fig. 3 Recycling information for France. → Fig. 2 → Fig. 3 Observe the recycling information for accompanying documentation and packaging or bags. This recycling information includes the following items: — Vehicle wallet The Triman logo and Info-tri symbol contain important sorting information for the end user. Returning and scrapping end-of-life vehicles Returning end-of-life vehicles At the end of its life, your vehicle must be recycled and disposed of in an environmentally appropriate way. For this reason, the last vehicle keepers in the EU and many other countries are required by law to take their vehicle to an approved collection point, vehicle return centre or authorised dismantling facility. Volkswagen has already made the corresponding preparations for this: a comprehensive network of vehicle return centres is available in all EU countries and many other countries, where you can hand over your vehicle. If you satisfy the national legal requirements, you can return your end-of-life vehicle free of charge within the EU. The vehicle return centre issues a recycling certificate which serves as proof that the end-of-life vehicle has been recycled properly. You can obtain information about vehicle return centres from your Volkswagen dealership. Scrapping The relevant safety requirements must be observed when scrapping the vehicle or its individual components, e.g. the airbag system and belt tensioners. These requirements are known to the correspondingly qualified workshops. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen dealership. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 546: Simplified Eu Declaration Of Conformity

    Simplified EU Declaration of Conformity Your vehicle is equipped with various radio systems. The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that this equipment complies with Directive 2014/53/EU where required by law. The complete text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo The corresponding legal regulations stipulate that radio equipment with this marking must be collected and disposed of separately from normal household waste. You can hand in these devices at local disposal centres or (→ Product recycling) any nationally authorised return systems Marking for the restricted use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment in accordance with the RoHS Directive. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 547 Manufacturers' addresses For components that, due to their size or nature, cannot be provided with the manufacturer’s address, the respective manufacturers’ addresses as required by law are listed here: Door handle with NFC radio technology HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA Rixbecker Straße 75 59552 Lippstadt GERMANY WITTE VELBERT GmbH & Co. KG Höferstraße 3-15 42551 Velbert GERMANY Remote control (auxiliary heater), auxiliary heater (transmitter and receiver unit) Digades GmbH Äußere Weberstraße 20 02763 Zittau GERMANY Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Straße 9 82205 Gilching GERMANY Bury GmbH & Co. KG Robert-Kochstraße 1-7 32584 Löhne GERMANY Tyre pressure sensors HUF Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 548: Mapping Tables

    Gewerbestraße 40 75015 Bretten GERMANY Wireless charging function Molex Technologies GmbH Mizarstrasse 3 12529 Schönefeld GERMANY Bury Sp. Z o.o. Wojska Polskiego 4 39-300 Mielec POLAND BCS Automotive Interface Solutions (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. No. 2052 Taidong Road Xiangcheng Economic Development District 215413 Suzhou CHINA Mapping tables (→ Radio Equipment Directive (RED)) What the two letters in the tables mean ( e.g. AF) Safety This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Garage door opener, Keyless Access, vehicle key, instrument cluster, ID. Cockpit, electronic immobiliser . Garage door opener: ADHL5D, EHL2 ADHL5D, EHL2 Keyless Access: OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 549 Frequency band, maximum RSB19 transmission power Kessy MQB37W Kessy MQB-A, 5ZA 010 176, MQB-B B, MQB- B H, 013854 VWTOUA PKETOUA Remote control key (vehicle): VK2, FS19 FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS12PM, FS125C, FS14, FS14K, FS14T, FS14TK, FS1744, FS1744M, FS94 VWTOUA RKETOUA Instrument cluster, electronic immobiliser: COLOUR5C, MEDIUM 5C, MEDIUM 5C_21 eNSF, LCW05-VWE1, LCW05-VWE5, LCW05- SEE5, EZS-VW-Touareg, Immobilizer integrated in dashboard module instrument cluster, 17101001, 17101002, 17101010, 17101021, 17101022, 17101023, 17101031, 17101032, 17101033, 17101034, 17101041, 17101042, 17101043, 17101051, 17101052, 17101053, 17101054, 17101055, 17101056, 17101057, 17101071, 17101072, 18020501, 18020531, 18020532, 18020533, 18020534, 18031410, 18100931 FPK8 IMMO5D, Instrument cluster 1, Instrument cluster 2, Instrument cluster 3, BNF_HL, BNF_LL, NSF_HL, NSF_LL1, NSF_LL3 MQB_A0 Clusters, MQBG01, MQBM01, MQBS01 DTCO 1381 EFAS-4.10 Air Conditioning This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Remote control (auxiliary heater), auxiliary heater (transmitter and receiver unit) . Remote control (auxiliary heater): OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 550: Control Unit

    Approval numbers EasyStart R, Funkfernbedienung, STH VW- 50000884, STH VW D-50001194, Telestart Auxiliary heater (transmitter and receiver unit): Funkempfänger STH, 50000864 D208L VW, 50001219 D208L VW Tyres This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Tyre pressure sensors . Tyre pressure sensors: AG2FW4, TSSRE4Dg, TSSRE4Uf, TSSSG4G5, TSSSG4G5b Control unit This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Central control unit, door control unit, valet keycard, wireless charging function, wireless seat belt warning system . Central control unit: 5WK50254 BCM MQB37W, BR21, MQB37W KFG: Max BCM2, BCM2R, BCMevo, BCMevoC, BCMevo5 BCM MQB27, BCM PQ25, BCM PQ26 ROW (502N1xFOx), BCM PQ35, BCM PQ37H, BR11, 5WK50248, BC-Module, 5WK50474 Door control unit: HUF71110, HUF71254, DHA20, NFCTGS, Mobile Key 4K0.959.754.xx, 3G0.837.205, 3G0.837.206 CDIS 2.0 Wireless charging function: WCH-185, WCH-186, WPC003-1 3G0.980.611 Wireless seat belt warning system: OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 551: Driver Assist Systems

    Driver assist systems This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Radar sensors for assist systems . Radar sensors for assist systems: LCA 2.0A, BSD 3.0 ARS4-B, ARS5-B, FR5CPEC, LRR3, MRR1Plus, LRR4, MRR1Rear, LRR4R, MRRe14FCR, MRRevo14F, R3TR, F5CP42 Infotainment system and online communication This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Infotainment system, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi hotspot, mobile phone interface, OCU, Volkswagen Car-Net “Security & Service”, Volkswagen Car-Net “e-Remote”. Infotainment system: New Radio Ultra Low SBB, New Radio Ultra Low SBB DAB, New Radio Ultra Low SBT, 7CO.035.153, 7LA.035.153.A, Radio Ultra Low Touch, Radio Ultra Low Touch DAB A473/A476/A750, A475/A754, L40VW2, L41VW2, L42VW2, L53VW2, L56VW2, L62VW2, L69VW2, L73VW2, L77VW2, MIB Global Entry/Standard, MIB2, MIB2 PQ MIN, MIB2STD, MIB Standard 2 – PQ +/NAV with BT, MIB Standard 2 – ZR with BT, MIB Standard 2 – ZR +/Nav with BT, MIB3E_MQB_BT, MIB3E_MQB37w_BT, OE-PP 87BT MIB3TOP MEB ICAS3 MIB3 OI (LGE) MIB3 OI MIB Standard 2 – ZR +/Nav mit BT and WLAN, MIB Standard 2 – PQ +/NAV with BT and WLAN, MIB2STD Nav, MIB2STD Radio MIB3E_MQB_BTWIFI, MIB3E_MQB37w_BTWIFI A580/A270 MIB HS MMI3G CONBOX-High MMI3G RU RRVW402B, RRVW401*, RRVW402* OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 552 Bluetooth: HT-5 Wi-Fi hotspot: HT-5 CCU4 Mobile phone interface: HT-5 Online connectivity unit (OCU): DataPlug HT-6d, HT-6e, TUVM01IU-G, TUVM02IU-C, TUVM02IU-E, TUVM03IU-C, TUVM03IU-E TLAHW3IU-E, TLAHW3IU-R, TLVHM3IU-E, TLVHM3IU-R, TLVHW3IU-E, TLVHW3IU-R, TLVLM3IU-E, TLVLM3IU-R, TLVHE4IU-E, TLVHE4IU-R Aerials This section contains the certificate numbers of the following components: — Aerials, aerial amplifier, connection to the external aerial. Connection to the external aerial: LTE-MBC-EU, LTE-MBC-EU2 CM01TN-VWW, CM01XN-VWE UMTS/GSM-MMC, UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2, UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG3 Aerial amplifier: General information on the data OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 553 CSA-1 DDAECE01, 4N0.035.503.E, 4N0.035.503.F, 4N0.035.503.J, 4N0.035.503.L, 4N0.035.503.M, 4N0.035.503.Q, 4N0.035.503.AB, 4N0.035.503.AC, 4N0.035.503.AF, 4N0.035.503.AG 7T0.035.510 0-07-26-1912-00, 756xxxx, 10A.035.577.A, 10A.035.577.B, 10A.035.577.C, 10A.035.577.D, 11A.035.577.A, 11A.035.577.B, 11A.035.577.C, 11A.035.577.D, 11A.035.577.F, 11A.035.577.M, 11E.035.577.A, 11E.035.577.B, 11E.035.577.C, 11E.035.577.D, 1S0.035.577.A, 2G0.035.577.A, 2GA.035.577, 2GA.035.577.A, 2GA.035.577.B, 2GM.035.577.A, 2S0.035.577.A 3G5.035.577, 3G5.035.577.A, 3G5.035.577.B, 3G5.035.577.G, 3G5.035.577.H, 3G5.035.577.J, 3G5.035.577.K, 3G7.035.577.A, 3G7.035.577.B, 3G7.035.577.D, 3G8.035.577, 3G8.035.577.A, 3G8.035.577.B, 3G8.035.577.E, 3G8.035.577.F, 3G8.035.577.G, 3G8.035.577.H, 3G8.035.577.J, 3G8.035.577.K, 3G9.035.577, 3G9.035.577.A, 3G9.035.577.B, 3G9.035.577.G, 3G9.035.577.H, 3G9.035.577.J, 3G9.035.577.K, 3V5.035.577.A, 3V5.035.577.B, 3V5.035.577.F, 4S0.035.225.A, 4S0.035.225.D, 510.035.577, 510.035.577.A, 510.035.577.B, 565.035.577, 565.035.577.A, 565.035.577.C, 575.035.225, 575.035.225.A, 575.035.225.B, 5C3.035.552, 5C3.035.552.A, 5C3.035.552.B, 5C5.035.552, 5C5.035.552.A, 5C5.035.552.B, 5E5.035.577.A, 5E5.035.577.B, 5E6.035.577, 5E6.035.577.A, 5E6.035.577.B, 5E7.035.577, 5E7.035.577.A, 5E7.035.577.B, 5F4.035.225, 5F4.035.225.A, 5F4.035.225.B, 5G6.035.577, 5G6.035.577.A, 5G6.035.577.B, 5G6.035.577.E, 5G6.035.577.F, 5G9.035.577, 5G9.035.577.A, 5G9.035.577.B, 5G9.035.577.G, 5G9.035.577.H, 5G9.035.577.J, 5G9.035.577.K, 5L0.035.501.A, 5LE.035.577, 5LE.035.577.A, 5LG.035.577, 5LG.035.577.A, 5NA.035.577, 5NA.035.577.A, 5NA.035.577.B, 5NA.035.577.E, 5NA.035.577.F, 5TA.035.577, 5TA.035.577.A, 5TA.035.577.B, 6C0.035.501, 6C0.035.501.A, 6C0.035.501.C, 6C0.035.501.D, 6C0.035.501.G, 6C0.035.501.J, 6C0.035.501.N, 6C0.035.501.P, 6C0.035.501.Q, 6C0.035.577, 6C0.035.577.P, 6C0.035.577.Q, 6R0.035.501, 6R0.035.501.A, 6R0.035.501.C, 6R0.035.501.D, 6R0.035.501.F, 6R0.035.501.L, 6V6.035.577.A, 6V6.035.577.B, 6V9.035.577.A, 6V9.035.577.B, 760.035.577, 760.035.577.A, 760.035.577.S, 760.035.577.T, 7C0.035.501, 7C0.035.501.C, 7C0.035.501.D, 7C0.035.501.F, 7C0.035.501.G, 7H0.035.507.E, 7N0.035.552.J, 7N0.035.552.K, 7N0.035.552.Q, 7P6.035.552, 7P6.035.552.A, 7P6.035.552.M, 7T0.035.507.A, 7T0.035.507.B, 7T0.035.507.E, 7T0.035.507.F, 7T0.035.577.A, 7T0.035.577.B, 7T0.035.577.C, 7T0.035.577.D, 8S7.035.503.B, 8V0.035.503.AF, 14A.035.577.B, 14A.035.577.C, 14B.035.577.B, 14B.035.577.C 920 105 105, 920 105 110, 920 211 072, 920 211 172, 920 211 201, 920 211 202, 920 213 172, 920 286 002, 920 286 005, 920 286 009, 920 286 010, 920 286 011, 920 286 012, 920 286 013, 920 286 015, 920 286 313, 920 286 323, 920 286 343, 920 286 351, 920 286 352, 920 286 353, 920 286 354, 920 286 362, 920 286 382, 920 286 383, 920 286 385, 920 286 386, 920 301 022, 920 301 030, 920 301 031, 920 301 041, 920 301 042, 920 304 022, 920 355 001, 920 437 003, 920 437 023, 920 437 035, 920 437 303, 920 437 323, 920 437 335, 920 460 003, 920 460 009, 920 460 018, 920 460 025, 920 460 028, 920 460 042, 920 460 047, 920 460 069, 920 460 303, 920 460 318, 920 460 325, 920 460 328, 920 460 342, 920 460 347, 920 460 369, 920 461 001, 920 461 002, 920 461 003, 920 461 004, 920 461 005, 920 554 001, 920 554 002, 920 554 003, 920 554 004, 920 554 011, 920 554 012, 920 554 013, 920 554 014, 920 611 001, 920 611 002, 920 611 011, 920 611 012, 920 615 001, 920 615 002, 920 627 A, 920 627 B, 920 627 003, 920 627 007, 920 627 011, 920 627 013, 920...
  • Page 554 Koppelantenne Gen.3 AM/FM1/DAB2/TV ECE (Impedance Converter) AM/FM Antenna Base, 3789.01, 754xxxx, 76xxxxx, 77xxxxx, 790xxxx, 7540xxx, 7542xxx 1K8.035.552.C, 1K8.035.552.F, 2GA.035.577.B, 2GC.035.577, 2GC.035.577.A, 2GC.035.577.S, 2K5.035.525.L, 2K5.035.525.M, 2K5.035.525.Q, 2K5.035.525.T, 2K5.035.525.AB, 2K5.035.525.AC, 2K5.035.525.AD, 2K5.035.525.AE, 2K5.035.526.L, 2K5.035.526.M, 2K5.035.526.Q, 2K5.035.526.T, 2K5.035.526.AA, 2K5.035.526.AB, 2K5.035.526.AC, 2K5.035.526.AD, 2K5.035.526.AE, 2K5.035.526.AF, 2K5.035.532.Q, 2K5.035.532.R, 2K5.035.532.S, 2K5.035.540.A 3C0.035.507.AA, 3C0.035.507.N, 3C0.035.507.P, 3V5.035.577.A, 3V5.035.577.F, 4G5.035.225.A, 4G5.035.225.B, 4G8.035.225.A, 4G8.035.225.B, 4G9.035.225.A, 4G9.035.225.B, 4N0.035.503.L 5Q0.035.507.A, 5Q0.035.507.AG, 5Q0.035.507.AH, 5Q0.035.507.B, 5Q0.035.507.C, 5Q0.035.507.P, 5Q0.035.507.Q, 5Q0.035.507.S, 5QD.035.507.AG, 5QD.035.507.AH, 5QG.035.507.AG, 5QG.035.507.AH, 5WA.035.507.A, 5WA.035.507.B, 5WA.035.507.E, 5WA.035.507.F, 5WA.035.507.T, 5WD.035.507.A, 5WD.035.507.B, 5WD.035.507.E, 5WD.035.507.F, 5WG.035.507.A, 5WG.035.507.B, 5WG.035.507.E, 5WG.035.507.F, 6C0.035.501.FQ, 6R0.035.501.F, 7E0.035.503, 7E0.035.503.A, 7E0.035.503.B, 7E0.035.503.C, 7E0.035.503.D, 7E0.035.503.E, 7E0.035.510, 7E0.035.510.A, 7N0.035.507.A, 7N0.035.507.B 920 336 003, 920 336 005, 920 336 006, 920 336 007, 920 336 008, 920 336 010, 920 336 011, 920 336 012, 920 336 013, 920 336 014, 920 417 007, 920 417 010, 920 481 002, 920 481 003, 920 481 004, 920 481 012, 920 481 013, 920 481 014. If not otherwise stated, the specifications apply to all Volkswagen models or to vehicles that are equipped with the respective radio system. In certain countries, the activation of, or permission to use, radio technology may be restricted, not possible, or only possible when additional requirements have been fulfilled. (→ Radio Equipment Directive (RED)) Referenced radio systems (e.g. AA) Frequency band. Maximum transmission power. µW = Microwatt, mW = Milliwatt, W = Watt. 105 kHz – 115 kHz 116 kHz – 134 kHz 148,70 dBµV/m 125 kHz +/- 10 kHz 5,4 dBµA/m 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m 13,56 MHz 14,5 mW OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 555 433,05 MHz – 434,79 MHz 15 dBm EIRP 433,92 MHz 10 mW 433,92 MHz, 434,42 MHz 5 dBm EIRP 434,79 MHz 25 mW 433,47 MHz – 434,37 MHz -17 dBm 868,00 MHz – 868,60 MHz -17 dBm 868,0 MHz – 869,2 MHz 25 mW 2400 MHz – 2483,5 MHz 10 mW 5795 MHz – 5815 MHz (DSRC) 0,04 mW 5855 MHz – 5925 MHz 2 W EIRP 6,0 GHz – 8,5 GHz (6,52 GHz, 7,04 GHz, 7,56 GHz) 0 dBm EIRP 24,05 GHz – 24,25 GHz 0,05 W 24,075 GHz – 24,250 GHz 15,1 dBm EIRP 76,0 GHz – 77,0 GHz 37,79 dBm EIRP GSM 900 (uplink: 880 MHz – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 MHz – 960 MHz) GSM 1800 (uplink: 1710 MHz – 1785 MHz / downlink: 1805 MHz – 1880 MHz) WCDMA FDDI (uplink: 1920 MHz – 1990 MHz / downlink: 2110 MHz – 2170 MHz) 0,25 W WCDMA FDDVIII (uplink: 880 MHz – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 MHz – 960 MHz) 0,25 W 5,795 GHz – 5,815 GHz (DSRC) -19,9 dBm 1599 MHz – 1610 MHz (GNSS) EIRP WCDMA Band 1: 1922,4 MHz – 1977,6 MHz, WCDMA Band 3: 1712,4 MHz – 23,35 dBm 1782,6 MHz, WCDMA Band 8: 882,4 MHz – 912,6 MHz LTE Band 1: 1920 MHz – 1980 MHz, LTE Band 3: 1710 MHz – 1785 MHz, LTE Band...
  • Page 556 EIRP Bluetooth: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz 4,63 dBm EIRP WLAN 2.4 GHz: 2412 MHz – 2472 MHz 17,70 dBm EIRP Bluetooth: 2400 MHz – 2483,5 MHz 4,9 dBm EIRP WLAN 2.4 GHz: 2400 MHz – 2483,5 MHz, WLAN 5 GHz: 5150 MHz – 5250 MHz, 13,8 dBm EIRP WLAN 5 GHz: 5725 MHz – 5850 MHz Bluetooth: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz 0,9 dBm EIRP WLAN: 2400 MHz – 2483,5 MHz 8 dBm EIRP GSM: 900/1800 MHz 27 dBm EIRP UMTS FDDI/III 24 dBm EIRP LTE FDD 3, 7, 8, 20 23 dBm EIRP Bluetooth: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz 10 dBm EIRP WLAN: 2400 MHz – 2483,5 MHz 20 dBm EIRP GSM 900 (uplink: 880 MHz – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 MHz – 960 MHz) 33 dBm EIRP GSM 1800 (uplink: 1710 MHz – 1785 MHz / downlink: 1805 MHz – 1880 MHz) 30 dBm EIRP WCDMA FDDI (uplink: 1920 MHz – 1980 MHz / downlink: 2110 MHz – 2170 MHz) 24 dBm EIRP WCDMA FDDVIII (uplink: 880 MHz – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 MHz – 960 MHz) 24 dBm EIRP LTE FDD1 (uplink: 1920 MHz – 1980 MHz / downlink: 2110 MHz – 2170 MHz) 23 dBm EIRP LTE FDD3 (uplink: 1710 MHz –1785 MHz / downlink: 1805 MHz – 1880 MHz) 23 dBm EIRP LTE FDD7 (uplink: 2500 MHz – 2570 MHz / downlink: 2620 MHz – 2690 MHz) 23 dBm EIRP LTE FDD8 (uplink: 880 MHz – 915 MHz / downlink: 925 MHz – 960 MHz) 23 dBm EIRP LTE FDD20 (uplink: 832 MHz – 862 MHz / downlink: 791 MHz – 821 MHz) 23 dBm EIRP...
  • Page 557 Bluetooth: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz 0,001 W WLAN: 2412 MHz – 2462 MHz 0,1 W WiFi IEEE 802.11 b/g/n: 2412 MHz – 2472 MHz 18,4 dBm EIRP GSM/GPRS/eGPRS 900: 880,2 MHz – 914,8 MHz 37,64 dBm GSM/GPRS/eGPRS 1800: 1710,2 MHz – 1784,8 MHz EIRP UMTS FDDI: 1922,4 MHz – 1977,6 MHz, UMTS FDDVIII: 882,4 MHz – 912,6 MHz, 34,64 dBm LTE FDD1: 1920 MHz – 1980 MHz, LTE FDD3: 1710 MHz – 1784,9 MHz, LTE EIRP FDD7: 2500 MHz – 2569,9 MHz, LTE FDD8: 880 MHz – 914,9 MHz, LTE FDD20: 27,84 dBm 832 MHz – 861,9 MHz EIRP 105 kHz – 115 kHz 13,56 MHz 500 mW 5855 MHz – 5925 MHz 24 dBm EIRP Bluetooth: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz 9,7 dBm EIRP Bluetooth LE: 2402 MHz – 2480 MHz -1,5 dBm EIRP WLAN: 2412 MHz – 2472 MHz 13,3 dBm EIRP WLAN: 5745 MHz – 5825 MHz 12,7 dBm EIRP GSM 900: 880 MHz – 960 MHz 33 dBm rated GSM 1800: 1710 MHz – 1880 MHz 30 dBm rated LTE FDD Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28, 34, 38, 40 23 dBm rated WCDMA Band I: 1920 MHz – 1980 MHz, 2110 MHz – 2170 MHz, WCDMA Band III: 24 dBm rated 1710 MHz – 1880 MHz, WCDMA Band VIII: 880 MHz – 960 MHz Keine Sendeleistung, nur Empfang Algeria Agréé par l’ ARPT:...

  • Page 558: Vehicle Identification Number

    Homologué par l’ANF: № CC:22/H/ANF/2021, № CC:38/H/ANF/2021, № CC:39/H/ANF/2021, № CC:40/H/ANF/2021, № CC:53/H/ANF/2021, № CC:138/H/ANF/2020, № CC:139/H/ANF/2020, № CC:164/H/ANF/2020, № CC:165/H/ANF/2020, № CC:174/H/ANF/2020 № CC:322/H/ANF/2021, № CC:323/H/ANF/2021, № CC:324/H/ANF/2021, № CC:325/H/ANF/2021, № CC:326/H/ANF/2021 № CC:332/H/ANF/2021, № CC:342/H/ANF/2021, № CC:372/H/ANF/2020, № CC:405/H/ANF/2021, № CC:406/H/ANF/2021 № CC:410/H/ANF/2020,№ CC:198/H/ANF/2021,№ CC:007/H/ANF/2022,№ CC:009/H/ANF/2022,№ CC:010/H/ANF/2022 № CC:019/H/ANF/2022,№ CC:024/H/ANF/2022,№ CC:028/H/ANF/2022, № CC:027/H/ANF/2022,№ CC:026/H/ANF/2022 Vehicle identification number Argentina C-8752, C-13277, C-13393, C-13823, C-14175, C-14176, C-14387, C-14451, C-14520, C-14569, C-14733, C-15807, C-16345, C-16741, C-17001, 17582, C-17583, C-17604, C-17629, C-17985, C-18005, C-18053, C-20030, C-20288, C-20323, C-21672, C-21673, C-21797, C-21798, C-22036, C-22394, C-23301, C-23466, C-23776,...

  • Page 559: Type Plate

    019/ARCEP/PT/DAJRC/GU, 2022-286/ARCEP/PT/DAJRC/GU, 2022-287/ARCEP/PT/DAJRC/GU Botswana BTA REGISTERED No: BOCRA/TA/2016/2691, BOCRA/TA/2017/3412, BOCRA/TA/2017/3441, BOCRA/TA/2018/2026, BOCRA/TA/2018/3012, BOCRA/TA/2018/3913, BOCRA/TA/2018/3941, BOCRA/TA/2018/3991, BOCRA/TA/2018/3992, BOCRA/TA/2018/4129, BOCRA/TA/2018/4130, BOCRA/TA/2018/4131, BOCRA/TA/2018/4132, BOCRA/TA/2018/4133, BOCRA/TA/2018/4134, BOCRA/TA/2018/4135, BOCRA/TA/2018/4136, BOCRA/TA/2018/4193, BOCRA/TA/2018/4194, BOCRA/TA/2018/4195, BOCRA/TA/2018/4196, BOCRA/TA/2019/2174, BOCRA/TA/2019/3433, BOCRA/TA/2019/4309, BOCRA/TA/2019/4311, BOCRA/TA/2019/4582, BOCRA/TA/2019/4648, BOCRA/TA/2019/4649, BOCRA/TA/2019/4666, BOCRA/TA/2019/4701, BOCRA/TA/2019/4978, BOCRA/TA/2019/4982, BOCRA/TA/2019/4997, BOCRA/TA/2019/4998, BOCRA/TA/2019/5045, BOCRA/TA/2019/5046, BOCRA/TA/2019/5079, BOCRA/TA/2019/5080, BOCRA/TA/2019/5895, BOCRA/TA/2019/6030, BOCRA/TA/2020/2551, BOCRA/TA/2020/3908, BOCRA/TA/2020/3991, BOCRA/TA/2020/3992, BOCRA/TA/2020/5158, BOCRA/TA/2020/5159, BOCRA/TA/2020/5188, BOCRA/TA/2020/5191, BOCRA/TA/2020/5261, BOCRA/TA/2020/5470, BOCRA/TA/2020/5487, BOCRA/TA/2020/5511, BOCRA/TA/2020/5846, BOCRA/TA/2021/2175, BOCRA/TA/2021/4040, BOCRA/TA/2021/4057, BOCRA/TA/2021/4701, BOCRA/TA/2021/5894, BOCRA/TA/2021/5886, BOCRA/TA/2021/5895, BOCRA/TA/2021/5957, BOCRA/TA/2021/6030, BOCRA/TA/2021/6071, BOCRA/TA/2021/6093, BOCRA/TA/2021/6098, BOCRA/TA/2021/6187, BOCRA/TA/2021/6422, BOCRA/TA/2021/6536, BOCRA/TA/2021/6581, BOCRA/TA/2020/3372, BOCRA/TA/2020/5261, BOCRA/TA/2020/5191, BOCRA/TA/2022/6705, BOCRA/TA/2022/6820, BOCRA/TA/2022/6864, BOCRA/TA/2021/6581, BOCRA/TA/2021/6536, BOCRA/TA/2022/7424, BOCRA/TA/2022/7619, BOCRA/TA/2022/7617, BOCRA/TA/2022/15329. Brazil Type plate Para maiores informações, consulte o site da ANATEL - www.anatel.gov.br. 00716-15-03745, 00850-13-03745, 0918-14- 5364, 0939-14-2856, 0940-14-2856, 00231-20- 09215, 00716-15-03745, 00720-19-05364, 00939-19-06673, 01094-17-03226, 01095-17- 03226, 01138-12-02856, 01140-12-02856, 01202-15-06815, 01618-20-02149, 01760-20- 02149, 01812-19-05364, 01813-19-05364, 01814-19-05364, 01834-18-02856, 02018-18-...
  • Page 560 06353, 05531-16-02149, 05674-16-06830, 05676-19-01925, 05803-21-03745, 06029-18- 05364, 06215-16-03430, 06763-18-06353, 06950-18-10457, 06962-18-06353, 07084-18- 03745, 07137-19-08137, 07183-18-06353, 07184-18-06353, 07185-18-06353, 07186-18- 06353, 07188-18-06353, 07189-18-06353, 07191-18-06353, 07830-17-08001, 08057-19- 05179, 09036-19-01925, 09087-19-07978, 09275-19-06353, 10313-20-06353, 12001-20- 10944, 13806-20-09215, 17186-20-10539, 00533-22-03745, 05310-19-10188, 11718-22- 05364, 11502-22-05364, 05507-18-06353, 11718-22-05364, 11502-22-05364 00082026_04/01/2022, 00085600_01/07/2021, 00086092_23/10/2020, 00089079_01/07/2021, 00092837_16/03/2021, 00098955_27/08/2018,...
  • Page 561 Versys2434_19/07/2023, Versys3889_13/08/2024, Versys2259_21/03/2025, Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados. 0148-15-7978, 0263-16-9946, 0278-15-7978, 0456-15-9946, 0646-13-5452, 0716-15-3745, 0850-13-3745, 0918-14-5364, 1140-14-2856, 1202-14-6815, 1497-14-9946, 1498-14-9946, 1546-10-2886, 1690-15-5364, 1711-12-5364, 2115-15-6815, 2220-14-3745, 2230-14-3745, 2294-15-3616, 2483-14-6324, 3002-09-3745, 3080-14-6828, 3557-15-5364, 4057-14-6068, 02128-16-05364, 02530-16-09946, 03323-18- 02930, 05531-16-02149, 05674-15-06830, 05674-16-06830, 07084-18-03745, 17186-20- 10539 UL-BR 17.0958, MT-4903/2020_29/04/2024, MT- 6015/2022_06/08/2024, MT-6112/2022_26/10/2024, MT-6109/2022_04/02/2025, MT-...
  • Page 562 016410, DTA-016411, DTA-016410, DTA-018086, DTA-018257, DTA-018899, DTA-018907, DTA-018912, DTA- 019078, DTA-020730, DTA-020492, DTA-021806, DTA-023898, DEKRA-00025-22, DTA-023889, DTA-023890. //DTL-D-20004-11-2021-1727: DDTA-017797 England, Wales and Scotland See EU Declarations of Conformities at www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. Further information on radio systems European Union (EU) and countries where radio systems are approved according to EU Directives: See EU Declarations of Conformities at www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. Further information on radio systems Gabon D'HOMOLOGATION D'EQUIPEMENTS DE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CERTIFICAT No: 033/ARCEP/2021, 045/ARCEP/2020, 070/ARCEP/2021, 100/ARCEP/2019, 112/ARCEP/2020, 337/ARCEP/2020, 369/ARCEP/2020, 371/ARCEP/2020, 419/ARCEP/2021, 421/ARCEP/2021, 433/ARCEP/2020, 440/ARCEP/2019, 441/ARCEP/2019, 443/ARCEP/2019, 444/ARCEP/2019, 445/ARCEP/2019, 446/ARCEP/2019, 450/ARCEP/2019, 452/ARCEP/2020, 513/ARCEP/2019, 554/ARCEP/2020, 608/ARCEP/2019, 609/ARCEP/2019, 644/ARCEP/2021, 645/ARCEP/2021, 675/ARCEP/2021, 697/ARCEP/2021, 698/ARCEP/2021, 865/ARCEP/2020, 869/ARCEP/2020, 885/ARCEP/2020, 970/ARCEP/2020, 1012/ARCEP/2020, 1013/ARCEP/2020, 1016/ARCEP/2021, 1017/ARCEP/2020, 1365/ARCEP/2021, 699/ARCEP/2021, 203/ARCEP/2022, 044/ARCEP/2022, 112/ARCEP/2022, 096/ARCEP/2022, 264/ARCEP/2022, 263/ARCEP/2022, 320/ARCEP/2022,319/ARCEP/2022,531/ARCEP/2022,542/ARCEP/2022,535/ARCEP/2022,540/ARCEP/2022, 95/ARCEP/2022, 604/ARCEP/2022, 602/ARCEP/2022, 601/ARCEP/2022, 600/ARCEP/2022, 618/ARCEP/2022, 642/ARCEP/2022, 641/ARCEP/2022, 640/ARCEP/2022, 790/ARCEP/2022, 890/ARCEP/2022, 892/ARCEP/2022, 891/ARCEP/2022, 1031/ARCEP/2022, 95/ARCEP/2023, 103/ARCEP/2023 Ghana NCA Appoved: XXX-XX-XXX-XXX BRE-1M-GE2-15A, BR3-1M-GE2-X72, BR3-1M-GE2-X69, BR3-1M-GE2-080, BR3-1M-GE2-087, BR3-1M-GE2-088, BR3-1M-GE2-089, BR3-1M-GE2-09E, BR3-1M-GE2-0AF, BR3-1M-GE2-0BA, BR3-1M-GE2-0BB, BR3-1M-GE2-0BC, BR3-1M-GE2-0B0, BR3-1M-GE2-0B3, BR3-1M-GE2-0B4, BR3-1M-GE2-0B7, BR3-1M-GE2-0B8, BR3-1M-GE2-0D2, BR3-1M-GE2-0BA, BR3-1M-GE2-0BC, BR3-1M-GE2-0EC, BR3-1M-GE2-0ED, BR3-1M-GE2-0EE, BR3-1M-GE2-10A, BR3-1M-GE2-10B, BR3-1M-GE2-15A, BR3-1M-GE2-130, EX6-6M-GE2-17B, ORG-4H-7E3-X98, SRO-1M-7E4-2A9, SRO-1M-7EA-24B, SRO-1M-7E4-25D, SRO-1M-7E4-243, SRO-1M-7E4-244, SRO-1M-7E4-246, ZRO-M8-7E3-11B, ZRO-M8-7E3-19A, ZRO-M8-7E3-19C, ZRO-M8-7E3-X26, ZRO-M8-7E3-X43, ZRO-M8-7E3-X73, ZRO-M8-7E3-X75, ZRO-M8-7E3-X90, ZRO-M8-7E3-X92, ZRO-M8-7E3-X96, ZRO-M8-7E3-11B, ZR0-M8-7E3-20B, ZRO-M8-7E3-209, ZRO-M8-7E3-229, ZRO-M8-7E3-27B, ZRO-1H-7E3-14E, ZRO-1H-7E3-150, 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7, 1R3-1M-7E1-09B, 1R3-1M-7E1-09C, 1R3-1M-7E1-160, 2R9-1H-7E0-xAC, 2R9-1H-7E0-X71, 2R9-1H-7E0-X75, 2R9-1H-7EO-X90, 2R9- 1H-7E0-0DA, 3R2-1M-7DF-287, 3R2-1M-7DF-288, 3R8-8M-7DF-2AA, 6X6-4H-7EO-OF3, 7E5-7M-X0B-RDR, 7E5- 7M-X24-RDR, 7E5-7M-X43-RDR, 7E5-7M-X47-RDR, 7E5-7M-X74-RDR, 7T6-5H-7DF-17F, 7T6-5H-7DF-182,7E5-7M- 101-RDR,7E5-7M-156-RDR,7E6-M1-X36-SRD,7E6-M1-XDC-SRD,7E6-M1-X0F-SRD, 7E6-M1-X92-SRD, 7E6-M1- XDC-SRD, 7E6-M1-X0F-SRD, 7E6-M1-216-SRD.
  • Page 563 India ETA Certificate No: ETA-0044/2018/RLO(WR), ETA-0073/2019/RLO(NR), ETA-0082/2018/RLO(NR), ETA-0096/2019/RLO(NR), ETA- 101/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-102/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-113/2017/RLO(SR), ETA-140/2013/ERLO, ETA-141/2013/ERLO, ETA-142/2013/ERLO, ETA-143/2013/ERLO, ETA-144/2013/ERLO, ETA-145/2013/ERLO, ETA-146/2013/ERLO, ETA- 249/2010, ETA-554/2010/WRLO, ETA-747/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-769/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-770/2017-RLO(SR), ETA- 861/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-862/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-863/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-864/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-894/2017- RLO(SR), ETA-895/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-920/2016/ERLO, ETA-982/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-983/2017-RLO(SR), ETA- 1284/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-1285/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-1360/2017-RLO(SR), ETA-1609/17-RLO(NE), ETA--2013- RLO(GHY)/1752, ETA-2965/15-RLO(WR), ETA-3000/16-RLO(WR), ETA-3001/16-RLO(WR), ETA-3057/16-RLO(WR), ETA-3217/16-RLO(WR), ETA-3415/17-RLO(WR), ETA-3416/17-RLO(WR), ETA/9778-RLO(NR) ETA-SD-20190500531, ETA-SD-20190500547, ETA-SD-20190500710, ETA-SD-20190500818, ETA-SD- 20190601758, ETA-SD-20190601779, ETA-SD-20190702496, ETA-SD-20190702597, ETA-SD-20190702602, ETA- SD-20190702752, ETA-SD-20190904868, ETA-SD-20190904870, ETA-SD-20191005584, ETA-SD-20200100480, ETA-SD-20200201296, ETA-SD-20200503318, ETA-SD-20210201239, ETA-SD-20210503115. NR-ETA/1215, NR-ETA/1420, NR-ETA/1421, NR-ETA/2015, NR-ETA/2221, NR-ETA-3373, NR-ETA/3544, NR- ETA/4717, NR-ETA/7218-RLO(NR), NR-ETA/7219-RLO(NR), NR-ETA/7220-RLO(NR), NR-ETA/9168-RLO(NR), SR- ETA/201900419,ETA-SD-20210201419,ETA-SD-20210201425,ETA-SD-2021070517,ETA-SD-20210704875,ETA-SD- 20210805474,ETA-SD-20211007711,ETA-SD-20220100173,ETA-SD-20220302289,ETA-SD-20220605444,ETA-SD- 20220604919, R-41175277, ETA-SD-2030100482, ETA-SD-20220201488. Indonesia Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya. 57027/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7696 57059/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7696 60924/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 61642/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 61855/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 61981/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 62361/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 8837 62404/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 64520/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 4334 67149/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 4334 67359/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 4334 67495/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 4334 OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 564 67512/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 4334 69516/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 4334 72556/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 72557/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 72770/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 72586/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 72663/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 72823/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 73094/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 73489/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 73588/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 73580/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 74117/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 74303/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 74436/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 74699/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 74700/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 75294/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 76052/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 77146/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 77225/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 4334 77384/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 77920/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 78452/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 80130/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 80858/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 565 82116/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 82926/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 82886/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 81094/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 81032/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 80846/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 84481/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 83130/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 83196/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 83332/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 84482/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85458/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 84957/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85672/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85926/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85731/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86720/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85361/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85477/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85694/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86721/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85688/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86719/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85691/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85499/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85243/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 566 85240/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85365/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85245/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85198/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85197/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85201/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85373/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85687/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86618/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85689/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86619/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 85693/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86620/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 88081/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 82953/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 86178/SDPPI/2022, PLG ID: 4334 12345/SDPPI/2011, PLG ID: 1234, 21436/SDPPI/2011, 32143/SDPPI/2013, PLG ID: 3073, 32144/SDPPI/2013, PLG ID: 3073, 32221/SDPPI/2013, PLG ID: 3073, 33651/SDPPI/2014, PLG ID: 2181, 33652/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 2181, 34468/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 2879, 34539/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4211, 34691/SDPPI/2014, PLG ID: 4604, 36961/SDPPI/2014, PLG ID: 4792, 38132/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 2130, 38296/I/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4976, 40095/I/SPDDI/2018, PLG ID: 3891, 40409/SDPPI/2015, PLD ID: 4792, 44153/SDPPI/2016, PLG ID: 4211, 47786/SDPPI/2016, PLG ID: 6051, 47817/SDPPI/2016, PLG ID: 6094, 48732/SDPPI/2016, PLG ID: 3891, 40848/I/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 2181, 50425/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4057, 50459/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 6051, 53856/SDPPI/2017, PLG ID: 4211, 55438/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 6051, 55776/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7205, 56625/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57406/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57647/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 57687/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 7708, 58206/SDPPI/2018, PLG ID: 5834, 62361/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 8837, 62745/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID:3813, 64730/SDPPI/2019, PLG ID: 8837, 67688/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 3813, 67930/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 3813, 67931/SDPPI/2020, PLG ID: 3813, 74369/SDPPI/2021, PLG ID: 3813, 74998/SDPPI/2021, PLD ID: 10325. PLG ID: 4334: 39689/SDPPI/2015, 58849/SDPPI/2018, 60544/SDPPI/2019, 62443/SDPPI/2019, 62481/SDPPI/2019, 62637/SDPPI/2019, 62638/SDPPI/2019, 62825/SDPPI/2019, 62826/SDPPI/2019, 62827/SDPPI/2019, 62828/SDPPI/2019, 62957/SDPPI/2019, 62958/SDPPI/2019, 63076/SDPPI/2019, 63077/SDPPI/2019, 63078/SDPPI/2019, 63079/SDPPI/2019, 63080/SDPPI/2019, 63081/SDPPI/2019, 63082/SDPPI/2019, 63128/SDPPI/2019, 63129/SDPPI/2019, 63130/SDPPI/2019, 63131/SDPPI/2019, 63132/SDPPI/2019, 63133/SDPPI/2019, 63134/SDPPI/2019, 63135/SDPPI/2019, 63136/SDPPI/2019, 63137/SDPPI/2019, 63138/SDPPI/2019, 63139/SDPPI/2019, 63140/SDPPI/2019, 63147/SDPPI/2019, 63160/SDPPI/2019, OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 567 63161/SDPPI/2019, 63162/SDPPI/2019, 63286/SDPPI/2019, 63577/SDPPI/2019, 63578/SDPPI/2019, 63579/SDPPI/2019, 63580/SDPPI/2019, 63581/SDPPI/2019, 63582/SDPPI/2019, 63583/SDPPI/2019, 64515/SDPPI/2019, 64516/SDPPI/2019, 64639/SDPPI/2019, 64640/SDPPI/2019, 66006/SDPPI/2020, 66074/SDPPI/2020, 66603/SDPPI/2020, 67154/SDPPI/2020, 68316/SDPPI/2020, 71563/SDPPI/2020, 71835/SDPPI/2020, 72274/SDPPI/2020, 73488/SDPPI/2021, 73816/SDPPI/2021, 73954/SDPPI/2021, 74360/SDPPI/2021, 74525/SDPPI/2021, 74928/SDPPI/2021, 75296/SDPPI/2021, 76862/SDPPI/2021, 76974/SDPPI/2021, 77920/SDPPI/2021, 78452/SDPPI/2021, 80130/SDPPI/2022, 80858/SDPPI/2022, 82116/SDPPI/2022,80846/SDPPI/2022,81032/SDPPI/2022,81094/SDPPI/2022,82886/SDPPI/2022,82926/SDPPI/2022, 74998/SDPPI/2022. Israel MoC: 11-11052, 11-11252, 11-12320, 51-07681, 51-10011, 51-10360, 51-10361, 51-37428, 51-41889, 51-42830, 51- 42841, 51-43949, 51-46980, 51-47851, 51-52344, 51-54730, 51-55347, 51-57375, 51-58102, 51-58527, 51-63653, 51-64296, 51-65008, 51-65009, 51-65839, 51-65860, 51-65909, 51-65953, 51-66171, 51-66172, 51-66173, 51- 66259, 51-66383, 51-66390, 51-66415, 51-66601, 51-66602, 51-69416, 51-69417, 51-70460, 51-70461, 51-71498, 51-71601, 51-72848, 51-73078, 51-73720, 51-74243, 51-74291, 51-74339, 51-74356, 51-74361, 51-74441, 51- 74442, 51-74443, 51-74356, 51-74537, 51-74636, 51-74989, 51-75000, 51-75054, 51-74632, 51-74633, 51-74634, 51-74635, 51-74636, 51-74896, 51-74989, 51-75000, 51-75054, 51-75243, 51-75245, 51-75515, 51-76029, 51- 76247, 51-76311, 51-76312, 51-76422, 51-76971, 51-77001, 51-77099, 51-77882, 51-80024, 51-81786, 51-81807, 51-82314 55-02626, 55-06864, 55-06893, 55-06894, 55-07102, 55-07460, 55-07477, 55-07480, 55-07680, 55-07681, 55- 07789, 55-08250, 55-08456, 55-08739, 55-08803, 55-09135, 55-09396, 55-09600, 55-09601, 55-09617, 55-09618, 55-09683, 55-10011, 55-10360, 55-10361, 55-10614, 55-11599 63-63304, 63-66687, 63-67691, 63-67736,63-67180,63-73362,63-67180,63-73361,63-71587,11-12330,63-70375, 51-90346, 55-13788, 55-13787, 55-13785, 55-13789, 55-13786, 55-13903, 55-13946, 55-13947, 55-13949, 55- 13947, 55-13951, 55-14175, 55-14172, 55-14187, 55-14188, 51-87213, 55-14395, 55-14410, 55-14409, 51-888032, 55-14866, 55-14888, 51-88306, 51-88548, 51-88870, 51-89881, 11-11252, 51-89766, 51-89882, 51-89883, 55- 15760, 55-15761, 51-91118, 51-91119, 51-91460, 51-88548, 55-12193 Jamaica This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA Equipment Identifier: FR5CUEC, RS5.3, MQBS01, TSSRE4Uf, TSSSG4G5b, WPC003-1, Medium 5C_21, TSSRE4Td, FPK8 IMMO5D, CB2JCIBUSHL4, LTE-MBC-NAR2, TLVHM3IU-W, LTE-MBC-NAR2, LTE-MBC-NARTSSSG4G4, TSSTSc, TLAHW3IU-W, FS14T and FS14TK, WCH-186, WCH-185, WCH-183, 17101031, CONBOX-HIGH, MQB3 OI, MEDIUM 5C & COLOUR 5C, 17101023, 17101022, 17101032, 17101043, 17101041, 18020534, ARS5-B, 18020534, TSSRE4A, VK2, VW MIB2 Entry, MIB GLOBAL STANDARD PLUS, RS4, 18020534, 5WK50257/254/252/250/248/40398036/40406557/4038279, FS94, FS09,VW India 2.0 Low Radio,VW MIB Regio,F5CP42, MQBS01, WPC003-5, WPC003-1 Jordan TRC no.: TRC/LPD/2010/91, TRC/LPD/2014/9, TRC/LPD/2014/186, TRC/LPD/2014/214, TRC/LPD/2014/241, TRC/LPD/2014/248, TRC/LPD/2014/258, TRC/LPD/2014/274, TRC/LPD/2015/387, TRC/LPD/2016/170, TRC/LPD/2016/215, TRC/LPD/2016/216, TRC/LPD/2016/252, TRC/LPD/2016/353, TRC/LPD/2016/478, TRC/LPD/2016/538, TRC/LPD/2016/584, TRC/LPD/2016/591, TRC/LPD/2017/63, TRC/LPD/2017/254,...
  • Page 568 TRC/LPD/2018/272, TRC/LPD/2018/274, TRC/LPD/2018/381, TRC/LPD/2018/399, TRC/LPD/2018/489, TRC/LPD/2018/528, TRC/LPD/2018/529, TRC/LPD/2019/67, TRC/LPD/2019/152, TRC/LPD/2019/153, TRC/LPD/2019/155, TRC/LPD/2019/227, TRC/LPD/2019/233, TRC/LPD/2019/234, TRC/LPD/2021/215. TRC/SS/2010/48, TRC/SS/2014/127, TRC/SS/2015/221, TRC/SS/2015/222, TRC/SS/2016/476, TRC/SS/2019/212, TRC/31/7615/2020, TRC/31/5862/2022, TRC/32/6684/2023, TRC/31/11434/2023, TRC/31/11517/2023, TRC/34/6696/2023, TRC/31/11516/2023. TRC No.: T/4/11/11/... 194, 0354, 1200, 2394, 2538, 2926, 2950, 3338, 3339, 3474, 3502, 3506, 3512, 3641, 3680, 3681, 3900, 4215, 4350, 4352, 4387, 4549, 4554, 4555, 5616, 5621, 5649, 5653, 5896, 5898, 5974, 5976, 5977, 6082, 6435, 7192, 7216, 7218, 7716, 7777, 8007, 8163, 8164, 8205, 8225, 8226, 8227, 8230, 8278, 8281, 8660, 8677, 8680, 8793, 8910, 9184, 9229, 9236, 9351, 9352, 9585, 9851, 10124, 10354, 10488, 10752, 10753, 11026, 11078, 12260,194200,1199,2950,3512,4215,5397,5739,8102,9215,9217,932,2517,2612,2609,2608, 258, 382. Cameroon AGENCE DE REGULATION DES TELECOMMUNICATIONS CAMEROUN HOMOLOGATION D'EQUIPEMENT: 106/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH/CA, 125/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH/CA, 137/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 139/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 152/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 167/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA3, 170/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 172/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 271/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 273/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 287/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 293/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH, 301/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH/CA, 305/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 309/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 318/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 428/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 458/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 459/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 465/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH, 469/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 475/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 581/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 616/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 628/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 631/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 720/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 722/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 726/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 734/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 778/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA1, 788/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH/CA, 851/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 856/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 870/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH/CA2, 1129/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH/CA, 1151/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 1789/ART/DG/DT/SDNA/SNH, 1150/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 1152/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 135/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 289/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH,295/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 492/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 655/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 656/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 663/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 2784/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 834/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 837/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 941/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 36/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH, 79/ART/DG/DT/SDNSEA/SNH Malaysia CIDF15000490, CIDF15000578, CIDF17000143, MRR14F, ARS4-B, MIB3 OI RAAT/44A/0219/S(19-0487), RAAU/05C/0415/S(14-3022), RAAU/33C/1015/S(15-0535), RAAU/35C/1115/S(15-0536), RAAU/40C/1215/S(15-4937), RAAU/48C/0716/S(16-2025), RAAU/57A/0111/S(10-2112), RAAY/84A/0618/S(18-2241), RAAY/85A/0618/S(18-2242), RAAY/86A/0618/S(18-2378), RAAY/87A/0718/S(18-2596), RAAY/89A/0718/S(18-3107), RAAY/92A/1218/S(18-4731), RAAY/98A/0620/S(20-2103), RAFC/18A/0618/S(18-2470), RALM/22A/0315/S(15-0480), RALM/30B/1020/S(20-4379), RALM/34A/0616/S(16-0899), RALM/35A/0716/S(16-2324), RALM/43B/0221/S(21- 0619), RALM/44A/0517/S(17-1383), RALM/45A/0517/S(17-1576), RALM/66A/0618/S(18-2468), RALM/67A/0618/S(18-2474), RALM/68A/0618/S(18-2473), RALM/69A/1018/S(18-3829), RALM/77A/0219/S(19- 0174), RANI/26C/1215/S(15-4798, RANI/27B/0314/S(14-0418), RANI/27C/1215/S(15-4802), RANI/72B/0215/S(14- 3024), RAQP/76A/1121/S(21-5310), RAVG/39U/0616/S(16-1865), RBEF/04A/0317/S(17-0584), RBEF/30A/0919/S(19-...
  • Page 569 3306), RDDK/23A/0916/S(16-3288), RDDK/68A/0418/S(18-1521), RDDK/69B/1220/S(20-5452), RDDK/72A/0518/S(18-1697), RDDK/74A/0618/S(18-2223), RDDK/83A/1018/S(18-4152), RDDK/84A/1018/S(18- 4153), RDDS/27A/0319/S(19-1029), RDFX/09A/0821/S(21-4059), RDFX/10A/0921/S(21-4061), RDFX/11A/0921/S(21- 4060), RFCL/09A/0218/S(18-0609), RFCL/13A/0618/S(18-2379), RFCL/14A/0618/S(18-2543), RFCL/15A/0718/S(18- 2544), RFCL/18A/0718/S(18-2529), RFCL/19A/0718/S(18-2545), RFCL/20A/0718/S(18-2718), RFCL/21A/0718/S(18- 2717), RCFL/22A/0818/S(18-3109), RFCL/23A/0818/S(18-3153), RCFL/24A/0818/S(18-3152), RFCL/26A/0918/S(18- 3810), RFCL/27A/0918/S(18-3812), RFCL/28A/1018/S(18-3977), RFCL/29A/1018/S(18-4127), RFCL/30A/1018/S(18- 4129), RFCL/31A/1018/S(18-3976), RFCL/33A/0619/S(19-2422), RFCL/34A/0619/S(19-2421), RFCL/35A/0719/S(19- 2874), RFCL/36A/0719/S(19-2875), RFCL/41A/0220/S(20-0390), RFCL/42A/0220/S(20-0391), RFCL/44A/0320/S(20- 1385), RFCP/36A/0321/S(21-1381), RFGF/05A/0519/S(19-2090), RGBZ/01A/0318/S(18-0918), RGBZ/03A/0320/S(20- 1253), RGEZ/25A/0920/S(20-3544), RGEZ/31A/0421/S(21-1529), RGEZ/36A/0521/S(21-2216), RGIG/01A/0220/S(20- 0593), RGIG/02A/0220/S(20-0591), RGLA/06A/1220/S(20-5384), RGNU/03A/0221/S(21-0560),RCCT/02G/1021/S(21- 4512),RAQP/73A/1121/S(21-5209),RAQP/76A/1121/S(21-5310),RAQP/75A/1121/S(21-5309),RRCCT/19G/1121/S(21- 4614),RFGF/05A/0519/S(19-2090),RALM/77A/0219/S(19-0174),RALM/54B/1221/S(21-5945),RALM/34A/0616/S(16- 0899),RGLN/26A/0122/S(22-0336),RAQP/77A/0222/S(22-0908),RGEZ/45A/0322/S(22-1385),RAVG/39U/0616/S(16- 1865),RCCT/46B/0317/S(17-0740),RCCT/47B/0317/S(17-0739),RCCT/64B/0517/S(17-0741), RAAU/40C/1215/S(15- 4937),RAAU/57A/0111/S(10-2112), RAVG/39U/0616/S(16-1865), RDDK/23A/0916/S(16-3288), RAQP/84A/0822/S(22-3841), RBEF/30A/0919/S(19-3760), RAQP/84A/0922/S(22-4095), RAQP/88A/1022/S(22-4485), RALM/75B/1122/S(22-5510), RALM/74B/1122/S(22-5508), RALM/22A/0315/S(15-0480), RAQP/84A/0223/S(23- 0548), RGLA/06A/1220/S(20-5384), RGIH/67A/0522/S(22-2480). Morocco AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément_Date d’agrément MR 5371ANRT2010_05.12.2019, MR 5611ANRT2010_27.05.2010, MR 5835ANRT2010_28.08.2020, MR 7906ANRT2013_06.03.2013, MR 8106ANRT2013_29.04.2013, MR 9102ANRT2014_14.03.2014, MR 9107ANRT2014_18.03.2014, MR 9126ANRT2014_26.03.2014, MR 9186ANRT2014_22.04.2014, MR 9668ANRT2014_30.09.2014, MR 9741ANRT2014_24.10.2014, MR 9778ANRT2014_11.11.2014, MR 9904ANRT2014_19.12.2014, MR 9918ANRT2014_22.12.2014, MR 11030ANRT2015_04.11.2015, MR 11264ANRT2016_08.01.2016, MR 11554ANRT2016_15.03.2016, MR 12089ANRT2016_15.06.2016, MR 12123ANRT2016_22.06.2016, MR 12372ANRT2016_16.08.2016, MR 12623ANRT2016_11.10.2016, MR 12755ANRT2016_07.11.2016, MR 12756ANRT2016_07.11.2016, MR 12901ANRT2016_30.11.2016, MR 13217ANRT2017_27.01.2017, MR 13255ANRT2017_09.02.2017, MR 13576ANRT2017_20.03.2017, MR 13772ANRT2017_13.04.2017, MR 13774ANRT2017_13.04.2017, MR 13851ANRT2017_03.05.2017, MR 13892ANRT2017_03.05.2017, MR 13900ANRT2017_04.05.2017, MR 14830ANRT2017_28.09.2017, MR 15171ANRT2017_22.11.2017, MR 15669ANRT2018_31.01.2018, MR 15674ANRT2018_31.01.2018, MR 15675ANRT2018_31.01.2018, MR 15925ANRT2018_27.02.2018, MR 16263ANRT2018_06.04.2018, MR 16606ANRT2018_17.05.2018, MR 16657ANRT2018_23.05.2018, MR 16726ANRT2018_30.05.2018, MR 16794ANRT2018_05.06.2018, MR 16860ANRT2018_18.06.2018, MR 16861ANRT2018_18.06.2018, MR 16905ANRT2018_21.06.2018, MR 16906ANRT2018_21.06.2018, MR 16907ANRT2018_21.06.2018, MR 16908ANRT2018_21.06.2018, MR 17015ANRT2018_03.07.2018, MR 17016ANRT2018_03.07.2018, MR 17079ANRT2018_11.07.2018, MR 17080ANRT2018_11.07.2018, MR 17201ANRT2018_06.08.2018, MR 17202ANRT2018_06.08.2018, MR 17203ANRT2018_06.08.2018, MR 17204ANRT2018_06.08.2018, MR 17504ANRT2018_14.09.2018, MR 17505ANRT2018_14.09.2018, MR 17528ANRT2018_20.09.2018,...
  • Page 570 MR 19769ANRT2019_15.05.2019, MR 20859ANRT2019_11.09.2019, MR 20901ANRT2019_13.09.2019, MR 20902ANRT2019_13.09.2019, MR 20944ANRT2019_19.09.2019, MR 21472ANRT2019_26.11.2019, MR 21473ANRT2019_28.11.2019, MR 21807ANRT2019_23.12.2019, MR 22495ANRT2020_26.02.2020, MR 23231ANRT2020_26.05.2020, MR 23405ANRT2020_16.03.2020, MR 24001ANRT2020_13.05.2020, MR 24106ANRT2020_20.05.2020, MR 25982ANRT2020_14.10.2020, MR 26081ANRT2020_22.10.2020, MR 26333ANRT2020_12.11.2020, MR 27808ANRT2021_13.03.2021, MR 30377ANRT2021_14.10.2021, MR 31268ANRT2022_04.01.2022,MR 29628ANRT2021_02.08.2021,MR 30406ANRT2021_24.10.2021,MR 30494ANRT2021_2 MR 30377ANRT2021_14.10.2021, MR 30377ANRT2021_26.10.2022, MR 8106ANRT2013_26.10.2022, MR 9186ANRT2014_26.10.2022, MR 9668ANRT2014_26.10.2022, MR 11264ANRT2016_27.10.2022, MR 17528ANRT2018_27.10.2022, MR 9126ANRT2014_27.10.2022, MR 35384ANRT2022_21.11.2022, MR 35382ANRT2022_21.11.2022, MR 35387ANRT2022_21.11.2022, MR 35393ANRT2022_21.11.2022, MR 36711ANRT2023_10.02.2023, MR 25982ANRT2020_14.10.2020, MR 31772ANRT2020_17.02.2022. Mauritania AGREE PAR L’ARE MAURITANIE Numéro d’agrément_Date d’agrément: 0375/ARE/2016_29.11.2016, 410/ARE/2017_03.05.2017, 0411/ARE/2017_03.05.2017, 0483/ARE/2018_05.04.2018, 0491/ARE/2018_15.05.2018, 0493/ARE/2018_16.05.2018, 0518/ARE/2018_19.06.2018, 0519/ARE/2018_19.06.2018, 0520/ARE/2018_19.06.2018, 0523/ARE/2018_19.07.2018, 0524/ARE/2018_19.07.2018, 0525/ARE/2018_19.07.2018, 0537/ARE/2018_30.07.2018, 0538/ARE/2018_30.07.2018, 0542/ARE/2018_08.08.2018, 0587/ARE/2018_04.12.2018, 0588/ARE/2018_04.12.2018, 0591/ARE/2018_05.12.2018, 0597/ARE/2018_13.12.2018, 0598/ARE/2018_13.12.2018, 0630/ARE/2019_25.02.2019, 0647/ARE/2019_30.04.2019, 0649/ARE/2019_30.04.2019, 0650/ARE/2019_30.04.2019, 0664/ARE/2019_27.05.2019, 0665/ARE/2019_27.05.2019, 0667/ARE/2019_27.05.2019, 0712/ARE/2018_04.11.2019, 0713/ARE/2018_04.11.2019, 0742/ARE/2020_20.01.2020, 0796/ARE/2020_11.05.2020, 0839/ARE/2020_21.09.2020, 0840/ARE/2020_21.09.2020, 0869/ARE/2020_17.11.2020, 0869/ARE/2019_16.11.2022, 0874/ARE/2020_26.11.2020, 0971/ARE/2021_20.07.2021, 0979/ARE/2021_09.08.2021, 1128/ARE/2021_27.06.2022, 1127/ARE/2021_27.06.2022, 1173/ARE/2022_17.10.2022, 232/ARE/2023_13.02.2023 Mexico NYCE: NYC-2102C0E15067, NYC-2102C0E19765,NYC-2102C0E21985, NYC-2202C0E14311, NYC-2202C0E14310, NYC-2202C0E14309, NYC-CEDT1456-21, NYC-2202C0E22124, NYC-2202C0E22129, NYC-2202C0E22336, NYC- 2202C0E22232, NYC-2102C0E19765, NYC-2202C0E21270 ANCE:ANC2101C00017489,ANC2201C00003403,ANC2201C00004471 UL:ULM-NOM-10526,ULM-NOM-10528,ULM-NOM-10533, IFETEL: IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/0311/2018, IFT-008-2015, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/10559/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/9797/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/9793/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/9791/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/9792/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/9796/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/9788/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/0029/2021, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/7577/2020, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/6918/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/6915/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/1911/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE2294/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/2516/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/1766/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/3659/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG- AUSE/3672/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/4769/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-AUSE/1540/2022, IFT/223/UCS/DG-...
  • Page 571 RCPBOMR12-1538, RCPBOMR14-0766, RCPBOMR14-0922, RCPBOMR17-0598, RCPBOMQ19-0594, RCPCOAR18- 1800, RCPGEAD16-1700, RCPHAMM10-0514, RCPHEBS14-0180, RCPHEBC18-2099, RCPHEFS19-1702, RCPHEFS20- 1469, RCPHERS19-1678, RCPGEAD16-1700, RCPGECB14-0464, RCPLGLG16-0952, RCPLGMI19-1163, RCPVIVW20- 0478, RCPVOHT13-1485, RCPVOMI15-0115, RCPVWFS16-0693, RCPVWL414-0775, RCPVWL414-0775-A1, RCPVWL617-0023, RCPVWMI17-0707, RCPVWMI17-0902, RCPVWMI18-2151, RCPVWMI18-2169, RCPVWMI14- 0755, RCPVWMI14-1819, RCPVWMI14-1819, RCPVWMI14-1820, RCPVWMI15-0640, RCPVWMI16-0590, RCPVWMI16-1445, RCPVWMM17-1053, RCPVWVW17-0714, RCPVWVW17-0714-A1, RLVBHTS19-1995, RLVBOLR14-1873, RLVCO1820-0821, RLVCOAR15-0008, RLVCOBC16-1823, RLVCO1820-0821, RLVCOFS18-2029, RLVCOFS18-2030, RLVDER316-1666, RLVDER316-2005, RLVHE0119-0720, RLVHEBC15-0293, RLVHEBC16-0682, RLVHEFS13-1688, RLVHEFS13-1690, RLVHEFS14-1515, RLVHEFS18-1288, RLVHEFS18-1565, RLVHEFS19-0647, RLVHEFS19-1298, RLVHEFS20-0533, RLVHEFS20-1335, RLVHEFS20-1336, RLVHEFS20-1420, RLVHELC11-1185, RLVHEMQ19-1757, RLVHEMQ19-1758, RLVHEMW19-1757, RLVHERS17-0286, RLVHUHU19-1065, RLVHUTS20- 1781, RLVMABN18-1512, RLVMABN18-1512-A1, RLVMAMQ18-0363, RLVMAMQ20-2464, RLVVENB20-1419, RLVVICO19-1023, RLVVIFP20-1412, RLVVIKO18-0155, RLVVIME19-1022, RLVVIME19-1023, RLVVIME20-2934, RLVVWFS17-2122, RLVVWFS17-2122-A1, RLVVW1718-1092, RLVVW1718-1169, RLVVW1718-1170, RLVVW1718- 1171, RLVVW1718-1314, RLVVW1718-1315, RLVVW1718-1316, RLVVW1718-1317, RLVVW1718-1507, RLVVW1718-1508, RLVVW1718-1509, RLVVW1718-1517, RLVVW1718-1518, RLVVW1718-1519, RLVVW1718-1567, RLVVW1718-1568, RLVVW1718-1789, RLVVW1718-1790, RLVVW1718-1928, RLVVW1718-1929, RLVVW1719-1795, RLVVW1818-1248, RLVVW1818-1249, RLVVW1818-1258, RLVVW1819-0009, RLVVW1819-0023, RTIAUCB18-0153, RTIAUMI14-1863, RTILECO19-1805, RTILECO21-2443, RTILGTL19-0483, RTILGTL19-1617, RTILGTL20-727, RTIMOLT20-0870, RTIMOLT20-1047, RTIVWCO19-1185,RCPHEPS21-4334,RCPHERS21-4335,RCPSCAG21- 4523,RCPBOF522-0910,RCPVWMI22-1384,RLVBOFR22-2006,RCPVWL922-2123,RLVMAMQ22-3409. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: —(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y —(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Mongolia Монгол Улсад баталгаажсан ID: A17000102, A17000116b, A17000165, A18000077, A18000240, A18000261, A18000266, A18000267, A19000462, A19000474, A19000548, A19000579, A19000574, A19000569, A19000578, A19000580, A20000040, A20000074, A20000098, A20000240, A20000253, A20000270,A20000124,A17000128,A17000122,A20000186,A18000201,A180002013,A18000073,A18000216,A18000261 A19000423, A19000447, A19000446, A19000462, A19000474, A19000475, A19000476, A19000473, A19000724, A19000751, A19000547, A19000548, A19000569TSSRE4Uf, A19000578, A19000580, A19000579, A19000581, A16000088, A20000040, A20000253, A22000651. Nigeria Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission. NCC/TSNi/WN/TA/CERT/: 0043/2011, 0679/2015, 0884/2015, 0922/2015, 0923/2015, 0947/2016, 1071/2016, 1247/2016, 1454/2017, 1567/2017, 1571/2017, 1650/2017, 1691/2017, 1692/2017, 2061/2018, 2062/2018, 2236/2018, 2332/2018, 2333/2018, 2334/2018, 2335/2018, 2338/2018, 2339/2018, 2340/2018, 2383/2018, 2384/2018, 2385/2018, 2427/2018, 2466/2018, 2467/2018, 2525/2018, 2838/2019, 2862/2019, 2935/2019, 2951/2019, 3137/2019, 3138/2019, 3223/2019, 3224/2019, 3401/2020, 3492/2020, 3493/2020, 3738/2020, 3948/2020, 3983/2020, 3989/2020, 4019/2021, 4176/2021, 4218/2021,...
  • Page 572 NCC/TSNi/TA/CERT: 435/2022 Oman TRA/TA-R/0555/12_D172338, TRA/TA-R/0984/13_D100428, TRA/TA-R/1049/09, TRA/TA-R/1298-01/10_D090258, TRA/TA/R/1448/10_D090258, TRA/TA-R/1575/13_TRAUSR001251, TRA/TA-R/1585/13_TRAUSR001251, TRA/TA- R/1630/13_D100428, TRA/TA-R/1697/14_D100428, TRA/TA-R/1733/14_D080134, TRA/TA-R/1743/14_D090016, TRA/TA-R/1849-14_D090258, TRA/TA-R/1995/14_D100428, TRA/TA-R/2160/14_D080134, TRA/TA- R/2197/14_D100428, TRA/TA-R/2210/14_D080134, TRA/TA-R/2235/14_D080134, TRA/TA-R/2289/14_D080134, TRA/TA-R/2444/15_D090016, TRA/TA-R/2609/15_D100428, TRA/TA-R/2903/15_D080134, TRA/TA-R/3007- 16_D080314, TRA/TA-R/3315/16_DA80134, TRA/TA-R/3331/16_D080134, TRA/TA-R/3370/16, TRA/TA- R/3621/16_D080134, TRA/TA-R/3701/16_D080134, TRA/TA-R/3848/17_D080134, TRA/TA-R/3957/17_D080134, TRA/TA-R/4227/17_D090024, TRA/TA-R/4353/17_D080134, TRA/TA-R/5130/18_23/01/2018, TRA/TA- R/5241/18_D172249, TRA/TA-R/5442/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5443/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5617/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5725/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5772/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5774/18_D100428, TRA/TA- R/5819/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5820/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5884/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5885/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5886/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/5887/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6021/18_D100428, TRA/TA- R/6022/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6023/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6024/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6132/18_D172249, TRA/TA-R/6166/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6188/18_D172249, TRA/TA/R/6348/18_D090258, TRA/TA/R/6363/18_D090258, TRA/TA-R/6366/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6372/18_D100428, TRA/TA- R/6527/18_D172249, TRA/TA-R/6535/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6537/18_D177249, TRA/TA-R/6616/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6695/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/6696/18_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7145/19_D172338, TRA/TA- R/7240/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7244/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7383/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7384/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7481/19_D172338, TRA/TA-R/7524/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/7604/19_D100428, TRA/TA- R/7704/19_D090024, TRA/TA-R/7752/19_D090024, TRA/TA-R/7867/19_D192564, TRA/TA-R/7871/19_D192564, TRA/TA-R/8052/19_D090024, TRA/TA-R/8056/19_D090024, TRA/TA-R/8084/19_D192564, TRA/TA- R/8150/19_D172338, TRA/TA-R/8158/19_D172338, TRA/TA-R/8171/19_D100428, TRA/TA-R/8240/19_D172338, TRA/TA-R/8480/19_D192564, TRA/TA-R/8649/19_D090024, TRA/TA-R/8749/19_D172338, TRA/TA- R/9347/20_D172338, TRA/TA-R/9664/20_D172338, TRA/TA-R/9675/20_D192564, TRA/TA-R/9676/20_D192564, TRA/TA-R/9682/20_D100428, TRA/TA/R/10209/20_D172249, TRA/TA-R/10345/20_D090024, TRA/TA- R/10363/20_D100428, TRA/TA-R/11110/21_D172338, TRA/TA-R/11179/21_D172249,TRA/TA- R/10614/20_D172249,TRA/TA-R/11980/21_D172338,TRA/TA-R/12440/21_D172338,TRA/TA- R/12742/21_D090258,TRA/TA-R/12743/21_D090258,TRA/TA-R/13040/22_D172338, TRA/TA- R/11110/21_D172338, TRA/TA/6945/2014_17/09/2014, TRA/TA-R/15114/23_D172338, TRA/TA- R/13211/22_D172338. Pakistan Pakistan Telecom Authority (TAC No:) Approved by PTA (2015), Approved by PTA (2016), Approved by PTA (2018), Approved by PTA (2020), Approved by PTA..., 9.090/2017, 9.10026/2019, 9.1048/2018, 9.1184/2021, 9.160/2021, 9.164/2021, 9.215/2015, 9.222/2015, 9.245/2020, 9.283/2020, 9.3012/2018, 9.399/2020, 9.484/2020, 9.499/2018, 9.581/2020, 9.652/2016, 9.687/2017, 9.9112/2019, 9.9227/2019, 9.9288/2019, 9.929/2018, 9.93/2021, 9.977/2015, 9.9837/2019, 9.9838/2019, 9.9903/2019,9.10026/2019,9.283/2020,9.245/2020,9.399/2020,9.283/2020,9.245/2020,9.399/2020,9.484/2020,9.581/2020 9.164/2021, 9.160/2021, 9.184/2021, 9.124/2023.
  • Page 573 2013-02-I-0027, 2014-06-I-000122, 2014-12-I-000352, 2015-02-I-000054, 2015-03-I-000085, 2015-03-I-000092, 2015-11-I-000344, 2015-11-I-000346, 2016-02-I-000036, 2016-03-I-000072, 2016-05-I-000138, 2016-07-I- 000174, 2016-07-I-000186, 2016-10-I-000256, 2016-11-I-000293, 2016-11-I-000311, 2017-06-I-0000162, 2017- 06-I-0000171, 2017-06-I-0000172, 2017-06-I-0000173, 2017-06-I-0000194, 2017-07-I-0000220, 2018-04-I- 000169, 2018-05-I-000179, 2018-05-I-000192, 2018-06-I-000212, 2018-06-I-000220, 2018-07-I-000299, 2018- 07-I-000322, 2018-07-I-000353, 2018-08-I-000364, 2018-08-I-000369, 2018-08-I-000380, 2018-08-I-000381, 2018-09-I-000419, 2018-09-I-000421, 2018-09-I-000422, 2018-09-I-000423, 2018-09-I-000424, 2018-10-I- 000480, 2018-10-I-000481, 2018-10-I-000492, 2018-11-I-000585, 2018-11-I-000586, 2018-11-I-000596, 2018- 11-I-000597, 2018-11-I-000612, 2019-01-I-000071, 2019-03-I-000155, 2019-03-I-000156, 2019-05-I-000236, 2019-05-I-000237, 2019-05-I-000243, 2019-05-I-000245, 2019-05-I-000253, 2019-06-I-0289, 2019-06-I-0295, 2019-07-I-0335, 2019-07-I-0341, 2019-07-I-0353, 2019-07-I-0396, 2019-08-I-0442, 2019-09-I-0517, 2019-10-I- 0560, 2019-10-I-0561, 2019-11-I-0595, 2019-11-I-0596, 2019-11-I-0640, 2020-02-I-0111, 2020-02-I-0125, 2020- 02-I-0140, 2020-03-I-00198, 2020-07-I-0417, 2020-07-I-0455, 2020-07-I-0531, 2020-07-I-0532, 2020-09-I-0664, 2020-11-I-0783, 2020-11-I-0825, 2020-11-I-0826, 2020-11-I-0832, 2020-11-I-0851, 2020-11-I-0868, 2020-12-I- 0881, 2021-01-I-0035, 2021-03-I-0130, 2021-09-I-0539, 2021-09-I-0560,2021-11-I-0678,2021-12-I-0781,2021- 12-I-0783,2022-02-I-00862022-02-I-0072,202-02-I-0089,2022-04-I-0275,2022-08-I-0497, 2022-08-I-04517, 2022-08-I-0516, 2022-08-I-0528 y 2017-09-I-0000328, 2023-01-I-0044, 2023-01-I-0052 y 2018-07-I-000299, 2023-01-I-0049 y 2018-06-I-000220, 2020-11-I-0832, 2022-03-I-00130. 1297/2019, 1298/2019. Este vehiculo posee el siguiente componente de radiofrecuencias, homologado por la CONATEL – Paraguay: Llave Inalámbrica Marca HELLA, Modelo FS19. Fabricado por HELLA Germany. Philippines NTC, Type Approved No.: ESD-1105427C, ESD-1105633C, ESD-1206775C, ESD-1308271C, ESD-1408668C, ESD-1408747C, ESD-1408917C, ESD-1409834C, ESD-1409181C, ESD-1409770C, ESD-1510139C, ESD-1510297C, ESD-1510396C, ESD-1510397C, ESD-1511095C, ESD-1612168C, ESD-1612188C, ESD-1613057C, ESD-1613431C, ESD-1613454C, ESD-1714358C, ESD-1714837C, ESD-1714838C, ESD-1714839C, ESD-1715123C, ESD-1716172C, ESD-1816403C, ESD-1816404C, ESD-1816419C, ESD-1816997C, ESD-1817283C, ESD-1817335C, ESD-1817369C, ESD-1817501C, ESD-1817548C, ESD-1817853C, ESD-1817897C, ESD-1817898C, ESD-1817899C, ESD-1817900C, ESD-1818098C, ESD-1818419C, ESD-1918733C, ESD-1918734C, ESD-1918735C, ESD-1918843C, ESD-1918844C, ESD-1919228C, ESD-1919230C, ESD-1919232C, ESD-1919296C, ESD-1919297C, ESD-1919418C, ESD-1919559C, ESD-1919739C, ESD-1919803C, ESD-1919804C, ESD-1919996C, ESD-1920171C, ESD-1920172C, ESD-1920173C, ESD-1920174C, ESD-1920175C, ESD-1920724C, ESD-1920725C, ESD-1919739C, ESD-1920803C, ESD-2021903C, ESD-2021997C, ESD-2021998C ESD-CPE-1817719C, ESD-CPE-1920803, ESD-CPE-2003542, ESD-CPE-2003561, ESD-CPE-2103674, ESD-GEC- 1402882, ESD-RCE-2022725, ESD-RCE-2023283, ESD-RCE-2024041, ESD-RCE-2024379, ESD-RCE-2125478,ESD- CPE-2103674,ESD-RCE-21257185,ESD-RCE-2127184,ESD-RCE-2127226,ESD-RCE-2128032,ESD-RCE-2228946, ESD-RCE-2024041, ESD-RCE-2229380 Qatar ICT/QATAR/RT/2010/R-1978, ICT/QATAR/RT/2012/R-1878, ICT/QATAR/RT/2013/R-3240, ICT/QATAR/RT/2014/R- 3818, ICT/QATAR/RT/2014/R-3856, ICT/QATAR/RT/2014/R-3957 CRA/SA/2014/R-4097, CRA/SA/2014/R-4122, CRA/SA/2014/R-4315, CRA/SA/2014/R-4361, CRA/SA/2014/R-4412, CRA/SA/2015/R-4596, CRA/SA/2015/R-4714, CRA/SA/2015/R-5136, CRA/SA/2015/R-5137, CRA/SA/2015/R-5151, CAR/SA/2016/R-5255, CRA/SA/2016/R-5455, CRA/SA/2016/R-5667, CRA/SA/2016/R-5808, CRA/SA/2017/R-5980,...
  • Page 574 CRA/SA/2018/R-7213, CRA/SA/2018/R-7214, CRA/SA/2018/R-7262, CRA/SA/2018/R-7263, CRA/SA/2019/R-7728 CRA/SM/2018/R-7418, CRA/SM/2018/R-7422, CRA/SM/2018/R-7417, CRA/SM/2018/R-7447, CRA/SM/2018/R-7460, CRA/SM/2018/R-7447, CRA/SM/2018/R-7551, CRA/SM/2018/R-7553, CRA/SM/2018/R-7554, CRA/SM/2018/R-7562, CRA/SM/2019/R-7682, CRA/SM/2019/R-7689, CRA/SM/2019/R-7761, CRA/SM/2019/R-7763, CRA/SM/2019/R-7812, CRA/SM/2019/R-7827, CRA/SM/2019/R-7874, CRA/SM/2019/R-7983, CRA/SM/2019/R-8053, CRA/SM/2019/R-8054, CRA/SM/2019/R-8113, CRA/SM/2019/R-8147, CRA/SM/2019/R-8148, CRA/SM/2019/R-8187, CRA/SM/2019/R-8205, CRA/SM/2019/R-8206, CRA/SM/2019/R-8300, CRA/SM/2020/R-8451, CRA/SM/2020/R-8465, CRA/SM/2020/S- 0004065, CRA/SM/2020/S-0004790, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005129, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005140, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005156, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005157, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005255, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005662, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005786, CRA/SM/2021/S-0006561, CRA/SM/2021/S-0006995,CRA/SM/2020/S-0006251,CRA/SM/2021/S- 0008089,CRA/SM/2021/S-0008566,CRA/SM/2021/S-0008868,CRA/SM/2021/S-0008893,CRA/SM/2022/S- 0009072,CRA/SM/2022/S-0009977, CRA/SM/2023/S-0012794, CRA/SM/2020/S-0005662, CRA/SM/2022/S-009342 Rwanda RURA/1010402/2019/L123_23.10.2019, RURA/1010402/2019/L128_21.10.2019, RURA/1010402/2020/L1069, RURA/1010402/2020/L1705_20.05.2020, RURA/101042/2020/L6997_24.09.2020, RURA/ICT/AUT/200140090_17.11.2020, RURA/ICT/AUT/200140122_17.11.2020, RURA/ICT/AUT/210165696_10.06.2021, RURA/ICT/AUT/210172215_21.07.2021, RURA/ICT/AUT/210172964_30.07.2021, RURA/ICT/AUT/210178685_30.08.2021, RURA/ICT/AUT/210190642_22.10.2021,RURA/ICT/AUT/210148185_31.01.2021,RURA/ICT/AUT/210149593_18.02.2021 RURA/ICT/AUT/220264765_05.10.2022, RURA/ICT/AUT/220270155_28.10.2022, RURA/ICT/AUT/220272401_14.11.2022, RURA/ICT/AUT/220273457_15.11.2022. 026HD/ICT/RURA/018_11.01.2018, 093HD/ICT/RURA/018_19.02.2018, 181HD/ICT/RURA/019_07.03.2019, 192HD/ICT/RURA/018_13.04.2018, 265HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.05.2018, 266HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.05.2018, 277HD/ICT/RURA/019_11.04.2019, 278HD/ICT/RURA017_25.07.2017, 279HD/ICT/RURA/019_11.04.2019, 313HD/ICT/RURA/018_08.06.2018, 334HD/ICT/RURA/018_13.06.2018, 335HD/ICT/RURA/018_14.06.2018, 343HD/ICT/RURA/017_22.08.2017, 348HD/ICT/RURA/019_10.05.2019, 349HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.06.2018, 355HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.06.2018, 356HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.06.2018, 357HD/ICT/RURA/018_22.06.2018, 368HD/ICT/RURA/018_29.06.2018, 399HD/ICT/RURA/019_03.06.2019, 401HD/ICT/RURA/018_09.07.2018, 433HD/ICT/RURA/019_19.06.2019, 444HD/ICT/RURA/019_19.06.2019, 448HD/ICT/RURA/018_27.07.2018, 449HD/ICT/RURA/018_27.07.2018, 537HD/ICT/RURA/018_14.09.2018, 607HD/ICT/RURA/018_11.10.2018, 645GM/ICT/RURA/019_11.09.2019, 646GM/ICT/RURA/019_11.09.2019, 712HD/ICT/RURA/018_04.12.2018, 742HD/ICT/RURA/018_14.12.2018, 1350HD/CMR/RURA/015_08.12.2015. Zambia Type Approval Ref: ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2015/3/20, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2015/3/21, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2015/10/19, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2015/12/3, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2015/12/4, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2016/1/2, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2016/11/1, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2016/9/21, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2017/6/7, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2017/6/17, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2017/9/27, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/5/23, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/6/20, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/8/38, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/8/39, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/8/40, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/8/41, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/10, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/10, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/15, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/16, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/17, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/18, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/19, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/20, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/21, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/24, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/25, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/26, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/10/27, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/16, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/2/44, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/2/45, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/23, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/37, ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/4/8,...
  • Page 575 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2021/11/9,ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2021/9/40,ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2021/11/10,ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2020/07/121. Senegal AGREE PAR ARPT SENEGAL Numéro d’agrément : XXXXXX/AG/ER 071845/AG/ER,071821/AG/ER,071755/AG/ER,071710/AG/ER,071617/AG/ER,071414/AG/ER,071395/AG/ER,071394/AG/ER 072100/AG/ER, 072164/AG/ER, 072164/AG/ER, 072183/AG/ER, 072231/AG/ER, 072453/AG/ER Serbia И005 17, И005 18, И005 19, ИH005 19, И005 20, И005 21, И005 22, И005 23 И011 17, И011 18, И011 19, И011 20, И011 21 , И011 22, И011 23 И038 19, И038 20, И038 21, И038 22, И038 23 И038 21/00583 01025,И038 21/00719 01145,И038 21/00738 01159,И038 21/00790 01208,И038 22/00861 01272, И038 22/01072 01264, И038 22/01219 01264, И038 22/00319 00774i, И038 22/01301 01264, И038 22/01403 01356 P1615004100, P1617143100, P1617143200, P1617197200, P1618131400, P1619000500, P1619047400, P1619048600, P1619053300, P1619073700, P1619073800, P1619083400, P1619095800, P1619127100, P1619130700, P1619134100, P1619135700, P1619153400, P1619154200, P1619193000, P1620011000, P1620037400, P1620052200, P1620093500, P1620106000, P1620166400, P1620167300, P1621036300, P1620069300, P1620151500, P1620169600, P1621036300, P1621077600, P1621134700,P1621089400,P1621105500,P1621134400,P1621134600,P1621134500,P1621136600,P1621147800,P16211 P1622022300, P1622046900, P1622047300, P1622056200, P1622022100, P1620166400. И1622110000, И1622123100, И1622122900, И1622131100, И1622131700, И1622135700, И1622135600, И1622139200, И1622141800, И1622147900, И1622178100, И1622178000, И1623010900, И1623016700 34540-23/19-11, 34540-24/19-9, 34540-49/21-6, 34540-194/21-3, 34540-200/17-5, 34540-242/18-4, 34540- 242/21-334540-307/19-3, 34540-263/19-4, 34540-436/19-3, 34540-768/18-5, 34540-871/18-4, 34540-1313/16- 3,34540-194/21-3,34540-198/21-13,34540-228/21-5,34540-242/21-3,34540-25/22-5,34540-40/22-13,34540- 77/22-10, 34540-146/22-5, 34540-144/22-3, 34540-148/22-6, 34540-147/22-8, 34540-165/22-5. Singapore Fig. 82 Kennzeichnung gemäß Funkkommunikationsgesetz. Complies with IMDA Standards: DA103238, DA103787, DA103858, DA104328, DA104682, DA104812, DA105282, DA107248, DA107974, DB03227, DB101762, DB103858, DB106879, DB107220, DB106879. Registration Number: G1594-19, G1858-19, G5521-19, N0039-21, N0147-19, N0254-17, N0254-17, N0356-20, OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 576 N0688-15, N0690-18, N0708-17, N0715-15, N0721-15, N0871-19, N0982-20, N1085-21, N1159-18, N1453-20, N1599-19, N1629-17, N1630-17, N1699-17, N2052-18, N2053-18, N2069-19, N2152-20, N2285-19, N2404-19, N2405-19, N2415-18, N2416-18, N2417-18, N2418-20, N2420-18, N2565-18, N2673-18, N2700-18, N2706-19, N2853-18, N2860-16, N2991-18, N2992-18, N3005-18, N3083-18, N3277-20, N3278-20, N3333-13, N3548-18, N3555-18, N3577-18, N3688-18, N3888-16, N3970-18, N3971-18, N4123-19, N4334-20, N4347-21, N4839-18, N4848-18, N4877-19, N4878-19, N4887-19, N4975-17, N5068-19, N5069-19, N5081-20, N5358-20, N5835-20, N5856-20, S2946-20, S3583-19, S5104-21,N5264-21,N5963-21,N0708-17,N1019-22,N1568-22,N1851-22,N1898- 22,N3020-22,N3453-22,N3456-22,N3450-22,,N3835-22, G0443-21, N3888-16, N0254-17, N0708-17, N5372-22, N5373-22, N6052-22, N0374-23, N0415-23, N0414-23, N1159-23, N5856-20. South Africa ICASA APPROVED: TA-2005/614, TA-2009/464, TA-2010/218, TA-2010/1235, TA-2011/615, TA-2012/321, TA-2012/1747, TA- 2012/1821, TA-2013/1679, TA-2013/1681, TA-2013/1682, TA-2013/1680, TA-2013/1683, TA-2013/2085, TA- 2013/2465, TA-2013/2503, TA-2014/176, TA-2014/212, TA/2014/792, TA/2014/982, TA-2014/1719, TA-2014/1783, TA-2014/1784, TA-2014/1887, TA-2014/2108, TA-2014/2597, TA-2015/517, TA-2015/2011, TA-2015/2084, TA- 2016/169, TA-2016/501, TA-2016/820, TA-2016/863, TA-2016/1449, TA-2016/2568, TA-2016/2601, TA-2016/2759, TA-2016/3407, TA-2016/3539, TA-2016/3541, TA-2017/052, TA-2017/127, TA-2017/209, TA-2017/2013, TA- 2017/2824, TA-2017/3480, TA-2017/2824, TA-2018/175, TA-2018/280, TA-2018/732, TA-2018/842, TA-2018/843, TA-2018/844, TA-2018/845, TA-2018/996, TA-2018/997, TA-2018/998, TA-2018/999, TA-2018/1091, TA-2018/1095, TA-2018/1205, TA-2018/1408, TA-2018/1649, TA-2018/1650, TA-2018/1806, TA-2018/1814, TA-2018/1815, TA- 2019/1853, TA-2018/2177, TA-2018/2251, TA-2018/2776, TA-2018/2777, TA-2018/2868, TA-2018/3141, TA- 2018/3466, TA-2018/3561, TA-2018/3974, TA-2018/5159, TA-2019/115, TA-2019/348, TA/2019/550, TA-2019/582, TA-2019/583, TA-2019/1110, TA-2019/1111, TA-2019/1410, TA-2019/1853, TA-2019/2347, TA-2019/2348, TA- 2019/5101, TA-2019/5116, TA-2019/5167, TA-2020/4885, TA-2020/5217, TA-2020/5480, TA-2020/6261, TA- 2020/6392, TA-2020/6394, TA-2020/7066, TA-2020/7103, TA-2020/7390, TA-2021/0295, TA-2021/0637,TA- 2021/7762,TA-2021/0949,TA-2021/1613,TA-2021/1608,TA-2021/2146,TA-2021/2307,TA-2021/2501,TA- 2021/3273, TA-2021/0637, TA-2022/0625, TA-2022/0298, TA-2022/0298, TA-2020/7103, TA-2022/0124, TA- 2020/5443. Thailand Fig. 83 Identification in accordance with Radiocommunication Act. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 577 หนดของ กสทช. เค อง ท คมนาคม ระ บการแ ค นแ เห กไฟ าสอดค องตามมาตรฐานความปลอด ย อ ขภาพของม ษ จากการ ใ เค อง ท คมนาคม คณะกรรมการ จการโทรคมนาคมแ งชา ประกาศ หนด NBTC ID: A57003-17, A57004-14, A57004-17, A57005-14, A57006-15, A57006-19, A57006-18, A57008-14, A57009- 14, A57012-16, B38083-20,B57008-21,B57007-21,B57014-21,B57003-22,S01561-22,S01559-22, S00224-23 Türkiye For declarations of conformity, see www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. Further information on radio systems Countries outside the US that approve and permit radio systems in accordance with US FCC guidelines: FCC ID: 2AAJCBR20, FCC ID: 2AAJCBR21, FCC ID: 2AA98, FCC ID: 2AA98-COLOUR5C, FCC ID: 2AA98-MEDIUM5C, FCC ID: 2AA98-MEDIUM5C21, FCC ID: 2AA98A, FCC ID: 2AHPN-WLC, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101001, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101002, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101010, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101022, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101023, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101031, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101032, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101033, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101034, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101041, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101042, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101043, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101051,...

  • Page 578: United Arab Emirates

    FCC Class A digital device notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 (and to Part 18) of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. FCC Class B digital device notice NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. —Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. —Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected —Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Ukraine For declarations of conformity, see www.volkswagen.com/generalinfo. Further information on radio systems United Arab Emirates TRA, REGISTERED No_DEALER No ER01458/21, ER0029197/10_DA0014517/08, ER0109760/13_DA0043253/10, ER0126849/14_DA0127935/14, ER0130894/14_DA44932/15, ER0130898/14_DA44932/15, ER0130932/14_DA44932/15, ER01458/21_DA0018994/09, ER34947/14_DA0043252/10, ER35080/14_DA0028019/10, ER35423/14_DA35176/14, ER36213/14_DA36758/14, ER37557/15_DA0028019/10, ER37571/15_DA0028019/10, ER37807/15_DA38660/15, ER39135/15_DA36758/14, ER39136/15_DA36758/14, ER39739/15_DA36758/14, ER40309/15_DA44932/15, ER40510/15_DA44932/15, ER40885/15_DA44877/15, ER42982/15_DA36758/14, ER43831/16_DA36758/14, ER45185/16_DA36758/14, ER45520/16_DA44932/15, ER46672/16_DA38660/15, ER46796/16, ER47876/16_DA44932/15, ER47877/16_DA44932/15, ER47887/16_DA28019/10, ER48223/16_DA44932/15, ER49378/16_DA38660/15, ER49719/16_DA0062437/11, ER49796/16_DA35176/14, ER50430/16, ER51643/17_DA44932/15, ER53878/17_DA44932/15, ER53915/17_DA44932/15, ER53925/17_DA44932/15, ER54754/17_DA0043253/10, ER54922/17, ER55421/17_DA36758/14, ER61136/18_DA40068, ER61137/18_DA0089862/12, ER62566/18_DA44932/15, ER62570/18_DA44932/15, ER63911/18_DA44932/15, ER64149/18, ER64150/18, ER65216/18, ER65415/18, ER65217/18, ER65416/18, ER66801/18_DA77281/18, ER66978/18_DA36758/14, ER66969/18, ER67571/18, ER67572/18, ER67685/18, ER68006/18_DA40068/15, OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 579 ER68096/18_DA36975/14, ER68097/18_DA36975/14, ER68568/19_DA76163/18, ER68570/19, ER68572/19, ER69987/19_DA44932/15, ER70009/19_DA44932, ER70046/19_DA44932, ER70534/19, ER70554/19_DA0043253/10, ER70659/19_DA44932/15, ER71148/19_DA0043253/10, ER71355/19_DA38660/15, ER71413/19_DA0089862/12, ER71414/19_DA0089862/12, ER72288/19, ER72723/19, ER72725/19, ER73393/19_DA0086237/12, ER74095/19, ER75266/19_DA0086237/12, ER76113/19, ER76114/19, ER76324/19_DA56674/16, ER76515/19, ER76869/19, ER77956/20_DA76153/18, ER78093/20_DA36975/14, ER78187/20_DA36975/14, ER79367/20, ER80171/20, ER81399/20_DA0089862/12, ER88450/20_DA0086237/12, ER88708/20, ER89638/20_DA36975/14, ER90272/20_DA0028019/10, ER90294/20_DA0043253/10, ER90295/20_DA0043253/10, ER91750/20, ER95816/21_DA36758/14, ER97243/21, ER64150/18, ER64149/18_DA36975/14, ER98887/21_DA77281/18, ER65217/18_DA36975/14, ER65216/18_DA36975/14, ER00657/21_DA44932/15, ER00660/21_DA44932/15, ER65416/18_DA36975/14, ER65415/18_DA36975/14, ER01458/21, ER66978/18_DA36758/14, ER42982/15_DA36758/14, ER42982/15, ER43831/16__DA36758/14, ER67685/18_DA36975/14, ER66801/18_DA77281/18, ER68006/18_DA40068, ER68568/19_DA36975/14, ER68571/19_DA36975/14, ER68572/19_DA36975/14, ER68570/19_DA36975/14, ER68096/18_DA36975/14, ER68097/18_DA36975/14, ER45185/16_DA36758/14, ER05443/22_DA36758/14, ER68239/18, ER67572/18_DA77281/18, ER67571/18_DA77281/18, ER67572/18_DA77281/18, ER70532/19_DA36975/14, ER70534/19_DA36975/14, ER07751/22_DA77281/18, ER70554/19_DA0043252/10, ER71148/19_DA0043252/10, ER10098/22_DA0110016/13, ER72724/19_DA36975/14, ER72725/19_DA36975/14, ER72723/19_DA36975/14, ER72288/19, ER69987/19_DA44932/15, ER45520/19_DA44932/15, ER70046/19_DA44932/15,ER47877/16_DA44932/15, ER47876/16_DA44932/15, ER48223/16_DA44932/15, ER71414/19_DA36975/14, ER71413/19_DA36975/14, ER75266/19_DA0086237/12, ER76115/19_DA77281/18, ER76113/19_DA77281/18, ER766869/19_DA36975/14, ER50430/16_, ER78187/19_DA36975/14, ER51643/17_DA44932/15, ER78942/20_DA0086237/12, ER78955/20_DA0086237/12, ER17500/23_DA0086237/12, ER97243/21_DA0043253/10, ER06372/22_DA0043253/10. Vietnam SunTech VietNam Technology Company Limited, C00082015 , SUNTECH VietNam, SUNTECH VN: 71/CVT-TT3 220221.01-TN, 220208.14-TN, 773/TTDLCL-CN, 210816.05-TN, 210526.20-TN, 2108106.04-TN, 3568/CVT-CNDV, 210526.21-TN, 2357/CVT-CL,220310.03-TN,220321.12-TN, 220607.09-TN A0292190321AF04A3, A0406070421AF04A3, A0407070421AF04A3, A0858170820AF04A3,A2029161221AA04A3, B0401220321AE01A3, B0411230321AF04A3, B1189140520AF04A2, B2110171214BE11A2,B0423060422AF04A3,B0609240522AF04A3,B0620300522AE01A3,0735240622AF04A3,B0734240622 B1093160822AE01A3, B1092160822AE01A3, B1089160822AE01A3, B1437261022AF04A3, B1647291122AF04A3, B1646291122AF04A3. C0032060315BE01A2, C0032210220AF04A2, C0033060315BE01A2, C0055100417AF04A2, C0101230419AF04A2, C0118220519AF04A2, C0119220519AF04A2, C0124040520AF04A2, C0135110520AF04A2, C0141020718AF04A2, C0150270520AF04A2, C0158100620AF04A2, C0159100620AF04A2, C0161110620AF04A2, C0162110620AF04A2, C0163110620AF04A2, C0174020818AF04A2, C0175020818AF04A2, C0181260620AF04A2, C0182260620AF04A2, C0183260620AF04A2, C0184260620AF04A2, C0197111217AF04A2, C0229240919AF04A2, C0238150321AF04A3, C0239150321AF04A3, C0289310321AF04A3, C0307010920AF04A3, C0308010920AF04A3, C0309010920AF04A2, C0319091219AF04A2, C0470201120AF04A3, C0438061120AF04A3,C01360900222AF04A3,C0197280222AF04A3,C0237070322AF04A3,C0577170522AF04A3,...

  • Page 580: Performance Figures

    C0314061219AF04A2, C0952190821AF04A3, C0953190821AF04A3, C1071270921AF04A3, C1099011021AF04A3, C1100011021AF04A3, C0136090222AF04A3, C0197280222AF04A3, C1239021122AF04A3, C124002122AF04A3, C1798281222AF04A2 Except where indicated or specifically stated, the technical data applies to the basic model. The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted and in the case of different model versions, special vehicles and country- dependent equipment. All data in the official vehicle documents always takes precedence. The official vehicle documents show which drive and which power output your vehicle has. Weight The values for the kerb weight in the following tables apply to the road-ready vehicle with driver 75 kg (approx. 165 lbs), service fluids including fuel tank carrying 90% of its capacity and, where applicable, tools and spare tyre. Additional equipment and retrofitted accessories increase the stated kerb weight and reduce the maximum permitted load accordingly. The load comprises the weights of the following: —Passengers —All luggage inside and outside of the vehicle. —Add-on parts. —Drawbar load when towing a trailer. The permitted gross vehicle weight rating and gross axle weight rating must never be exceeded. The permitted (→ Safety certificate) (→ Type plate) values are provided on the safety certificate on the B-pillar on the driver side Performance figures The performance figures were measured without equipment which may detrimentally affect performance, such as add-on parts. The power output and performance figures may differ for reasons of vehicle registration or vehicle taxation. The maximum speed may be limited and may therefore be lower for some engine versions in vehicles equipped with heavy-duty running gear. Maximum trailer weight and drawbar load values The figures for maximum trailer weight and drawbar load that are given on the type plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes of the towing bracket only. The correct values for your specific model, which are often lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documents. The values in the official vehicle documents, on the type plate of the vehicle (→ Type plate) or on the safety certificate (→ Safety certificate) always have priority. Gross combination weight The gross combination weight ratings listed apply only to altitudes up to around 1,000 m (approx. 3,000 ft) above sea level. The maximum gross combination weight rating must be reduced by approximately 10% for every further started 1,000 m (approx. 3,000 ft) in altitude.
  • Page 581 Structure of the vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number VIN comprises 17 characters. These characters are categorised into seven groups. The following sample vehicle identification numbers are used to demonstrate the structure. Group Position: 6 7 8 Z C B Example 2 9 N 1 Vehicle manufacturer identifier: Volkswagen Passenger Cars Volkswagen Passenger Cars Volkswagen Group of America Inc., Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V LLC Volkswagen Group Rus ( Volkswagen/Skoda Kaluga) Garuda Matraman Motor (Indonesia) 2 Filler characters: the filler characters may differ depending on manufacturer or contain information about the body or gearbox type. Vehicle class per model: ID.7 Arteon OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 582 Touran Polo T-Roc Cabriolet Golf Passat Atlas Touareg Depending on manufacturer, the places 7 to 9 can also contain information on the fuel type (7) and vehicle class (8 and 9). 4 Filler characters or check digits: the filler characters or check digits may differ depending on the manufacturer. VIN index per model year: 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 583 6 Production location, manufacturing plant: Volkswagen Chattanooga Plant Volkswagen Bratislava Plant Volkswagen Emden Plant Volkswagen Osnabrück Plant Or: Volkswagen Kaluga Plant Volkswagen Puebla Plant Volkswagen Zwickau Plant Volkswagen Pune Plant Volkswagen Uitenhage Plant Volkswagen Palmela Plant Volkswagen Wolfsburg Plant Volkswagen Pamplona Plant The letters assigned to the production locations may differ on a vehicle-specific basis or may have a double assignment. Sequential production number in a model year. Position of the vehicle identification number OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 584 Fig. 1 In the windscreen: vehicle identification number. The vehicle identification number can be read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. The viewer is located in the lower corner of the windscreen. For some models, depending on the Infotainment system version, the vehicle identification number can be displayed in the Service menu or in the vehicle settings. The vehicle identification number can also be found on the type plate. Depending on model, country and engine, the vehicle identification number may also be stamped at one of the following locations: —In the engine compartment in the right water drainage channel. —In the engine compartment on the right suspension turret. —In the engine compartment close to the bonnet hinge on the right side of the vehicle. —Behind the right front seat under the floor covering. Fig. 1 Type plate (illustration): variant 1. Depending on country, the number of the type approval, e.g. EC type approval number, may be specified. 1 Manufacturer code. 2 Type approval. 3 Vehicle identification number. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 585 4 Gross vehicle weight rating. Gross combination weight rating (vehicle plus trailer). Gross front axle weight rating. Gross rear axle weight rating. 5 Type approval number, country-specific. 6 Vehicle type. 7 Manufacturer’s address. 8 Engine code. Fig. 2 Type plate (illustration): variant 2. Depending on country, the number of the type approval, e.g. EC type approval number, may be specified. 1 Manufacturer code. 2 Type approval. 3 Vehicle identification number. 4 Gross vehicle weight rating. 5 Gross combination weight rating (vehicle plus trailer). 6 Gross front axle weight rating. 7 Gross rear axle weight rating. Depending on country and model, the type plate is visible in the lower area of the door pillar after opening the driver or front passenger door. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 586: Safety Certificate

    Safety certificate Fig. 1 Safety certificate (illustration). Fig. 2 Safety certificate (illustration). A safety certificate on the door pillar in the driver door shows the following information: —Vehicle type. —Manufacturer. —Date of manufacture. —Country of manufacture. —Vehicle identification number. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 587 Dimensions Fig. 1 Vehicle dimensions. The data in the table applies to the basic model with basic equipment. The specified values can vary due to different wheel rim and tyre sizes, additional equipment, different model versions or retrofitted accessories, and also for special vehicles and vehicles that have been manufactured for other countries. (→ Technical data) Information on the composition of the weights can be found in section Polo Fig. 1 Key to Front track 1500 – 1526 Rear track 1483 – 1509 Width 1751 Width from exterior mirror to exterior mirror 1964 Height to the upper edge of the roof at kerb weight 1435 – 1436 Height at kerb weight with aerial base 1424 – 1425 Height with open bonnet at kerb weight 1756 Height with open boot lid at kerb weight 1991 Ground clearance between the axles at kerb weight 147 – 148 Wheelbase with full load 2549 – 2555 Minimum turning circle diameter approx. 10.6 Length from bumper to bumper 4074 Length with a factory-fitted towing bracket 4202 OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 588: Tank Capacities

    Polo GTI Fig. 1 Key to Front track 1501 – 1513 Rear track 1484 – 1496 Width 1751 Width from exterior mirror to exterior mirror 1964 Height to the upper edge of the roof at kerb weight 1431 Height at kerb weight with aerial base 1420 Height with open bonnet at kerb weight 1749 Height with open boot lid at kerb weight 1983 Ground clearance between the axles at kerb weight Wheelbase with full load 2552 Minimum turning circle diameter approx. 10.6 Length from bumper to bumper 4074 Length with a factory-fitted towing bracket – Tank capacities The fuel tank has the following capacity: —approx. 40 l The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 14 kg. The petrol fuel tank capacity is approximately 12.2 l. The fuel tank capacity includes an unspecified reserve quantity which remains in the tank when the tank gauge indicates that the tank is empty. The reserve quantity is variable and cannot be reliably used to increase the remaining range. The capacity depends on the performance and type of the natural gas refuelling system. The capacities indicated are based on a filling pressure of 200 bar. OwnersManuals2.com...

  • Page 589: Engine Overview

    1.0 l, 3-cylinder MPI®, 59 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 59 at 6300 rpm Engine code DSGD Maximum torque 93 at 3700 – 3900 rpm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1138 – 1141 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1540 – 1610 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 820 rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1000 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 560 – 570 unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2340 – 2410 gross combination weight, gradients up to Maximum permitted 2540 – 2610 gross combination weight, gradients up to...
  • Page 590 1.6 l, 4-cylinder SRE, 66 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 66 at 4250 – 6000 rpm Engine code DWYB Maximum torque 152 at 3850 – 4100 rpm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1148 – 1151 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1560 – 1620 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 810 rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1000 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1100 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2560 – 2620 gross combination weight, gradients up to Maximum permitted 2660 – 2720 gross combination weight, gradients up to...
  • Page 591 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI MV®, 70 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 70 at 5000 – 5500 rpm Engine code DLAC Maximum torque 175 at 1600 – 3500 rpm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Gearbox ® Kerb weight with driver 1165 – 1168 1196 – 1199 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1570 – 1650 1600 – 1680 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 830 750 – 830 rating Maximum trailer weights Gearbox ® Maximum trailer weight 1000 1000 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1100 1100 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked...
  • Page 592 (→ Bicycle carrier) Load for rear carrier systems 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 70 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 70 at 5000 – 5500 rpm Engine code CHZL/DXTA Maximum torque 175 at 2000 – 3500 rpm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1155 – 1158 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1560 – 1640 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 830 rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1000 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1100 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2560 – 2640 gross combination weight, gradients up to Maximum permitted 2660 – 2740...
  • Page 593 (→ Bicycle carrier) Load for rear carrier systems 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 81 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 81 at 5500 rpm Engine code DLAA Maximum torque 200 at 2000 – 3000 rpm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1209 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1610 – 1680 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 820 rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1100 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2710 – 2780 gross combination weight, gradients up to Maximum permitted...
  • Page 594 (→ Bicycle carrier) Load for rear carrier systems 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TSI®, 85 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 85 at 5000 – 5500 rpm Engine code DKJA/DXUA Maximum torque 200 at 2000 – 3500 rpm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1195 – 1199 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1600 – 1670 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight 750 – 820 rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1100 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2700 – 2770 gross combination weight, gradients up to Maximum permitted...
  • Page 595 (→ Bicycle carrier) Load for rear carrier systems 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 147 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 147 at 4390 – 6000 rpm Engine code CZPC Maximum torque 320 at 1450 – 4390 rpm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1353 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1780 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to 12 % Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 2980 gross combination weight Load for rear carrier systems (→ Bicycle carrier)
  • Page 596 2.0 l, 4-cylinder TSI®, 152 kW, petrol engine Engine overview Power output 152 at 4600 – 6000 rpm Engine code DNND Maximum torque 320 at 1500 – 4500 rpm Gearbox ® Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1372 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1800 rating Gross front axle weight 1000 rating Gross rear axle weight rating Maximum trailer weights Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight 1200 braked, gradients up to Maximum trailer weight unbraked Maximum permissible drawbar load Maximum permitted 3000 gross combination weight (→ Bicycle carrier) Load for rear carrier systems OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 597 1.0 l, 3-cylinder TGI®, 66 kW, natural gas engine Engine overview Power output 66 at 4,000 – 5,500 rpm Engine code DBYA Maximum torque 160 at 1,800 – 3,800 rpm Gearbox Maximum speed km/h Weights and axle loads Kerb weight with driver 1,296 (→ Technical data) Gross vehicle weight 1,680 rating Gross front axle weight rating Gross rear axle weight rating NOTICE Trailer towing is not permitted for this engine version. OwnersManuals2.com...
  • Page 598 OwnersManuals2.com...

This manual is also suitable for:

T-roc 2023

Table of Contents

Save PDF